Home

HP NW280AAABA User's Manual

1. key aie KO KS_O AO KSA_O bd v K1 KS_1 A_ KSA_1 oy K2 KS_2 A2 KSA_2 wy K3 KS_3 A2 KSA_2 ime K_4 KS_4 AA KSA_4 raat K_5 KS_5 A5 KSA_5 Sw K_6 KS_6 A_6 KSA_6 ss K_7 KS_7 A7 KSA_7 oF K_8 KS_8 A8 KSA_8 Paar K9 KS_9 A9 KSA_9 Programming 517 Internal name of keys and key states Key Name cm m en key key key K_Abc KS_Abc KA_Abc KSA_Abc EES K_Alpha KS_Al ha KA_Alpha KSA_Alpha K_Apps KS_Apps KA_Apps KSA_Apps K_Bksp KS_Bksp KA_Bksp KSA_Bksp K_Comma KS_Comma KA_Comma KSA_Comma K_Cos KS_Cos KA_Cos KSA_Cos K_Div KS_Div KA_Div KSA_Div 2 K_Dot KS_Dot KA_Dot KSA_Dot K_Down KS_Down KA_Down KSA_Down K_Enter KS_Enter KA_Enter KSA_Enter K_Home KS_Home KA _Home KSA_Home K left KS_Left KA_Left KSA_Left K_Righ KS_Right KA_Right KSA_Right ay Kin KS_In KA_In KSA_Ln ie K_log KS_log KA_log KSA_Log aaa K_Minus KS_Minus KA_Minus KSA_ Minus oh i K_Neg KS_Neg KA_Neg KSA_Neg K Num KS_Num KA Num KSA_Num or K_On KA_On KSA_On K_Plot KS_Plot KA Plot KSA_Plot ists K_Plus KS_Plus KA_Plus KSA_Plus v X E K_Power KS_ Power KA Power KSA_Power LEN K_Sin KS_Sin KA_Sin KSA_Sin Gin K_Sq KS_Sq KA_Sq KSA_Sq K_Symb KS_Symb KA_Symb KSA_Symb 518 Programming Internal name of keys and key states Key Name cm m emn key key key aan 1 K_Tan KS_Tan KA_Tan KSA_Tan Q K_Up KS_Up KA_Up KSA_Up wes KVars KS_Vars KA
2. Various settings allow you to CAS Settings aa configure how the CAS Angle Measure Radians r Number Fi t Standard 127 works To display the ame nee A Shift E CAS Integers Decimal y settings press E The modes are spread across Bact y Complex two pages Use V Yy Use i Principal Increasing Choose angle measure Computer algebra system CAS 55 Page 1 Setting Purpose Angle Measure Number Format first drop down list Number Format second drop down list Integers drop down list Integers check box Simplity Exact Select the units for angle measure ments Radians or Degrees Select the number format for dis played solutions Standard or Scientific or Engineering Select the number of digits to dis play in approximate mode man tissa exponent Select the integer base Decimal base 10 Hex base 16 Octal base 8 If checked any real number equiv alent to an integer in a non CAS environment will be converted to an integer in the CAS Real num bers not equivalent to integers are treated as real numbers in CAS whether or not this option is selected Select the level of automatic sim plification None do not simplify automati cally use for manual sim plification Minimum do basic simplifications Maximum always try to simplify If checked the calculator is in exact mode and solutions will be symboli
3. Open the Open the Sequence Sequence Symbolic View app ui Sequence app Ne mas Select me Sequence u2 1 E u22 U2 N The app opens in u3 Symbolic view COEREREDTIHET Define the Define the Fibonacci sequence expression U 1 U 1 U U U for n gt 2 In the U1 1 field specify the first term of the sequence 1 In the U1 2 field specify the second term of the sequence 1 In the UI N field Sequence Symbolic View specify the formula eeu nee E u21 for finding the nth Ae ETA term of the sequence eo L from the previous Jt U2 N two terms using the u3 1 buttons at the bottom qui quan gaa of the screen to help with some entries Optionally choose a color for your graph see Choose a color for plots on page 85 Set up the plot A Open the Plot Setup view p p Setup 5 Reset all settings to their default values Clear 280 Sequence app Plot the sequence Explore the graph 6 Select Stairstep from the Seq Plot menu 7 Set the X Rng maximum and the Y Rng maximum to 8 as shown at the right 8 Plot the Fibonacci sequence Ploti Setup 9 Return to Plot Setup view E GB and select Cobweb from the Seq Plot menu 10 Plot the sequence Plot Setup Seq Plot Stairstep N Rng 1 X Rng 1 8 Y Rng 1 8 X Tick 1 Y Tick 1 Enter maximum vertical value Pht OBE Yo Md N 1 U1 N 1
4. a column it is automatically copied to every cell in that column p b fo b b p jo fo lo T bead oad Rind el bel a bed Ln At the moment only O is shown since there are NO qua eeneersryerrn geYREIIS values in the PRICE column yet 6 Once again select the header of column B Tap and select Name 8 Type COMMIS and tap GB Note that the heading of column B is now COMMIS It is always a good idea to check your formulas by entering some dummy values and noting if the result is as expected Select cell A1 and make sure that and not is showing in the menu If not tap the button This option means that your cursor automatically selects the cell immediately below the one you have just entered content into 10 Add some values in the PRICE column and note PRE goumis c p E the result in the COMMIS ioes column If the results do a D A 6 not look right you can tap 7 b 8 the COMMIS heading tap B b EB ond fix the rrr formula 194 Spreadsheet To delete the dummy values select cell a1 tap EEB press until all the dummy values are selected and then press i Select cell c1 Enter a label for your takings ma AO TAKINGS _ E Notice that text strings but not names need to be enclosed within quotation marks Select cell D1 Enter
5. 88 90 89 65 70 89 gt L1 88 90 89 65 70 89 L1 gt D1 88 90 89 65 70 89 Ea a ee ee a You will now be able to see the list data in the Numeric view of the Statistics 1Var app Start the Statistics 1Var app Select Di D2 D3 D4 Statistics 1Var Notice that your list yauna wn G elements are in data set D1 In the Symbolic view specify the data set whose statistics you want to find Symb B Statistics 1Var Symbolic View By default H1 will SEES Histogram y n H2 use the data in DI I Plot2 Histogram v so nothing further H3 needs to be done in TP Histogram 7 H4 Sym bolic view Enter independent column Fo Pav Dad a Show val However if the data of interest were in D2 or any column other than D1 you would have to specify the desired data column here Lists 463 5 Calculate the X HI i a n f statistics Min 65 Ql 170 Med 88 5 a fo Max 90 x 491 De 140811 Tap when R i8 1833333e1 sX 1 1232394 1 you are done ox 1 0253726E1 See the chapter 10 Statistics 1Var app beginning on page 209 for the meaning of each statistic 464 Lists 25 Matrices You can create edit and operate on matrices and vectors in the Home view CAS or in programs You can enter matrices directly in Home or CAS or use the Matrix Editor Vectors Vectors are one dimensional arrays They are composed of just one r
6. Matrices 475 Matrix functions and commands Functions Functions can be used in any app or in Home view They are listed on the Math menu under the Matrix category They can be used in mathematical expressions primarily in Home view as well as in programs Functions always produce and display a result They do not change any stored variables such as a matrix variable Functions have arguments that are enclosed in parentheses and separated by commas for example CROSS vector I vector2 The matrix input can be either a matrix variable name such as M1 or the actual matrix data inside brackets For example CROSS M1 1 2 Menu format By default a Matrix function is presented on the Math menu using its descriptive name not its common command name Thus the shorthand name TRN is presented as Transpose and DET is presented as Determinant If you prefer the Math menu to show command names instead deselect the Menu Display option on page 2 of the Home Settings screen see page 26 Commands Matrix commands differ from matrix functions in that they do not return a result For this reason these functions can be used in an expression and matrix commands cannot The matrix commands are designed to support programs that use matrices The matrix commands are listed in the Matrix category of the Commands menu in the Program Editor They are also listed in the Catalog menu one of the Toolbox menus Press and tap
7. eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 511 The User Keyboard Customizing key presses 006 515 APP programs ce eee eecee eee eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 519 ProOqramCOMMGnels 235 5 t55 deter witianiduabrency susie wcctanedthecomanaseucdes 525 Commands under the Tmplt menu ccceceseeeteeeeeeeeees 525 IGE ee taee ced cae aac eathta et cea Sache Gee ese Oates 525 Brancho e e a a a a heats 526 Kole AEE ter ree EA E T 527 Varia OLE cits nanena e e ane a a at 530 RETE E EE A E EEATT 531 Commands under the Cmds menu cccecseereeeeeeeeeees 531 SHINS E A E A T 531 DiOWiM Ge tcccattcads nu a e e ses sane tuadoenedereages 534 MATIK eiiean ia eii e a a a aa 541 App Functions asics a s 543 Integer accensi aia KE save E eii E aas 544 VOe annaa a a A A S 546 MO re areta r y E EE EA E E NS T S 551 Variables and Programs s2i c00tiacrvistuaedex erty ae esenee 553 Contents 7 28 Basic Integer arithmetic The default base Tt a a 576 Changing the default base sscs 6 ccs savecutcaiwaceaceveiteerotareeteluogs 577 Examples of integer arithmetic ccccccceesceeeeeteeeeeeteeees 578 Integer me SUA ticsen shina nd tech chek reveteaswacueswe ieveemivactelas 579 Base funcions cadet sth oe a hs Deven oud ev anedeeonseeeabee 580 A Glossary B Troubleshooting Calculator not responding anti vrwsnatne sedan seas savant vviacieu ore 585 TOMFESET yi iae a a a a e aE E E 585 If the calculator does not tu
8. 65 f tait T ins Delete size tists 456 Lists Select L1 2 that is a the second element in the list ED gt om SURN W 90 f tait ins Delete size uists Deleting lists To delete a list In the List Catalog use the cursor keys to highlight the list and press You are prompted to confirm your decision Tap or press _ J If the list is one of the reserved lists LO L9 then only the contents of the list are deleted The list is simply stripped of its contents If the list is one you have named other than LO L9 then it is deleted entirely To delete all lists In the List Catalog press Clear The contents of the lists LO L9 are deleted and any other named lists are deleted entirely Lists in Home view You can enter and operate on lists directly in Home view The lists can be named or unnamed To createa list 1 Press A pair of braces appears on the entry line All lists must be enclosed in braces 2 Enter the first element in the list followed by a comma element 3 Continue adding elements separating each with a comma Lists 457 To store a list To display a list To display one element To store one 4 When you have finished entering the elements press Eter The list is added to History with any expressions among the elements evaluated You can store a list in a variable You can do this before the list is added to His
9. Type1 Linear X regression line in Symbolic view zg Type2 Linear If the equation is too wide m Fitz m x s for the screen select it F Enter function and press EEA The example above shows that the slope of the regression line m is 425 875 and the y intercept b is 376 25 While and move the cursor along a fit or from point to point in a scatter plot use and to choose the scatter plot or fit you wish to trace For each active analysis S1 S5 the tracing order is the scatter plot first and the fit second So if both S1 and S2 are active the tracer is by default on the S1 scatter plot when you press Press to trace the S1 fit At this point press O to return to the S1 scatter plot or again to trace the 2 scatter plot Press a third time to trace the 2 fit If you Statistics 2Var app 233 press a fourth time you will return to the S1 scatter plot If you are confused as to what you are tracing just tap to see the definition of the object scatter plot or fit currently being traced Plot view menu items Plot setup Plotting mark Connect The menu items in Plot view are Button Purpose Displays the Zoom menu Turns trace mode on or off Shows or hides a curve that best fits the data points according to the selected regression model Enables you to specify a value on the regression line to jump to or a data point to jump to if your cursor
10. Display the 13 Press to display the Numeric Numeric view Teu Fase view By default the Numeric 2 2 rs view displays rows of x aE False and y values In each 5 5 False row the 2 values are 3 s False a q Ealse followed by a column enre a e e that tells whether or not the x y pair satisfies each open sentence True or False Explore 14 With the cursor in the X column type a new value and Numeric tap QS The table scrolls to the value you entered view You can also enter a value in the Y column and tap GES Press and to move between the columns in Numeric view You can also zoom in or out on the X variable or Y variable Note that in Numeric view zooming does not affect the size of what is displayed Instead it decreases or increases the increment between consecutive x and y values Zooming in decreases the increment zooming out increases the increment This and other options are explained in Common operations in Numeric view on page 100 Advanced Graphing app 131 Numeric Setup Trace in Numeric view Ti Although you can configure Advanced Graphing Num Setup awal the X and Y values shown in numxstartp i Numeric view by entering Num Y Start 0 d Num X Step 0 1 ae ame inor Num Y Step 0 1 out you can also directly set tT the values shown using Num X Zoom 4 Num Y Zoom 4 Enter table horizontal start value meree a
11. U1 N 1 The button gives you access to common plot exploration tools such as EZ Zoon in or out on the plot GER Trace along a graph EIB Go to a specified N value BIB Display the sequence definition These tools are explained in Common operations in Plot view on page 88 Split screen and autoscaling options are also available by pressing eS Sequence app 281 e Display 11 Display Numeric N vi e A 1 1 Numeric view pod e 4 3 view 5 5 6 8 7 13 12 With the cursor 8 21 9 34 anywhere in the N 10 fs column type a new f Z Si Defn Col value and tap zoom ___ __ _ size_ _Defn_ column 6 4 The table of values N m 25 75025 scrolls to the value 26 f121393 d Y 2s biyen you entered Youcan 28 781 30 832040 then see the 22040 32 2178309 corresponding value 33 bszas78 A 34 5702887 in the sequence The bs 9227465 25 example at the right gaya queen ery eee shows that the 25th value in the Fibonacci sequence is 75 025 Explore the The Numeric view gives you access to common table table of exploration tools such as values EZ Change the increment between consecutive values E Change the size of the font GIB Display the sequence definition EED Choose the number of sequences to display These tools are explained in Common operations in Numeric view on page 100 Split screen and autos
12. 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not equal Configuration A string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers h header cells will be created acc Accept Reject 1tZ TestZ tM Test Mean prob Probability cZ Critical Z cxl Critical xbar 1 x2 Critical xbar 2 std Standard deviation Functions and commands 353 HypZ1prop The hypothesis test HypZ1 prop is a one proportion Ztest HypZlprop input list configuration HypZlprop SuccCount SampSize NullPopProp SigLevel Mode configuration Input List A list of input variables see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values e Input Parameters SuccCount SampSize NullPopMean Siglevel Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not equal Configuration A string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers h header cells will be created acc Accept Reject tZ TestZ tP prob cZ cpl cp2 std 354 Functions and commands HypZ2prop The hypothesis test HypZ2prop is a two proportion Ztest for compari
13. ConfZlprop SuccCount SampSize ConfLevel configuration Input List A list of input variables see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values Input Parameters SuccCount SampSize Conflevel Functions and commands 359 ConfZ2prop Configuration A string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers h header cells will be created Z zX zXh zXm std The ConfZ 1 mean calculates the confidence interval for a two proportion Zt est ConfZ2prop input list configuration ConfZ2prop SuccCountl SuccCount2 SampSizel SampSize2 ConfLevel configuration Input List A list of input variables see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values Input Parameters SuccCount SuccCount2 SampSizel SampSize2 ConfLevel Configuration A string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers h header cells will be created Z zX zXh 360 Functions and commands ConfT1mean Conff2mean zXm std The ConfT1mean calculates the confidence interval for a one sample T test ConfTlm
14. Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI EMI connector hoods to main tain compliance with FCC rules and regulations Applica ble only for products with connectivity to PC laptop Product Regulatory Information 589 Declaration of Conformity for products Marked with FCC Logo United States Only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Oper ation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration write to Hewlett Packard Company P O Box 692000 Mail Stop 530113 Houston TX 77269 2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration write to Hewlett Packard Company P O Box 692000 Mail Stop 510101 Houston TX 77269 2000 or call HP at 281 514 3333 To identify your product refer to the part series or model number located on the product Canadian Notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regula tions Avis Canadien Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Can ada Product Regulatory Information European Union Regulatory Notice Products bearing the CE marking comply w
15. will act as a breakpoint and launch the debugger at that location This allows you to start debugging at a specific location rather than starting at the beginning of the program debug program_name 382 Functions and commands delcols delrows deltalist Dirac division_point DO DrawSlp Returns the matrix that is matrix A with the columns n1 nk deleted delcols Mtrx A Interval nl nk n1 Example delcols 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 gives 1 3 4 6 7 9 Returns the matrix that is matrix A with the rows n1 nk deleted delrows Mtrx A Interval nl n2 n1 Example delrows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 gives 1 2 3 7 8 9 Returns the list of the differences between consecutive terms in the original list deltalist Lst Example deltalist 1 4 8 9 gives 3 4 1 Returns the value of the Dirac delta function for a real number Dirac Real Example Dirac 1 gives 0 Returns a point M such that for the given a and b z a k z b and z MA k MB division_point Pnt or Cplx a Pnt or Cp1x b Cp1x k Example division_point 0 6 6 i 4 returns point 8 8 Used in programming to initiate a step or sequence of steps Draws the line with slope m that goes through the point a b i e y b m x a DrawSlp Real a Real b Real m Example DrawSlp 2 1 3 draws the line given by y 3x 5 Functions and commands 383 eigenval
16. ALOG value Exponential minus 1 e 1 EXPM1 value Natural log plus 1 In x LNP1 value The trigonometry functions can also take complex numbers as arguments For SIN COS TAN ASIN ACOS and ATAN see Keyboard functions on page 307 Cosecant 1 sinx CSC value Arc cosecant ACSC value Secant 1 cosx SEC value Arc secant ASEC value 314 Functions and commands COT ACOT Hyperbolic SINH ASINH COSH ACOSH TANH ATANH Probability Factorial Cotangent cosx sinx COT value Arc cotangent ACOT value The hyperbolic trigonometry functions can also take complex numbers as arguments Hyperbolic sine SINH value Inverse hyperbolic sine sinh x ASINH value Hyperbolic cosine COSH value Inverse hyperbolic cosine cosh x ACOSH value Hyperbolic tangent TANH value Inverse hyperbolic tangent tanh7 x ATANH value Factorial of a positive integer For non integers x T x 1 This calculates the gamma function value Example 5 returns 120 Functions and commands 315 Com bination Permutation The number of combinations without regard to order of n things taken r at a time COMB n r Example Suppose you want to know how many ways five things can be combined two at a time COMB 5 2 returns 10 Number of permutations with regard to order of n things taken rata time PE
17. Tap and press 2 _ J3 e The cursor jumps to x 2 3 and the area between the two functions is shaded 6 To display the numerical value of the integral tap ca 7 Tap QB to return to the Plot menu Note that the sign of the area calculated Area 7 812 OK depends both on which function you are tracing and whether you enter the endpoints from left to right or right to left Shortcut When the Goto option is available you can display the Go To screen simply by typing a number The Function app To find the extremum of the quadratic NOTE number you type appears on the entry line Just tap to accept it 1 To calculate the coordinates of the extremum of the quadratic equation move the tracing cursor near the extremum of interest if necessa ry tap No minimum or maximum found ok and select Extremum The coordinates of the extremum are displayed at the bottom of the screen The ROOT INTERSECTION and EXTREMUM operations return only one value even if the function in question has more than one root intersection or extremum The app will only return values that are closest to the cursor You will need to move the cursor closer to other roots intersections or extrema if you want the app to calculate values for those The Function Variables The result of each numerical analysis in the Function app is assigned to a va
18. The Polygon menu provides tools for drawing various polygons Tap at each vertex pressing after each tap Keyboard shortcut Tap at each vertex pressing after each tap Produces a pentagon Tap at each vertex pressing after each tap Produces a hexagon Tap at each vertex pressing after each tap Produces a regular hexagon that is one with sides of equal length and angles of equal measure Tap on a point and press _ _ Tap on a second point to define the length of one side of the regular hexagon and press _ _ The other 157 Special Eq triangle 1 Equilateral 4 Square Parallelogram Curve Circle Ellipse Hyperbola Parabola four vertices are automatically calculated and the regular hexagon is drawn Produces an equilateral triangle Tap at one vertex and press ft Tap at another vertex and press _ _ The location of the third vertex is automatically calculated and the triangle is drawn Tap at one vertex and press Ce Tap at another vertex and press __ The location of the third and fourth vertices are automatically calculated and the square is drawn Tap at one vertex and press a Tap at another vertex and press _ _ Tap at a third vertex and press e _ The location of the fourth vertex is automatically calculated and the parallelogram is drawn Tap at the center of the circle and press _ _ Tap at a point on the circumference and press _ _ A circ
19. To access your new note return to the Notes Catalog To create a note for You can also create a note that is specific to an app and an app which stays with the app should you send the app to another calculator See Adding a note to an app on page 106 Notes created this way take advantage of all the formatting features of the Note Editor see below Notes and Info 491 Note Editor buttons The following buttons and keys are available while you and keys are adding or editing a note Button or Key Purpose Opens the text formatting menu See Formatting options on page 494 Provides bold italic underline full caps superscript and subscript options See Formatting options on page 494 A toggle button that offers three types of bullet See Formatting options on page 494 Insert Starts a 2D editor for entering mathematical expressions in textbook format see Inserting mathematical expressions on page 495 Enters a space during text entry _ 4 Page __ Moves from page to page ina multi page note Shift Shows options for copying text in a note See below Begin Copy option Mark where to begin a text selection Copy option Mark where to end a text selection Copy option Select the entire note Copy option Cut the selected text Copy Copy option Copy the selected text tad a Deletes the character to the left of the cursor 492 Notes a
20. division_point element inter Returns the center of a circle center circle Example center circle x2 y x y gives point 1 2 1 2 For two points A and B and a numerical factor k returns a point C such that C B k C A division point pointl point2 realk Example division point 0 6 6 i 4 returns point 8 8 Creates a point on a geometric object whose abscissa is a given value or creates a real value on a given interval element object real or element reall real2 Examples element plotfunc x 2 creates a point on the graph of y x Initially this point will appear at 2 4 You can move the point but it will always remain on the graph of its function element 0 5 creates a value of 2 5 initially Tapping on this value and pressing enables you to press gt and to increase or decrease the value in a manner similar to a slider bar Press again to close the slider bar The value you set can be used as a coefficient in a function you subsequently plot Returns the intersections of two curves as a vector inter curvel curve2 y og bays Example inter 8 1 returns _ _41l This indicates that there are two intersections e 6 2 9 5 5 166 Geometry isobarycenter midpoint orthocenter point Geometry Returns the hypothetical center of mass of a set of points Works like barycenter but assumes that all points have equal weight isob
21. polygon quadrilateral rectangle rhombus Draws a polygon from a set of vertices polygon pointl point2 pointn Example polygon GA GB GD draws AABD Draws a quadrilateral from a set of four points quadrilateral pointl point2 point3 point4 Example quadrilateral GA GB GC GD draws quadrilateral ABCD Draws a rectangle given two consecutive vertices and a point on the side opposite the side defined by the first two vertices or a scale factor for the sides perpendicular to the first side As with many of the other polygon commands you can specify optional CAS variable names for storing the coordinates of the other two vertices as points rectangle pointl point2 point3 or rectangle pointl point2 realk Examples rectangle GA GB GE draws a rectangle whose first two vertices are points A and B one side is segment AB Point E is on the line that contains the side of the rectangle opposite segment AB rectangle GA GB 3 p q drawsarectangle whose first two vertices are points A and B one side is segment AB The sides perpendicular to segment AB have length 3 AB The third and fourth points are stored into the CAS variables pand q respectively Draws a rhombus given two points and an angle As with many of the other polygon commands you can specify optional CAS variable names for storing the coordinates of the other two vertices as points rhombus point1 point2 angle
22. 106 An introduction to HP apps To add a note to an app 1 Open the app 2 Press Info If a note has already been created for this app its contents are displayed 3 Tap and start writing or editing your note The format and bullet options available are the same as those in the Note Editor described in The Note Editor on page 490 4 To exit the note screen press any key Your note is automatically saved Creating an app The apps that come with the HP Prime are built in and cannot be deleted They are always available simply by pressing Qi However you can create any number of customized instances of most apps You can also create an instance of an app that is based on a previously customized app Customized apps are opened from the application library in the same way that you open a built in app The advantage of creating a customized instance of an app is that you can continue to use the built in app for some other problem and return to the customized app at any time with all its data still in place For example you could create a customized version of the Sequence app that enables you to generate and explore the Fibonacci series You could continue to use the built in Sequence app to build and explore other sequences and return as needed to your special version of the Sequence app when you next want to explore the Fibonacci series Or you could create a customized version of the Solve app named for
23. 174 Geometry right_triangle square triangle Geometry Example rhombus GA GB angle GC GD GE draws a rhombus on segment AB such that the angle at vertex A has the same measure as DCE Draws a right triangle given two points and a scale factor One leg of the right triangle is defined by the two points the vertex of the right angle is at the first point and the scale factor multiplies the length of the first leg to determine the length of the second leg right triangle pointl point2 realk Example right _triangle GA GB 1 draws an isosceles right triangles with its right angle at point A and with both legs equal in length to segment AB Draws a square given two consecutive vertices as points square pointl point2 Example Example square 0 3 2i p q draws a square with vertices at 0 0 3 2 1 5 and 2 3 The last two vertices are computed automatically and are saved into the CAS variables pand q Draws a triangle given its three vertices triangle pointl point2 point3 Example triangle GA GB GC draws AABC 175 Curve function Draws the plot of a function given an expression in the independent variable x Note the use of lowercase x plotfunc Expr Example Example plotfunc 3 sin x draws the graph of y 3 sin x circle Draws a circle given the endpoints of the diameter or a center and radius or an equation in x and y circle point1 point2
24. 4 If you wish choose a color for the plot other than its default You do this by selecting the colored square to the left of the function set tapping EEB and selecting a color from the color picker For more information about adding definitions moditying definitions and evaluating dependent definitions in Symbolic view see Common operations in Symbolic view on page 81 Set the angle measure to radians 5 Ea Settings Angle Measure System Number Format vRadians Degrees y m 6 Tap the Angle Measure field and Complex select Radians For more information on the Symbolic Setup view see Common operations in Symbolic Setup view on page 87 Choose Angle Measure 7 Open the Plot Setup view Setup 276 Polar app Plot the expression Explore the graph 8 Set up the plot by Polar Plot Setup 12 5663706144 specifying Rng 0 6 Step 0 1308996939 appropriate 4 X Rng 15 9 15 9 graphing options In Y Rng 10 9 10 9 this example set the xtick 1 upper limit of the ymad range of the Enter maximum angle value independent variable to 41 Select the 2nd 0 Rng field and enter 46A 3 x OK There are numerous ways of configuring the appearance of Plot view For more information see Common operations in Plot Setup view on page 96 Plot the expression Plori WwW CAD 6 0 R1 6 15 707963268 eam Dis
25. Inverse Fits the data to an inverse variation y ate Statistics 2Var app 229 To define your own fit Fit type Meaning Continued Logistic Fits the data to a logistic curve L y 1 ae where L is the saturation value for growth You can store a positive real value in L or if L 0 let L be computed automatically Quadratic Fits the data to a quadratic curve y ax bxtc Needs at least three points Cubic Fits the data to a cubic polynomial y ax b x cext d Quartic Fits to a quartic polynomial 4 2 y ax bx cx dxt e Trigonometric Fits the data to a trigonometric curve y a sin bx c d Needs at least three points User Defined Define your own fit see below N On Ol OR 20 Press to display the Symbolic view For the analysis you are interested in S1 through S5 select the Type field Tap the field again to see a menu of fit types Select User Defined from the menu Select the corresponding Fit field Enter an expression and press _F _ The independent variable must be X and the expression must not contain any unknown variables Example 1 5 cos x 0 3 sin x Note that in this app variables must be entered in uppercase 230 Statistics 2Var app Computed statistics When you tap ER three sets of statistics become available By default the statistics involving both the independent and depende
26. Var or rem Poly Poly Var Example rem 1 2 3 4 1 2 gives poly1 26 Returns the degree of a polynomial degree Poly Example degree x 3 x gives 3 Functions and commands 339 Factor by Degree Coef GCD Zero Count Chinese Remainder Special Cyclotomic Returns a polynomial factorized in x n where n is the degree of polynomial factor xn Poly Example factor_xn x 4 1 gives x 4 1 x 4 Returns the greatest common divisor GCD of the coefficients of a polynomial content Poly P Var Example content 2 x 2 10 x 6 gives 2 If a and bare real this returns the number of sign changes in the specified polynomial in the interval a b If a or b are non real it returns the number of complex roots in the rectangle bounded by a and b If Var is omitted it is assumed to be x sturmab Poly Var a b Examples sturmab x 2 x 3 2 2 0 returns 1 sturmab n 3 1 n 2 i 5 3i returns 3 Returns the Chinese remainder of the polynomials written as lists of coefficients or in symbolic form chinrem Lst Expr Lst Expr Lst Expr Lst Expr Example chinrem 1 2 1 0 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 gives polyl 1 1 0 1 poly1 1 1 2 1 1 Returns the list of coefficients of the cyclotomic polynomial of an integer cyclotomic Int Example cyclotomic 20 gives 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 340 Functions and commands Groebner Basis Gr
27. gives DERCOR YI QtS ROA PY Z Returns the coefficients m b of y b x m where y is the monomial which best approximates the points whose coordinates are the elements in two lists or the rows of a matrix power regression Lst Mtrx A Lst Example power regression 1 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 3 0 9 0 4 0 16 0 gives 2 0 1 0 Returns the real number d 2 R 2 where d is the distance between the point and the center of the circle and R is the radius of the circle powerpc Crcle Pnt or Cplx Example powerpc circle 0 1 i 3 i gives 8 Functions and commands 409 prepend primpart prism product projection propfrac ptayl Adds an element to the beginning of a list prepend Lst Elem Example prepend 1 2 3 gives 3 1 2 Returns a polynomial divided by the greatest common divisor of its coefficients primpart Poly Var Example primpart 2x 2 10x 6 gives x 2 5 x 3 Draws a prism whose base is the plane ABCD and whose edges are parallel to the line made by A and Al prism LstPnt A B C D Pnt Al With an expression as the first argument returns the product of solutions when the variable in the expression is substituted from a to b with step p If p is not provided it is taken as 1 With a list as the first argument returns the product of the values in the list With a matrix as the first argument returns the element by element product of the matrix product Expr Lst Var Lst
28. low the instructions on the screen or see page 154 147 Key Result in Plot view Continued z Selects the line drawing tool Follow the instructions on the screen or see page 156 EX Selects the point drawing tool Follow the instructions on the screen or see page 153 Z Selects the segment drawing tool Follow j the instructions on the screen or see page 156 Selects the triangle drawing tool Follow the instructions on the screen or see page 157 EP Undo Symbolic view in detail NOTE Every object whether a Geometry Symbolic View point segment line SENIGIAEAD polygon or curve is given V SC lt ircle Ga GB Ga a name and its definition is displayed in Symbolic view EB The name is the name for it you see in Plot view but prefixed by G edit v new _ _ delete Thus a point labeled A in Plot view is given the name GA in Symbolic view The G prefixed name is a variable that can be read by the computer algebra system CAS Thus in the CAS you can include such variables in calculations Note in the illustration above that GC is the name of the variable that represents a circle drawn in Plot view If you are working in the CAS and wanted to know what the area of that circle is you could enter area GC and press _ _ The CAS is explained in chapter 3 Calculations referencing geometry variables can be made in the CAS or in the Numeric
29. object is distinct from the points you entered to create it Thus deleting the object does not delete the points that define it Those points remain in the app For example if you select a 144 Geometry Clearing all objects Moving about the Plot view Zooming Geometry circle and press 8 J the circle is deleted but the center point and radius point remain If you tap when no object is selected a list of objects appears Tap on the point 3 8 3 176 one you want to delete If ae oa you don t want to delete an j E segment GD GE object press to close center GC the list If other objects are dependent on the one you have selected for deletion you will be asked to confirm your intention Tap to do so otherwise tap EE Note that points you add to an object once the object has been defined are cleared when you clear the object Thus if you place a point say D ona circle and delete the circle the circle and D are deleted but the defining points the center and radius points remain To clear the app of all geometric objects press E3 You will be asked to confirm your intention to do so Tap to clear all objects defined in Symbolic view or to keep the app as it is You can clear all measurements and calculations in Numeric view in the same way You can pan by dragging a finger across the screen either up down left or right You can also use the cursor keys to pan once the curs
30. on page 107 for more information about customizing and saving apps 70 An introduction to HP apps With one exception all the apps mentioned above are described in detail in this user guide The exception is the DataStreamer app A brief introduction to this app is given in the HP Prime Quick Start Guide Full details can be found in the HP StreamSmart 410 User Guide Application Library To open an app To reset an app To sort apps Apps are stored in the Application Library displayed by pressing Ga 1 Open the Application Application Library 15 28 Library 2 Find the app s icon and tap on it You can also use the cursor keys to scroll to the app and when it is highlighted either tap or press mal You can leave an app at any time and all the data and settings in it are retained When you return to the app you can continue as you left off However if you don t want to use the previous data and settings you can return the app to its default state that is the state it was in when you opened it for the first time To do this 1 Open the Application Library 2 Use the cursor keys to highlight the app 3 Tap EEB 4 Tap to confirm your intention You can also reset an app from within the app From the main view of the app which is usually but not always the Symbolic view press and tap to confirm your intention By default the built in apps in the Application Library are sorted
31. 1 152 1 1 047 1 5 23599 4 18879 1 126 1 1 073 1 4 97380 4 45097 19 Tap GEES select Pot and select Vertical Extrema to see the extrema listed in the table 20 Tap and select Small for a small font 7 785398163397 size 1 57079632679 4 711238898038 10 9955742876 21 Tap and select 2 491238358035 157079632679 to see just two columns Leia p rect The table lists the 5 minima visible in Plot view followed by the 5 maxima Advanced Graphing app 133 Plot Gallery A gallery of interesting graphs and the equations that generated them is provided with the calculator You open the gallery from Plot view l 1 satan p sae n k 2 SIN Wg 5 LN X Y J LNI With Plot view open Sa press the Menu key Note that you press the Menu key here not the Menu touch button on the screen From the menu select Visit Plot Gallery The first graph in the Gallery appears along with its equation Press to display the next graph in the Gallery and continue likewise until you want to close the Gallery 4 To close the Gallery and return to Plot view press Gig Exploring a plot from the Plot Gallery If a particular plot in the Plot Gallery interests you you can save a copy of it The copy is saved as a new app a customized instance of the Advanced Graphing app You can modify and explore the app as you would with built in version of the
32. 12 sqrt 33 6 sqrt 3 a oe Ae Laregre 23 6601 sqrt 33 2 sqrt 33 3 een Returns the maximum real number that the HP Prime is capable of representing 9 99999999999E499 Returns the arithmetic mean of a list or of the columns of a matrix with the optional list a list of weights mean Lst Mtrx Lst Example mean 1 2 3 1 2 3 gives 7 3 Returns the median of a list or of the columns of a matrix with the optional list a list of weights median Lst Mtrx Lst Example median 1 2 3 5 10 4 gives 3 0 400 Functions and commands median_line member midpoint MINREAL MKSA modged Draws the median line through A of the triangle ABC median line Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Pnt or Cplx C Example median _line 0 8i 4 draws the line whose equation is y 2x that is the line through 0 0 and 2 4 the midpoint of the segment whose endpoints are 0 8 and 4 0 Tests if an element is in a list or set If the element is in the list or set returns 1 the index of the first occurrence of the element If the element is not in the list or set returns O member Elem e Lst 1 or Set 1 Example member 1 4 3 1 2 gives 3 Draws the midpoint of the line segment AB midpoint Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx A Example midpoint 0 6 6i returns point 3 3 Returns the minimum real number that the HP Prime is capable of representing 1E
33. END Solves for the value of a payment for an investment or loan CalcPMTV NbPmt IPYR PV FV PPYR CPYR END Solves for the present value of an investment or loan CalcPV NbPmt IPYR PMTV FV PPYR CPYR END Calculate TVM results Solves a TVM problem for the variable TVMVar The variable must be one of the Finance app s Numeric view variables Performs the same calculation as tapping in the Numeric view of the Finance app with TVMVar highlighted DoFinance TVMVar Example DoFinance FV returns the future value of an investment in the same way as tapping in the Numeric view of the Finance app with FV highlighted 368 Functions and commands Linear Solver app functions Solve2x2 Solve3x3 LinSolve The Linear Solver app has 3 functions that offer the user flexibility in solving 2x2 or 3x3 linear systems of equations Solves a 2x2 linear system of equations Solve2x2 a b c d e fl Solves the linear system represented by ax by c dx ey f Solves a 3x3 linear system of equations Solve3x3 a b c d e fg h i j k I Solves the linear system represented by ax by cz d ex fy gz h ix jy kz l Solve linear system Solves the 2x2 or 3x3 linear system represented by matrix LinSolve matrix Example LinSolve A B C D E F solves the linear system ax by c dx ey f Triangle Solver app functions The Triangle Solver app has a group of
34. Entry Textbook or Hex Integers Binary 32 ee Octal 3 The field to the right of Se Decimal g Language ex Integers is the wordsize Decimal Mark Dot field This is the maximum Choose the default base for integers ee eo number of bits that can represent an integer The default value is 32 but you can change it any value between 1 and 64 4 If you want to allow for signed integers select the option to the right of the wordsize field Choosing this option reduces the maximum size of an integer to one bit less than the wordsize Basic Integer arithmetic 577 Examples of integer arithmetic The operands in integer arithmetic can be of the same base or of mixed bases Integer calculation Decimal equivalent 10000b 10100b 8 20 28 1100b 71 o 10100b 57 20 37 450 4Dh 11101b 8B9h 77 x 29 2233 32Ah 50 A2h 810 5 162 Mixed base arithmetic With one exception where you Function have operands of different bases the result of the calculation is presented in the base of the first operand The example at the right shows two gah 710 E4h equivalent calculations the first 72 sato multiplies 419 by 5710 and the Cr C a second multiplies 5719 by 410 Obviously the results too are mathematically equivalent However each is presented in the base of the operand entered first 16 in the first case and 8 in the second The exception i
35. Example IFTE 2 lt 3 5 1 2 7 returns 4 Returns the greatest common divisor of two integers or two rationals or two polynomials of several variables igced Intg a or Poly Intg b or Poly Example igcd 24 36 returns 12 Functions and commands 393 ilaplace incircle inter interval2center inv inversion Returns the inverse Laplace transform of a rational fraction ilaplace Expr Var IlapVar Example ilaplace 1 x 2 1 2 gives x cos x 2 sin x 2 Draws the incircle of triangle ABC incircle Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Pnt or Cplx C Example incircle GA GB GC draws the incircle of AABC With two curves or surfaces as arguments returns the intersection of the curves or surfaces as a vector With a point as the third argument returns the intersection of the curves or surfaces close to the point inter Curve Curve Pnt Returns the center of an interval or object interval2center Interval or Real Example interval2center 2 5 gives 7 2 Returns the inverse of an expression or matrix inv Expr Mtrx Example inv 9 5 gives 5 9 Returns point A1 such that A1 is on line CA and mes_alg CA CA k inversion Pnt C Real k Pnt A Example inversion GA 3 GB draws point C on line AB such that AB AC 3 In this case point A is the center of the inversion and the scale factor is 3 Point B is the point whose inversion is created 394
36. Example coeff x 3 2 gives poly1 3 2 Returns the list of divisors of a polynomial or a list of polynomials divis Poly or LstPoly Example divis x 2 1 gives 1 x 1 x 1 x 1 x 1 Returns the list of prime factors of a polynomial or a list of polynomials Each factor is followed by its multiplicity factors Poly or LstPoly Example factors x 4 1 gives x 1 1 x 1 1 x 2 1 1 Returns the greatest common divisor of two or more polynomials gcd Polyl Poly2 Polyn Returns the lowest common multiple of two or more polynomials lom Polyl Poly2 Polyn Example Lem x 2 2 x 1 x 3 I gives x 1 x 3 1 Functions and commands 337 Create Poly to Coef Coef to Poly Roots to Coef Roots to Poly Random With a variable as second argument returns the coefficients of a polynomial with respect to the variable With a list of variables as the second argument returns the internal format of the polynomial symb2poly Expr Var or symb2poly Expr ListVar Example symb2poly x 3 2 1 gives poly1 3 2 1 With one list as argument returns a polynomial in x with coefficients in decreasing order obtained from the list With a variable as second argument returns a polynomial in the variable as for one argument but the polynomial is in the variable specified in the second argument poly2symb Lst Var Example poly2symb 1 2 3 x gives x 2 x 3 Returns the coefficients
37. Intg a Intg b Intg p Example product n n 1 10 2 gives 945 Returns the orthogonal projection of the point on the curve projection Curve Pnt Returns a fraction or rational fraction A B simplified to Q r B where R lt B or the degree of R is less than the degree of B propfrac Frac or RatFrac Example propfrac 28 12 gives 2 1 3 Returns the Taylor polynomial Q such as P x Q x a ptayl Poly P var Real a Var Example ptayl x 2 2 x 1 1 gives x 2 4 x 4 410 Functions and commands purge pyramid q2a quadrilateral quantile quartile1 quartile3 Unassigns a variable name purge Var With three points as arguments draws the pyramid with a face in the plane of the three points and with two vertices at the first and second points With four points as arguments draws the pyramid with vertices at the four points pyramid Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Pnt D Returns the matrix of a quadratic form with respect to the given in VectVar q2a QuadraForm VectVar Example q2a x 2 2 x y 2 y 2 x y gives 1 1 1 2 Draws the quadrilateral ABCD quadrilateral Pnt A Cplx Pnt B Cplx Pnt C Cplx Pnt D Cp1x Returns the quantile of the elements of a list corresponding to p O lt p lt 1 quantile Lst 1 Real p Example quantile 0 1 3 4 2 5 6 0 25 gives 1 0 Returns the first quartile of the elements of a list or the col
38. Linear Solver Parametric Polar Quadratics Explorer Sequence Solve Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Triangle Solver Trig Explorer Explore linear equations and test your knowledge of them Not used Plot and explore the functions selected in Symbolic view Plot and explore the functions selected in Symbolic view Explore quadratic equations and test your knowledge of them Plot and explore the sequences selected in Symbolic view Plot and explore a single function selected in Symbolic view Not used Plot and explore the analyses selected in Symbolic view Plot and explore the analyses selected in Symbolic view Not used Explore sinusoidal equations and test your knowledge of them An introduction to HP apps 75 Plot Setup view The table below outlines what is done in the Plot Setup view of each app App Use the Plot Setup view to Advanced Modify the appearance of plots and the Graphing plot environment Finance Not used Function Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Geometry Modify the appearance of the drawing environment Inference Not used Linear Explorer Not used Linear Solver Not used Parametric Polar Quadratics Explorer Sequence Solve Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Triangle Solver Trig Explorer Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Modify the appearance of plots an
39. PopStdDevm ConfLevel configuration Input List A list of input variables see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values Input Parameters SampMean SampSize PopStdDevm ConfLevel Configuration A string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers h header cells will be created Z zX zXh std The ConfZ2mean calculates the confidence interval for a two sample Ztest ConfZ2mean input list configuration ConfZ2mean SampMean1 SampMean2 SampSizel SampSize2 PopStdDev1 PopStdDev2 ConfLevel configuration 358 Functions and commands ConfZ1prop Input List A list of input variables see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values Input Parameters SampMean1 SampMean2 SampSizel SampSize2 PopStdDev1 PopStdDev2 ConfLevel Configuration A string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers h header cells will be created Z zXI zXh zXm std The ConfZ1 prop calculates the confidence interval for a one proportion Zest ConfZlprop input list configuration
40. Quadratic Explorer Sequence Solve Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Triangle Solver Trig Explorer Find solutions to sets of two or three linear equations Explore parametric functions of x and y in terms of t Example x cos A and y sin f Explore polar functions of rin terms of an angle 6 Example r 2cos 40 Explore the properties of quadratic equations and test your knowledge Explore sequence functions where U is defined in terms of n or in terms of previous terms in the same or another sequence such as U _ and U _5 Example U 0 U 1 and U U 2 Un 1 Explore equations in one or more real valued variables and systems of equations 2 Example x 1 x x 2 To solve problems or represent data best suited to a spreadsheet Calculate one variable statistical data x Calculate two variable statistical data x and y Find the unknown values for the lengths and angles of triangles Explore the properties of sinusoidal equations and test your knowledge As you use an app to explore a lesson or solve a problem you add data and definitions in one or more of the app s views All this information is automatically saved in the app You can come back to the app at any time and all the information is still there You can also save a version of the app with a name you give it and then use the original app for another problem or purpose See Creating an app
41. RPN Manipulating the stack PICK ROLL Swap Stack DROPN A number of stack manipulation options are available Most appear as menu items across the bottom the screen To see these items you must first select an item in history Function Copies the selected item to stack level 1 The item below the one that is copied is then highlighted Thus if you tapped MEA four times four consecutive items will be moved to the bottom four stack levels levels 1 4 There are two roll commads Tap to move the selected item to stack level 1 This is similar to PICK but PICK duplicates the item with the duplicate being placed on stack level However ROLL doesn t duplicate an item It simply moves it Tap to move the item on stack level 1 to the currently highlighted level You can swap the position of the objects on stack level 1 with those on stack level 2 Just press 2 The level of other objects remains unchanged Note that the entry line must not be active at the time otherwise a comma will be entered Tapping displays further stackmanipulation tools Deletes all items in the stack from the highlighted item down to and including the item on stack level 1 Items above the highlighted item drop down to fill the levels of the deleted items If you just want to delete a single item from the stack see Delete an item below Reverse Polish Notation RPN 51 DUPN Duplicates
42. SUM B1 C6 2Formula REGRS J1 A25 3Format REGRS E1 A294Value Format REGRS E1 A255Formula Format BEEPER External references You can refer to data in a Savings spreadsheet from outside the Spreadsheet app by using the reference SpreadsheetName CR For _ lspreadsheet a6 6 270 5 Savings A6 225 example in Home view you citings TOTAL a can refer to cell A6 in the built ania mamas anmas maama anano mam in spreadsheet by entering Spreadsheet A6 Thus the formula 6 Spreadsheet A6 would multiply whatever value is currently in cell A in the built in app by 6 If you have created a customized spreadsheet called say Savings you simply refer to it by its name as in 5 Savings A6 An external reference can also be to a named cell as in 5 Savings TOTAL In the same way you can also enter references to spreadsheet cells in the CAS If you are working outside a spreadsheet you cannot refer to a cell by its absolute reference Thus Spreadsheet SA 6 produces an error message Note that a reference to a spreadsheet name is case sensitive 202 Spreadsheet Referencing variables Any variable can be inserted in a cell This includes Home variables App variables CAS variables and user variables Variables can be referenced or entered For example if you have assigned 10 to P in Home view you could enter P 5 in a spreadsheet c
43. TestScore TestValue Contains the value of the Z or t distribution associated with the input a value Contains the lower critical value of the experimental variable associated with the negative TestScore value which was calculated from the input a level Contains the upper critical value of the experimental variable associated with the positive TestScore value which was calculated from the input a level Contains the degrees of freedom for the t tests Contains the probability associated with the TestScore value For hypothesis tests contains O or 1 to indicate rejection or failure to reject the null hypothesis Contains the Z or tdistribution value calculated from the hypothesis test or confidence interval inputs Contains the value of the experimental variable associated with the Test Score 440 Variables Parametric app variables Category Names Symbolic X1 X6 Y1 Y6 X2 X7 Y2 V7 X3 x8 Y3 Y8 X4 x9 Y4 Y9 x5 x0 Y5 YO Plot Axes Tstep Cursor xmax GridDots Xmin GridLines Xtick Labels Xzoom Method Ymax Recenter Ymin Tmin Yerek Tmax Yzoom Numeric Automatic NumStep BuildYourOwn NumType Numlndep NumZoom NumStart Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Variables 44 Polar app variables Category Names Symbolic R1 R6 R2 R7 R3 R8 R4 R9 R5 RO Plot Omin Recenter Omax Xmax Ostep Xmin Axes Xtick Cursor Xzoom GridDots Ymax GridLines Ymin Labels Ytick Method Yz
44. The TRN function swaps the row column and column row elements of a matrix For instance element 1 2 row 1 column 2 is swapped with element 2 1 element 2 3 is swapped with element 3 2 and so on For example TRN 1 21 3 4 creates the matrix 1 3 2 4 The set of equations x 2y 3z 14 2x y z 3 4x 2y 2z 14 can be written as the augmented matrix 1 2 3 14 2 1 1 3 4 2 2 14 Matrices 487 which can then be stored as a 3 x4 real matrix in any matrix variable M1 is used in this example You can then use the RREF function to change this to reduced row echelon form storing it in any matrix variable M2 is used in this example The reduced row echelon matrix gives the solution to the linear equation in the fourth column An advantage of using the RREF function is that it will also work with inconsistent matrices M1 DN 1 1 2 4 A Function 10 14 RREF M1 M2 ae ae eee Function 15 010 2 0013 RREF M1 gt M2 00 CO a resulting from systems of equations which have no solution or infinite solutions For example the following set of equations has an infinite numker of solutions xty z 5 2x y 7 x 2y z 2 The final row of zeros in the reduced row echelon form of the augmented matrix indicates an inconsistent system with a og RREF M3 1 0 333333333333 4 infinite solutions k 1 66666666
45. These can be referenced in Home view and in other apps Getting started with the Statistics 2Var app The following example uses the advertising and sales data in the table below In the example you will enter the data compute summary statistics fit a curve to the data and predict the effect of more advertising on sales Advertising minutes Resulting sales independent x dependent y 2 1400 920 3 1100 5 2265 5 2890 4 2200 Statistics 2Var app 221 Open the Statistics 2Var app Enter data Choose data columns and fit 1 Open the Statistics 2Var app Select Statistics 2Var ARR REEESE 9 Enter value or expression CODED 2 Enter the advertising minutes data in column C1 2 Enter 1 Enter 3 Enter 15 Enter 5 Enter 4 3 Enter the resulting sales data in column C2 1400 _ fuer 920 __ fer nool e 2 265 Enter 2890 _ Ete 2200 _ f 920 1100 2265 2890 2200 PUn N 1400 AP EIA BBISEIME Enter value or expression In Symbolic view you can define up to five analyses of two variable data named s1 to s5 In this example we will define just one S1 The process involves choosing data sets and a fit type 4 Specify the columns that contain the data you want to analyze In this case C1 and C2 appear by default But you could have entered your data into columns other th
46. Two Sample Test iss siciutacius void teeatsandssedpetions bebeagdbnvatiasutbess 249 CONTIEHESINtELVELS css icirotesroiuspoansooaadhoandosladms lod neti ceareonss 251 One Sample Z Interval cccceeeccceeeeeeecceeeeessteeeeeeeenaees 251 Two Sample Z Interval cccesseesccceeecesceeeeeeseneeeeeeeeaees 251 One Proportion Zdnterval cssscornetescercensravattuesseroceirenehtryuan 252 Two Proportion Z Interval 43 0ir2ccndesssteoeneesunesesesdccaMareatqodee 253 One Sample TMterval so cc sini wir taseateauade cyt coeang sveesancansante 254 Two Sample T Interval o3 024 aur ecuetecapeeaesssnvaeesvaonesacderqaeyt 254 13 Solve app Getting started with the Solve app seeeeeeceeeeeesteeeeeeettteeees 257 ONE SQUATION s isere eaan a hia a ei 258 Several equations oiias ic lelcesniorats sxntorseiaersionchatusnteraaenies 261 LIMIT ONS asAiaacitece cecoinevanenesiassuincaitsraig ono asatiedte cuanauenes 262 Solution information caassuntsee acwuators deve tevacalamesiapeaodeaaetines 263 14 Linear Solver app Getting started with the Linear Solver App eeccceeeeeeeeteeees 265 Men tems tin ditt keel eones Ee ei AES AAA E Aaa Getatiestvaasiees 267 4 Contents 15 Parametric app Getting started with the Parametric App sccceeeetereeeeeeeees 269 16 Polar app Getting started with the Polar Gpp cccccccseteeeeeeenteeeeeeeees 275 17 Sequence app Getting started with the Sequence app essseeeeeee
47. Var Example segment 1 2i 4 draws the segment defined by the points whose coordinates are 1 2 and 4 0 416 Functions and commands select seq seqsolve shift_phase signature Returns a list with only the elements that satisfy the Boolean function remaining select FncBool f Lst 1 Example select x gt x gt 5 1 2 6 7 gives 6 7 With an expression and two integers a and b as arguments returns the sequence obtained when the expression is evaluated within the interval given by a and b With an expression and three integers a b and p as arguments returns the sequence obtained when the expression is evaluated with step of p within the interval given by a and b With an expression and three integers n a and b as arguments returns the sequence obtained when the expression is evaluated n times of equal spacing within the interval given by a and b seq Expr Intg n Var var Intg a Intg b Intg p Example seq 2 k k 0 8 gives 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 Returns the value of a recurrent sequence or a system of recurrent sequences u_ n f u_n or u_ n 2 f u_ n 1 u_n seqsolve Expr or LstExpr Var or LstVar InitVal or LstInitVal Example seqsolve 2x n x n 1 gives n 1 2 2 n Returns the result of applying a phase shift of pi 2 toa trigonometric expression shift phase Expr Example shift_phase sin x gives cos pit2 x 2 Returns t
48. added The new integer represented appears in the Out field and in the hex and decimal fields below it or Cycle base displays the integer in the Out field in another base Menu buttons provide some additional options EEB returns all changes to their original state EEB cycles through the bases same as pressing GE toggles the wordsize between signed and unsigned GG returns the one s complement that is each bit in the specified wordsize is inverted a O is replaced by 1 anda 1 Basic Integer arithmetic 579 Note by O The new integer represented appears in the Out field and in the hex and decimal fields below it GDB activates edit mode A cursor appear sand you can move abut the dialog using the cursor keys The hex and decimal fields can be modified as can the bit representation A change in one such field automatically modifies the other fields GSM closes the dialog and saves your changes If you don t want to save your changes press instead 3 Make whatever changes you want 4 To save your changes tap GSS otherwise press Ea If you save changes the next time you select that same result in Home view and open the Edit Integer dialog the value shown in the Was field will be the value you saved not the value of the result Base functions Numerous functions related to integer arithmetic can be invoked from Home view and within programs BITAND BITNOT e BITOR e BITSL e B
49. by entering the independent variable of interest in the independent variable column and tapping WE For example suppose in the Symbolic view of the Function app you have defined F1 X as X 1 3 Suppose further that you want to know what the value of that function is when X is 625 1 Open Numeric view EB 2 Anywhere in the independent column the left most column enter 625 102 An introduction to HP apps F1 389373 389497 81 389622 64 389747 49 389872 36 389997 25 390122 16 390247 09 390372 04 390497 01 390622 3 Top ME Numeric view is refreshed with the value you entered in the first row and the result of the evaluation in a cell to the right In this example the result is 389373 Big Defn Width Custom tables If you choose Automatic for the NUMTYPE setting the table of evaluations in Numeric view will follow the settings in the Numeric Setup view That is the independent variable will start with the NUMSTART setting and increment by the NUMSTEP setting These settings are explained in Common operations in Numeric Setup view on page 105 However you can choose to build your own table where just the values you enter appear as independent variables 1 Open Numeric Setup view Choose BuildYourOwn from the NUMTYPE menu Open Numeric view Numeric view will be empty X F1 397 4 In the independent column the left most 438 100 9798 column enter a
50. in M1 and 5 6 7 8 in M2 Example 1 Select the first matrix Matrix Tap M1 or highlight it and press _ 2 Enter the matrix M i z elements gt b i n Es 2 3 4 L ins __ size Go gt column Matrices 471 To multiply and divide by a scalar To multiply two 3 Select the second matrix Matrix Tap M2 or highlight it and press __er_ J 4 Enter the matrix m i 2 elements b H 5 6 Enter 7 Enter 8 pins I size Go gt column 5 In Home view add the two matrices you have just created ag A 251 mmn 77 2 Enter M1 M2 k 5 1012 CTA a a For division by a scalar enter the matrix first then the operator then the scalar For multiplication the order of the operands does not matter The matrix and the scalar can be real or complex For example to divide the result of the previous example by 2 press the mm2 l5 il following keys Ans 56 GEJ 2a a a a ans aas To multiply the two matrices that you created for the matrices previous example press the following keys Function 75 2 To multiply a matrix bya i vector enter the matrix 1012 7 Ans 34 first then the vector The 7 f d M1 M2 19 22 Hille of elements 3 al the vector must equal the cae EL ED an number of columns in the matrix 472 Matrices To raise a matrix to a power To divide by
51. intercepts slope signed area and extrema and create tables that show how functions are evaluated at particular values This chapter demonstrates the basic functionality of the Function app by stepping you through an example More complex functionality is described in chapter 5 An introduction to HP apps beginning on page 69 Getting started with the Function app The Function app uses the customary app views Symbolic Plot and Numeric described in chapter 5 For a description of the menu buttons available in this app see Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons on page 86 Plot view Summary of menu buttons on page 96 and Numeric view Summary of menu buttons on page 104 Throughout this chapter we will explore the linear function y 1 x and the quadratic function y x 1 3 Function app 111 Open the Function app Define the expressions NOTE 1 Open the Function Function Symbolic View _ app FH E F2 X S Select E F3 X Function H F4QX E F5 Recall that you can req open an app justby E F70 tapping its icon aaga You can also open it by using the cursor keys to highlight it and then pressing Show The Function app starts in Symbolic view This is the defining view It is where you symbolically define that is specify the functions you want to explore The graphical and numerical data you see in Plot view and Nu
52. n In b gt In a b n for integers n incollect Expr Example Incollect 1ln x 2 1n y gives ln x y 2 Returns an expression with a power of sum rewritten as a product of powers powexpand Expr Example powexpand 2 x y yields 24x 24y 330 Functions and commands tExpand Exp amp Ln ey Inx _ xY x gt enx exp2trig expexpand Sine asinx gt acosx Returns a transcendental expression in expanded form tExpand Expr Example tExpand sin 2 x exp x y gives 2 cos x sin x texp x exp y Returns an expression of the form exp n In x rewritten as a power of x exp2pow Expr Example exp2pow exp 3 1n x gives x 3 Returns an expression with powers rewritten as an exponential pow2exp Expr Example pow2exp a b gives exp b 1n a Returns an expression with complex exponentials rewritten in terms of sin and cos exp2trig Expr Example exp2trig exp i x gives cos x i sin x Returns an expression with exponentials in expanded form expexpand Expr Example expexpand exp 3 x gives exp x 3 Returns an expression with arcsin x rewritten as pi 2 arccos x asin2acos Expr Example asin2acos acos x asin x gives acos x tacos x Functions and commands 331 asinx gt atanx sinx gt cosx fanx Cosine acosx gt asinx acosx gt atanx cosx gt sinx
53. nothing happens IF THEN ELSE Syntax IF fest THEN commands ELSE commands 2 END Evaluate test If test is true non 0 execute commands 1 otherwise execute commands 2 CASE Syntax CASE IF fest THEN commands END IF test2 THEN commands2 END DEFAULT commands END Evaluates fest If true execute commands and end the CASE Otherwise evaluate test2 If true execute commands2 Continue evaluating tests until a true is found If no true test is found execute default commands if provided Example CASE IF x lt 0 THEN RETURN negative END IF x lt 1THEN RETURN small END DEFAULT RETURN large END 526 Programming Loop IFERR IFERR ELSE FOR IFERR commands THEN commands2 END Executes sequence of commands If an error occurs during execution of commands executes sequence of commands2 IFERR commands THEN commands2 ELSE commands3 END Executes sequence of commands If an error occurs during execution of commands executes sequence of commands2 Otherwise execute sequence of commands3 Syntax FOR var FROM start TO finish DO commands END Sets variable var to start and for as long as this variable is less than or equal to finish executes the sequence of commands and then adds 1 increment to var Example 1 This program determines which integer from 2 to N has the greatest number of factors EXPORT MAXFACTORS N BEGI OCAL cur max k result
54. provided on the CD shipped with this product Preface Getting started The HP Prime Graphing Calculator is an easy to use yet powertul graphing calculator designed for secondary mathematics education and beyond It offers hundreds of functions and commands and includes a computer algebra system CAS for symbolic calculations In addition to an extensive library of functions and commands the calculator comes with a set of HP apps An HP app is a special application designed to help you explore a particular branch of mathematics or to solve a problem of a particular type For example there is a HP app that will help you explore geometry and another to help you explore parametric equations There are also apps to help you solve systems of linear equations and to solve time value of money problems The HP Prime also has its own programming language you can use to explore and solve mathematical problems Functions commands apps and programming are covered in detail later in this guide In this chapter the general features of the calculator are explained along with common interactions and basic mathematical operations Before starting Charge the battery fully before using the calculator for the first time To charge the battery either Connect the calculator to a computer using the USB cable that came in the package with your HP Prime The PC needs to be on for charging to occur Connect the calculator to a wal
55. rewritten in terms of exp x halftan_hyp2exp ExprTrig Example halftan_hyp2exp sin x sinh x gives 2 tan x 2 tan x 2 2 1 exp x 1 exp x 2 Used in programming to go into step by step debugging mode Returns the Hamming distance between two integers hamdist Intg Intg Example hamdist 0x12 0x38 gives 3 Returns the harmonic conjugate of three points or of three parallel or concurrent lines or returns the line of conjugates of a point with respect to two lines harmonic_conjugate Line or Pnt Line or Pnt Line or Pnt 390 Functions and commands harmonic_division has head Heaviside hexagon homothety With three points and a variable as arguments returns four points that are in a harmonic division With three lines and a variable as arguments returns four lines that are in a harmonic division harmonic division Pnt or Line Pnt or Line Pnt or Line Var Returns 1 if a variable is in an expression and returns O otherwise has Expr Var Example has xt y x gives 1 Returns the first element of a given vector sequence or string head Vect or Seq or Str Example head 1 2 3 gives 1 Returns the value of the Heaviside function for a given real i e 1 if x gt 0 and O if x lt 0 Heaviside Real Example Heaviside 1 gives 1 Draws a hexagon of side AB in the plane ABP The other four corners of the hexagon are named according to the variables
56. sCov MeanY oCov Y xXY D2 MeanX sY X oY 2X2 serrY Symbolic S1 S1Type S2 S2Type S3 S3Type S4 S4Type 5 S5Type Plot Axes Xmin Cursor Xtick GridDots Xzoom GridLines Ymax Labels Ymin Method Ytick Recenter Yzoom xmax Numeric C1 c6 ee C7 C3 c8 C4 c9 C5 co Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat 437 Results Nbltem Corr CoefDet sCov oCov XY MeanX X X2 sX oX serrX MeanY Contains the number of data points in the current 2 variable analysis S1 S5 Contains the correlation coefficient from the latest calculation of summary statistics This value is based on the linear fit only regardless of the fit type chosen Contains the coefficient of determination from the latest calculation of summary statistics This value is based on the fit type chosen Contains the sample covariance of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the population covariance of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sum of the X Y products for the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the mean of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sum of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sum of the squares of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sample standard d
57. to access the settings for Home view press mga Press the A key to access the characters printed in orange on a key For instance to type Z in Home view press and then press For a lowercase letter press faa and then the letter In CAS view and another key gives a lowercase letter and and another letter gives an uppercase letter 22 Getting started Adding text The text you can enter directly is shown by the orange characters on the keys These characters can only be entered in conjunction with the and keys Both uppercase and lowercase characters can be entered and the method is exactly the opposite in CAS view than in Home view Keys Effect in Home view Effect in CAS view Makes the next charac Makes the next charac fer uppercase Lock mode makes all alpha _ _alpha_J characters uppercase until the mode is reset Shift With uppercase locked DESET makes the next character lowercase Makes the next charac Com Cd ter lowercase Lock mode makes all alpha _ J characters lowercase until a the mode is reset With lowercase locked comes makes the next character uppercase With lowercase locked Lo Lapha J makes all characters uppercase until the mode is reset Reset uppercase lock alpha J mode Reset lowercase lock alpha _ alpha _ nee ter lowercase Lock mode makes all characters lowercase until the mode is reset With lowercase locked mak
58. 0 point 4 0 point 2 4 returns 3 Tests whether or not two lines or two circles are orthogonal perpendicular In the case of two circles tests whether or not the tangent lines at a point of intersection are orthogonal Returns 1 if they are and O otherwise is orthogonal linell line2 or is orthogonal circlel circle2 Example is orthogonal line y x line y x returns 1 Tests whether or not two lines are parallel Returns 1 if they are and 0 otherwise is _parallel linel line2 Example is parallel line 2x 3y 7 line 2x 3y 9 returns 1 Tests whether or not a set of four points are vertices of a parallelogram Returns 0 if they are not If they are then returns 1 if they form only a parallelogram 2 if they form a rhombus 3 if they form a rectangle and 4 if they form a square is_parallelogram pointl point2 point3 point4 Example is parallelogram point 0 0 point 2 4 point 0 8 point 2 4 returns 2 Similar to is_orthogonall Tests whether or not two lines are perpendicular is _perpendicular linel line2 187 is_rectangle Tests whether or not a set of four points are vertices of a rectangle Returns O if they are not 1 if they are and 2 if they are vertices of a square is_rectangle pointl point2 point3 point4 Examples is rectangle point 0 0 point 4 2 point 2 6 point 2 4 returns 2 With a set of only three points as argument te
59. 1 2 3 2 2 gives 1 1 3 2 3 0 1 4 Functions and commands 413 reflection remove reorder REPEAT residue restart resultant RETURN With a line D and a point C as arguments returns the reflection of the point across the line i e the line is taken as a line of symmetry With a point A and a curve C as arguments returns the reflection of the curve about the point i e the point is taken as the point of symmetry reflection Pnt A or Line D Pnt C or Curve C Example reflection line x 3 point 1 1 reflects the point at 1 1 over the vertical line x 3 to create a point at 5 1 Returns a list with the elements that satisfy the Boolean function removed remove FncBool f e Lst 1 Example remove x gt x gt 5 1 2 6 7 gives 1 2 Reorders the in an expression according to the order given in LstVar reorder Expr LstVar Example reorder x 2 2 xty 2 y x gives YOQtEKO DEQ K Used in programming to indicate a statement or statements that should be repeated until a given condition is true Returns the residue of an expression at a residue Expr Var v Cp1x a Example residue 1 z z 0 gives 1 Purges all the variables restart NULL Returns the resultant i e the determinant of the Sylvester matrix of two polynomials resultant Poly Poly Var Used in programming return a value of a function at a certain point retur
60. 1 gt max 1 gt result FOR k FROM 2 TO DO SIZE idivis k gt cur IF cur gt max THEN cur gt max k gt result SGBOX Max of max factors for result END Programming 527 FOR STEP FOR DOWN In Home enter MAXFACTORS I00 Max of 36 factors for 2 MAXFACTORS 100 ae ee ee a Syntax FOR var FROM start TO finish STEP increment DO commands END Sets variable var to start and for as long as this variable is less than or equal to finish executes the sequence of commands and then adds increment to var Example 2 This program draws an interesting pattern on the screen EXPORT DRAWPATTERN BEGIN LOCAL xincr yincr color STARTAPP Function RECT xincr Xmax Xmin 320 yincr Ymax Ymin 240 FOR X FROM Xmin TO Xmax STEP xincr DO FOR Y FROM Ymin TO Ymax STEP yincr DO color FLOOR X 2 Y 2 MOD 32768 PIXON X Y color END END FREEZE END Syntax FOR var FROM start DOWNTO finish DO commands END Sets variable var to start and for as long as this variable is more than or equal to finish executes the sequence of commands and then subtracts 1 decrement from var 528 Programming FOR DOWN STEP WHILE Syntax FOR var FROM start DOWNTO finish STEP increment DO commands END Sets variable var to start and for as long as this variable is more than or equal to finish executes th
61. 2 Used in programming to indicate the conditions under which a statement should stop being executed Simplifies a unit in a unit object usimplify Unit Returns the valuation degree of the term of lowest degree of a polynomial With only a polynomial as argument the valuation returned is for x With a variable as second argument the valuation is performed for it valuation Poly Var Example valuation x 4 x 3 gives 3 Returns the variance of a list or the list of variances of the columns of a matrix The optional second list is a list of weights variance Lst Mtrx Lst Example variance 3 4 2 gives 2 3 With one point as argument defines a vector from the origin to the point With two points as arguments defines a vector from the first point to the second point With a point and a vector as arguments defines a vector beginning from the point and with direction and magnitude of the vector vector Pnt Pnt Pnt Vect Returns the list of the vertices of a polygon or polyhedron vertices Polygon or Polyedr Returns the closed list A B A of the vertices of a polygon or polyhedron vertices abca Polygon or Polyedr Functions and commands 423 vpotential when WHILE XOR yellow zip Returns U such as curl U V vpotential Vect V LstVar Example vpotential 2 x y 3 x 2 4 z 2 y z x y Z gives Oy 2 x y 27 R S754 Re 243 y Used to introduce a conditio
62. 3 The last two vertices are computed automatically and are saved into the CAS variables p and q Returns the standard deviance of the elements in a list with the or returns the list of standard deviances of the columns of a matrix The optional second list is a list of weights stddev Lst Mtrx Lst Example stddev 1 2 3 gives sqrt 6 3 Functions and commands 419 stddevp STEP sto sturmseq subMat suppress surd Returns the population standard deviation of the elements in a list or returns the list of standard deviations of the columns of a matrix The optional second list is a list of weights stddevp Lst Mtrx Lst Example stddevp 1 2 3 gives 1 Used in programming to indicate the step in an iteration or the step size of an incrementation Stores a real or string in a variable sto Real or Str Var Returns the Sturm sequence for a polynomial or a rational fraction sturmseq Poly Var Example sturmseg x 3 1 x gives 1 1 0 0 1 3 0 0 9 1 Extracts from a matrix a sub matrix with first element A n 1 n2 and last element A n3 n4 subMat Mtrx A Intg nl1 Intg n2 Intg n3 Int g n4 Example subMat 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 0 2 1 gives 3 4 5 6 Returns a list without the nth element suppress Lst Intg n Example suppress 0 1 2 3 2 gives 0 1 3 Returns an expression to the power of 1 n surd Expr Intg n Example sur
63. 61 the bottom of the screen and change as you move the cursor Tracing is explained in more detail in Trace on page 94 Change the You can change the scale to see more or less of your scale graph This can be done in four ways e Press to zoom in or to zoom out on the current cursor position This method uses the zoom factors set in the Zoom menu The default for both x and y is 2 e Use the Plot Setup view to specify the exact xrange XRNG and y range YRNG you want 114 Function app NOTE Display Numeric view Set up Numeric view Use options on the Zoom menu to zoom in or out horizontally or vertically or both etc Use options on the View menu EB to select a pre defined view Note that the Autoscale option attempts to provide a best fit showing as many of the critical features of each plot as possible By dragging a finger horizontally or vertically across the screen you can quickly see parts of the plot that are initially outside the set x and y ranges This is easier than resetting the range of an axis Display the Numeric view T x 7 a 2 A 9 2 19 A 8 2 36 a Fi 51 S 4 6 2 64 The Numeric view 5 5 2 75 a 6 4 2 84 displays data 7 3 2 91 8 i CA generated by the ia 2 3 i 0 expressions you Display the Numeric Function Num Setup eal Zoom options with numerous examples are explained in more detail in Zoom on page 88 defined in Symbolic v
64. A25 A37 STAT1 A25 A37 h n X o Attempts to fit the input data to a specified function default is linear REGRS Input range mode configuration e Input range specifies the data source for example A1 D8 It must contain an even number of columns Each pair will be treated as a distinct set of datapoints Mode specifies the mode to be used for the regression 1 y sl x int y sl ln x int y int exp sl x y int x sl y int sI x y sl x int y L 1 a exp b x y a sin b x c d o ON WO O FR WN y cx 2 bx a 10 y dx 3 cex 2 bx a 11 y ex 4 dx 3 cx 2 bx a Functions and commands 349 PredY Configuration a string which indicates which values you want to place in which row and if you want row and columns headers Place each parameter in the order that you want to see them appear in the spreadsheet If you do not provide a configuration string a default one will be provided The valid parameters are H Place column headers h Place row headers sl slope only valid for modes 1 6 int intercept only valid for modes 1 6 cor correlation only valid for modes 1 6 cd Coefficient of determination only valid for modes 1 6 8 10 sCov Sample covariance only valid for modes 1 6 pCov Population covariance only valid for modes 1 6 L L parameter for mode 7 a a parameter for modes 7 11 b b parameter for mod
65. Algebraic An expression is entered on a single line Your entry is always one dimensional The same calculation as above would appear like this is algebraic entry mode LN 5 n e RPN Reverse Polish Notation The arguments of the expression are entered first followed by the operator The entry of an operator automatically evaluates what has already been entered Thus you will need to enter a two operator expression as in the example above in two steps one for each operator Step 1 5 the natural logarithm of 5 is calculated and displayed in history Step 2 m is entered as a divisor and applied to the previous result You choose your preferred entry method from page 1 of the Home Settings screen S EBB See System wide settings starting on page 30 for instructions on how to choose settings RPN is available in Home view but not in CAS view Reverse Polish Notation RPN 47 The same entry line editing tools are available in RPN mode as in algebraic and textbook mode Press to delete the character to the left of the cursor e Press to delete the character to the right of the cursor e Press to clear the entire entry line e Press to clear the entire entry line History in RPN mode The results of your calculations are kept in history This history is displayed above the entry line and by scrolling up to calculations that are no longer immediately visible The calculator offe
66. From Numeric Setup view enter a value for NUMYSTART In a program type n gt NumYStart NumStep Sets the step size increment value for an independent Function variable in Numeric view are From Numeric Setup view enter a value for NUMSTEP olar Sequence In a program type n gt NumStep where n gt 0 562 Programming NumXStep Advanced Graphing NumYStep Advanced Graphing NumType Function Parametric Polar Sequence Advanced Graphing NumZoom Function Parametric Polar Sequence NumXZoom Advanced Graphing NumYZoom Advanced Graphing Sets the step size increment value for an independent X variable in Numeric view From Numeric Setup view enter a value for NUMXSTEP In a program type n gt NumXStep where n gt 0 Sets the step size increment value for an independent Y variable in Numeric view From Numeric Setup view enter a value for NUMYSTEP In a program type n gt NumYStep where n gt 0 Sets the table format From Numeric Setup view enter 0 or 1 In a program type 0 gt NumType for Automatic default 1 gt NumType for BuildYourOwn Sets the zoom factor in the Numeric view From Numeric Setup view type in a value for NUMZOOM In a program type n gt NumZoom where n gt 0 Sets the zoom factor for the values in the X column in the Numeric view From Numeric Setup view type in a value for NUMXZOOM In a program type n gt NumXZoom where n gt 0 Sets th
67. Functions and commands iPart iquorem isobarycenter isopolygon isosceles_triangle Returns a real number without its fractional part or a list of real numbers each without its fractional part iPart Real LstReal Example iPart 4 3 gives 4 0 Returns the Euclidean quotient and remainder of two integers iquorem Intg a Intg b Example iquorem 46 23 returns 2 17 Draws the isobarycenter of the given points isobarycenter Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Example isobarycenter 3 3 3 V3 i returns point 3 V3 i 3 which is equivalent to 0 3 With two points and n gt 0 draws a regular polygon with vertices at the two points and abs n vertices in total With three points and n gt 0 draws a regular polygon with vertices at the first two points and the third point is in the plane of the polygon With two points and n lt O draws a regular polygon with center at the first point and a vertex at the second point With three points and n lt 0 draws a regular polygon with center at the first point vertex at the second point and the third point is a point in the plane of the polygon isopolygon Pnt Pnt Pnt Intg n Example isopolygon GA GB 6 draws a regular hexagon whose first two vertices are the points A and B Draws the isosceles triangle ABC With an angle t as the third argument it is equal to angle AB AC With a point P as the third argument the triangle is in the
68. MAMET press and select Spreadsheet You can create any number of customized spreadsheets each with its own name see Creating an app on page 107 You open a customized spreadsheet in the same way by pressing and selecting the particular spreadsheet The maximum size of any one spreadsheet is 10 000 rows by 676 columns The app opens in Numeric view There is no Plot or Symbolic view There is a Symbolic Setup view E1 E8 that enables you to override certain system wide settings See Common operations in Symbolic Setup view on page 87 Getting started with the Spreadsheet app Suppose you have a stall at a weekend market You sell furniture on consignment for their owners taking a 10 commission for yourself You have to pay the landowner 100 a day to set up your stall and you will keep the stall open until you have made 250 for yourself 1 Open the Spreadsheet app Press Press and select Spreadsheet 2 Select column A Either tap on A or use the cursor keys to highlight the A cell that is the heading of the A column Spreadsheet 193 Enter PRICE and tap EMB You have named the entire first column PRICE Select column B Either tap on B or use the cursor keys to highlight the B cell Enter a formula for your commission being 10 of the price of each item sold Gm JPRICEL JOTO E Because you entered the ara Sareea PRICE B IC ID IE formula in the heading of
69. Position If you prefer the Math menu to show command names instead deselect the Menu Display option on page 2 of the Home Settings screen see page 26 Make List Calculates a sequence of elements for a new list using the syntax MAKELIST expression variable begin end increment Evaluates expression with respect to variable as variable takes on values from begin to end values taken at increment steps Example In Home generate a series of squares from 23 to 27 Function Select List Select Make List or MAKELIST wa eased iced 529 576 625 676 729 23 mema 27 ka 31 Sort Sorts the elements in a list in ascending order SORT list Example SORT 2 5 3 returns 2 3 5 460 Lists Reverse Creates a list by reversing the order of the elements in a list REVERSE list Example REVERSE 1 2 3 returns 3 2 1 Concatenate Concatenates two lists into a new list CONCAT list list2 Example CONCAT 1 2 3 4 returns 1 2 3 4 Position Returns the position of an element within a list The element can be a value a variable or an expression If there is more than one instance of the element the position of the first occurrence is returned A value of O is returned if there is no occurrence of the specified element POS list element Example POS 3 7 12 19 12 returns 3 Size Returns the number of elements in a list SIZE li
70. Real a Real b Var Example preval x 2 2 2 3 gives 5 Returns in the neighborhood of n c an equivalent of the sum of Xpr var1 var2 for var2 from var2 1 to var2 var1 when the sum is looked at as a Riemann sum associated with a continuous function defined on 0 1 sum_riemann Expr Xpr Lst varl var2 Example sum_riemann 1 n k n k gives 1n 2 Returns the Taylor series expansion of an expression With the optional second and third arguments you can specify the limit point and the order of the expansion If no limit point is provided it is taken as x 0 If no order is provided the series returned is fifth order taylor Expr Var limit_ point Order Example taylor sin x x x 0 gives 1 x 2 6 x 4 120 x 6 order size x Returns the quotient Q of the division of polynomial A by polynomial B by increasing power order with degree Q lt n or Q 0 In other words Q is the Taylor expansion at order n of A B in the vicinity of x 0 divpc A B Intg n Example divpc x 4 x 2 x 2 1 5 gives x 5 3 x 4 x 3 2 x 24 x42 Returns the Laplace transform of an expression laplace Expr Var LapVar Example laplace exp x sin x gives 1 x 2 2 x 2 Functions and commands 327 Inverse Laplace FFT Inverse FFT Solve Solve Returns the inverse Laplace transform of an expression invlaplace Expr Var IlapVar Example ilaplace 1 x 2 1 2 re
71. Sya Ve TT VIEI Y2 U2 2A D ASV ea B Jat 223 4 RSD 258 Solve app Enter known variables NOTE Solve the unknown variable 4 Display the Numeric view Num Setup SOVE NOMEE view m v 0 Here you specify the values u0 of the known variables AO D 0 highlight the variable that you want to solve for and tap ae 5 Enter the values for the Enter value or press SOLVE DEEN SOLVE known variables 270247 8C fe 1 6L 36 7 M100 LB Some variables may already have values against them when you display the Numeric view This occurs if the variables have been assigned values elsewhere For example in Home view you might have assigned 10 to variable U 10 U Then when you open the Numeric view to solve an equation with U as a variable 10 will be the default value for U This also occurs if a variable has been given a value in some previous calculation in an app or program To reset all pre populated variables to zero press Si B3 6 Solve for the unknown variable A Move the cursor to the A field and tap ES Therefore the acceleration needed to increase the speed of a car from 16 67 m s 60 kph to 27 78 m s 100 kph over a distance of 100 m is approximately 2 4692 m s solve Numeric View V 27 78 U 16 67 A 2 4691975 D 100 Enter value or press SOLVE DEEN SOLVE The equation is linear with respect to the variabl
72. TT of sides of the dice the Roll Dice number of rolls and alae execute a simulation After running a simulation press to see a histogram of your simulation results ne ee ee eee Program commands This section describes each program command The commands under the menu are described first The commands under the menu are described in Commands under the Cmds menu on page 531 Commands under the Tmplt menu Block BEGIN END The block commands determine the beginning and end of a sub routine or function There is also a Return command to recall results from sub routines or functions Syntax BEGIN stmtl stm2 stmfN END Defines a command or set of commands to be executed together In the simple program EXPORT SQM1 X BEGIN RETURN X 2 1 END the block is the single RETURN command Programming 525 If you entered SQM1 8 in Home view the result returned would be 63 RETURN Syntax RETURN expression Returns the current value of expression KILL Syntax KILL Stops the step by step execution of the current program with debug Branch In what follows the plural word commands refers to both a single command or a set of commands IFTHEN Syntax IF test THEN commands END Evaluate test If test is true not O execute commands Otherwise
73. The following is a more complex example involving the naming of an entire column 198 Spreadsheet 1 Select cell A that is the oT E IC D IE header cell for column A 5 i ods 3 33 10 89 4 36 11 88 2 Enter COST and tap is oD fp 8 0 3 Select cell B that is the a b header cell for column B Hisz Edit_ Format GoTo select Gol 4 Enter Sma cost 0 33 and tap M 5 Enter some values in column A and observe the calculated results in column B Entering content Direct entry You can enter content directly in the spreadsheet or import data from a statistics app A cell can contain any valid calculator object a real number 3 14 a complex number a ib an integer 1Ah a list 1 2 a matrix or vector 1 2 a string text a unit 2_m or an expression that is a formula Move to the cell you want to add content to and start entering the content as you would in Home view Press when you have finished You can also enter content into a number of cells with a single entry Just select the cells enter the content for example Row 3 and press L What you enter on the entry line is evaluated as soon as you press _ _ with the result placed in the cell or cells However if you want to retain the underlying formula precede it with EA For example suppose that want to add cell A1 which contains 7 to cell B2 which c
74. The graphic at the right shows the final solution EREJEDERNERED once all the coefficients and constants had been entered 266 Linear Solver app Solve a two by If the three equation TEAN 12 22 two system input form is Lh OY 0 displayed and you OX oys 0 want to solve a two equation set tap ED 0 Infinite number of solutions adina 2x20 33 a a Note You can enter any expression that resolves to a numerical result including variables Just enter the name of a variable For more information on assigning values to variables see Storing a value in a variable on page 42 Menu items The menu items are B moves the cursor to the entry line where you can add or change a value You can also highlight a field enter a value and press _ _ The cursor automatically moves to the next field where you can enter the next value and press _ EZ displays the page for solving a system of 2 linear equations in 2 variables changes to when active E displays the page for solving a system of 3 linear equations in 3 variables changes to when active Linear Solver app 267 268 Linear Solver app 15 Parametric app The Parametric app enables you to explore parametric equations These are equations in which both x and y are defined as functions of t They take the forms x f t and y g t Getting started with the Parametric app Th
75. Triangle Solver 369 370 G geometric objects 153 160 geometric transformations 161 164 Geometry app 69 135 192 commands 165 192 creating objects in Plot view 141 in Symbolic view 148 functions 165 192 naming objects 142 objects types of 153 160 Plot view menu buttons 146 selecting an object 143 shortcut keys 147 transforming objects 161 164 undo option 144 variables summary of 433 gestures 17 global variables 511 glossary 581 583 graph bar 218 box and whisker 218 cobweb 279 color for 85 line 218 normal probability 218 pareto 219 stairsteps 279 statistical data one variable 217 two variable 232 graphics storing and recalling 534 variables 431 graphing methods 99 Greek characters 21 H help online 45 hexagesimal format 26 highlight color 34 histogram 217 history Home 14 RPN 48 Home settings 30 431 override 87 Home view 13 horizontal zoom 89 101 HP apps See apps HP 69 hyperbolic functions 315 hypothesis tests 238 243 250 365 366 hypothesis alternative 238 i57 I O commands programming 544 546 implied multiplication 39 increasing powers 57 inequalities 125 inference confidence intervals 251 255 hypothesis tests 243 250 One Proportion Z Interval 252 OneProportion Z Test 246 One Sample T Interval 254 One Sample T Test 248 One Sample Z Interval 251 One Sample Z Test 244 TwoProportion Z Interval 253 Two Proportion Z Test 247 Two Sample T Interval 254 Two Sample T Test 249 Two Sam
76. Typically a seed value is a value that directs the calculator to provide if possible a solution that is closest to it rather than some other value In this example let s look for a solution in the vicinity of X 2 5 Enter the seed value in the X field 2 OK The calculator will provide one solution if there is one and you will not be alerted if there are multiple solutions Vary the seed values to find other potential solutions 6 Select the variables you want solutions for In this example we want to find values for both X and Y so make sure that both variables are selected Note too that if you have more than two variables you can enter seed values for more than one of them SOVE NOMEE View i X2 28388218142 v 3 28388218142 7 Tap o find a solution near X 2 that satisfies each selected equation Solutions if found are displayed beside each selected variable Enter value or press SOLVE DEFN SOLVE You cannot plot equations if more than one is selected in Symbolic view The HP Prime will not alert you to the existence of multiple solutions If you suspect that another solution exists close to a particular value repeat the exercise using that value as a seed In the example just discussed you will find another solution if you enter 4 as the seed value for X In some situations the Solve app will use a random number seed in its search for a solution This means
77. Ymax Labels Ymin Method Ytick Recenter Yzoom Xmax Numeric NumStart NumType NumStep NumZoom Automatic BuildYourOwn NumIndep Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat a The Results variables contain the last value found by the Signed Area Extremum Intersection Root and Slope functions respectively 432 Variables Geometry app variables Category Names Numeric XMin XMax YMin Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Spreadsheet app variables Category Names Numeric ColWidth RowHeight Row Col Cell Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Solve app variables Category Names Symbolic El E E2 E7 E3 E E4 E E5 E Plot Axes Xmin Cursor Xtick GridDots Xzoom GridLines Ymax Labels Ymin Method Ytick Recenter YZoom Xmax Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Variables 433 Advanced Graphing app variables Category Names Symbolic S1 s6 S2 S7 S3 S8 S4 S9 99 so Plot Axes Xmin Cursor Xtick GridDots Xzoom GridLines Ymax Labels Ymin ethod Ytick Recenter Yzoom xmax Numeric umXStart NumType umYyStart NumXZoom umxStep NumYZoom umyStep Automatic NumIndep BuildYourOwn Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat 434 Variables Statistics 1Var app variables Category Names Results Nbltem IX explained Min E X below Ql ean Med sX Q3 oX Max serrX Symbolic H1 H1Type H2 H2Type H3 H3Type H4 H4Type H5 H5Type Plot Axes Xmax Cursor Xmin GridDots
78. a square matrix You can raise a matrix to any power as long as the power is an integer The following example shows the result of raising matrix M1 created earlier to the power of 5 GT 1k25 a A 1 gt You can also raise a matrix to a power without first storing it as a variable m 5 s Sa 2337 3406 Matrices can also be mer p p e LT raised to negative powers In this case the result is equivalent to 1 matrix ABS power In the following example M1 is raised to the power of 2 2 2 5 5 2 M1 3 75 1 75 CT es ee For division of a matrix or a vector by a square matrix the number of rows of the dividend or the number of elements if it is a vector must equal the number of rows in the divisor This operation is not a mathematical division it is a left multiplication by the inverse of the divisor M1 M2 is equivalent to MZ M1 To divide the two Function matrices you created for the previous example press the following keys salsa E 72 7 EJ Pe ee feasan eee Matrices 473 To invert a matrix To negate each element You can invert a square matrix in Home view by typing the matrix or its variable name and pressing em Fe You can also use the INVERSE command in the Matrix category of the Math menu You can change the sign of each element in a matrix by pressing Al entering the matrix name and pressing Solving systems of
79. a and b for there to be a solution iabcuv Intg a Intg b Intg c Example iabcuv 21 28 7 gives 1 1 Returns the basis of the intersection of two vector spaces ibasis Lst Vect Vect Lst Vect Vect Example ibasis 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 gives 1 1 0 Returns the greatest common divisor of the integer coefficients of a polynomial icontent Poly Var Example icontent 24x 3 6x 2 12x 18 gives 6 392 Functions and commands icosahedron identity iegcd IFERR IFTE igcd Draws an icosahedron with center A vertex B and such that the plane ABC contains one vertex among the five nearest vertices from B icosahedron Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Returns the solution to the identity function for an expression id Seq Example id 1 2 3 gives 1 2 3 Returns the identity matrix of dimension n identity Intg n Example identity 3 gives 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Returns the extended greatest common divisor of two integers iegcd Intg Intg Example iegcd 14 21 returns 1 1 7 Used in programming to begin a conditional statement Executes sequence of commands If an error occurs during execution of commands I execute sequence of commands2 Otherwise execute sequence of commands3 IFERR commands1 THEN commands2 ELSE commands3 END If a condition is satisfied returns Expr otherwise returns Expr2 IFTE Cond Exprl Expr2
80. a circle just by entering the name of the circle Displaying To have a calculation made 3 calculations in in Numeric view appear in fadus 60 536 Plot view Plot view just highlight it in ae Numeric view and tap GMB A checkmark appears beside the calculation Repeat the procedure to prevent the calculation being displayed in Plot view The checkmark is cleared Editing a 1 Highlight the calculation you want to delete calculation 2 Tap EZIB 3 Make your change and tap Qi Deleting a 1 Highlight the calculation you want to delete calculation 2 Tap GEEZ To delete all calculations press E3 Note that deleting a calculation does not delete any geometric objects from Plot or Symbolic view 152 Geometry Geometric objects Points Point Point On Geometry The geometric objects discussed in this section are those that can be created in Plot view Objects can also be created in Symbolic view more in fact than in Plot view but these are discussed in Geometry functions and commands on page 165 In Plot view you choose a drawing tool to draw an object The tools are listed in this section Note that once you select a drawing tool it remains selected until you deselect it This enables you to quickly draw a number of objects of the same type such as a number of circles To deselect the current drawing tool press RM You can tell if a drawing tool is still active by the presence of on screen help in the top left s
81. a formula to add up your takings mM SUM 2 PRICE You could have specified a range such as A1 AL100 but by specifying the name of the column you can be sure that the sum will include all the entries in the column Select cell c3 Enter a label for your total commission m AB 2 TOTAL COMMIS E Note that the column is not wide enough for you to see the entire label in c3 We need to widen column C Select the heading cell for column C tap and select Column An input form appears for you to specity the required width of the column Enter 100 and tap i You may have to experiment until you get the column width exactly as you want it The value you enter will be the width of the column in pixels 20 Select cell D3 21 Enter a formula to add up your commission eTa JSUM L COMMIS Note that instead of entering SUM by hand you could have chosen it from the Apps menu one of the Toolbox menus 22 Select cell c5 Spreadsheet 195 23 Enter a label for your fixed costs 24 In cell D5 enter 100 This is what you have to pay 2P RCE goumis c 2 E 2 200 20 the landowner for renting oo bo 4 450 5 the space for your stall 5 b 6 25 Enter the label PROFITin amp cell c7 fa b 26 In cell D7 enter a formua BMMCMENECIER ma Acos E to calculate your profit ena D3 kz D5 You could als
82. a negative sign Pressing instead will in some situations be interpreted as an operation to subtract the next number you enter from the last result This is explained in To reuse the last result on page 41 To raise a negative number to a power enclose it in parentheses For example 5 25 whereas 52 25 Implied multiplication takes place when two operands appear with no operator between them If you enter AB for example the result is A B Notice in the example on page 38 that we entered 14 ii 8 without the multiplication operator after 14 For the sake of clarity the calculator adds the operator to the expression in history but it is not strictly necessary when you are entering the expression You can though enter the operator if you wish as was done in the examples on page 38 The result will be the same Getting started 39 Large results If the result is too long or too tall to be seen in its entirety for example a many rowed matrix highlight it and then press MB The result is displayed in full screen view You can now press and as well as and to bring hidden parts of the result into view Tap to return to the previous view Reusing previous expressions and results TIP Using the clipboard Being able to retrieve and reuse an expression provides a quick way of repeating a calculation that requires only a few minor changes to its parameters You can retrieve and reu
83. all items between and including the highlighted item and the item on stack level 1 If for example you have selected the item on stack level 3 selecting DUPN duplicates it and the two items below it places them on stack levels 1 to 3 and moves the items that were duplicated up to stack levels 4 to 6 Echo Places a copy of the selected result on the entry line and leaves the source result highlighted DLIST Creates a list of results with the highlighted result the first element in the list and the item on stack level 1 the last Function zz Function 13 4 25 1 12 17 8 13 Before After Show an To show a result in full screen textbook format tap ERB item Tap to return to the history Delete an To delete an item from the stack item 1 Select it You can do this by pressing or until the item is highlighted or by tapping on it 2 Press 8 Delete all To delete all items thereby clearing the history press SA EJ items 52 Reverse Polish Notation RPN Computer algebra system CAS CAS view A computer algebra system CAS enables you to perform symbolic calculations By default CAS works in exact mode giving you infinite precision On the other hand non CAS calculations such as those performed in HOME view or by an app are numerical calculations and are often approximations limited by the precision of the calculator to 12 significant digits in the case of the HP Prime For example 142 yields the approximate
84. and may require special handling when recycled or disposed in California FEPHSAROREREGERRES ape EHARA NBWE OEE LE BPD RH Ca A thuy snr tervi PBB PBDE PCA X o o o o o O BFRABAECRS RSH ASE TS sk SEST 11363 2006 FARTHSAETAT X RI RAGARCRSV SRSA HR SRG TH AEH SIT 11363 2006 HARE RaET ESRA SRABRER ST BRHSaR BARS HR MSEL2003S1 F277 AF SFSBLKTRMRASE ASMA 20295 EC ane FESARAHS SHRM ASA RERI EMSA SASS Product Regulatory Information 593 594 Product Regulatory Information Index A adapter 12 adaptive graphing 99 Advanced Graphing app 69 125 134 Plot Gallery 134 trace options 129 variables summary of 434 algebra functions 322 323 algebraic entry 32 36 47 algebraic precedence 39 alternative hypothesis 238 amortization 291 292 angle measure 31 56 annunciators 14 Ans last answer 41 antilogarithm common 308 natural 308 a commands 543 creating 107 134 521 customizing See app creating definition of 581 deleting 72 functions See functions HP apps See apps HP library 71 notes 106 open 71 programs 519 reset 7 1 sorting 71 72 variables 109 432 444 554 574 See also variables App menu 305 app views 72 Numeric 77 Numeric Setup 78 Plot 74 Plot Setup 76 Symbolic Setup 74 Symbolic view 73 Application Library 7 1 sorting 7 1 apps See also the separate entry for each individual app Advanced Graphing 69 125 134 DataStreamer 69 71 Finance 6
85. answer 619047619047 in Home view with Standard numerical format but yields the exact answer i in the CAS The CAS offers many hundreds of functions covering algebra calculus equation solving polynomials and more You select a function from the CAS menu one of the Toolbox menus discussed in chapter 21 Functions and commands beginning on page 305 Consult that chapter for a description of all the CAS functions and commands CAS calculations are done Function in CAS view CAS view is almost identical to Home view A history of calculations is built and you can select and copy previous calculations just as you can in Home view as well as store objects in variables To open CAS view press GJ CAS appears in red at the left of the title bar to indicate that you are in CAS view rather than Home view Computer algebra system CAS 53 The menu buttons in CAS view are E assigns an object to a variable GE applies common simplification rules to reduce an expression to its simplest form For example simplify e 1 b e yields b EXP a EXP c QB copies a selected entry in history to the entry line EB displays the selected entry in full screen mode with horizontal and vertical scrolling enabled The entry is also presented in textbook format CAS calculations With one exception you perform calculations in CAS view just as you do in Home view The exception is that there i
86. c u v over the intervals specified by in the second argument plotparam Cplx Lst Var Lst Var For an expression f x draws the polar curve r f x for x over the interval VarMin to VarMax plotpolar Expr Var VarMin VarMax Displays the pth terms of the sequence u 0 a u n f u n 1 plotseq Expr f Var Var a xm xM Intg p With a complex as argument plots it With the coordinates of a point in three dimensions as argument plots it point Cplx Vect Returns the line of the conjugated points of A with respect to a circle polar Crcle Pnt or Cplx A Returns the list of the norm and of the argument of the affix of a point complex number or list of rectangular coordinates polar coordinates Pnt or Cplx or LstRectCoord Example polar coordinates point 1 2 i gives sqrt 5 atan 2 Functions and commands 407 polar_point pole POLYCOEF POLYEVAL polygon polygonplot polygonscatterplot polyhedron Returns the point with polar coordinates r and t polar point Real r Real t Returns the point for which the line is polar with respect to the circle pole Crcle Line Returns the coefficients of a polynomial with roots given in the vector argument polyCoef Vect Example POLYCOEF 1 1 returns 1 0 1 Evaluates a polynomial given by its coefficients at xO polyEval Vect Real x0 Example POLYEVAL 1 0 1 3 returns 8 Draws the polyg
87. can return a value using the RETURN statement or not When a program is executed from Home view the program will return the value returned by the last statement that was executed Furthermore functions can be defined in a program and exported for use by other programs in much the same way that variables can be defined and used elsewhere In this section we will create a small set of programs each illustrating some aspect of programming in the HP Prime Each program will be used as a building block for a custom app described in the next section App Programs We ll first create a program called ROLLDIE It simulates the rolling of a single die returning a random integer between 1 and whatever number is passed into the function In the Program Catalog create a new program named ROLLDIE For help see page 501 Then enter the code in the Program Editor H EXPORT ROLLDIE N BEGIN RETURN 1 FLOOR RANDOM N END The first line is the heading of the function Execution of the RETURN statement causes a random integer from 1 to N to be calculated and returned as the result of the function Note that the RETURN command causes the execution of the function to terminate Thus any statements between the RETURN statement and END are ignored In Home view in fact anywhere in the calculator where a number can be used you can enter ROLLDIE 6 anda random integer between 1 and 6 inclusiv
88. change with each press of the or key e Press or to clear the entry line e Press Clear to clear the entry line and the history Getting started Sections of the display Title bar Function History Sen 3 96332729761 T n anl 1 73205080758 3 988984046561 7 97796809312 Entry line Menu buttons Home view has four sections shown above The title bar shows either the screen name or the name of the app you are currently using Function in the example above It also shows the time a battery power indicator and a number of symbols that indicate various calculator settings These are explained below The history displays a record of your past calculations The entry line displays the object you are currently entering or modifying The menu buttons are options that are relevant to the current display These options are selected by tapping the corresponding menu button You close a menu without making a selection from it by pressing Ea Annunciators Annunciators are symbols or characters that appear in the title bar They indicate current settings and also provide time and battery power information Annunciator Meaning lt lime green The angle mode setting is currently degrees T lime green The angle mode setting is currently radians tS Cyan The Shift key is active The function shown in blue on a key will be activated when a key is pressed Press to cancel shift mod
89. charge q electron mass me q me ratio qme proton mass mp mp me ratio mpme fine structure a magnetic flux Faraday F Rydberg R Bohr radius a Bohr magneton p nuclear magneton Hy photon wavelength 2 photon frequency fy Compton wavelength 2 Units and constants 451 452 Units and constants 24 Lists A list consists of comma separated real or complex numbers expressions or matrices all enclosed in braces A list may for example contain a sequence of real numbers such as 1 2 3 Lists represent a convenient way to group related objects You can do list operations in Home and in programs There are ten list variables available named LO to L9 or you can create your own list variable names You can use them in calculations or expressions in Home or in a Vars program Retrieve a list name from the Vars menu 5 or just type its name from the keyboard You can create edit delete send and receive named lists in the List Catalog EA 7 List You can also create and store lists named or unnnamed in Home view List variables are identical in behavior to the columns C1 CO in the Statistics 2Var app and the columns D1 D0 in the Statistics 1Var app You can store a statistics column as a list or vice versa and use any of the list functions on the statistics columns or the statistics functions on the list variables Create a list in the List Catalog 1 Open th
90. chronologically with the most recently used app shown first Customized apps always appear after the built in apps An introduction to HP apps 71 To delete an app Other options You can change the sort order of the built in apps to Alphabetically The app icons are sorted alphabetically by name and in ascending order A to Z e Fixed Apps are displayed in their default order Function Advanced Graphing Geometry Polar and Sequence Customized apps are placed at the end after all the built in apps They appear in chronological order oldest to most recent To change the sort order 1 Open the Application Library 2 Tap EB 3 From the Sort Apps list choose the option you want The apps that come with the HP Prime are built in and cannot be deleted but you can delete an app you have created To delete an app 1 Open the Application Library 2 Use the cursor keys to highlight the app 3 Top GED 4 Tap to confirm your intention The other options available in the Application Library are Enables you to save a copy of an app under a new name See Creating an app on page 107 Enables you to send an app to another HP Prime See Sharing data on page 44 App views Most apps have three major views Symbolic Plot and Numeric These views are based on the symbolic graphic and numeric representations of mathematical objects They are accessed through the fe SB and keys near the
91. collect x 2 4 gives x 2 x 2 Returns an expression expanded expand Expr Example expand x y z 1 gives y z x z y x Returns a polynomial factorized factor Poly Example factor x 4 1 gives x 1 x 1 x 2 1 322 Functions and commands Substitute Partial Fraction Extract Numerator Denominator Left Side Right Side Calculus Differentiate Returns the solution when a value is substituted for a variable in an expression subst Expr Var v value a Example subst 1 4 x 2 x 2 gives 1 8 Returns the partial fraction expansion of a rational fraction partfrac RatFrac Example partfrac x 4 x 2 gives 1 x 2 2 1 x42 2 Returns the numerator of a fraction after simplifying the fraction if necessary numer Frac a b or RatFrac Example numer 10 12 returns 5 Returns the denominator of a fraction after simplifying the fraction if necessary denom Frac a b or RatFrac Example denom 10 12 returns 6 Returns the left side of an equation or the left bound of an interval lhs Equal a b or Interval a b Returns the right side of an equation or the left bound of an interval rhs Equal a b or Interval a b With one expression as argument returns derivative of the expression with respect to x With one expression and one variable as arguments returns the derivative or partial derivative of
92. comma after the parameter even if in the syntax shown below there is a comma between it and an optional parameter An example is the syntax zeros Expr Var The comma is needed only if you are specifying the optional parameter Var is used to indicate or For example in DotDiv Lst Mtrx Lst Mtrx the parameters can be lists or matrices Keyboard functions The most frequently used functions are available directly from the keyboard Many of the keyboard functions also accept complex numbers as arguments Enter the keys and inputs shown below and press to evaluate the expression In the examples below shifted functions are represented by the actual keys to be pressed with the function name shown in parentheses For example Ema LSN ASIN means that to make an arc sine calculation ASIN you press lea The examples below show the results you would get in Home view If you are in the CAS the results are given in simplified symbolic format For example 320 returns 17 88854382 in Home view and 8 V5 in the CAS Add subtract multiply divide Also accepts complex numbers lists and matrices valuel value2 etc Functions and commands 307 LN e 1 K E E 10 LS ASIN Natural logarithm Also accepts complex numbers LN value Example LN 1 returns 0 Natural exponential Also accepts complex numbers evolve Example e5 returns 148 413159103 Common loga
93. companion matrix of a polynomial companion Poly Var Example companion x 2 5x 7 x gives 0 7 1 5 Compares objects and returns 1 if type arg1 lt type arg2 or if type arg 1 type arg2 and arg lt arg2 and returns O otherwise compare Obj argl Obj arg2 Example compare 1 2 gives 1 With two arguments returns vectors each of which is either a complex root of the polynomial P with its multiplicity or an interval the boundaries of which are the opposite vertices of a rectangle with sides parallel to the axis and containing a complex root of the polynomial with the multiplicity of this root With four arguments returns vectors described as for Functions and commands 379 cone conic contains CONTINUE CONVERT two arguments but only for those roots lying in the rectangle with sides parallel to the axis having complex a and complex b as opposite vertices complexroot Poly P Real l Cplx a Cplx b Example complexroot x 5 2 x 4 x 3 i 0 1 gives 21 12 i 32 18 9 i 32 1 6 15 i 16 6 21 i 16 16 i 1 27 18 i 16 16 i 24 3 i 16 1 6 27 i 16 16 i 9 6 i 8 1 15 6 i 16 16 i 3 12 i 16 1 Draws a cone with vertex at A direction given by v half angle t and if provided height h and h cone Pnt A Vect v Real t Real h Defines a conic from an expression and draws it Without a second
94. done Evaluates the highlighted expres sion resolving any references to other definitions To continue our example suppose that the heights of the rest of the students in the class are measured and that each one is rounded to the nearest of the five values first recorded Instead of entering all the new data in D1 we simply add another column D2 that holds the frequencies of our five data points in D1 Height cm Frequency 160 5 165 3 170 8 175 2 180 1 6 Tap on Freq to the right of H1 or press to highlight the second H1 field Statistics 1Var app 211 7 Enter the name of the Statistics 1Var Symboli column that you will 101 E Plott Histogram contain the mi frequencies in this I Plot2 Histogram V H3 D1 D2 example D2 W Plot3 Line 2 A H4 arma Enter frequency column Eits sanla Die SHOW evala 8 If you want to choose a color for the graph of the data in Plot view see Choose a color for plots on page 85 9 If you have more than one analysis defined in Symbolic view deselect any analysis you are not currently interested in 10 Return to Numeric view Num Setup 11 In column D2 enter the frequency data 5 2 165 3 shown in the table Bli7 4 175 2 above Jiao f 6 7 5 z 9 3 s 8 20 1C 12 Recalculate the X HI o n 19 statistics Min 160 QI 160 Med 170 Max 18
95. enter the variable that you want to assign the complex number to and then press _fer_ For example to store 2 3i in variable 26 J22 330 gS 2 Jol E As well as giving you access to many types of mathematical calculations the HP Prime enables you to create various objects that can be saved and used over and over again For example you can create apps lists matrices programs and notes You can also send these objects to other HP Primes Whenever you encounter a screen with as a menu item you can select an item on that screen to send it to another HP Prime You use one of the supplied USB cablesto o C D send objects from one aa E Micro A sender Micro B receiver HP Prime to another This is the micro A micro B USB cable Note that the connectors on the ends of the USB cable are slightly different The micro A connector has a rectangular end and the micro B connector has a trapezoidal end To share objects with another HP Prime the micro A connector must be inserted into the USB port on the sending calculator with the micro B connector inserted into the USB port on the receiving calculator The general procedure for sharing objects is as follows 1 Navigate to the screen that lists the object you want to send This will be the Application Library for apps the List Catalog for lists the Matrix Catalog for matrices the 44 Getting started Program Catalog for programs and the Notes C
96. entries in Symbolic view Objects are drawn in Plot view in the order in which they are defined in Symbolic view To change the position of an entry highlight it and tap either to move it down the list or to move it up To prevent an object displaying in Plot view deselect it in Symbolic view 1 Highlight the item to be hidden 2 Tap v g Repeat the procedure to make the object visible again 149 Deleting an object As well as deleting an object in Plot view see page 144 you can delete an object in Symbolic view 1 Highlight the definition of the object you want to delete 2 Tap or press 8 To delete all objects press Ea Symbolic Setup view The Symbolic view of the Geometry app is common with many apps It is used to override certain system wide settings For details see Symbolic Setup view on page 74 Numeric view in detail Numeric view EB enables you to do calculations in the Geometry app The results displayed are dynamic if you manipulate an object in Plot view or Symbolic view any calculations in Numeric view that refer to that object are automatically updated to reflect the new properties of that object Consider circle c in the illustration at the right To calculate the area and radius of C 1 Press to open CN laa Numeric view to Pointer 9 2 5 3 2 Tap EEB Zoom Point Line Polygo Curve Transfo 3 Tap and choose G
97. fanx Tangent atanx gt asinx Returns an expression with arcsin x rewritten as arctan x sqri 1 x 2 asin2atan Expr Example asin2atan 2 asin x gives 2 atan x sqrt 1 x 2 Returns an expression with sin x rewritten as cos x tan x sin2costan Expr Example sin2costan sin x gives tan x cos x Returns an expression with arccos x rewritten as pi 2 arcsin x acos2asin Expr Example acos2asin acos x asin x gives pi 2 asin x asin x Returns an expression with arccos x rewritten as pi 2 arctan x sqrt 1 x 2 acos2atan Expr Example acos2atan 2 acos x gives 2 pi 2 atan x sqrt 1 x 2 Returns an expression with cos x rewritten as sin x tan x cos2sintan Expr Example cos2sintan cos x gives sin x tan x Returns an expression with arctan x rewritten as arcsin x sqri 1 x 2 atan2asin Expr 332 Functions and commands atanx gt acosx tanx gt sinx cosx halftan Trig trigx gt sinx trigx gt cosx trigx gt tanx Returns an expression with arctan x rewritten as pi 2 arccos x sqrt 1 x 2 atan2acos Expr Returns an expression with tan x rewritten as sin x cos x tan2sincos Expr Example tan2sincos tan x gives sin x cos x Returns an expression with sin x cos x or tan x rewritten as tan x 2 halftan Expr Example halftan sin x give
98. following options GBB the cursor moves to the cell to the right of the current cell when you press r_ EJB the cursor moves to the cell below the current cell when you press _ er_ QB the cursor stays in the current cell when you press _ fuer When done press Matrix to return to the Matrix Catalog or press to return to Home view The matrix entries are automatically saved You can enter and operate on matrices directly in Home view The matrices can be named or unnamed Enter a vector or matrix in Home or CAS views directly in the entry line 468 Matrices To store a matrix 1 Press You can increase 4 When you are Function to start a vector or matrix The matrix template will appear as shown in the figure to the right T Enter a value in the iy peer square Then press to enter a second value in the same row or press to move to the second row The matrix will grow with you as you enter values adding rows and columns as needed Function your matrix at any time adding columns and rows as you please You can zs also delete an entire 4564 789 row or column Just place the cursor on the symbol at the end of a row or column Then press to insert a new row or column or to delete the row or column You can also press to delete a row or column In the figure above pressing would delete the second row of the matrix
99. for example Constrains the tracer to move along an edge of the current relation if one can be found Use this option for functions as well as for inequalities etc Jumps from one x intercept to another on the current graph Jumps from one y intercept to another on the current graph Jumps between the horizontal extrema on the current graph Jumps between the vertical extrema on the current graph Jumps from one inflection point to another on the current graph Opens a menu so you can select which relation to trace This option is needed because and no longer jump from relation to relation for tracing All four cursor keys are needed for moving the tracer in the Advanced Graphing app 130 Advanced Graphing app Numeric The Numeric view of most HP apps is designed to explore 2 view variable relations using numerical tables Because the Advanced Graphing app expands this design to relations that are not necessarily functions the Numeric view of this app becomes significantly different though its purpose is still the same The unique features of the Numeric view are illustrated in the following sections 1 2 Press to return to Advanced Graphing Symbolic View 11381 Symbolic view and V E vi SING i mA S define V1 as E v Y SIN X Ev E vs Note that you don t Ew have to erase the Ev previous defintion first Enter an open sentence Just enter the new defintion and tap S
100. for information about the other apps Symbolic view is typically used to define a function or open sentence that you want to explore by plotting and or evaluating In this section the term definition will be used to cover both functions and open sentences Press to open Symbolic view Add a definition With the exception of the Parametric app there are 10 fields for entering definitions In the Parametric app there are 20 fields two for each paired definition An introduction to HP apps 81 Modify a definition l 2 3 N 3 4 Highlight an empty field you want to use either by tapping on it or scrolling to it Enter your definition If you need help see Definitional building blocks on page 82 Tap or press when you have finished Your new definition is added to the list of definitions Note that variables used in definitions must be in uppercase A variable entered in lowercase will cause an error message to appear Highlight the definition you want to modify either by tapping on it or scrolling to it Top The definition is copied to the entry line Modify the definition Tap or press when you have finished Definitional building blocks The components that make up a symbolic definition can come from a number of sources From the keyboard You can enter components directly from the keyboard To enter 2X2 3 just press 2ABSX J lr J3 From user varia
101. form key Library list An operation for use in programs Commands can store results in variables but do not display results A number variable or algebraic expression numbers plus functions that produces a value An operation possibly with arguments that returns a result It does not store results in variables The arguments must be enclosed in parentheses and separated with commas The basic starting point of the calculator Most calculations can be done in Home view However such calculations only return numeric approximations For exact results you can use the CAS You can share results and variables between the CAS and Home view and vice versa A screen where you can set values or choose options Another name for a dialog box A key on the keypad as opposed to a button which appears on the screen and needs to be tapped to be activated A collection of items more specifically the apps See also catalog A set of objects separated by commas and enclosed in curly braces Lists are commonly used to contain statistical data and to evaluate a function with multiple values Lists can be created and manipulated by the List Editor and stored in the List Catalog 582 Glossary matrix menu note open sentence program variable vector views A two dimensional array of real or complex numbers enclosed by square brackets Matrices can be created and manipulated by the Matr
102. given by its proper elements mkisom vector sign 1 or 1 Example In CAS view mkisom 1 2 1 returns cos 1 sin 1 sin 1 cos 1 Vandermonde Returns the Vandermonde matrix Given a vector n n2 nj returns a matrix whose first row is n1 n1 n1 2 eA The second row is n2 n2 n2 2 n2 i etc vandermonde vector Example BAL vandermonde 1 3 5 returns 4 3 9 S25 Basic Norm Returns the Frobenius norm of a matrix matrix Example 1 2 returns 5 47722557505 3 4 Matrices 479 Row Norm Column Norm Spectral Norm Spectral Radius Condition Row Norm Finds the maximum value over all rows for the sums of the absolute values of all elements in a row ROWNORM matrix Example romo 1 returns 7 3 4 Column Norm Finds the maximum value over all columns of the sums of the absolute values of all elements in a column COLNORM matrix Example conn returns 6 3 4 Spectral Norm of a square matrix SPECNORM matrix Example S J sonoru l returns 5 46498570422 34 Spectral Radius of a square matrix SPECRAD matrix Example S AS scan i returns 5 37228132327 34 Condition Number Finds the 1 norm column norm of a square mairix COND matrix Example con 12 returns 21 34 480 Matrices Rank Pivot Trace Advanced Eigenvalues Rank of a rectangular matrix RANK matrix Example rane 12 ret
103. given in the third fourth fifth and sixth arguments hexagon Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Pnt P Var C Var D Var E Var F Example hexagon 0 6 draws a regular hexagon whose first two vertices are at O 0 and 6 0 Returns a point A1 such that vect C A 1 k vect C A homothety Pnt C Real k Pnt A Example homothety GA 2 GB creates a dilation centered at point A that has a scale factor of 2 Each point P on geometric object B has its image P on ray AP such that AP 2AP Functions and commands 391 hyp2exp hyperbola iabcuv ibasis icontent Returns an expression with hyperbolic terms rewritten as exponentials hyp2exp ExprHyperb Example hyp2exp cosh x gives exp x 1 exp x 2 With three points F1 F2 and M as arguments draws an hyperbola with foci at F1 and F2 that passes though M With two points and a real F1 F2 and a as arguments draws an hyperbola with foci at F1 and F2 that passes through point M such that MF1 MF2 2a With one second degree polynomial p x y as argument draws the hyperbola defined when the polynomial is set to equal O hyperbola Focus Fl Focus F2 Pnt M or Real a Example hyperbola GA GB GC draws the hyperbola whose foci are points A and B and which passes through point C Returns u v such as au bv c for three integers a b and c Note that c must be a multiple of the greatest common divisor of
104. gives 4 cos x 2 1 sin x Returns an expression with trigonometric functions rewritten as complex exponentials without linearization trig2exp Expr Example trig2exp sin x gives exp i x 1 exp i x 2 i Returns the list of divisors of an integer or a list of integers idivis Intg a or LstIntg Example idivis 12 returns 1 2 3 4 6 12 334 Functions and commands Factors Factor List GCD LCM Prime Test if Prime Nth Prime Next Prime Returns the prime factor decomposition of an integer ifactor Intg a Example ifactor 150 returns 2 3 5 Returns the list of prime factors of an integer or a list of integers with each factor is followed by its multiplicity ifactors Intg a or LstIntg Example ifactors 150 returns 2 1 3 1 5 2 Returns the greatest common divisor of two or more integers gcd Intg a Intg b Intg n Example gcd 32 120 636 gives 4 Returns the lowest common multiple of two or integers lom Intg a Intg b Int n Example lcom 6 4 gives 12 Tests whether or not a given integer is a prime number isPrime Intg a Example isPrime 1999 returns 1 Returns the nth prime number less than 10000 ithprime Intg n where nis between 1 and 1229 Example ithprime 5 returns 11 Returns the next prime or pseudo prime after an integer nextprime Intg a Example nextprime 11 returns 13 Functi
105. half of the display ee shows the graph of a a quadratic function The right half shows the CEPCCDPTOCHETIER general form of the equation being explored at the top and below it the current equation of that form The keys you can use to manipulate the graph or equation appear below the equation These will change depending on the level of equation you choose Displayed beneath they keys is the equation the discriminant that is b 4ac and the roots of the quadratic Graph mode The app opens in graph Y X 3 mode In graph mode you manipulate a copy of the graph using whatever a keys are available The b 4ac 12 X1 1 73205080757 original X2 1 73205080757 graph convertedio SECHDE dotted lines remains in place for you to easily see the result of your manipulations Four general forms of quadratic equations are available for you to explore y ax Level 1 y x h level 2 ys xty Level 3 y a xt hy ty Level 4 300 The Explorer apps Equation mode Test mode Choose a general form by tapping the Level button ay and so on until the form you want is displayed The keys available to you to manipulate the graph vary from level to level Tap fo move to Yl Y uX 0 0 equation mode In equation mode you use or the cursor keys to move ad between parameters in beta 0 the equation and change their values observing aise anal ened deta Genie D the effect on the graph displayed Press
106. in decreasing order of the univariate polynomial of roots specified in the argument pcoef Vect Example peoeff 1 0 0 0 1 gives polyl 1 2 1 0 0 0 Returns the rational function that has the roots and poles specitied in the argument fcoeff Lst root pole order Example fooeff 1 2 0 1 3 1 9 gives x1 42 4x 5 3 42 1 Returns a vector of coefficients of a polynomial of variable Var or x of degree Intgr and where the coefficients are random integers in the range 99 through 99 with uniform distribution or in an interval specified by Intrvl randpoly Var Intgr Dist 338 Functions and commands Minimum Algebra Quotient Remainder Degree Example randpoly t 8 1 1 returns a vector of 9 random integers all of them between 1 and 1 With only a matrix as argument returns the minimal polynomial in x of a matrix written as a list of its coefficients With a matrix and a variable as arguments returns the minimum polynomial of the matrix written in symbolic form with respect to the variable pmin Mtrx Var Example pmin 1 0 0 1 x gives x 1 Returns the Euclidean quotient of two polynomials written as vectors or in symbolic form quo Vect Vect Var or quo Poly Poly Var Example gu ll 2 3 4 1 21 gives polyl 1 4 11 Returns the Euclidean remainder of two polynomials written as vectors or in symbolic form rem Vect Vect
107. interval in the past For this function k is a non negative integer and wis a real number POISSON u k Example Suppose that on average you get 20 emails a day What is the probability that tomorrow you will get 15 POISSON 20 15 returns 0 0516488535318 Cumulative normal distribution function Returns the lower tail probability of the normal probability density function for the value x given the mean u and standard deviation of a normal distribution If only one argument is supplied it is taken as x and the assumption is that u 0 and o 1 NORMALD_ CDF u 0 x Example NORMALD CDF 0 1 2 returns 0 977249868052 Cumulative Student s t distribution function Returns the lower tail probability of the Student s tprobability density function at x given n degrees of freedom STUDENT_CDF n x Example STUDENT CDF 3 3 2 returns 0 0246659214814 Cumulative 7 distribution function Returns the lower tail probability of the x probability density function for the value x given n degrees of freedom CHISQUARE CDF n k 318 Functions and commands Binomial Poisson Inverse Normal Example CHISQUARE CDF 2 6 1 returns 0 952641075609 Cumulative Fisher distribution function Returns the lower tail probability of the Fisher probability density function for the value x given numerator n and denominator d degrees of freedom FISHER CDF n d x Example FISHER_CDF 5 5 2 return
108. is not a right angled triangle or you are not sure what type it is you should use the general input form Triangle Solver app 295 Special cases The indeterminate case No solution with given data Not enough data If two sides and an adjacent acute angle are entered and there are two solutions only one will be displayed initially In this case the button is displayed as in this example You can tap to display the second solution and tap again to return to the first solution Triangle Solver Solution found a 14 9052520363 A 111 317812546 b 8 B 30 c 10 C 88 6821874535 a b Enter angle C CORDOBES If you are using the general input form and you enter more a 5 A than 3 values the zu po values might not be se zs consistent that is no 7 7 triangle could ibly have all the Enter angle c possibly fe Edit Degree Rect ERBES values you specified mae In these cases No sol with given data appears on the screen Triangle Solver No solution with given data The situation is similar if you are using the simpler input form for a right angled triangle and you enter more than two values If you are using the general input form you need to specify at least three values for the Triangle Solver to be able to calculate the remaining i Enter length of side a ay ae specify less than three Not enough data appears on the screen Triangle
109. is on a data point rather than on the regression line You might need to press or to move the cursor to the object of interest the regression line or the data points Shows or hides the menu buttons As with all the apps that provide a plotting feature he Plot Setup view Sia Setup enables you to set the range and appearance of Plot view The common settings available are discussed in Common operations in Plot Setup view on page 96 The Plot Setup view in the Statistics 2Var app has two additional settings Page 1 of the Plot Setup view has fields namedS1MARK through SSMARK These fields enable you to specify one of five symbols to use to represent the data points in each data set This will help you distinguish data sets in Plot view if you have chosen to plot more than one Page 2 of the Plot Setup view has a Connect field If you choose this option straight lines join the data points in Plot view 234 Statistics 2Var app Predicting values Predx is a function that predicts a value for X given a value for Y Likewise Predy is a function that predicts a value for Y given a value for X In both cases the prediction is based on the equation that best fits the data according to the specitied fit type You can predict values in the Plot view of the Statistics 2Var app and also in Home view In Plot view 1 In the Plot view tap to display the regression curve for the data set if it is not alread
110. k gt Notice that a point is i V J hi added to the graph and F H 2 Ra given a name B in this L 4 4 inter GA G example Tapa blank area of the screen to deselect everything Objects colored cyan are selected 136 Geometry Add a tangent Geometry 8 10 T 12 13 14 15 We will now add a tangent to the curve making point B the point of tangency gt More gt Tangent Tap on point B press and then press B3 A tangent is drawn y through point B Depending on where LAT you placed point B your illustration might be different from the one at 7 the right 5 4 2 Pointer 3 32 We ll now make the tangent stand out by giving it a bright color If the curve is selected tap a blank area of the screen to deselect and then tap on the tangent to select it Press and select Change Color Pick a color from the color picker press and then tap on a blank area of the screen Your tangent should now be colored Press to select point B If there is only one point on the screen pressing automatically selects it If there is more than one point a menu will appear asking you to choose a point With point B selected use the cursor keys to move it about Note that whatever you do point B remains constrained to the curve Moreover as you move point B the tangent moves as well If it moves off the screen you can always bring it ba
111. key was pressed since the last call to GETKEY Key IDs are integers from O to 50 numbered from top left key 0 to bottom right key 50 as shown in figure 27 1 Programming 547 J PS ES p a Keys 0 13 Ea Plot i E j Num amp i Menu Vasl eo b Keys 14 19 Vars fF a b e Mem_8 Defin OTE moe Chars AJ Keys 20 25 ty Id Z a g ESj tE ag i z g _ fy of J Keys 26 30 Keys 31 35 _EEX f o Ge AJ Un Cee eas mm 4105 10 x EBs es u Ease keys 46 50 Loa O 2 Jj L_of J Beene Cosa Coss bs Figure 27 1 Numbers of the keys INPUT Syntax INPUT var title label help default Opens a dialog box with the title text title with one field named label displaying help at the bottom and using the default value Updates the variable var if the user taps and returns 1 If the user taps EEE it does not update the variable and returns O Example EXPORT SIDES EXPORT GETSIDES BEGIN INPUT SIDES D ee num sides 2 ie Sides N qq SCTE Enter num sides 2 END 548 Programming ISKEYDOWN Syntax ISKEYDOWN key_id Returns true non zero if the key whose key_id is provided is currently pressed and false 0 if it is not MOUSE Syntax MOUSE index Returns two lists describing the current
112. location of each potential pointer or empty lists if the pointers are not used The output is x y original z original y type where type is O for new 1 for completed 2 for drag 3 for stretch 4 for rotate and 5 for long click The optional parameter index is the nth element that would have been returned x y original x etc had the parameter bee omitted or 1 if no pointer activity had occurred MSGBOX Syntax MSGBOX expression or string ok_cancel Displays a message box with the value of the given expression or string If ok_cancel is true displays the and buttons otherwise only displays the button Default value for ok_cancel is false Returns true non zero if the user taps false O if the user presses RRR EXPORT AREACALC BEGIN OCAL radius INPUT radius Radius of Circle r Enter radius 1 SGBOX The area is nm radius 2 END If the user enters 10 for Program Catalog 7 A DiceSimulation OKB the radius the message ERATE TE box shows this DRAWPATTERN 1KB MAXFACTORS lt 1KB MYPROGR e area is 314 159265359 oxa saa ee eee Programming 549 PRINT Syntax PRINT expression or string Prints the result of expression or string to the terminal The terminal is a program text output viewing mechanism which is displayed only when PRINT commands are executed When visible you can press or to view the
113. menuincgaccsrnseccavaiseracaengaseinapegussiarsies 182 Other Geometry Uni ctionSiiceissccicucansabsvencspenesianseruscnwteaciavaer 188 9 Spreadsheet Getting started with the Spreadsheet App cccesesreeeeeeeees 193 Basic operations cccceceeseerseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceececceeeeeeeeeeenees 197 Navigation selection and gestures cccesssceeeeeeesteeees 197 Cell references cecceeeseeesseeeneeceseeeeseeeeeseteneeeenseesneeenes 198 Cell Mens astihedtesasniadeaceensianag wh vacua aetna sue omananaenen 198 Entering COnHEN sacrae e a T 199 Copy and paste 2 2048 Lashed toh vaca emanated wontneuins aeainine 202 External Peterences o sis caiasantie nidanrcaesvmeanvarenueevenaunimanteewsunaens 202 Referencing variables ccscccceescceseseeeeeseeeeeseeeenaes 203 Using the CAS in spreadsheet calculations 0ceeeeeeeeeees 204 Buttons cel Keys 4csttantacqeduatinnsqanutinnsatuadeoanecentecdetananiuaans 205 Formatting Options ccccceecesseeceeerseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeees 206 Splegelshesh UNctions xis castuwidenwa nei yud ras emanetadolads 208 10 Statistics 1Var app Getting started with the Statistics 1Var app ccecceeeeeeeeeeees 209 Entering and editing statistical data cceeseeeeeeteeeeetteeeeeees 213 Computed SIGUSHCS 5 qed astrve este Meeineusneev ees eee 216 Plotin esse utaevs eee eupey nae EE T E t 217 Contents 3 EGU Ry Go iy taetetes da tantetatan a a a ERE
114. non symbolic calculations here You can also do calculations in CAS view which uses the computer algebra system see chapter 3 Computer algebra system CAS starting on page 53 In fact you can use functions from the CAS menu one of the Toolbox menus in an expression you are entering in Home view and use functions from the Math menu another of the Toolbox menus in an expression you are entering in CAS view Choosing an entry type The first choice you need to make is the style of entry The three types are Textbook An expression is entered in much the same way as if you were writing it on paper with some arguments above or below others In other words your entry could be two dimensional as in the example above LN 5 LLS e Algebraic An expression is entered on a single LNCS n line Your entry is always one dimensional e RPN Reverse Polish Notation Not available in CAS view The arguments of the expression are entered first followed by the operator The entry of an operator automatically evaluates what has already been entered Thus you will need to enter a two operator 36 Getting started expression as in the example above in two steps one for each operator Step 1 5 the natural logarithm of 5 is calculated and displayed in history Step 2 mis entered as a divisor and applied to the previous result More information about RPN mode can be foun
115. of the functions on the Math menu can be incorporated into a definition The Math menu is one of the Toolbox menus The following definition combines a math function Size with a Home variable L1 F4 X X STZE L1 It is equivalent to x2 n where n is the number of elements in the list named L1 Size is an option on the List menu which is a sub menu of the Math menu From CAS functions Some of the functions on the CAS menu can be incorporated into a definition The CAS menu is one of the Toolbox menus The following definition incorporates the CAS function irem F5 X X CAS irem 45 7 iremis entered by choosing Remainder an option on the Division menu which is a sub menu of the Integer menu Note that any CAS command or function selected to operate outside the CAS is given the cas prefix From app functions Some of the functions on the App menu can be incorporated into a definition The App menu is one of the Toolbox menus The following definition incorporates the app function Predy F9 X X Statistics 2Var Predy 6 An introduction to HP apps 83 From the Catlg menu Some of the functions on the Catlg menu can be incorporated into a definition The Catlg menu is one of the Toolbox menus The following definition incorporates a command from that menu and an app variable F6 X X2 INT Root The integer value of the last root calculated in the Function app is substituted for
116. one for the maximum value OSTEP Sets the increment between consecutive Polar only angle values SEQPLOT Sets the type of plot Stairstep or Cobweb Sequence only NRNG Sets the range of N values to be plotted Sequence Note that here are two fields one for the only minimum and one for the maximum value HWIDTH Sets the width of the bars in a histogram Stats 1 Var only HRNG Sets the range of values to be included in a Stats 1 Var histogram Note that here are two fields only one for the minimum and one for the maximum value An introduction to HP apps 97 Setup field Purpose Cont S MARK Sets the graphic that will be used to Stats 2 Var represent a data point in a scatter plot A only different graphic can be used for each of the five analyses that can be plotted together XRNG Sets the initial range of the xaxis Note that here are two fields one for the minimum and one for the maximum value In Plot view the range can be changed by panning and zooming YRNG Sets the initial range of the y axis Note that there are two fields one for the minimum and one for the maximum value In Plot view the range can be changed by panning and zooming XTICK Sets the increment between tickmarks on the xaxis YTICK Sets the increment between tickmarks on the y axis Page 2 Setup field Purpose AXES Shows or hides the axes LABELS Places values at the ends of each axis to show
117. open list by pressing the cursor keys and pressing when the option you want is highlighted e Ifa field is a toggle field one that is either selected or not selected tap on it to select the field and tap on it again to select the alternate option Alternatively select the field and tap GB The illustration at the right Home settings Font Size Medium Font shows an input form with A Calculator Name CO all three types of field Textbook Display v Menu Display V Calculator Name is a Time 6 1 52 PM A Date 2013 4 19 YYY free form data entry field a Color Theme Light Font Size provides a Appeare Enter a name for your calculator menu of options and Paes Textbook Display is a toggle field Getting started 29 Reset input form fields To reset a field to its default value highlight the field and press To reset all fields to their default values press Clear System wide settings Home settings System wide settings are values that determine the appearance of windows the format of numbers the scale of plots the units used by default in calculations and much more There are two system wide settings Home settings and CAS settings Home settings control Home view and the apps CAS settings control how calculations are done in the computer algebra system CAS settings are discussed in chapter 3 Although Home settings control the apps you can override certain Home se
118. or circle point1 point 2 point1 or circle equation Examples circle GA GB draws the circle with diameter AB circle GA GB GA draws the circle with center at point A and radius AB circle x 2 y 2 1 draws the unit circle This command can also be used to draw an arc circle GA GB 0 m 2 draws a quarter circle with diameter AB circumcircle Draws the circumcircle of a triangle that is the circle circumscribed about a triangle circumcircle pointl point2 point3 Example circumcircle GA GB GC draws the circle circumscribed about AABC conic Plots the graph of a conic section defined by an expression in x and y conic expr Example conic x 2 y 2 81 draws a circle with center at 0 0 and radius of 9 176 Geometry ellipse excircle hyperbola incircle Geometry Draws an ellipse given the foci and either a point on the ellipse or a scalar that is one half the constant sum of the distances from a point on the ellipse to each of the foci ellipse pointl point2 point3 or ellipse pointl point2 realk Examples ellipse GA GB GC draws the ellipse whose foci are points A and B and which passes through point C ellipse GA GB 3 draws an ellipse whose foci are points A and B For any point P on the ellipse AP BP 6 Draws one of the excircles of a triangle a circle tangent to one side of the triangle and also tangent to the extensions of the other two sides excircle pointl point2 point3
119. parentheses are automatically added to enclose the arguments of functions as in LN However you will need to manually add parentheses by pressing J to enclose a group of objects you want operated on as a single unit Parentheses provide a way of avoiding arithmetic ambiguity In the example above we wanted the entire numerator divided by 3 thus the entire numerator was enclosed in parentheses Without the parentheses only 14V8 would have been divided by 3 The following examples show the use of parentheses and the use of the cursor keys to move outside a group of objects enclosed within parentheses Entering Calculates SN 45 EG 3 sin 45 1 SINJ45O uct Sia PEF sin 45 7 en 85 OL JB x9 C 850 9 J55x5 38 Getting started Algebraic precedence Negative numbers Explicit and implied multiplication The HP Prime calculates according to the following order of precedence Functions at the same level of precedence are evaluated in order from left to right 1 Expressions within parentheses Nested parentheses are evaluated from inner to outer l v reciprocal square nth root Power 10 Negation multiplication division and modulo Addition and subtraction Relational operators lt gt lt AND and NOT OR and XOR SOP 00 ON OR SOT Re Go oN 10 Left argument of where 11 Assign to variable It is best to press to start a negative number or to insert
120. payment it group is indicated by the piece lit height of a bar The aye oe amount by which the principal has been reduced and interest paid during a payment group is shown at the bottom of the bottom of the screen The example at the right shows the first payment group selected This represents the first group of 12 payments or the state of the loan at the end of the first year By the end of that year the principal had been reduced by 1 676 57 and 9 700 63 had been paid in interest Tap or to see the amount by which the principal has been reduced and interest paid during other payment groups 292 Finance app 19 Triangle Solver app The Triangle Solver app enables you to calculate the length of a side of a triangle or the size of an angle ina triangle from information you supply about the other lengths angles or both You need to specify at least three of the six possible values the lengths of the three sides and the size of the three angles before the app can calculate the other values Moreover at least one value you specify must be a length For example you could specify the lengths of two sides and one of the angles or you could specify two angles and one length or all three lengths In each case the app will calculate the remaining values The HP Prime will alert you if no solution can be found or if you have provided insufficient data If you are determining the lengths
121. payments are skipped Payments can occur at the beginning or the end of each compounding period an option you control by un checking or checking the End option The number of compounding periods in a year The future value of the transaction the amount of the final cash flow or the compounded value of the series of previous cash flows For a loan this is the size of the final balloon payment beyond any regular payment due For an investment this is its value at the end of the investment period TVM calculations Another example Suppose you have taken out a 30 year 150 000 house mortgage at 6 5 annual interest You expect to sell the house in 10 years repaying the loan in a balloon Finance app 289 payment Find the size of the balloon payment that is the value of the mortgage after 10 years of payment The following cash flow diagram illustrates the case of a mortgage with balloon payment I YR 6 5 PV 150 000 N 30x 12 360 for PMT N 10x 12 120 for balloon payment P YR 12 End mode 2 noho PMT Balloon payment FV 2 1 Start the Finance app Select Finance 2 Return all fields to their default values 3 Enter the known TVM Time Value of Money variables as shown p60 ee e5 n h fi PV 150000 P YR 12 in the tigure mp o FV 0 End Group Size 12 Enter payment amount or solve 4 Highlight eurond _ CT VT tap I The pmt field shows 984
122. point 0 0 point 2 3 3 2 at point 8 8 Works the same as slopeat but without the label Numeric view Cmds menu Measure abscissa Returns the x coordinate of a point or the x length of a vector abscissa point or abscissa vector Example abscissa GA returns the x coordinate of the point A affix Returns the coordinates of a point or both the x and y lengths of a vector as a complex number affix point or affix vector Example if GA is a point at 1 2 then affix GA returns 1 2i angle Returns the measure of a directed angle The first point is taken as the vertex of the angle as the next two points in order give the measure and sign angle vertex point2 point3 Example angle GA GB GC returns the measure of lt BAC 182 Geometry arcLen area coordinates distance Geometry Returns the length of the arc of a curve between two points on the curve The curve is an expression the independent variable is declared and the two points are defined by values of the independent variable This command can also accept a parametric definition of a curve In this case the expression is a list of 2 expressions the first for x and the second for y in terms of a third independent variable arcLen expr reall real2 Examples arcLen x 2 x 2 2 returns 9 29 arcLen sin t cos t t 0 m 2 returns 1 57 Returns the area of a circle or polygon area circle or area poly
123. r Numeric setup 15 Display the Numeric Setup view EB Setup You can set the starting value and step value that is the increment for both the X column and the Y column as well as the zoom factor for zooming in or out on a row of the table You can also choose whether the table of data in Numeric view is automatically populated or whether it is populated by you typing in the particular x values and y values you are interested in These options Automatic or BuildYourOwn are available from the Num Type list They are explained in detail in Custom tables on page 103 Besides the default configuration of the table in Numeric view there are other options available in the Trace menu The trace options in Numeric view mirror the trace options in Plot view Both are designed to help you investigate the properties of relations numerically using a tabular format Specifically the table can be configured to show any of the following edge values controlled by X or Y points of interest Pol Advanced Graphing Numeric View motif X intercepts Y intercepts horizontal extrema eae 2Y Intercepts Horizontal Extrema 2Edge 4Vertical Extrema 3Pol gt 5Inflections vertical extrema inflections The values shown using the Trace options depend on the Plot view window that is the values shown in the table are restricted to points visible in Plot view Zoom i
124. radical_axis circlel circle2 191 reciprocation single_inter vector vertices vertices_abca Example radical axis circle x 2 y 8 circle x 2 y 8 returns line x 0 Given a circle returns the poles points of given polar lines or the polar lines of given poles points reciprocation circle point or reciprocation circle line or reciprocation circle list Example reciprocation circle x 2 y 2 1 point 1 3 0 line x 2 returns line x 3 point 1 2 0 Returns the intersection of curvel and curve2 that is closest to point single inter curvel curve2 point Example single inter line y x circle x 2 y 2 1 point 1 1 returns point 1 i V2 2 Creates a vector from point to point2 With one point as argument the origin is used as the tail of the vector vector pointl point2 or vector point Example vector point 1 1 point 3 0 creates a vector from 1 1 to 3 0 Returns a list of the vertices of a polygon vertices polygon Returns the closed list of the vertices of a polygon vertices abca polygon 192 Geometry Spreadsheet The Spreadsheet app provides Spreadsheet IC a grid of cells for you to enter content such as numbers text expressions and so on and to perform certain operations on BRENERIEN what you enter To open the Spreadsheet app
125. select Decimal You can also use the cursor keys to specify the area you want to zoom in on 90 An introduction to HP apps Views menu Testing a zoom with split screen viewing Zoom examples The most commonly used zoom options are also available on the Views menu These are ee Split Screen Plot Table Autoscale Decimal Integer e Trig These options which can be applied whatever view you are currently working in are explained in the table immediately above A useful way of testing a zoom is to divide the screen into two halves with each half showing the plot and then to apply a zoom only to one side of the screen The illustration at the right is a plot of y 3sin x To split the screen into two halves F1 X 0 1 Open the Views menu Press 2 Select Split Screen Plot Detail The result is shown at the right Any zoom operation you undertake will be applied only to the copy of the plot in the righthand half of the screen This will help you test and then choose an appropriate zoom Note that you can replace the original plot on the left with the zoomed plot on the right by tapping HERES To un split the screen press Hag The following examples show the effects of the zooming options on a plot of 3sinx using the default zoom factors 2 x 2 Split screen mode described above has been used to help you see the effect of zooming An introdu
126. select Fixed Step Segments 14 Press EB A triangle is displayed instead of a circle This is because the new value of T Step makes the points being plotted 120 apart instead of the T 0 0 08 nearly continuous 5 And by selecting Fixed Step Segments the points 120 apart are connected with line segments 272 Parametric app Y1 8 7 999987815 7 999951261 7 999890338 7 999805046 17 999695385 7 999561355 7 999402957 17 999220192 7 999013060 7 998781561 e Display the 15 Display the T XI 0 0 numeric view Numeric view 0 1 1 396263E 2 0 2 2 792521E 2 0 3 4 1887716 2 0 4 I5 585008E 2 0 5 6 981228E 2 1 i 0 6 I8 377427E 2 16 With the cursor in p Feiler 10 8 1 116974E 1 the T column type 0 9 1 256585E 1 a new value and i 13961931 D tap OK The Zoom table scrolls to the value you entered Size Defn Column You can also zoom in or out on the independent variable thereby decreasing or increasing the increment between consecutive values This and other options are explained in Common operations in Numeric view on page 100 You can see the Plot and Numeric views side by side See Combining Plot and Numeric Views on page 106 Parametric app 273 274 Parametric app Polar app 16 The Polar app enables you to explore polar equations Polar equations are equations in which r the distance a point is from the or
127. shown beside a vector You can also create and store matrices named or unnamed in Home view For example the command POLYROOT 1 0 1 0 gt M1 stores the roots of the complex vector of length 3 into the variable M1 M1 will thus contain the three roots of 3 x x 0 0 1 and 1 The buttons and keys available in the Matrix Catalog are Button or Key Purpose Opens the highlighted matrix for editing or Deletes the content sof the selected matrix Changes the selected matrix into a one dimensional vector Transmits the highlighted matrix to another HP Prime E Clear Clears the contents of the reserved matrix variables MO M9 and deletes any user named matrices 466 Matrices Working with matrices To open the Matrix Editor Matrix Editor Buttons and keys To create or edit a matrix go to the Matrix Catalog and tap on a matrix You could also use the cursor keys to highlight the matrix and then press MZN The Matrix Editor opens The buttons and keys available in the Matrix Editor are Button or Key Purpose Column E3 Clear BBE OO Copies the highlighted element to the entry line Inserts a row of zeros above or a column of zeros to the left of the highlighted cell You are prompted to choose row or column Displays a menu for you to choose the small font medium font or large font A three way toggle that controls how the cursor will move
128. shown in the 1 04427378242 illustrati tthe richt 1 02189714865 IHUSTration a erg ETTA CD is 2 2 When your are working in Home view you can retrieve an expression or result from the CAS by tapping and selecting Get from CAS The CAS opens Press or until the item you want to retrieve is highlighted and press _ The highlighted item is copied to the cursor point in Home view Storing a value in a variable You can store a value in a variable that is assign a value to a variable Then when you want to use that value in a calculation you can refer to it by the variable s name You can create your own variables or you can take advantage of the built in variables in Home view named A to Z and 0 and in the CAS named a to z and a few others CAS variables can be used in calculations in Home view and Home variables can be used in calculations in the CAS There are also built in app variables and geometry variables These can also be used in calculations Example To assign 7 to to the variable A Your stored value en elie ee AN w appears as shown at the right If you then wanted d mA 9 86960440109 to multi our store pyy mm value by 5 you could enter EA Ysa J5 C e You can also create your own variables in Home view For example suppose you wanted to create a variable called ME and assign 7 to it You would enter EED eB 42 Getting started A message appears a
129. such that for each point x 5 5 andy e 5 5 Any further movement of one of the points will randomly re distribute all of the points with each tap or direction key press point2d pointl point2 pointn Begins tracing of a specified point trace point Stops tracing of a specified point but does not erase the current trace This command is only available in Plot view In Symbolic view uncheck the trace object to erase the trace and stop further tracing Erases the trace of a point but does not stop tracing Any further movement of the point will be traced In Symbolic view uncheck the trace object to erase the trace and stop further tracing Line DrawSlp Given three real numbers m a b draws a line with slope m that passes through the point a b DrawSlp a b m Example DrawSlp 2 1 3 draws the line given by y 3x 5 altitude Given three non collinear points draws the altitude of the triangle defined by the three points that passes through the first point The triangle does not have to be drawn altitude pointl point2 point3 Example altitude A B C draws a line passing through point A that is perpendicular to BC 168 Geometry bisector exbisector half_line line Geometry Given three points creates the bisector of the angle defined by the three points whose vertex is at the first point The angle does not have to be drawn in the Plot view bisector pointl point2 point3 Exampl
130. system matrix 1 X matrix2 LSQ matrix 1 matrix2 Example Gil LU Decomposition Factorizes a square matrix into three matrices L U and P where L lowertriangular U uppertriangular P permutation H and P A L U LU matrix Example so 3 eres T FA 484 Matrices QR SCHUR SVD QR Factorization Factorizes an mxn matrix A numerically as Q R where Q is an orthogonal matrix and R is an upper triangular matrix and returns R R is stored in var2 and Q A inv R is stored in var QR matrix A var1 var2 Example af 12 returns 34 0 3612 0 9486 3 1622 4 4271 1 0 0 9486 0 3162 0 0 6324 O01 Schur Decomposition Factorizes a square matrix into two matrices If matrix is real then the result is orthogonall upper quasi triangular If matrix is complex then the result is unitary upper triangular SCHUR matrix Example SCHUR 12 returns 3 4 ee er 5 3722 1 f 17 Be 209 8 OATS 9c S 55x10 20538722 Singular Value Decomposition Factorizes an m x n matrix into two matrices and a vector m x m square orthogonal n x n square orthogonal real SVD matrix Example SVD 12 returns 3 4 0 4045 0 9145 0 5760 0 8174 5 4649 0 3659 0 9145 0 4045 0 8174 0 5760 Matrices 485 SVL Vector Cross Product Dot Product L2 Norm L Norm Singular Values Retu
131. tet finished press and the matrix will be displayed in the History You can then 123 456 use or name your a mati san anms anans oma anas anann 123 456 789 You can store a vector or matrix in a variable You can do this before it is added to History or you can copy it from History When you ve entered a vector or matrix in the entry line or copied it from History to the entry line tap ETB enter a name for it and press _ _ The variable names reserved for vectors and matrices are MO through M9 You can always use a variable name you Matrices 469 To display a matrix To display one element To store one element devise to store a vector or matrix The new variable will appear in the Vars menu under MEIS The screen at the right Function shows the matrix 2 5 729 16 2 being stored in M5 Note ps 725 us fz 72 16 2 16 2 that you can enter an expression like 5 2 for an element of the matrix and it will be evaluated upon entry The figure to the right Function shows the vector 1 2 3 being stored in the user variable M25 You will Qoe A be prompted to confirm arbela that you want to create your own variable Tap es pws to proceed or D AS STN aCTED A to cancel Once you top MSB m your new matrix will be m 11 023KB stored under the name M 1 023KB M6 1 1 023KB M25 This variable will 7 1 023KB h h M8 1 1 023
132. text LE Jto erase the text and any other key to hide the terminal Pressing stops the interaction with the terminal PRINT with no argument clears the terminal There are also commands for outputting data in the Graphics section In particular the commands TEXTOUT and TEXTOUT_P can be used for text output This example prompts the user to enter a value for the radius of a circle and prints the area of the circle on the terminal EXPORT AREACALC BEGIN OCAL radius Beene INPUT radius Radius of Circle r i Enter radius 1 Enter radius 10 SSS Ganaa antan PRINT The The area is 314 159265359 area is r radius 2 END Notice the use of the LOCAL variable for the radius and the naming convention that uses lower case letters for the local variable Adhering to such a convention will improve the readability of your programs WAIT Syntax WAIT n Pauses program execution for n seconds With no argument or with n O pauses program execution for one minute 550 Programming More CHANGE TOTAL CAS EVALLIST EXECON Syntax CHANGE x y The percentage change in going from x to y Example CHANGE 20 50 returns 150 Syntax TOTAL x y The percentage of x that is y Example TOTAL 20 50 returns 250 Syntax CAS Exp or CAS function or CAS variable Evaluates the expression or variable
133. that you supplied Difference in the proportion of successes in the two samples associated with the a level you supplied One Sample T Test Menu name T Test 1 u This test is used when the population standard deviation is not known On the basis of statistics from a single sample this test measures the strength of the evidence for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the sample mean has some assumed value Hg u uo You select one of the following alternative hypotheses against which to test the null hypothesis Ho u lt po Ho u gt Ho Ho u po 248 Inference app Inputs The inputs are Field name Definition x Sample mean s Sample standard deviation n Sample size Ho Hypothetical population mean a Significance level Results The results are Result Description Test T T Test statistic Test 3 Value of 3 associated with the test t value P Probability associated with the T Test statistic DF Degrees of freedom Critical T Boundary value s of T associated with the a level that you supplied Critical 3 Boundary value s of 3 required by the a value that you supplied Two Sample T Test Menu name T Test u u2 This test is used when the population standard deviation is not known On the basis of statistics from two samples each sample from a different population this test measures the strength of the Side for a selected hypoth
134. that it is not always predictable which seed will lead to which solution when there are multiple solutions 262 Solve app Solution information When you are solving a single equation the button appears on the menu after you tap EIS Tapping displays a message giving you some information about the solutions found if any Tap to clear the message Message Meaning Zero The Solve app found a point where both sides of the equation were equal or where the expression was zero a root within the calculator s 12 digit accuracy Sign Solve found two points where the two sides Reversal of the equation have opposite signs but it cannot find a point in between where the value is zero Similarly for an expression where the value of the expression has different signs but is not precisely zero Either the two values are neighbors they differ by one in the twelfth digit or the equation is not real valued between the two points Solve returns the point where the value or difference is closer to zero If the equation or expression is continuously real this point is Solve s best approximation of an actual solution Extremum Solve found a point where the value of the expression approximates a local minimum for positive values or maximum for negative values This point may or may not be a solution Or Solve stopped searching at 9 99999999999EA99 the largest number the calculator can represent Note that
135. the calculator s keyboard These are described in Keyboard functions on page 307 Other functions and commands are collected together in the Toolbox menus There are five Toolbox menus Math A collection of non symbolic mathematical functions see Keyboard functions on page 307 CAS A collection of symbolic mathematical functions see CAS menu on page 322 App A collection of app functions that can be called from elsewhere in the calculator such as Home view CAS view the Spreadsheet app and in a program see App menu on page 343 Note that the Geometry app functions can be called from elsewhere in the calculator but they are not available from the App menu For that reason the Geometry functions are not described in this chapter They are described in the Geometry chapter User The functions that you have created see Creating your own functions on page 425 and the programs you have created that contain global variables Catlg All the functions and commands onthe Math menu on the CAS menu used in the Geometry app used in programming Functions and commands 305 Setting the form of menu items used in the Matrix Editor used in the List Editor and some additional functions and commands See Ctlg menu on page 372 Some functions can be chosen from the math template displayed by pressing J See Math template va Ya 5P fo
136. the Ext remum message indicates that it is highly likely that there is no solution Use Numeric view to verify this and note that any values shown are suspect Solve app 263 Message Meaning Continued Cannot find No values satisfy the selected equation or solution expression Bad The initial guess lies outside the domain of Guess es the equation Therefore the solution was not a real number or it caused an error Constant The value of the equation is the same at every point sampled 264 Solve app 14 Linear Solver app The Linear Solver app enables you to solve a set of linear equations The set can contain two or three linear equations In a two equation set each equation must be in the form ax by k In a three equation set each equation must be in the form ax by cz k You provide values for a b and k and c in three equation sets for each equation and the app will attempt to solve for x and y and z in three equation sets The HP Prime will alert you if no solution can be found or if there is an infinite number of solutions Getting started with the Linear Solver app The following example defines the following set of equations and then solves for the unknown variables 6x 9y 6z 5 7x 10y 8z 10 6x 4y 6 Open the Linear 1 Open the Linear as an Solver app Solver app ke ove Oz o Select OX OY 0Z 0 OX OY 0Z 0 Linear 0 Solver Infinite
137. the area of srcGRB between points x y1 and x2 y2 srcGRB can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO trgtGRB can be any of the graphics variables except GO x2 y2 are optional and if not specified will be the bottom right of srcGRB xl y1 are optional and if not specified will be the top left of srcGRB Example SUBGROB G1 G4 will copy G1 in G4 Programming 539 TEXTOUT_P TEXTOUT Syntax TEXTOUT text G x y font cl width c2 TEXTOUT_P text G x y font cl width c2 Draws text using color c1 on graphic G at position x y using font Do not draw text more than width pixels wide and erase the background before drawing the text using color c2 G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO Font can be 0 current font selected in mode screen 1 small font 2 large font Font is optional and if not specified is the current font selected on the Homes Settings screen c1 can be any color specified as RRGGBB The default is black 000000 width is optional and if not specified no clipping is performed c2 can be any color specified as RRGGBB c2 is optional If not specified the background is not erased Example This program displays the successive approximations for 7 using the series for the arctangent 1 Note that a color for the text and for background has been specified with the width of the text b
138. the expression with respect to the variable With Functions and commands 323 one expression and more than one variable as arguments returns the derivative of the expression with respect to the variables in the second argument These arguments can be followed by k k is an integer to indicate the number of times the expression should be derived with respect to the variable For example diff exp x y x 3 y 2 z is the same as diff exp x y x x x y y Z diff Expr var or diff Expr varl kl var2Sk2 Example diff x 3 x gives 3 x 2 1 Integrate Returns the indefinite integral of an expression With one expression as argument returns the indefinite integral with respect to x With the optional second third and fourth arguments you can specify the variable of integration and the bounds of the integrate int Expr Var x Real a Real b Example int 1 x gives 1n abs x Limit Returns the limit of an expression when the variable approaches a limit point a or infinity With the optional fourth argument you can specify whether it is the limit from below above or bidirectional d 1 for limit from below and d 1 for limit from above d 0 for bidirectional limit If the fourth argument is not provided the limit returned is bidirectional limit Expr Var Val Dir d Example limit n tan x tan n x sin n x n sin x x 0 gives 2 324 Functions and commands S
139. to display the commands catalog The matrix functions are described in the following sections of this chapter the matrix commands are described in the chapter Programming see page 541 476 Matrices Argument conventions For row or column supply the number of the row counting from the top starting with 1 or the number of the column counting from the left starting with 1 The argument matrix can refer to either a vector or a matrix Matrix functions Transpose Determinant RREF Create Make The matrix functions are available in the Matrix category on the Math menu Select Mat rix Select a function Transposes matrix For a complex matrix TRN finds the conjugate transpose TRN matrix Example oan 12 returns 13 34 24 Determinant of a square matrix DET matrix Example en 12 returns 2 34 Reduced Row Echelon Form Changes a rectangular matrix to its reduced row echelon form J RREF matrix Example nese 2 2 1 returns 10 0 2 3 4 1 01 0 4 Creates a matrix of dimension rows x columns using expression to calculate each element If expression contains the variables and J then the calculation for each element substitutes the current row number for and the current column number for J You can also create a vector Matrices 477 Identity Random Jordan by the number of elements e instead of the number of rows and columns AKEMAT expre
140. to the next line or block of the program ES Executes the current line EZ Opens a menu of variables ETB Closes the debugger NB Continues program execution without debugging Execute the FOR loop command Step The FOR loop starts and the top of the display shows the next line of the program the MSGBOX command Execute the MSGBOX command Step The message box appears Note that when each message box is displayed you still have to dismiss it by tapping or pressing Tap and press repeatedly to execute the program step by step Tap to close the debugger at the current line of the program or tap to run the rest of the program without using the debugger Edit a You edit a program using the Program Editor which is prog g g program accessible from the Program Catalog 1 Open the Program Program Catalog a Catalog ee Es ExportName lt 1KB 2 Tap the program you want to edit or use the arrow keys to highlight it and press EE The HP Prime opens the Program Editor The name of your program appears in the title bar of the display 508 Programming Copy a program or part of a program The buttons and keys you can use to edit your program are listed in Program Editor buttons and keys on page 502 You can use the global copy and Paste commands to copy partor all of a program The following steps illustrate the process Open the Program Catalog 2 Tap the program that has
141. top left of the keyboard Typically these views enable you to define a 72 An introduction to HP apps mathematical object such as an expression or an open sentence plot it and see the values generated by it Each of these views has an accompanying setup view a view that enables you to configure the appearance of the data in the accompanying major view These views are called Symbolic Setup Plot Setup and Numeric Setup They are accessed by pressing Ea Ge BE ond BS Not all apps have all the six views outlined above The scope and complexity of each app determines its particular set of views For example the Spreadsheet app has no Plot view or Plot Setup view and the Quadratic Explorer has only a Plot view What views are available in each app is outlined in the next six sections Note that the DataStreamer app is not covered in this chapter See HP StreamSmart 410 User Guide for information about this app Symbolic view The table below outlines what is done in the Symbolic view of each app App Use the Symbolic view to Advanced Specify up to 10 open sentences Graphing Finance Not used Function Specify up to 10 real valued rectangular functions of y in terms of x Geometry View the symbolic definition of geometric constructions Inference Choose to conduct a hypothesis test or test a confidence level and select a type of test Linear Explorer Not used Linear Solver Not used Parametric
142. unequal lt gt and In this section we will conduct a ZTest on one mean on the example data to illustrate how the app works 238 Inference app Select the inference method Enter data 2 5 Hypothesis Test is the default inference method If it is not selected tap on the Method field and select it Choose the type of test In this case select Z Test 1 u from the Type menu Select an alternative hypothesis In this case select u lt po from the Alt Hypoth menu Go to Numeric view to see the sample data Num LSetup Method v Hypothesis test Type Confidence interval Alt Hypoth p lt pz Choose an inferential method Method Hypothesis test Type Z Test 1 p Alt Hypoth Choose a distribution statistic Method Hypothesis test h Type Z Test 1 p Choose the alternative hypothesis e Numeric View 0 461368 n 50 Ho 0 5 o 0 2887 a 0 05 Sample mean Fest _Jimport calc The table below describes the fields in this view for the sample data Field name Definition x Sample mean n Sample size Ho Assumed population mean Population standard deviation Alpha level for the test Inference app 239 Display the test results Plot the test The Numeric view is where you enter the sample statistics and population parameters for the situation you are examining The sample data supp
143. used Trig Explorer Not used Quick example The following example uses all six app views and should give you an idea of the typical workflow involved in working with an app The Polar app is used as the sample app Open the app 1 Open the Application Library by pressing W 2 Tap once on the icon of the Polar app The Polar app opens in Symbolic View Symbolic view The Symbolic view of the Polar app is where you define or specify the polar equation you want to plot and explore In this example we will plot and explore the equation r 4ncos 0 2 cos 3 Define the equation r 4rcos 0 2 cos 0 by entering 42 200 OIL If you are using algebraic entry mode you would enter 4 Sia 0 7 2083 EB JC J Polar Symbolic View V E R18 snecod cose mO E R3 6 E R4 0 E R5 8 E R6 0 JaA Enter function Show This equation will draw symmetrical petals provided that the angle measure is set to radians The angle measure for this app is set in the Symbolic Setup view An introduction to HP apps 79 Symbolic Setup view 4 Press a Polar Symbolic Setup bets Angle Measure System 5 Seeamadianskomihe aa iii Angle Measure menu Complex De Choose Angle Measure Plot view 6 Press a A graph of the equation is plotted However as the illustration at the right shows only a part of the petals is visible To see the res
144. variable can then be used elsewhere The results variables are listed with the apps that generate them See App variables on page 432 574 Programming 28 Basic Integer arithmetic The common number base used in contemporary mathematics is base 10 By default all calculations performed by the HP Prime are carried out in base 10 and all results are displayed in base 10 However the HP Prime enables Function you to carry out integer arithmetic in four bases decimal base 10 binary base 2 octal base 8 and hexadecimal base 16 For example you could multiply 4 in base 16 by 71 in base 8 and the answer i EGS GGS E4 in base 16 This is equivalent in base 10 to multiplying 4 by 57 to get 228 You indicate that you are about to engage in integer arithmetic by preceding the number with the pound symbol got by pressing 3 4 You indicate what base to use for the number by appending the appropriate base marker 4h 710 E4h Base marker Base blank Adopt the defualt base see The default base on page 576 d decimal b binary o octal h hexadecimal Thus 11b represents 319 The base marker b indicates that the number is to interpreted as a binary number 11 gt Likewise E4h Basic Integer arithmetic 575 represents 22849 In this case the base marker h indicates that the number is to interpreted as a hexadecimal number E4 Note that with integer ari
145. view of the Statistics 2Var app Others predict X and Y values based on the fit specified in one of the analyses Predict X Uses the fit from the first active analysis S1 S5 found to predict an x value given the y value PredxX value Functions and commands 363 PredY Resid Do2VStats SetDepend SetIndep Predict Y Uses the fit from the first active analysis S1 S5 found to predict a y value given the x value Predy value Residuals Calculates a list of residuals based on column data and a fit defined in the Symbolic view via S1 S5 Resid Sn or Resid Resid looks for the first defined analysis in the Symbolic view S1 S5 Do 2 variable statistics Performs the same calculations as tapping in the Numeric view of the Statistics 2Var app and stores the results in the appropriate Statistics 2Var app results variables Sn must be one of the Statistics 2Var app Symbolic view variables S1 S5 Do2VStats Sn Set dependent column Sets the dependent column for one of the statistical analyses S1 S5 to one of the column variables CO 69 SetDepend Sn Cn Set independent column Sets the independent column for one of the statistical analyses S1 S5 to one of the column variablesc0 C9 SetIndep Sn Cn Inference app functions Dolnference The Inference app has a single function that returns the same results as tapping in the Numeric view of the Inference app The results depend on the con
146. will set Num Start to 4 and Num Step to 0 025 EA Clear to reset all the settings to their Num Zoom 4 Enter table start value Explore 15 Re display Numeric Function Numeric View et x F1 F2 Numeric view m z e 3 97484 4 97484277 2 174906E1 view 3 94969 4 94968553 2 149939 1 3 92453 4 92452830 2 125098e1 3 89937 4 89937107 2 100384e1 3 87421 4 87421384 2 075796E1 3 84906 4 84905660 2 051335 1 3 82390 4 82389937 2 027001E1 3 79874 4 79874214 2 002793 1 i To navigate around 16 Using the cursor Function Numeric View 12 x FI F2 a table keys scroll through 5 3 97484 4 97484277 2 174906E1 the values in the 3 94969 4 94968553 2 149939 1 3 92453 4 92452830 2 125098E1 ode 3 89937 4 89937107 2 100384e1 3 87421 4 87421384 2 075796e1 column x Note 3 84906 4 84905660 2 051335 1 that the values inthe 3 82390 4 82389937 2 027001e1 d 3 79874 4 79874214 2 002793 1 3 77358 4 77358491 1 9787111 F1 and F2 columns 384213836 j match what you Zoom __ __ _size_ _Defn_ Column would get if you substituted the values in the X column for x in the 116 Function app To go directly to a value To access the zoom options Other options expressions selected in Symbolic view 1 x and x 1 3 You can also scroll through the columns of the dependant variables labeled
147. you want to change the default color of a plot Parametric Symbolic View E EHE T im E vm X4 T Select graph color 1 Tap the colored square to the left of the function s definition You can also select the square by pressing while the definition is selected Pressing moves the selection from the definition to the colored square and from the colored square to the definition 2 top GED 3 Select the desired color from the color picker Delete a definition To delete a single definition 1 Tap once on it or highlight it using the cursor keys 2 Press 8 To delete all the definitions 1 Press A G3 2 Tap or press to confirm your intention An introduction to HP apps 85 Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons Button Purpose Copies the highlighted definition to the entry line for editing Tap when done To add a new definition even one that is replacing an existing one highlight the field and just start entering your new definition Selects or deselects a definition Enters the independent variable in the Function only Function app You can also press Ge Enters an X in the Advanced Graphing Advanced app You can also press amp i2 Graphing only Advanced Graphing only p Parametric only Polar only Sequence only ve only Enters an Y in the Advanced Graphing app Enters the independent variable in the Paramet
148. 0 X 3185 The mean height x S z 1 676316 2 NOW IS sx 5 86146101 f oX 5 70512721 approximately 167 631578947 k aa ei Sl al 13 Configure a histogram plot for the data 212 Statistics 1Var app Plot a histogram of a a man Statistics 1Var Plot Setup Setu H Width 5 p H Rng 160 180 Enter parameters X Rng 158 182 Y Rng 1 9 appropriate 1o your M data Those shown at ytic 1 the right will ensure ERES TA Enter horizontal tick spacing that all the datain ERS this particular example are displayed in Plot view the data Press and to move the tracer and see the interval and H1 160 165 FS frequency of each bin You can also tap to select a bin Tap and drag to scroll the Plot view You can also zoom in or out on the cursor by pressing and respectively Entering and editing statistical data Each column in Numeric view is a dataset and is represented by a variable named DO to D9 There are three ways to get data into a column Go to Numeric view and enter the data directly See Getting started with the Statistics 1Var app on page 209 for an example Go to Home view and copy the data from a list For example if you enter L1 D1 in Home view the items in list L1 are copied into column D1 in the Statistics 1Var app Go to Home view and copy the data from the Spreadsheet app For example suppose the data of interest is in Al A10
149. 10 In other words the monthly payments are 948 10 5 To determine the balloon payment or future value FV for the mortgage after 10 years enter 120 for N highlight FV and tap EIS The FV field shows 127 164 19 indicating that the future value of the loan that is how much is still owing as 127 164 19 290 Finance app Calculating amortizations Amortization calculations determine the amounts applied towards the principal and interest in a payment or series of payments They also use TVM variables To calculate amortizations 1 Start the Finance app 2 Specity the number of payments per year P YR 3 Specify whether payments are made at the beginning or end of periods 4 Enter values for I3YR PV PMT and FV 5 Enter the number of payments per amortization period in the Group Size field By default the group size is 12 to reflect annual amortization 6 Tap GBI The calculator displays an amortization table For each amortization period the table shows the amounts applied to interest and principal as well as the remaining balance of the loan Example Using the data from the previous example of a home Amortization for a mortgage with balloon payment see page 289 home mortgage calculate how much has been applied to the principal how much has been paid in interest and the balance remaining after the first 10 years that is after 12 x 10 120 payments 1 Make your data Tim
150. 14 Programming In this scenario assume there is no ROLLDIE function exported from another program Instead ROLLDIE is visible only to ROLLMANY The ROLLDTE function must be declared before it is called The first line of the program above contains the declaration of the ROLLDIE function The definition of the ROLLDIE function is located at the end of the program Finally the list of results could be returned as the result of calling ROLLMANY instead of being stored directly in the global list variable L2 This way if the user wanted to store the results elsewhere it could be done easily EXPORT ROLLMANY n sides BEGI LOCAL k roll results AKELIST 0 X 1 2 sides 1 bresults FOR k FROM 1 TO n DO ROLLDIE sides ROLLDIE sides Proll results roll 1Presults roll END RETURN results END In Home view you would enter ROLLMANY 100 6 L5 and the results of the simulation of 100 rolls of two six sided dice would be stored in list L5 The User Keyboard Customizing key presses You can assign alternative functionality to any key on the keyboard including to the functionality provided by the shift and alpha keys This enables you to customize the keyboard to your particular needs For example you could assign to a function that is multi nested on a menu and thus difficult to get to on a menu such as ALOG A customized keyboard is called the user keyboa
151. 31 Numeric view 561 Parametric app 441 Plot view 554 Polar app 442 qualifying 110 429 512 real 431 retrieving 429 Sequence apps 444 Solve app 433 Spreadsheet app 203 433 Statistics 1Var 435 Statistics 2Var 437 Symbolic view 559 561 Triangle Solver 443 types of in programming 553 User 554 Index 603 vectors definition of 465 583 See Also matrices views definition of 583 in apps 72 Numeric 77 Numeric Setup 78 Plot 74 Plot Setup 76 Symbolic 73 Symbolic Setup 74 Views menu 91 520 W wireless network 34 wordsize 577 Z Z Intervals 251 253 zoom examples of 91 94 factors 88 in Numeric view 100 102 in Plot view 88 94 keys for 89 101 types of 89 90 102 604 Index
152. 3333 return to Numeric view Setup plot 11 Change the plotting range to ensure that all the data points are plotted and to select a different data point indicator if you wish Setup Statistics 2Var Plot Setup 1 6 S1 Mark EI S2 Mark S3 Mark aE S4 Mark 33 SS Mark 5 100 xes F 3200 Y Rng 100 3200 5 0 E i Enter minimum horizontal value _edit_ __ __Page _ __ __ Plot the graph 12 Plot the graph Notice that the regression curve that is a curve to best fit the data points is plotted by default S1 1 X 2 1400 224 Statistics 2Var app Display the equation Predict values 13 Return to the Symbolic view a Note the expression in the Fit1 field It shows that the slope m of the regression line is 425 875 and the y intercept b is 376 25 Statistics 2Var Symbolic View Vsifr_ de Type Linear WB Fitt 425 875 X 376 25 S2 Type2 Linear W Fit2 M X B s3 Enter independent column Let s now predict the sales figure if advertising were to go up to 6 minutes 14 Return to the Plot view The trace option is active by default This option will move the cursor from data 1 3 X 3 1100 point to data point as you press or As you move from data point to data point the corresponding x and y values appear at the bottom of the screen In this example the xaxis represents minute
153. 4 99 Converts a unit object into a unit object written with the compatible MKSA base unit mksa Unit Example mksa 32_yd returns 29 2608 m Uses the modular algorithm to return the greatest common divisor of two polynomials modgcd Poly Poly Example modgced x 4 1 x 1 2 gives x 1 Functions and commands 401 mRow mult_c_conjugate mult_conjugate nDeriv NEG Multiplies the row n1 of the matrix A by an expression mRow Expr Mtrx A Intg n1 Example mRow 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 gives 12 24 3 4 5 6 If the given complex expression has a complex denominator returns the expression after both the numerator and the denominator have been multiplied by the complex conjugate of the denominator If the given complex expression does not have a complex denominator returns the expression atter both the numerator and the denominator have been multiplied by the complex conjugate of the numerator mult _c_conjugate Expr Example mult_c_ conjugate 1 3 i 2 gives 1 3 i 2 3 4 2 34 i 2 Takes an expression in which the numerator or the denominator contains a square root If the denominator contains a square root returns the expression after both the numerator and the denominator have been multiplied by the complex conjugate of the denominator If the denominator does not contain a square root returns the expression atter both the numerator and the de
154. 45 Unitcalc lahions onenen enen sersuncsgvacttegadereatt 446 DIOGO nos neon sale E art ast sates caes tie diate Minted Rea tect 448 Physical constants 45 isa cars tudeulets aentesediorntiadeaeintd ann cavouened 449 List of CONSTENIS 1 aecnsaccotanavccenecaanecnteiieon sane anemaceauesinn 451 6 Contents 24 Lists Creote a list in the List Catalog suis ccusicaront vtec ineenatarennns 453 MT hes LIS Editorit e E a E ea Ea 455 Deleting listinni a E OEE eA 457 Lists in HOME vieW esseesesessersreessssteresesssrsereersesrereressssere 457 List funtion e E n A a tas E E A A 459 Finding statistical values for lists ccccceesseeeeeseeeeenteeeeeees 462 25 Matrices Creating and storing Matrices atenatceatsva waar eetere 466 Working with malices ciccsweretvtnevarpaniinendaus salen crsnansiscun 467 Ma tixarthimeti Cienan scan eee i i 471 Solving systems of linear equations ccccccceeeseeeeseeeeesseees 474 Matrix functions and commands cccccceeesteeesesteeeeeteeeees 476 Matrix funetionss ssia deea a edad dna ludevasdeuiens we 477 Examples aaa plea sad bey EE EN E 487 26 Notes and Info Th Noite atalo g e a aa paca eia E I E 489 Mhe Note EditoT irnia rara a a 490 27 Programming The Program Catalog ni irns aaan 498 Creating a new program eeeeeeeeeeceeeecaeeeeeeenteeeeneeeeeeeeeeees 501 The Program Editor i cas ecinehanssaennanrson emaaanern cemansinneiuaanes 501 The HP Prime programming language
155. 512 4096 32768 26214 9 81 729 6561 59049 53144 just as you can to select a hohoo 1000 fio000 fro0000 f100001 19 121 1331 14641 161051 17715 i ROWN Col 1 column or row heading gegen genes exer av aS 2 On the entry line type ea Row Col lt 1 Note that Row and Col are built in variables They are placeholders for the row number and column number of the cell that has a formula containing them 3 Tap MI or Press e Note that each column gives the nth power of the row number starting with the squares Thus 95 is 59 049 You can import data from the Statistics 1 Var and Statistics 2Var apps and from any app customized from a statistics app In the procedure immediately below dataset D1 from the Statistics 1Var app is being imported 1 Select a cell 2 Enter Statistics 1Var DL 3 Press _ Fue The column is filled with the data from the statistics app starting with the cell selected at step 1 Any data in that column will be overwritten by the data being imported 200 Spreadsheet External functions You can also export data from the Spreadsheet app to a statistics app See Entering and editing statistical data on page 213 for the general procedure It can be used in both the Statistics 1Var and Statistics 2Var apps You can use in a formula any function available on the Math Mir i E F CAS App User or Catlg 3 menus see
156. 5i draws a parallelogram whose vertices are at O 0 6 0 9 5 and 3 5 The coordinates of the last point are calculated automatically Displays the perimeter at point zO of a circle or polygon A legend is provided perimeterat Polygon Pnt Cp1lx z0 Displays the perimeter at point zO of a circle or polygon perimeteratraw Polygon Pnt Cplx z0 Functions and commands 405 perpen_bisector perpendicular PI PIECEWISE Draws the bisection line or plane of the segment AB perpen bisector Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cp1x B Example perpen bisector 3 2i i draws the perpendicular bisector of a segment whose endpoints have coordinates 3 2 and 0 1 that is the line whose equation is y x 3 1 With a point and a line as arguments returns the line that is orthogonal to the given line and that passes through the given point With a line and a plane as arguments draws the plane that is orthogonal to the given plane and that contains the given line perpendicular Pnt or Line Line or Plane Example perpendicular 3 2i line x y 1 draws a line through the point whose coordinates are 3 2 that is perpendicular to the line whose equation is x y 1 that is the line whose equation is y x 5 Inserts pi Takes as arguments pairs consisting of a condition and an expression Each of these pairs defines a sub function of the piecewise function and the domain over which it is a
157. 6667 00 0 0 TS CD ED ED Matrices 26 Notes and Info The HP Prime has two text editors for entering notes The Note Editor opens from within the Note Catalog which is a collection of notes independent of apps The Info Editor opens from the Info view of an app A note created in the Info view is associated with the app and stays with it if you send the app to another calculator The Note Catalog Note Catalog button and keys Subject to available memory you can store as many notes as you want in the Note Catalog These notes are independent of any app The Note Catalog lists the notes by name This list excludes notes that were created in any app s Info view but these can be copied and then pasted into the Note Catalog via the clipboard From the Note Catalog you create or edit individual notes in the Note Editor Press Notes to enter the Note Catalog While you are in the Note Catalog you can use the following buttons and keys Note that some buttons will not be available if there are no notes in the Note Catalog Button or Key Purpose Opens the selected note for editing New Begins a new note and prompts you for a name Tap to provide additional features See below Notes and Info 489 Button or Key Purpose Continued Save creates a copy of the selected note and prompts you to save it under a new name Rename renames the selected note Sort sorts
158. 9 285 292 Function 69 111 124 Geometry 69 135 192 Inference 69 237 255 Linear Explorer 69 130 297 299 Linear Solver 70 130 265 267 Parametric 70 269 273 Polar 70 275 278 Quadratic Explorer 70 300 302 Sequence 70 279 284 Solve 70 257 264 Spreadsheet 70 193 208 Statistics 1Var 70 209 220 Statistics 2Var 70 221 236 Triangle Solver 70 293 296 Trig Explorer 70 302 304 arithmetic functions 312 314 arithmetic integer 575 autoscale 90 93 B backspace 21 bad argument 586 bar plot 218 base 32 default 576 functions 580 marker 575 battery 16 charging 11 indicator 16 warning 12 binary arithmetic See integer arithmetic 575 block commands 525 Boolean operators 21 box zoom 90 box and whisker plot 218 branch commands 526 553 brightness 13 Build Your Own See custom tables Index 595 buttons command 20 menu 20 See also menu buttons C cables 44 calculations CAS 54 322 343 confidence intervals 251 financial 285 292 geometric 150 in Home view 35 307 321 statistical 216 231 with units 446 calculus functions 323 328 CAS 53 59 calculations using 54 322 343 functions algebra 322 323 calculus 323 328 integer 334 336 plot 342 343 polynomial 337 342 rewrite 330 334 solve 328 330 menu 322 343 settings 30 55 view 13 cash flow 287 Catlg menu 372 425 cells entering content 199 formatting 206 importing data 200 naming 198 referencing 198 202 selecting 197 characters 22 charging 11 chemistry c
159. 92809489 Returns y y C y max xmax and R where y is a logistic function the solution of y y a y b such that y x0 y0 and where y x0 y x0 1 is the best approximation of the line formed by the elements in the list L logistic _regression Lst L Real x0 Real y0 Example logistic _regression 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 0 0 1 0 gives 17 77 1 exp 0 496893925384 x 2 82232341488 3 14159265359 i 2 48542227469 1 cosh 0 496893925384 x 2 82232341488 3 14159265359 i Returns a list of variables used in an expression lvar Expr Example lvar exp x 2 sin y gives exp x Sin y Used with display to specify the color of the geometrical object to be displayed Applies a function to the elements of the list map Lst Fnc Example map 1 2 3 x gt x 3 gives 1 8 27 Functions and commands 399 matZlist matpow MAXREAL mean median Returns the list of the terms of a matrix mat2list Mtrx Example mat2list 1 8 1 4 91 gives 1 8 4 9 Calculates the nth power of a matrix by jordanization matpow Mtrx Intg n Example matpow 1 2 3 4 n gives sqrt 33 3 sqrt 33 5 2 n 6 oo sqrt 33 3 sqrt 33 2 n 6 12 sqrt 33 sqrt 33 3 eee ii 2 n sqrt 33 3 tan si 2 sqrt 33 3 sqrt 33 2 sqrt 33 3 12 sqrt 33 6 sqrt 3 a Tesi 7 s Lavegre 22 eget 331 val aoe
160. Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Solve Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Geometry To restore one field to its default setting 1 Select the field 2 Press 8 pra 4 To restore all default settings press ces Common operations in Numeric view Zoom Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Numeric view functionality that is common to many apps is described in detail in this section Functionality that is available only in a particular app is described in the chapter dedicated to that app Numeric view provides a table X F1 F2 i PES o 2 5 of evaluations Each definitionin Pi 319 4 99 n s A 0 2 2 36 4 96 Symbolic view is evaluated fora 3 251 491 0 4 2 64 4 84 range of values for the 0 5 2 75 4 75 3 0 6 2 84 4 64 independent variable You can 7 z asi 0 8 2 96 4 36 set the range and fineness of the o9 j2s9 4 19 independent variable or leave it f Zoom Big Defn Width to the default settings Press to open Numeric view Unlike in Plot view zooming in Numeric view does not affect the size of what is displayed Instead it changes the increment between consecutive values of the independent variable that is the NUMsTEP setting in the Numeric Setup view see page 105 Zooming in decreases the increment zooming out increases the increment The row that was highlighted before the zoom remains unchanged For the ordinary zo
161. Advanced Graphing app To save a plot from the Plot Gallery 1 2 3 With the plot of interest displayed tap EIB Enter a name for your new app and tap WEBB Tap again Your new app opens with the equations that generated the plot displayed in Symbolic view The app is also added to the Application Library so that you can return to it later 134 Advanced Graphing app Geometry The Geometry app enables you to draw and explore geometric constructions A geometric construction can be composed of any number of geometric objects such as points lines polygons curves tangents and so on You can take measurements such as areas and distances manipulate objects and note how measurements change There are five app views e Plot view provides drawing tools for you to construct geometric objects Symbolic view provides editable definitions of the objects in Plot view Numeric view for making calculations about the objects in Plot view e Plot Setup view for customizing the appearance of Plot view Symbolic Setup view for overriding certain system wide settings There is no Numeric Setup view in this app To open the Geometry app press and select Geometry The app opens in Plot view Getting started with the Geometry app Geometry The following example shows how you can graphically represent the derivative of a curve and have the value of the derivative automatically update as you move a poin
162. C Confidence level Results The results are Result Description C Confidence level Critical Z Critical values for Z Lower Lower bound for u Upper Upper bound for u Two Sample Z Interval Menu name Zint u4 u2 This option uses the Normal Z distribution to calculate a confidence interval for the difference between the means of two populations u u gt when the population standard deviations 6 and 69 are known Inference app 251 Inputs The inputs are Field Definition name x Sample 1 mean 3 Sample 2 mean ny Sample 1 size n2 Sample 2 size o Population 1 standard deviation o2 Population 2 standard deviation Contidence level Results The results are Result Description C Confidence level Critical Z Critical values for Z Lower Lower bound for A u Upper Upper bound for A u One Proportion Z Interval Menu name Z nt 12 This option uses the Normal Zdistribution to calculate a confidence interval for the proportion of successes in a population for the case in which a sample of size n has a number of successes x Inputs The inputs are Field Definition name x Sample success count Sample size Confidence level 252 Inference app Results The results are Result Description C Confidence level Critical Z Critical values for Z Lower Lower bound for x Upper Upper bound for x Two Proportion Z Interval Menu name Zlnt 11 72 This option uses the Normal Zdistribution to
163. C2 and you want to sort by Income then you make C2 the independent column and C1 the dependent column 4 Specify any Frequency data column Top MIA The independent column is sorted as specified and any other columns are sorted to match the independent column To sort just one column choose None for the Dependent and Frequency columns 228 Statistics 2Var app Defining a regression model Choose a fit Fit types You define a regression model in Symbolic view There are three ways to do so e Accept the default option to fit the data to a straight line Choose a pre defined fit type logarithmic exponential and so on Enter your own mathematical expression The expression will be plotted so that you can see how closely it fits the data points 1 Press Bto display the Symbolic view 2 For the analysis you are interested in S1 through S5 select the Type field 3 Tap the field again to see the menu of fit types 4 Select your preferred fit type from the menu See Fit types on page 229 Twelve fit types are available Fit type Meaning Linear Default Fits the data to a straight line y mx b Uses a least squares fit Logarithmic Fits the data to a logarithmic curve y m lnx b Exponential Fits the data to the natural exponential curve y b e Power Fits the data to a power curve y bx Exponent Fits the data to an exponential curve y b m
164. Choose an inferential method oe a ee a Select 7 Tap on the Method inference field and select Methodi Confidence erai K Confidence IYpaZ Int 1 p 3 method and Interval type Choose an inferential method Choose a 8 Tap on Type and select T Int 1 u Method Confidence interval r Choose a distribution statistic Choose cu a a Import the 9 Open Numeric view data 10 Specify the data you want to import Top 0 242 Inference app 11 From the App field Import Sample Statistics select the statistics app 3 82 8833333333 n6 that has the data you ET want to import App Statistics 1Var 12 In the Column field a S specify the column in that app where the Choose column to import data is stored D1 is a gGIDET the default 13 Tap i 14 Specify a 90 Inference Numeric View confidence interval in 82 8833333333 the C field s 0 487510683644 n 6 Confidence Level edit import calc e a Display 15 Display the confidence x results interval in Numeric bep 2 view Crit T 2 01504837333 s Lower 82 4822875184 numerically ene Upper 16 Return to Numeric view OK 50 es cess seats S128 sro Display 17 Display the confidence 201504837333 scrit T 201504837333 results interval in Plot view graphically The 90 confidence interval is 82 48 83 28 me st srs Hypothesis tests You use hypothesis tests to test the validity of
165. Current time The default is 24 hour format but you can choose AM PM format See Home settings on page 30 for more information Green with Battery charge indicator gray border The HP Prime offers two modes of navigation touch and keys In many cases you can tap on an icon field menu or object to select or deselect it For example you can open the Function app by tapping once on its icon in the Application Library However to open the Application Library you will need to press a key Ga Instead of tapping an icon in the Application Library you can also press the cursor keys until the app you want to open is highlighted and then press Ete In the Application Library you can also type the first one or two letters of an app s name to highlight the app Then either tap the app s icon or press to open it Sometimes a touch or key touch combination is available For example you can deselect a toggle option either by tapping twice on it or by using the arrow keys to move to the field and then tapping a touch button along the bottom of the screen in this case GB Note that you must use your finger or a capacitive stylus to select an item by touch Getting started Touch gestures In addition to selection by tapping there are other touch related operations available to you To quickly move from page to page flick Place a finger on the screen and quickly swipe it in the d
166. Enter the scale factor and press 4 Tap the object that is to be dilated and press _ _ 162 Geometry Rotation More Projection Inversion Geometry A rotation is a mapping that rotates each point by a fixed angle around a center point The angle is defined using the angle command with the vertex of the angle as the first argument Suppose you wish to rotate A t5 K 8 To 5 Pointer GM Zoom Polygon Curve Transfor the square GC around point K GK through LKM in the figure to the right 1 Press and tap MEB 2 Tap and select Transform gt Rotation rotation appears on the entry line 3 Between the parentheses enter GK angle GK GL GM GC 4 Press or tap a 5 Press to return to W a L M L 5 t 10 10 Pointer 1 11 3 7 Plot view to see the rotated square A projection is a mapping of one or more points onto an object such that the line passing through the point and its image is perpendicular to the object at the image point 1 Tap and select Projection 2 Tap the object onto which points are to be projected and press fu J 3 Tap the point that is to be projected and press fe _ J Note the new point added to the target object An inversion is a mapping involving a center point and a scale factor Specifically the inversion of point A through center C with sc
167. Example excircle GA GB GC draws the circle tangent to BC and to the rays AB and AC Draws a hyperbola given the foci and either a point on the hyperbola or a scalar that is one half the constant difference of the distances from a point on the hyperbola to each of the foci hyperbola pointl point2 point3 or hyperbola pointl point2 realk Examples hyperbola GA GB GC draws the hyperbola whose foci are points A and B and which passes through point C hyperbola GA GB 3 draws a hyperbola whose foci are points A and B For any point P on the hyperbola AP BP 6 Draws the incircle of a triangle the circle tangent to all three sides of the triangle incircle pointl point2 point3 177 locus parabola Transform dilation inversion Example incircle GA GB GC draws the incircle of AABC Given a first point and a second point that is an element of a point on a geometric object draws the locus of the first point as the second point traverses its object locus point element Draws a parabola given a focus point and a directrix line or the vertex of the parabola and a real number that represents the focal length parabola point line or parabola vertex real Examples parabola GA GB draws a parabola whose focus is point A and whose directrix is line B parabola GA 1 draws a parabola whose vertex is point A and whose focal length is 1 Dilates a geometric object with r
168. F1 and F2 in the illustration above You can also scroll the table vertically or horizontally using tap and drag gestures Place the cursor in the Einciion Nimeriaiend X F1 F2 X column and type 5 5 4 1 0025E1 9 02515723 7 845346E1 the desired value For 1 0050 1 9 05031447 7 890819E1 H 1 0075e1 9 07547170 7 936419E1 eae el 1 0101 1 9 10062893 7 982145e1 traight to the row 1 0126 1 9 12578616 8 027997E1 srg g 7 ETO 1 015161 9 15094340 8 073977E1 where x 10 1 017661 9 17610063 8 120082E1 1 0201 1 9 20125786 8 166315e1 E 1 0 10 zoom T T size nefn column Numerous zoom options are available by tapping EZ These are explained in Zoom on page 100 A quick way to zoom in or zoom out is to press or J This zooms in or out by the Num Zoom value set in the Numeric Setup view see page 115 The default value is 4 Thus if the current increment that is the Num Step value is 0 4 zooming in on the row whose x value is 10 will further divide that interval into four smaller intervals So instead of x values of 10 10 4 10 8 11 2 etc the x values will be 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 etc Zooming out does the opposite 10 10 4 10 8 11 2 etc become 10 11 6 13 2 14 8 16 4 etc As explained on page page 104 you can also change the size of the font small medium or large display the definition responsible for generating a column of va
169. For instance if ages are in C1 and incomes in C2 and Statistics 1Var app 215 you want to sort by income then you make C2 the independent column and C1 the dependent column 4 Specify any frequency data column 5 Top MIM The independent column is sorted as specified and any other columns are sorted to match the independent column To sort just one column choose None for the Dependent and Frequency columns Computed statistics Tapping displays the following results for each dataset selected in Symbolic view Statistic Definition n Number of data points Min Minimum value Ql First quartile median of values to left of median Med Median value Q3 Third quartile median of values to right of median Max Maximum value XX Sum of data values with their frequencies x Sum of the squares of the data values x Mean sX Sample standard deviation oX Population standard deviation serrX Standard error When the data set contains an odd number of values the median value is not used when calculating Q1 and Q3 For example for the data set 3 5 7 8 15 16 17 only the first three items 3 5 and 7 are used to calculate Q1 and only the last three terms 15 16 and 17 are used to calculate Q3 216 Statistics 1Var app Plotting To plot statistical data Plot types Histogram You can plot Histograms Box and Whisker plots Normal Probability plots Line plots Bar graphs Pareto ch
170. For a numerical symmetric matrix A returns the matrix L such that A L tran L cholesky matrix Example In CAS view choresiy 3 1 returns 14 V3 0 BB after simplification gog 482 Matrices Hermite Hessenberg Smith Hermite normal form of a matrix with coefficients in Z returns U B such that U is invertible in Z B is upper triangular and B U A ihermite Mtrx A Example 12 3 3i 1 10 Loi s3 ihermite q 5 6 returns 4 _1 o lo 3 6 789 1 2 1 0 0 0 Matrix reduction to Hessenberg form Returns P B such that B inv P A P hessenberg Mtrx A Example E253 In CAS view hessenberg 4 5 6 789 lo 1 ol o 278 49 7 returns Smith normal form of a matrix with coefficients in Z returns U B V such that U and V invertible in Z B is diagonal B i i divides B i 1 i 1 and B U A V ismith Mtrx A Example l1 23 ismith q 5 6 returns 17 8 9 1 0 0 100 1 2 1 4 1 0 0 3 0 O 1 2 1 2 1 0 00 0 0 1 Matrices 483 Factorize LQ LSQ LU LQ Factorization Factorizes a m x n matrix into three matrices L Q and P where L m x n lowertrapezoidal Q n x n orthogonal P m x m permutation and P A L Q LQ matrix Example LQ 12 returns 3 4 l 2 2360 0 0 4472 0 8944 10 4 9193 0 8944 0 8944 0 4472 0 1 Least Squares Displays the minimum norm least squares matrix or vector corresponding to the
171. HECTEIIED B thereby forcing the calculation to be performed by the CAS Note that CAS appears in red on the entry line if the cell selected contains a formula that is being calculated by the CAS 204 Spreadsheet Buttons and keys Button or key Purpose Activates the entry line for you to edit the object in the selected cell Only visible if the selected cell has content Converts the text you have entered on the entry line to a name Only visible when the entry line is active ES A toggle button that is only visible when the entry line is active Both options force the expression to be handled by the CAS but only evaluates it ED Tap to enter the symbol A shortcut when entering absolute references Only visible when the entry line is active Displays formatting options for the selected cell block column row or the entire spreadsheet See Formatting options on page 206 Displays an input form for you to specify the cell you want to jump to Sets the calculator to select mode so that you can easily select a block of cells using the cursor keys It changes to to enable you to deselect cells You can also press hold and drag to select a block of cells ES or A toggle button that sets the direction the cursor Go moves after content has been entered in a cell Show Displays the result in the selected cell in full screen mode with horizontal and vertical scrolling enabled O
172. HP Prime Graphing Calculator User Guide Edition Part Number NW280 2001 Legal Notices This manual and any examples contained herein are provided as is and are subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard Company makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability non infringement and fitness for a particular purpose Portions of this software are copyright 2013 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved e HP is distributing FreeType under the FreeType License e HP is distributing google droid fonts under the Apache Software License v2 0 e HP is distributing HIDAPI under the BSD license only e HP is distributing Qt under the LGPLv2 1 license HP is providing a full copy of the Qt source e HP is distributing QuaZIP under LGPLv2 and the zlib libpng licenses HP is providing a full copy of the QuaZIP source Hewlett Packard Company shall not be liable for any errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual or the exam ples contained herein Product Regulatory amp Environment Information Product Regulatory and Environment Information is provided on the CD shipped with this prod uct Copyright 2013 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Reproduction adaptation or translation of this manual is prohibited without prior written per mission of
173. Hewlett Packard Company except as allowed under the copyright laws Printing History Edition 1 July 2013 Contents Preface Manual conventions casccsseecavdecacas iarukic costanesay goes sesaannsteediaanthens 9 PHS sons aA ae eeu ea Ra AA E AAAA ERES IE ARAA e E EAE a ETA 10 1 Getting started Before starting te cit vet Gear al ee sh aver es cia cdne ea inna ae 11 On off cancel Sperations sacviatecta sens caaces series svatidnsdicuetacviaseuee 12 Thedisplay cnnan a e curse e E Ra 13 Sections of the display 4y acaieiave wera tieveedivcerande noice telotoregehts 14 Navigation sincsen a a a a Deceeteaes 16 Touch g stures sirar recne rane e ee 17 The keyboard arenaer ar aee et a ae 18 Context sensitive MENU eeeceee cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeees 19 Entry and edit Keysa t costae cdtvenitearaturaitovs wins EA 20 SHIP REVS rosarina a are iowa as A 22 Adding text ocsiarenitosatarareerahtinaiteraeeenacmae nee arcen aes 23 Math Keys iener gerrier nua ewan euaun aN ENSA 24 MENUS Prsi sure seuss dav TETA EEE ETENA EEE EEEE 28 Toolbox ments ainsat iesieta e E RaT 29 IPUR OTS cans nsen dande xa EEE EEEa euesasies 29 System wide settings pujasvieseagussnga sougs scorn digs sckjupdevarcnhecy arene 30 Home SEMIN GS siiis eso na E weeds E EE EEEE 30 Specifying a Home setting ssseonenonoeneeeoeesseeeeseeerseeee seee 34 Mathematical coleulatiGnsiiy ss 2uiasiats secsesdreucnancerascamucrueienias 35 Choosing an entry ty pe s
174. INT Root when this definition is evaluated From other definitions You could for example define F3 X as F1 X F2 X Evaluate a dependent definition If you have a dependent definition that is one defined in terms of another definition you can combine all the definitions into one by evaluating the dependent definition 1 Select the dependent expression 2 Tap GEE Consider the example at the Function Symbolic View right Notice that F3 X is VBE F1Q0 24x24x V BEF2 X x2 1 defined in terms of two other 7 i E F3 X F1 X 2 F2 x functions It is a dependent saw O definition and can be evaluated m Fs If you highlight F3 X and tap La EER 3 x becomes 2 X X 2 X2 1 Select or deselect a definition to explore In the Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence and Solve apps you can enter up to 10 definitions However only those definitions that are selected in Symbolic view will be plotted in Plot view and evaluated in Numeric view You can tell if a definition is selected by the tick or checkmark beside it A checkmark is added by default as soon as you create a definition So if you don t want to plot or evaluate a particular definition highlight it and tap QB Do likewise if you want to re select a deselected function 84 An introduction to HP apps Choose a color for plots Each function and open sentence can be plotted in a different color If
175. ITSR e BITXOR e B gt R e GETBASE e GETBITS e R B e SETBASE e SETBITS These are described in Integer beginning on page 544 580 Basic Integer arithmetic Appendix A Glossary app A small application designed for the study of one or more related topics or to solve problems of a particular type The built in apps are Function Advanced Graphing Geometry Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Inference Datastreamer Solve Linear Solver Triangle Solver Finance Parametric Polar Sequence Linear Explorer Quadratic Explorer and Trig Explorer An app can be filled with the data and solutions for a specific problem It is reusable like a program but easier to use and it records all your settings and definitions button An option or menu shown at the bottom of the screen and activated by touch Compare with key CAS Computer Algebra System Use the CAS to perform exact or symbolic calculations Compare to calculations done in Home view which often yield numerical approximations You can share results and variables between the CAS and Home view and vice versa catalog A collection of items such as matrices lists programs and the like New items you create are saved to a catalog and you choose a specific item from a catalog to work on it A special catalog that lists the apps is called the Application Library Glossary 581 command expression function Home view input
176. If instead we entered the lengths as b and we would need to specify the angle as A The illustration on the screen will help you determine where to enter the known values 3 Go to a field whose value you know enter the value and either tap RH or press f _ Repeat for each known value Triangle Solver a Ina type 4 Enter 3 out of 6 values and press afd b In b type 6 j and press p T Le Enter length of side a c InCtype 30 BGP DES eTs and press _ Fer 294 Triangle Solver app Solve for the 4 Tap The unknown values app displays the values of the unknown variables As the illustration at the right shows the length of the unknown side in Triangle Solver Solution found ab _ d s CA 38 2619661998 b 6 B 111 7380338 c 3 22967190568 C 30 A b Enter length of side a Pest __Joegreey Rect __ sove our example is 3 22967 The other two angles have also been calculated Choosing triangle types The Triangle Solver app has two input forms a general input form and a simpler specialized form for right angled triangles If the general input form is displayed and you Enter length of side a edit Degree Recte __ Solve are investigating a right angled triangle tap to display the simpler input form To return to the general input form tap ERB f the triangle you are investigating
177. If the variable X has the value 90 ezgcd Uses the EZ GCD algorithm to return the greatest common divisor of two polynomials with at least two variables ezgcd Poly Poly Example ezgcd x 2 2 xyty 2 1 x y gives 1 f2nd Returns a list consisting of the numerator and denominator of an irreducible form of a rational fraction f2nd RatFrac Example 2nd 42 12 returns 7 2 faces Returns the list of the faces of a polygon or polyhedron Each face is a matrix of n rows and three columns where n is the number of vertices of the polygon or polyhedron faces Polygon or Polyedr Example faces polyhedron 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 5 1 2 6 gives polyhedron 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 Ose 0 slayer el ly 110 0 045 0707S l E 4 6 Te O7S7 0 7 10 0 5 7 122 60 factorial Returns the factorial of an integer or the solution to the gamma function for a non integer factorial Intg n Real a Example factorial 4 gives 24 Functions and commands 387 fMax fMin FOR format fracmod froot Returns the value of the abscissa at the maximum value of an expression Without a second argument it is assumed that it the abscissa is x With a variable as second argument it is taken as the abscissa fMax Expr Var Example fMax x 2 2 x 1 x gives 1 Returns the value of the abscissa at the minimum value of an expression Without a second argument it is assumed that it the abscissa i
178. KB show up in the User Toa ral section of the Vars menu M 1 023KB Ans 3 039KB You will also see your M25 3 039KB new matrix in the Matrix Edit Delete vet J Catalog In Home view enter the name of the vector or matrix and press _r_ If the vector or matrix is empty zero is returned inside double square brackets In Home view enter matrixname row column For example if M2 is 3 4 5 6 then M2 1 2 Fatt returns 4 In Home view enter value tap REB and then enter matrixname row column For example to change the element in the first row and 470 Matrices To send a matrix second column of M5 to 728 and then display the resulting matrix 728 Function LO aoa 2 728 gt M5 1 2 les ed 16 2 An attempt to store an Pa ee eee element to a row or column beyond the size of the matrix results in re sizing the matrix to allow the storage Any intermediate cells will be filled with zeroes You can send matrices between calculators just as you can send apps programs lists and notes See Sharing data on page 44 for instructions Matrix arithmetic You can use the arithmetic functions x and powers with matrix arguments Division left multiplies by the inverse of the divisor You can enter the matrices themselves or enter the names of stored matrix variables The matrices can be real or complex For the next examples store 1 2 3 4
179. MYPROGRAM and a BEGIN END pair that will enclose the statements for the function A program name can contain only alphanumeric characters letters and numbers and the underscore character The first character must be a letter For example GOOD_NAME and Spin2 are valid program names while HOT STUFF contains a space and 2Coo1 starts with number and includes are not valid The Program Editor Until you become familiar with the HP Prime commands the easiest way to enter commands is to select them from the Catalog menu EA RETE or from the Commands menu in the Program Editor E To enter variables Programming 501 symbols mathematical functions units or characters use the keyboard keys Program Editor The buttons and keys in the Program Editor are buttons and keys Button or Key Meaning Checks the current program for errors If your programs goes beyond one screen you can quickly jump from screen to screen b and bain either side of this i button Tap the left side of the button to display the previous page tap the right side to display the next page The left tap will be inactive if you have the first page of the program displayed or Opens a menu from which you can choose from common programming commands The commands are grouped under the options e Strings e Drawing e Matrix e App Functions e Integer O e More Press to return to the m
180. O 185 is_concyclic is_conjugate is_element is_equilateral is_isoceles Takes a set of points as argument and tests if they are all on the same circle Returns 1 if the points are all on the same circle and O otherwise is_concyclic pointl point2 pointn Example is _concyclic point 4 2 point 4 2 point 4 2 point 4 2 returns 1 Tests whether or not two points or two lines are conjugates for the given circle Returns 1 if they are and O otherwise is _conjugate circle pointl point2 or is_conjugate circle linel line2 Tests if a point is on a geometric object Returns 1 if it is and O otherwise is element point object Example is element point 2 2 circle 0 1 returns 1 Takes three points and tests whether or not they are vertices of a single equilateral triangle Returns 1 if they are and 0 otherwise is equilateral pointl point2 point3 Example is equilateral point 0 0 point 4 0 point 2 4 returns O Takes three points and tests whether or not they are vertices of a single isosceles triangle Returns O if they are not If they are returns the number order of the common point of the two sides of equal length 1 2 or 3 Returns 4 if the three points form an equilateral triangle is_isosceles pointl point2 point3 186 Geometry is_orthogonal is_parallel is_parallelogram is_perpendicular Geometry Example is isosceles point 0
181. Off turn the calculator off To save power the calculator turns itself off atter several minutes of inactivity All stored and displayed information is saved Getting started The Home View The CAS View Protective cover The display To adjust the brightness To clear the display Home view is the starting point for many calculations Most mathematical functions are available in the Home view Some additional functions are available in the computer algebra system CAS A history of your previous calculations is retained and you can re use a previous calculation or its result To display Home view press EM CAS view enables you to perform symbolic calculations It is largely identical to Home view it even has its own history of past calculations but the CAS view offers some additional functions To display CAS view press Gg The calculator is provided with a slide cover to protect the display and keyboard Remove the cover by grasping both sides of it and pulling down You can reverse the slide cover and slide it onto the back of the calculator This will ensure that you do not misplace the cover while you are using the calculator To prolong the life of the calculator always place the cover over the display and keyboard when you are not using the calculator To adjust the brightness of the display press and hold then press the or key to increase or decrease the brightness The brightness will
182. PUL Numeric view variables CO Cc9 Statistics 2Var CO through C9 for columns of data Can contain lists Enter data in the Numeric view In a program type LIST gt Cn where n 0 1 2 3 9 and LIST is either a list or the name of a list Programming 561 DO D9 Statistics 1Var DO through D9 for columns of data Can contain lists Enter data in the Numeric view In a program type LIST gt Dn where n 0 1 2 3 9 and LIST is either a list or the name of a list NumIndep Specifies the list of independent values or two value sets Function of independent values to be used by Build Your Own Parametric Table Enter your values one by one in the Numeric view Polar In a program type Sequence Advanced LIST gt NumIndep Graphing List can be either a list itself or the name of a list In the case of the Advanced Graphing app the list will be a list of pairs a list of 2 element vectors rather than a list of numbers NumStart Sets the starting value for a table in Numeric view Function A From Numeric Setup view enter a value for NUMSTART Parametric Polar In a program type Sequence n gt NumStart NumXStart Sets the starting number for the X values in a table in Advanced Graphing Numeric view From Numeric Setup view enter a value for NUMXSTART In a program type n gt NumxStart NumYStart Sets the starting value for the Y values in a table in Advanced Graphing Numeric view
183. Per e Ens a the f las by addi He e formulas by aading some fsfs 6 5 TOTAL COMMIS 379 5 4 750 75 dummy data to the PRICE 5 1560 156 COSTS 100 g 6 lo column When the profit 7 p PROFIT 279 5 8 reaches 250 you should see f b konom h V he value in D9 change from O ee tne value in D9 changetrom O Werren to 1 Basic operations Navigation selection and gestures You can move about a spreadsheet by using the cursor keys by swiping or by tapping and specifying the cell you want to move to You select a cell simply by moving to it You can also select an entire column by tapping the column letter and select an entire row by tapping the row number You can also select the entire spreadsheet just tap on the unnumbered cell at the top left corner of the spreadsheet It has the HP logo in it A block of cells can be selected by pressing down on a cell that will be a corner cell of the selection and after a second dragging your finger to the diagonally opposite cell You can also select a block of cells by moving to a corner cell tapping and using the cursor keys to move to the diagonally opposite cell Tapping on or another cell deselects the selection Spreadsheet 197 Cell references Cell naming Method 1 Method 2 Using names in calculations You can refer to the value of a cell in formulas as if it were a variable A cell is referenced by its column and row coordinates and references can be absol
184. R 217 Setting up the plot Plot Setup View cesseeceestteeeetreeees 219 Exploring the graph aicsssanccaceansyndean ach unucnaniayndentanentaunnees 219 11 Statistics 2Var app Getting started with the Statistics 2Var APp ecscceeeeeeeseeees 221 Entering and editing statistical data eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 226 Numeric view menu items ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeneaeeeee 227 Defining a regression model cccecceeeeseceeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeees 229 Computed statistics soso rese a eee eames 231 Plotting statistical data irises eran aeinennia aes 232 Plot view menu items sass kievceve airs voos ures eaear me nemauee 234 Plot SET By ssi oi AE cia ag ero a ae 234 Predicting VOWES anasto ae 235 Troubleshooting a pleted yaw wrnciienmneironuere 236 12 Inference app Getting started with the Inference OPp cccccesseeeesteeeeeees 237 Importing statistics cceeeeeeeeecececceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaaenaaeeaea 241 Hypothesis tests oonnnneneeeoeneeeessoeeeeseoetsssseressssertressereesee 243 One Sample Z Test jchssueiosseing desseunuddsonpucoedivoyausouvarvasiliads 244 Two Sample Z Test ius ascsciparsoudisolveuandiiensagdorval orvateeninabarwine 245 One Proportion Z Test cccccccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 246 Two Proportion Z Test ccccccseeceeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 247 One Sample T Test cascisssiashnnehnelosseeag Meeuthonpavorseccesineeags ont 248
185. RM n r Example Suppose you want to know how many permutations there are for five things taken two at a time PERM 5 2 returns 20 Random Number Random number With no argument this function returns a random number between zero and one With one argument a it returns a random number between O and a With two arguments a and b returns a random number between a and b With three arguments n a and b returns n random number between a and b RANDOM RANDOM a RANDOM a b RANDOM n a b Integer Random integer With no argument this function returns either O or 1 randomly With one integer argument a it returns a random integer between 0 and a With two arguments a and b returns a random integer between a and b With three integer arguments n a and b returns n random integers between a and b RANDINT RANDINT a RANDINT a b RANDINT n a b Normal Random real number with normal distribution N u1 o RANDNORM p 316 Functions and commands Seed Density Normal Sets the seed value on which the random functions operate By specifying the same seed value on two or more calculators you ensure that the same random numbers appear on each calculator when the random functions are executed RANDSEED value Normal probability density function Computes the probability density at value x given the mean p and standard deviation o of a normal distribution If only one argument is supplied it is taken
186. Rng Two fields for entering the minimum and maximum x values thereby giving the default horizontal range As well as changing this range on the 146 Geometry Geometry Geometry Plot Setup screen you can change it by panning and zooming Y Rng Two fields for entering the minimum and maximum y values thereby giving the default vertical range As well as changing this range on the Geometry Plot Setup screen you can change it by panning and zooming Axes A toggle option to hide or reshow the axes in Plot view Keyboard shortcut Labels A toggle option to hide or reshow the names of the geometric objects A B C etc in Plot view Function Labels A toggle option to hide or reshow the expression that generated a plot with the plot These should not be confused with calculation labels You can show function labels without also showing calculation labels and vice versa Axe 2454 1 2 2 Pointer 3 393 11 78 Zoom Point Shortcuts A toggle option to enable or disable keyboard shortcuts that is hot keys in Plot view With this option enabled the following shortcuts become available Key Result in Plot view Vars Hide or reshow the axes Chors_A Selects the circle drawing tool Follow the instructions on the screen or see page 158 a Erases all trace lines see page 154 TANT Selects the intersection drawing tool Fol
187. S BEGIN INPUT RADIUS END Note that EXPORT Function command for the variable RADIUS appears before the heading of the function where RADIUS is assigned After you a a execute this program EDEBE us new variable named RADIUS appears on the USER GETRADIUS section of the Variables menu The HP Prime has many system variables with names that are apparently the same For example the Function app has a variable named Xmin but so too does the Polar app the Parametric app the Sequence app and the Solve app In a program and in the Home view you can refer to a particular version of these variables by qualifying its name This is done by entering the name of the app or program that the variable belongs to followed by a dot and then the actual variable name For example the qualified variable Function Xmin refers to the value of Xmin within the Function app Similarly the qualified variable Parametric Xmin refers to the value of Xmin in the Parametric app Despite having the same name Xmin the variables could have 512 Programming Functions their arguments and parameters Program ROLLDIE different values You do likewise to declare a local variable in a program specify the name of the program followed by the dot and then variable name You can define your own functions in a program and data can be passed to a function using parameters Functions
188. Size NullPopMean PopStdDev SigLevel Mode configuration Functions and commands 351 HYPZ2mean Input List A list of input variables see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values e Input Parameters SampMean SampSize NullPopMean PopStdDev Siglevel Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not equal Configuration A string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers h header cells will be created acc Accept Reject tZ TestZ tM Test Mean prob Probability cZ Critical Z cxl Critical xbar 1 x2 Critical xbar 2 std Standard deviation The hypothesis test HypZ2mean is a two sample Ztest for comparing means HypZ2mean input list configuration HypZ2mean SampMean SampMean2 SampSize SampSize2 PopStdDev PopStdDev2 SigLevel Mode configuration 352 Functions and commands Input List A list of input variables see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values Input Parameters SampMean SampMean2 SampSize SampSize2 PopStdDev PopStdDev2 Siglevel Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic
189. Solver Not enough data If you are using the simplified input form for a right angled triangle you must specify at least two values 296 Triangle Solver app 20 The Explorer apps There are three explorer apps These are designed for you to explore the relationships between the parameters of a function and the shape of the graph of that function The explorer apps are e Linear Explorer For exploring linear functions Quadratic Explorer For exploring quadratic functions Trig Explorer For exploring sinusoidal functions There are two modes of exploration graph mode and equation mode In graph mode you manipulate a graph and note the corresponding changes in its equation In equation mode you manipulate an equation and note the corresponding changes in its graphical representation Each explorer app has a number of equations and graphs for to explore and app has a test mode In test mode you test you skills at matching equations to graphs Linear Explorer app Open the app The Linear Explorer app can be used to explore the behavior of the graphs of y ax and y ax b as the values of a and b change Press and select Y X Linear Explorer The left half of the display a shows the graph of a or linear function The right VRO half shows the general Eq Graphe incr 1 tevi Tet __ The Explorer apps 297 form of the equation being explored at the top and b
190. Specify up to 10 parametric functions of x and y in terms of t An introduction to HP apps 73 App Use the Symbolic view to Cont Polar Specify up to 10 polar functions of r in terms of an angle 9 Quadratics Not used Explorer Sequence Specify up to 10 sequence functions Solve Specify up to 10 equations Spreadsheet Not used Statistics 1Var Specify up to 5 univariate analyses Statistics 2Var Specify up to 5 multivariate analyses Triangle Solver Not used Trig Explorer Not used Symbolic Setup view The Symbolic Setup view is the same for each app It enables you to override the system wide settings for angle measure number format and complex number entry The override applies only to the current app Polar Symbolic Setup ea Angle Measure System Number Format Radians Degrees Complex Choose Angle Measure To change the settings for all apps see System wide settings on page 30 Plot view The table below outlines what is done in the Plot view of each app App Use the Plot view to Advanced Plot and explore the open sentences Graphing selected in Symbolic view Finance Display an amortization graph Function Plot and explore the functions selected in Symbolic view 74 An introduction to HP apps App Use the Plot view to Cont Geometry Create and manipulate geometric constructions Inference View a plot of the test results Linear Explorer
191. The nth root of x rootv value Example 3V8 returns 2 Functions and commands 309 bom eax Math menu Reciprocal value Example 3 1 returns 333333333333 Negation Also accepts complex numbers value Example 1 2 i Absolute value value x y il matrix returns 1 2 i 72 For a complex number x y i returns yx y Fora matrix matrix returns the Frobenius norm of the matrix Example 1 returns 1 1 2 returns 2 2360679775 Press to open the Toolbox menus one of which is the Math menu The functions and commands available on the Math menu are listed as they are categorized on the menu Statistics 1Var 1Numbers 2 Arithmetic 3 Trigonometry 4 Hyperbolic 5 Probability 6 List 7 Matrix 8 Special MEAS app Cale OK 310 Functions and commands Numbers Ceiling Floor FP Round Truncate Smallest integer greater than or equal to value CEILING value Examples EILING 3 2 returns 4 EILING 3 2 returns 3 Q Q Greatest integer less than or equal to value FLOOR value Example LOOR 3 2 returns 3 FLOOR 3 2 returns 4 Fj Integer part IP value Example IP 23 2 returns 23 Fractional part FP value Example FP 23 2 returns 2 Rounds value to decimal places Also accepts complex numbers ROUND value places ROUND can also ro
192. This section covers only operations common to the apps mentioned See the chapter dedicated to an app for the app specific operations done in Plot Setup view Press to open Plot Setup view Configure Plot view Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Statistics 1 Var Function Plot Setup Statistics 2Var ce 188 The Plot Setup view is used to mos YTICK 1 configure the appearance of Plot view and to set the method by which graphs are plotted The Enter minimum horizontal value 96 An introduction to HP apps configuration options are spread across two pages Tap to move from the first to the second page and to return to the first page Tip When you go to Plot view to see the graph of a definition selected in Symbolic view there may be no graph shown The likely cause of this is that the spread of plotted values is outside the range settings in Plot Setup view A quick way to bring the graph into view is to press reer and select Autoscale This also changes the range settings in Plot Setup view Page 1 Setup field Purpose TRNG Sets the range of T values to be plotted Parametric Note that here are two fields one for the only minimum and one for the maximum value TSTEP Sets the increment between consecutive T Parametric only values ORNG Sets the range of angle values to be Polar only plotted Note that here are two fields one for the minimum and
193. WEB toggles between radians and degrees as the angle measure for x CID o FEW toggles between translating the graph M and changing its frequency or amplitude EEN You make these changes using the cursor keys R enters test mode or SEQ toggles the increment by which parameter values change 2 9 2 6 7 4 or 20 30 45 depending on angle measure setting Open the app Press and select ETSIN Trig Explorer u An equation is shown at the top of the display it k with its graph shown i 4 below it Choose the type of function you want to explore by tapping either or SIN 302 The Explorer apps Graph mode Equation mode The app opens in graph Y 1 SIN 1 X 0 83311 0 7 mode In graph mode you manipulate a copy of gt the graph by pressing the cursor keys All four keys are available The 4 original graph converted to dotted lines remains in place for you to easily see the result of your manipulations When is chosen erasa the cursor keys simply translate the graph horizontally and vertically When is chosen pressing or 4 changes the amplitude of the graph that is it is stretched or shrunk vertically and pressing or changes the frequency of the graph that is it is stretched or shrunk horizontally The or button at the far right of the menu determines the increm
194. X 2 returns 1 5 Root of a function Finds the root of the function Fn if one exists that is closest to the X value guess ROOT Fn guess Example ROOT 3 X2 2 returns 1 732 Slope of a function Returns the slope of the function Fn at the X value if value exists SLOPE Fn value Example SLOPE 3 X 2 returns 4 Solve app functions SOLVE The Solve app has a single function that solves a given equation or expression for one of its variables En may be an equation or expression or it may be the name of one of the Solve Symbolic variables EO E9 Solve Solves an equation for one of its variables Solves the equation En for the variable var using the value of guess as the initial value for the value of the variable var If En is an expression then the value of the variable var that makes the expression equal to zero is returned SOLVE En var guess 344 Functions and commands Example SOLVE X 2 X 2 X 3 returns 2 This function also returns an integer that is indicative of the type of solution found as follows 0 an exact solution was found 1 an approximate solution was found 2 an extremum was found that is as close to a solution as possible 3 neither a solution an approximation nor an extremum was found See chapter 13 Solve app beginning on page 257 for more information about the types of solutions returned by this function Spreadshe
195. Xmax OmYmin AX D2 1 Ymax STARTVIEW 1 1 END VIEWS Set Sides SETSIDES BEGIN REPEAT Programming 523 INPUT SIDES Die Sides N ENTER num sides 2 FLOOR SIDES SIDES IF SIDES lt 2 THEN SGBOX Must be gt 2 END UNTIL SIDES gt 2 END VIEWS Set Rolls SETROLLS BEGIN REPEAT I n F al NPUT ROLLS Num of rolls N Enter umrolls 25 OOR ROLLS ROLLS IF ROLLS lt 1 THEN SGBOX u must enter a num gt 1 END UNTIL ROLLS gt 1 END PLOT BEGIN 1 gt Xmin AX D1 1 gt Xmax OPYmin AX D2 1 gt Ymax STARTVIEW 1 1 END The ROLLMANY routine is an adaptation of the program presented earlier in this chapter Since you cannot pass parameters to a program called through a selection from a custom Views menu the exported variables SIDES and ROLLS are used in place of the parameters that were used in the previous versions The program above calls two other user programs ROLLDIE and DICESIMVARS ROLLDIE appears earlier in this chapter Here is DICESIMVARS Create a program with that name and enter the following code 524 Programming The program DICESIMVARS EXPORT ROLLS SIDES EXPORT DICESIMVARS BEGIN 10 gt ROLLS 6 gt SIDES END Press to see the Dicesimulation custom app menu Here you can set the number
196. Xtick GridLines Xzoom Hmin Ymax Hmax Ymin Hwidth Ytick Labels Yzoom Recenter Numeric D1 D6 D2 D7 D3 D8 D4 D9 D5 DO Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Variables 435 Results Nbltem Min Q1 Med Q3 Max X X2 MeanX sX oX serrX Contains the number of data points in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the minimum value of the data set in the current variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the value of the first quartile in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the median in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the value of the third quartile in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the maximum value in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the sum of the data set in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the sum of the squares of the data set in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the mean of the data set in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the sample standard deviation of the data set in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the population standard deviation of the data set in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the standard error of the data set in the current variable analysis H1 H5 436 Variables Statistics 2Var app variables Category Names Results Nbltem sX explained Corr ox below CoefDet serrX
197. _Vars KSA_Vars coed K_View KS_View KA View KSA_View Fae K_Xttn KS_Xttn KA_Xttn KSA_Xttn te K_Help KA_Help KSA_Help eaer K_Menu KS_Menu KA_Menu KSA_Menu K_Esc KS Esc KA_Esc KSA_Esc K_Cas KS_Cas KA Cas KSA_Cas K_Math KS_Math KA_Math KSA_Math ag K_Templ KS_Temp KA_Templ KSA_Templ er K_Paren KS_Paren KA_Paren KSA_Paren ewe K_Eex KS_Eex KA_Eex KSA_Fex K_Mul KS_Mul KA_Mul KSA_Mul Ema CE K_Space KS_Space KA_Space KSA_Space App programs An app is a unified collection of views programs notes and associated data Creating an app program allows you to redefine the app s views and how a user will interact with those views This is done with a dedicated program functions with special names and b by redefining the views in the Views menu Programming 519 Using These programs are run when the keys shown in the table dedicated below are pressed These program functions are designed program to be used in the context of an app functions Program Name Equivalent Keystrokes Symb Symbolic view SymbSetup Symbolic Setup Plot Plot view PlotSetup Plot Setup Num Numeric view NumSetup Numeric Setup Info Info view START Starts an app RESET Resets or initializes an app Redefining The Views menu allows any app to define views in the Views addition to the standard seven views shown in the table above By default each HP app has its own set of menu y PP additional views contained in this m
198. a light back ground Dark white text on a dark back ground At the far right is a option for you to choose a color for the shading such as the color of the highlight Page 3 of the Home Settings input form is for setting Exam mode This mode enables certain functions of the calculator to be disabled for a set period with the disabling controlled by a password This feature will primarily be of interest to those who supervise examinations and who need to ensure that the calculator is used appropriately by students sitting an examination It is described in detail in chapter 4 Exam Mode starting on page 61 Page 4 of the Home Settings input form is for configuring your HP Prime to work with the HP Prime Wireless Kit Visit www hp com support for further information Specifying a Home setting This example demonstrates how to change the number format from the default setting Standard to Scientific with two decimal places 34 Getting started Press Home Settings i Settings to open the Angle Measure Radians m Number Format Standard Home Settings Entry Textbook input form Integers Hex B32 if Complex a b i The Angle Language English Measure field is Decimal Mark Dot highlighted Choose OAR Tap on Number Format either the field label or the field This selects the field You could also have pressed to select it Tap on Number Home Settings For
199. a variable Example assume n integer additionally n gt 5 Returns the list of the symbolic variable names used in an expression The list is ordered by the algebraic extensions required to build the original expression algvar Expr Example algvar sqrt x y gives y x Returns the solution when 10 is taken to the power of an expression alog10 Expr Example alog10 3 gives 1000 Draws the altitude through A of the triangle ABC altitude Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Pnt or Cp1x C Example altitude A B C draws a line passing through point A that is perpendicular to BC Logical And expri AND expr2 Example 3 1 4 AND 4 lt 5 returns 1 Displays the value of the measure of the angle AB AC at point z0 angleatraw Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Pnt or Cp1x z0 Returns the previous answer Ans Functions and commands 375 append apply approx areaat areaatraw ASIN assume ATAN barycenter Appends an element to a list sequence or set append Lst Seq Set Elem Example append 1 2 3 4 gives 1 2 3 4 Returns the result of applying a function to the elements in a list apply Fnc Lst Example apply x gt x 3 1 2 3 gives 1 8 27 With one argument returns the numerical evaluation of it With a second argument returns the numerical evaluation of the first argument with the number of significant figures taken from the second argumen
200. a variable named CO to C9 There are three ways to get data into a column Go to Numeric view and enter the data directly See Getting started with the Statistics 2Var app on page 221 for an example Go to Home view and copy the data from a list For example if you enter L1 C1 in Home view the items in list L1 are copied into column C1 in the Statistics 1Var app Go to Home view and copy the data from a the Spreadsheet app For example suppose the data of interest is in A1 A10 in the Spreadsheet app and you want to copy it into column c7 With the Statistics 2Var app open return to Home view and enter Spreadsheet Al A10 oy ae A data column must have at least four data points to provide valid two variable statistics 226 Statistics 2Var app Whichever method you use the data you enter is automatically saved You can leave this app and come back to it later You will find that the data you last entered is still available After entering the data you must define data sets and the way they are to be plotted in Symbolic view Numeric view menu items The buttons you can tap on in Numeric view are Purpose Edit a data set Copies the highlighted item to the entry line Inserts a new cell above the highlighted cell and gives ita value of 0 Opens an input form for you to choose to sort the data in various ways Displays a menu for you to choose the small medium or large
201. able of values For a description of the menu buttons common to the other apps that are also available in this app see Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons on page 86 Plot view Summary of menu buttons on page 96 Solve app 257 One equation Suppose you want to find the acceleration needed to increase the speed of a car from 16 67 m s 60 kph to 27 78 m s 100 kph over a distance of 100 m The equation to solve is V U 2AD where V final speed U initial speed A acceleration needed and D distance Open the 1 Open the Solve app WE1 Solve app Select Solve HE2 The Solve app starts in a PEF MEG Symbolic view where you aE i i HES specify the equation to a solve Enter function EDIT CHK NOTE In addition to the builtin variables you can use one or more variables you created yourself either in Home view or in the CAS For example if you ve created a variable called ME you could include it in an equation such as this Y G ME Functions defined in other apps can also be referenced in the Solve app For example if you have defined F1 X to be X 10 in the Function app you can enter F1 X 50 in the Solve app to solve the equation X2 10 50 Clear the 2 If you have no need for any equations or expressions already app and defined press Clear Tap to confirm your define the intention to clear the app equation a 3 Define the equation eoe
202. after an element has been entered moves the cursor to the right moves it downward and does not move it at all Displays a menu for you to choose 1 2 3 or 4 columns to be displayed at a time Deletes the highlighted row or column or the entire matrix You are prompted to make a choice Moves the cursor to the first row last row first column or last column respectively Matrices 467 To create a matrix in the Matrix Editor Matrices in Home view Open the Matrix Catalog het Matrix If you want to create a vector press or until the matrix you want to use is highlighted tap IZ and then press __ Continue from step 4 below If you want to create a matrix either tap on the name of the matrix MO M9 or press or until the matrix you want to use is highlighted and then press Note that an empty matrix will be shown with a size of 1 1 beside its name For each element in the matrix type a number or an expression and then tap or press _ J You can enter complex numbers in complex form that is a b where a is the real part and b is the imaginary part You can also enter them in the form atbi By default on entering an element the cursor moves to the next column in the same row You can use the cursor keys to move to a different row or column You can also change the direction the cursor automatically moves by tapping WEIB The button toggles between the
203. ain menu The commands in this menu are described in Commands under the Cmds menu beginning on page 531 502 Programming Button or Key Meaning Continued Vars Chors_A Chars EmO and mo BH and mo Opens a menu from which you can select common programming commands The commands are grouped under the options Block Branch e Loop e Variable e Function Press to return to the main menu The commands in this menu are described in Commands under the Tmplt menu beginning on page 525 Displays menus for selecting variable names and values Displays a palette of characters If you display this palette while a program is open you can choose a character and it will be be added to your program at the cursor point To add one character highlight it and tap or press yep To add a character without closing the characters palette select it and tap EIB Moves the cursor to the end or beginning of the current line You can also swipe the screen Moves the cursor to the start or end of the program You can also swipe the screen Programming 503 Button or Key Meaning Continued and Moves the cursor one screen aena ED right or left You can also g g swipe the screen Starts a new line Deletes the character to the left of the cursor Deletes the character to the right of the cursor Deletes the entire program To con
204. aining n terms If the number of elements in the list is not divisible by n then the matrix is completed with zeros list2mat Lst 1 Intg n Example list2mat 1 8 4 91 1 gives 1 8 4 9 Returns the natural logarithm of an expression ln Expr Returns a list of the variables in an expression lname Expr Example Iname exp x 2 sin y gives x y Returns the expanded form of a logarithmic expression inexpand Expr Example lnexpand 1n 3 x gives 1n 3 1n x Used in programming to define local variables LOCAL varl var2 varn locus M A draws the locus of M locus d A draws the envelope of d A element C C is a curve locus Pnt Elem Returns the natural logarithm of an expression LOG Expr Returns the log base 10 of an expression log10 Expr Example log10 10 gives 1 398 Functions and commands logarithmic_ regression logb logistic_ regression lvar magenta map Returns the coefficients a and b of y a In x b where y is the natural logarithm that best approximates the points whose coordinates are the elements in two lists or the rows of a matrix logarithmic regression Lst Mtrx A Lst Example logarithmic regression 1 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 3 0 9 0 4 0 16 0 gives 10 1506450002 0 564824055818 Returns the logarithm of base b of a logb a b Example logb 5 2 gives 1n 5 1n 2 which is approximately 2 321
205. al quantity You can attach a unit of measurement to any number or numerical result A numerical value with units attached is referred to as a measurement You can operate on measurements just as you do on numbers without attached units The units are kept with the numbers in subsequent operations The units are on the Units menu Press Units and if necessary tap WAS Function gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt jsAcceleration The menu is organized by category Each category is listed at the left with the units in the selected category listed at the right length e acceleration electricity area e force e light volume energy angle time power e viscosity speed e pressure radiation mass e temperature Units and constants 445 Prefixes The Units menu includes an entry that is not a unit category namely Prefix Selecting this option displays a palette of prefixes Function Y yotta Z zetta E exa P peta T tera G giga M mega k kilo h hecto D deca d deci c centi m milli u micro n nano p pico f femto a atto z zepto y octo Unit prefixes provide a handy way of entering large or small numbers For example the speed of light is approximately 300 000 m s If you wanted to use that in a calculation you could enter it as 300_km s with the prefix k selected from the prefix palette Select the prefix you want before selecting the unit Uni
206. ale factor k maps A onto A such that A is on line CA and CA CA k where CA and CA denote the 163 lengths of the corresponding segments If k 1 then the lengths CA and CA are reciprocals Suppose you wish to find the inversion of a circle GC with a point on the circle GD as center 1 Tap and select More gt Inversion 2 Tap the point that is to be the center GD of the inversion circle and press _ er_ 3 Enter the inversion ratio use the default value of 1 and press 4 Tap on the circle GC and press _ You will see that the inversion is a line ee ly sa AX yo r 5 f 10 Pointer 12 7 8 1 Reciprocation A reciprocation is a special case of inversion involving circles A reciprocation with respect to a circle transforms each point in the plane into its polar line Conversely the reciprocation with respect to a circle maps each line in the plane into its pole 1 Tap and select More gt Reciprocation 2 Tap the circle and press _ _ 3 Tap a point and press x y ho to see its polar _ line k f gt 4 Tap a line and press 4 to see its pole Le In the illustration to the i i 15 _ 10 _ 5 O Pointer 16 8 3 7 right point K is the reciprocation of line DE G and Line at the bottom of the display is the reciprocation of point H 164 Geometry Geo
207. alf Expr Int Example evalf 2 3 gives 0 666666666667 Functions and commands 385 exact exbisector excircle EXP exponential_ regression EXPORT Converts an irrational expression to a rational or real expression exact Expr Example exact 1 4141 gives 14141 10000 Draws the exterior bisector of the angle AB AC given by A B and C exbisector Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Pnt or Cplx C Example exbisector 0 4i 4 draws the line given by y x Draws the excircle of the triangle ABC excircle Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Pnt or Cplx C Example excircle GA GB GC draws the circle tangent to BC and to the rays AB and AC Returns the solution to the mathematical constant e to the power of an expression exp Expr Example exp 0 gives 1 Returns the coefficients a b of y b a x where y is the exponential which best approximates the points whose coordinates are the elements in two lists or the rows of a matrix exponential regression Lst Mtrx A Lst Example exponential regression 1 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 4 0 7 0 gives 1 60092225473 1 10008339351 Export Exports the function FunctionName so that it is globally available and appears on the User menu m EXPORT FunctionName 386 Functions and commands EXPR Parses the string str into a number or expression expr str Examples expr 2 3 returns 5 expr X 10 returns 100
208. algorithm returns the quadratic form of an expression written as a sum or difference of squares of the variables given in VectVar gauss Expr VectVar Example gauss x 2 2 a x y x y gives a yt x 2 y 2 a 2 Returns the color of the pixel G with coordinates x y GETPIX P G xposition yposition G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO the current graphic Creates a Galois Field of characteristic p with p n elements GF Intg p Intg n Example F 5 9 gives GF 5 k 9 k 8 2 k 7 2 k 5 k 2 2 k 2 k K g undef Functions and commands 389 gramschmidt green half_cone half_line halftan2hypexp halt hamdist harmonic_ conjugate For a basis B of a vector subspace and a function Sp that defines a scalar product on this vector subspace returns an orthonormal basis for Sp gramschmidt Basis B ScalarProd Sp Example gramschmidt 1 1 x p q gt integrate p q x 1 1 gives 1 sqrt 2 1 x 1 sqrt 6 3 Used with display to specify the color of the geometrical object to be displayed Draws a half cone with vertex A direction v half angle t and if applicable height h half_cone Pnt A Vect v Real t Real h Draws the half line AB with A as the origin half line Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Returns an expression with sin x cos x tan x rewritten in terms of tan x 2 and sinh x cosh x tanh x
209. also be chosen from the relations palette BHE j 8 0 K E 3 4 ANDOR fo NOT XOR Inserts opening parenthesis Multiplication symbol Returns the product of numbers or the scalar product of two vectors Addition symbol Returns the term by term sum of two lists or two matrices or adds two strings together Subtraction symbol Returns the term by term subtraction of two lists or two matrices List or matrix multiplication symbol Returns the term by term multiplication of two lists or two matrices Lst Mtrx Lst Mtrx Example 1 2 3 4 1 3 4 5 611 gives 3 8 15 24 List or matrix division symbol Returns the term by term division of two lists or two matrices Returns the list or matrix where each term is the corresponding term of the list or matrix given as argument raised to the power n Lst or Mtrx Intg n Stores the evaluated expression in the variable Note that cannot be used with the graphics variables GO G9 See the command BLIT var expression Example A 3 stores the value 3 in the variable A Functions and commands 373 lt gt abcuv ACOS Strict inequality test Returns 1 if the inequality is true and O if the inequality is false Note that more than two objects can be compared Thus 6 lt 8 lt 11 returns 1 because it is true whereas 6 lt 8 lt 3 returns O as it is false Inequality test Returns 1 if the inequality is true an
210. alue The numbers below the a x H3 Min 2 plot give the statistic at the cursor You can see other statistics by pressing Dor The normal probability plot is used to determine whether or not sample data is more or less normally distributed The more linear the data appear the more likely that the data are normally distributed The line plot connects points of the form x y where x is the row number of the data point and y is its value The bar graph shows the value of a data point as a vertical bar placed along the x axis at the row number of the data point wl 1 0 0471698113208 ii 15 H3 X 2 Y 1 6448536270 e 7 x 0 0471698113208 i 45 I H3 1 2 0 0471698113208 15 7 H3 1 2 218 Statistics 1Var app Pareto chart A pareto chart places the fro data in descending order and displays each with its percentage of the whole H1 180 of Total 26 47 Setting up the plot Plot Setup view Histogram width Histogram range The Plot Setup view E1 EB enables you to specify many of the same plotting parameters as other apps such as X Rng and Y Rng There are two settings unique to the Statistics 1Var app H Width enables you to specify the width of a histogram bin This determines how many bins will fit in the display as well as how the data is distributed that is how ma
211. alue for A In a program type nbhSideA where n gt 0 The length of Side B Sets the length of the side opposite the angle B From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for B In a program type nhSideB where n gt 0 The length of Side C Sets the length of the side opposite the angle C From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for C In a program type nhSidec where n gt 0 The measure of angle a Sets the measure of angle a The value of this variable will be interpreted according to the angle mode setting Degrees or Radians From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for angle a Programming 569 In a program type nbAngleA where n gt 0 AngleB The measure of angle B Sets the measure of angle Bp The value of this variable will be interpreted according to the angle mode setting Degrees or Radians From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for angle In a program type nbAngleB where n gt 0 AngleC The measure of angle 6 Sets the measure of angle 8 The value of this variable will be interpreted according to the angle mode setting Degrees or Radians From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for angle 8 In a program type nbAnglec where n gt 0 RECT Corresponds to the status of in the Numeric view of the Triangle Solver app Determines whether a general triangle solver or a right t
212. an C1 and C2 Statistics 2Var Symbolic View tefl sifr e Type1 Linear W Fit M x B S2 Type2 Linear W Fit2 M x B s3 Enter independent column 222 Statistics 2Var app Explore statistics Select a fit From the Type 1 field select a fit In this example select Linear If you want to choose a color for the graph of the data in Plot view Logarithmic Exponential Power Exponent Inverse Logistic Quadratic Cubic Statistics 2Var Symbolic View 11 150 see Choose a color for plots on page 85 If you have more than one analysis defined in Symbolic view deselect any analysis you are not currently interested in Find the correlation r between advertising time and sales The correlation is r 0 8995 Find the mean advertising time x The mean advertising time is 3 33333 minutes X S1 n 6 r 8 995309e 1 R 8 091559E 1 sCOV_ 1 135667 3 oCOV_ 9 463889e2 2XY 41595 899530938561 es X S1 R 3 333333333 x 20 De 80 sX 1 632993162 oX 1 490711985 serrX 6 666667E71 3 33333333333 stats J xe v size column ox _ Statistics 2Var app 223 10 Find the mean sales gt The mean sales 7 is approximately 1 796 Press to X S1 9 1 7958333E3 ZY 10775 ZY 22338725 sY 7 7312623E2 oY 7 0576446E2 serrY 3 1562746E2 1795 8333
213. and User variables For information on Home and CAS variables see chapter 22 Variables beginning on page 427 Not all app variables are used in every app S1Fit for example is only used in the Statistics 2Var app However most of the variables are used in common by the Function app the Parametric app the Polar app the Sequence app the Solve app the Statistics 1Var app the Statistics 2Var app and others If a variable is not available in all of these apps or is available only in some other apps then a list of the apps where the variable can be used appears under the variable name The following sections list the app variables by the view in which they are used To see the variables listed by the menus in which they appears on the Variables menu see App variables beginning on page 432 Plot view variables Axes Cursor Turns axes on or off In Plot Setup view check or uncheck AXES In a program type 0 gt Axes to turn axes on 1 gt Axes to turn axes off Sets the type of cursor Inverted or blinking is useful if the background is solid In Plot Setup view choose Cursor 554 Programming GridDots GridLines Hmin Hmax Statistics 1 Var Hwidth Statistics 1 Var Labels In a program type 0 gt CrossType for solid crosshairs default 1 gt CrossType to invert the crosshairs 2 gt CrossType for blinking crosshairs Turns the background dot grid
214. and angles of a right angled triangle a simpler input form is available by tapping Ga Getting started with the Triangle Solver app The following example calculates the unknown length of the side of a triangle whose two known sides of lengths 4 and 6 meet at an angle of 30 degrees Open the Triangle Solver app 1 Open the Triangle Solver app Select Triangle Solver The app opens in Numeric view Triangle Solver Enter 3 out of 6 values b B c a b Enter length of side a F ecit __ Degree Rect __ solve Triangle Solver app 293 Set angle measure Note Specify the known values 2 If there is unwanted data from a previous calculation you can clear it all by pressing Clear Make sure that your angle measure mode is appropriate By default the app starts in degree mode If the angle information you have is in radians and your current angle measure mode is degrees change the mode to degrees before running the solver Tap or depending on the mode you want The button is a toggle button The lengths of the sides are labeled a b and and the angles are labeled A B and C It is important that you enter the known values in the appropriate fields In our example we know the length of two sides and the angle at which those sides meet Hence if we specify the lengths of sides a and b we must enter the angle as since is the angle where A and B meet
215. ar on the Eq ett button at the bottom of the screen 7 CIWO In equation mode you use the cursor keys to Ege Graph incr i tev2 Test _ move between parameters in the equation and change their values observing the effect on the graph displayed Press or to decrease or increase the value of the selected parameter Press or to select another parameter Press 7 to change the sign of a Tap to enter test 2 Y 1 X mode In Test mode you test your skill at matching est H an equation to the graph shown Test mode is like equation mode in that you use the cursor keys to qu gu GEEPREEERETETREETS select and change the value of each parameter in the equation The goal is to try to match the graph that is shown The app displays the graph of a randomly chosen linear function of the form dictated by your choice of level Tap or to change the level Now press the cursor keys to select a parameter and set its value When you are ready tap to see if you have correctly matched your equation to the given graph Tap to see the correct answer and tap to exit Test mode The Explorer apps 299 Quadratic Explorer app Open the app The Quadratic Explorer app can be used to investigate the behavior of y a x h v as the values of a h and v change Press and select Y X Quadratic Explorer cafi i The left
216. argument x and y are taken as the default variable conic Expr LstVar Example conic x 2 y 2 81 draws a circle with center at 0 0 and radius of 9 If the list or set contains the element e returns 1 the index of the first occurrence of e in If the list or set does not contain e returns O contains Lst 1 or Set 1 Elem e Example contains 0 1 2 3 2 gives 3 Used in programming to bypass remaining statements in the current iteration and begin the next iteration in a loop Returns the value of an expression subjected to a command convert Expr Cmd Example convert 20 m 1 ft returns 65 6167979003 ft 380 Functions and commands convexhull CopyVar correlation cos count covariance covariance_correl atio Returns the convex hull of a list of two dimensional points convexhull Lst Example convexhull 0 1 1 i 1 2i 1 i 1 3i 2 1i gives 1 3 i 14 2 i 2 i 1 i Copies the first variable into the second variable without evaluation CopyVar Varl Var2 Returns the correlation of the elements of a list or matrix correlation Lst Mtrx Example correlation 1 2 1 1 4 7 gives 33 6 sqrt 31 Cosine cosx COS value Applies a function to the elements in a list or matrix and returns their sum count Fnc Lst Mtrx Example count x gt x 2 12 45 3 7 78 gives 147 Returns the covariance of the elements in a list or matrix covarian
217. arts Once you have entered your data and defined your data set you can plot your data You can plot up to five box and whisker plots at a time however with the other types you can only plot one at a time l The first set of numbers pe below the plot indicate where the cursor is In the example at the right the cursor is in the bin for data between 5 and 6 but not including 6 f and the frequency for 1856 Ee In the Symbolic view select the data sets you want to plot From the Plotn menu select the plot type For any plot but especially for a histogram adjust the plotting scale and range in the Plot Setup view If you find histogram bars too fat or too thin you can adjust them by changing the HWIDTH setting See Setting up the plot Plot Setup view on page 219 Press Mg If the scaling is not to your liking press and select Autoscale Autoscale can be relied upon to give a good starting scale which can then be adjusted either directly in the Plot view or in the Plot Setup view Statistics 1 Var app 217 Box and Whisker plot Normal probability plot Line plot Bar graph that bin is 6 The data set is defined by H3 in Symbolic view You can see information about other bins by pressing or The left whisker marks the minimum data value The box marks the first quartile the median and the third quartile The right whisker marks the maximum data v
218. arycenter pointl point2 pointn Example isobarycenter 3 3 3 V3 i returns point 3 V3 i 3 which is equivalent to 0 V3 Returns the midpoint of a segment The argument can be either the name of a segment or two points that define a segment In the latter case the segment need not actually be drawn midpoint segment or midpoint pointl point2 Example midpoint 0 6 6i returns point 3 3 Returns the orthocenter of a triangle that is the intersection of the three altitudes of a triangle The argument can be either the name of a triangle or three non collinear points that define a triangle In the latter case the triangle does not need to be drawn orthocenter triangle or orthocenter pointl point2 point3 Example orthocenter 0 4i 4 returns 0 0 Creates a point given the coordinates of the point Each coordinate may be a value or an expression involving variables or measurements on other objects in the geometric construction point reall real2 or point exprl expr2 Examples point 3 4 creates a point whose coordinates are 3 4 This point may be selected and moved later point abscissa A ordinate B creates a point whose x coordinate is the same as that of a point A and whose y coordinate is the same as that of a point B This point will change to reflect the movements of point A or point B 167 point2d trace stop trace erase trace Randomly re distributes a set of points
219. as x and the assumption is that u 0 and o 1 NORMALD H 6 x Example NORMALD 0 5 and NORMALD 0 1 0 5 both return 0 352065326764 Student s t probability density function Computes the probability density of the Student s t distribution at x given n degrees of freedom STUDENT n x Example student 3 5 2 returns 0 00366574413491 x probability density function Computes the probability density of the x distribution at x given n degrees of freedom CHISQUARE n x Example CHISQUARE 2 3 2 returns 0 100948258997 Fisher or Fisher Snedecor probability density function Computes the probability density at the value x given numerator n and denominator d degrees of freedom FISHER n d x Example FISHER 5 5 2 returns 0 158080231095 Functions and commands 317 Binomial Poisson Cumulative Normal Binomial probability density function Computes the probability of k successes out of n trials each with a probability of success of p Returns Comb n k if there is no third argument Note that n and k are integers with k lt n BINOMIAL n k p Example Suppose you want to know the probability that just 6 heads would appear during 20 tosses of a fair coin BINOMIAL 20 6 0 5 returns 0 03696441652002 Poisson probability mass function Computes the probability of k occurrences of an event during a future interval given u the mean of the occurrences of that event during that
220. at in Modes In a program type 0 gt AAngle for System default 1 gt AAngle for Degrees 2 gt AAngle for Radians Sets the complex number mode From Symbolic setup choose System ON or OFF System default will force this setting to agree with the corresponding setting in Home Modes In a program type 0 gt AComplex for System default 1 gt AComplex for ON 2 gt AComplex for OFF Defines the number of decimal places to use for the Fixed number format in the app s Symbolic Setup Affects results in the Home view From Symbolic setup enter a value in the second field of Number Format In a program type n gt ADigits where 0 lt n lt 11 Defines the number display format used for number display in the Home view and to label axes in the Plot view From Symbolic setup choose Standard Fixed Scientific or Engineering in the Number Format field Programming 573 Results variables In a program store the constant number or its name into the variable AFormat O System 1 Standard 2 Fixed 3 Scientific 4 Engineering Example Scientific gt AFormat or 3 gt AFormat The Function Linear Solver Statistics 1Var Statistics 2Var and Inference apps offer functions that generate results that can be re used outside those apps such as in a program For example the Function app can find a root of a function and that root is written to a variable called Root That
221. atalog for notes 2 Connect the USB cable between the two calculators The micro A connector with the rectangular end must be inserted into the USB port on the sending calculator 3 On the sending calculator highlight the object you want to send and tap ZB In the illustration at Program Catalog j 1 Sequence OKB the right a program Pes ae named Scores OKB SimpleCounter lt 1KB TriangleCalcs has been selected in the Program Catalog and will be sent to the connected calculator when is tapped Online Help Press to open the online help The help initially provided is context sensitive that is it is always about the current view and its menu items For example to get help on the Function app press W select Function and press 8 From within the help system tapping displays a hierarchical directory of all the help topics You can navigate through the directory to other help topics or use the search facility to quickly find a topic You can find help on any key view or command Getting started 45 46 Getting started Reverse Polish Notation RPN The HP Prime provides you with three ways of entering objects in Home view Textbook An expression is entered in much the same way was if you were writing it on paper with some arguments above or below others In other words your entry could be two dimensional as in the following example LN 5 LLE e
222. ation ny Sample 1 size n2 Sample 2 size C Confidence level Pooled Whether or not to pool the samples based on their standard deviations Results The results are Result Description C Confidence level DF Degrees of freedom Critical T Critical values for T Lower Lower bound for A u Upper Upper bound for Au 255 Inference app 256 Inference app 13 Solve app The Solve app enables you to define up to ten equations or expressions each with as many variables as you like You can solve a single equation or expression for one of its variables based on a seed value You can also solve a system of equations linear or non linear again using seed values Note the differences between an equation and an expression e An equation contains an equals sign Its solution is a value for the unknown variable that makes both sides of the equation have the same value e An expression does not contain an equals sign Its solution is a root a value for the unknown variable that makes the expression have a value of zero For brevity the term equation in this chapter will cover both equations and expressions Solve works only with real numbers Getting started with the Solve app The Solve app uses the customary app views Symbolic Plot and Numeric described in chapter 5 though the Numeric view is significantly different from the other apps as it is dedicated to numerical solving rather than to displaying a t
223. ation such as operators number variables etc and create a new calculation You don t need to first select Ans before it can be part of a new calculation If you press a binary operator key to begin a new calculation Ans is automatically added to the entry line as the first component of the new calculation For example to multiply the last answer by 13 you could enter S J13 _f _J But the first two keystrokes are unnecessary All you need to enter is L 13 Se The variable Ans is always stored with full precision whereas the results in history will only have the precision determined by the current Number Format setting see page 31 In other words when you retrieve the number assigned to Ans you get the result to its full precision but when you retrieve a number from history you get exactly what was displayed You can repeat the previous calculation simply by pressing fr This can be useful if the previous calculation involved Ans For example suppose you want to calculate the nth root of 2 when n is 2 4 8 16 32 and so on 1 Calculate the square root of 2 2 2 Now enter VAns Gna BML J e This calculates the fourth root of 2 Getting started 41 To reuse an expression or result from the CAS 3 Press repeatedly Each time you press the root is twice the previous 2 1 41421356237 root The last answer fans 1 189207115 1 09050773266
224. bles If for example you have created a variable called cost you could incorporate that into a definition either by typing it or choosing it from the User menu one of the sub menus of the Variables menu Thus you could have a definition that reads F1 X X COST To select a user variable press 5 tap IEE select User Variables and then select the variable of interest From Home variables Some Home variables can be incorporated into a symbolic definition To access a Home variable press 3 tap EET select a category of variable and select the variable of interest Thus you could have a definition that 82 An introduction to HP apps reads F1 X X2 Q Q is on the Real sub menu of the Home menu Home variables are discussed in detail in chapter 28 Troubleshooting beginning on page 507 From app variables All settings definitions and results for all apps are stored as variables Many of these variables can be incorporated into a symbolic definition To access app variables press 5 tap EERE select the app select the category of variable and then select the variable of interest You could for instance have a definition that reads F2 X X X Root The value of the last root calculated in the Function app is substituted for Root when this definition is evaluated App variables are discussed in detail in chapter 28 Troubleshooting beginning on page 507 From math functions Some
225. c If not checked the calcu lator is in approximate mode and solutions will be approximate For example 26 1 5 yields in exact mode and 5 2 in approxi mate mode 56 Computer algebra system CAS Setting Purpose Cont Complex Use V Use i Principal Increasing Select this to allow complex results in variables If checked second order polyno mials are factorized in complex mode or in real mode if the dis criminant is positive If checked the calculator is in complex mode and complex solu tions will be displayed when they exist If not checked the calculator is in real mode and only real solu tions will be displayed For exam ple factors x 1 yields x 1 x 1 x i x i in complex mode and x 1 x 1 x2 1 in real mode If checked the principal solutions to trigonometric functions will be displayed If not checked the gen eral solutions to trigonometric func tions will be displayed If checked polynomials will be displayed with increasing powers for example 4 x 3x x If not checked polynomials will be dis played with decreasing powers for example x3 3x x 4 Page 2 Setting Purpose Recursive Evaluation Specify the maximum number of embedded variables allowed in an interactive evaluation See also Recursive Replacement below Computer algebra system CAS 57 Setting Purpose Cont Recursive Replacemen
226. calculate a confidence interval for the difference between the proportions of successes in two populations Inputs The inputs are Field Definition name x Sample 1 success count Ry Sample 2 success count ny Sample 1 size Ny Sample 2 size c Confidence level Results The results are Result Description C Confidence level Critical Z Critical values for Z Lower Lower bound for Ar Upper Upper bound for Ar Inference app 253 One Sample T Interval Menu name TInt 1 u This option uses the Student s t distribution to calculate a confidence interval for p the true mean of a population for the case in which the true population standard deviation o is unknown Inputs The inputs are Field name X s n C Results The results are Definition Sample mean Sample standard deviation Sample size Confidence level Result Description C DF Critical T Lower Upper Confidence level Degrees of freedom Critical values for T Lower bound for u Upper bound for u Two Sample T Interval Menu name T Int wy u2 This option uses the Student s t distribution to calculate a confidence interval for the difference between the means of two populations u1 u2 when the population standard deviations ojand o are unknown 254 Inference app Inputs The inputs are Result Definition Ry Sample 1 mean X Sample 2 mean S Sample 1 standard deviation S2 Sample 2 standard devi
227. caling options are also available by pressing kan 282 Sequence app Set up the table of values The Numeric Setup view provides options common to most of the graphing apps although there is no zoom factor as the domain for the sequences is the set of counting numbers See Sequence Num Setup Num Step 1 Num Zoom 4 Num Type Automatic Enter table start value mmer Common operations in Numeric Setup view on page 105 for more information Another example Explicitly defined sequences In the following example we define the nth term of a sequence simply in terms of n itself In this case there is no need to enter either of the first two terms numerically Define the expression Setup the plot e Define 2 N ui 3 Select U1 N and select D 2 3 OO n Open the Plot Setup view Setup Reset all settings to their default values Clear Tap Seq Plot and select Cobweb Sequence Symbolic View a 35 U1 1 Bue N V Ut N 2 3 U2 1 N 2 3 Sequence Plot Setup Seq Plot Cobweb N Rng 1 24 X Rng 1 1 Y Rng 1 1 Y Tick 1 Enter horizontal tick spacing COENE qan a Set both X Rng and Y Rng to 1 1 as shown above Sequence app 283 Plot the 6 Plot the sequence sequence A Press to see ml the dotted
228. can calculate confidence intervals and test hypotheses based on data in the Statistics 1 Var and Statistics 2Var apps The following example illustrates the process A series of six experiments gives the following values as the boiling point of a liquid 82 5 83 1 82 6 83 7 82 4 and 83 0 Based on this sample we want to estimate the true boiling point at the 90 confidence level 1 Open the Statistics Statistics 1Var Numeric View eee 1Var app Select Statistics 1Var nn Enter value or expression Peat ins size Make stars 2 If there is unwanted data in the app clear it All columns 3 In column D1 enter the boiling points TPE found during the ge experiments s37 8205 He 83L j Et 822 J Enter value or expression Edit Ins E Size a Stats 83l 7 822 J4 83 Inference app 241 Calculate 4 Calculate statistics e e y statistics lt i a z 16 The statistics iat ees n Q1 82 5 calculated will now Mea b28 f Q3 83 1 be imported into the Max 3 7 X 4497 3 X 41219 07 Inference app z BOOT sX 44 875107E 1 5 Tap to close s Mitaa the statistics window MEDAD Open the 6 Open the Inference Inference Symbolic View i Inference app and clear the Method Hypothesis test current settings ype iZ Test 1 y app n g Alt Hypoth u lt po Select Inference
229. can enter text in different formats in the Note Editor Choose a formatting option before you start entering text The formatting options are described in Formatting options below Formatting options are available from three touch buttons in the Note Editor and in the Info view of an app Farmall Sivie f e The formatting options are listed in the table below Category Options 10 22 pt Font Size Select from twenty colors Foreground Color Select from twenty colors Background Color e Left Align e Center text alignment e Right 494 Notes and Info Options Continued Category Font Style Bold Italic Underline Strikethrough Superscript Subscript gt x Cancels bullet Bullets Inserting You can insert a mathematical mathematical expression expressions in textbook format into your note as shown in the figure to the right The Note Editor uses the same 2D editor that the Home and CAS views MYNOTE The Quadtratic Formula states that If A X B X C 0 B B 4 A C then X 2 A Format sye J insert employ activated via the menu button 1 Enter the text you want When you come to the point where you want to start a mathematical expression top Ea 2 Enter the mathematical expression just as you would in Home or CAS views You can use the math template as well as any function in the Toolbox menus 3 When you have finished ent
230. ce Lst Mtrx Example covariance 1 2 1 1 4 7 gives 11 3 Returns the list of the covariance and the correlation of the elements of a list or matrix covariance correlation Lst Mtrx Example covariance correlation 1 2 1 1 4 7 gives 11 3 33 6 sqrt 31 Functions and commands 381 cpartfrac crationalroot cube cumSum cyan cylinder DEBUG Returns the result of partial fraction decomposition of a rational fraction in the complex field cpartfrac RatFrac Example cpartfrac x 4 x 2 gives 1 x 2 2 1 xt2 2 2 Returns the list of complex rational roots of a polynomial without indicating the multiplicity crationalroot Poly Example crationalroot 2 x 3 5 7 i x 2 4 14 i x 8 4 i gives 3 i 2 2 i 1 i Draws a cube with a vertex at the line AB and a face in the plane containing A B and C cube Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Returns the list sequence or string whose elements are the cumulative sum of the original list sequence or string cumSum Lst Seq IStr Example cumSum 0 1 2 3 4 gives 0 1 3 6 10 Used with display to specify the color of the geometrical object to be displayed Draws a cylinder with axis from A in the direction of vector v with radius r and if provided with height h cylinder Pnt A Vect v Real r Real h Starts the debugger for the program name you specify In a program DEBUG
231. cell referencing 198 entering content 199 external functions 201 external referencing 202 format parameters 207 formatting 206 functions 208 345 362 gestures 197 importing data 200 menu buttons 205 naming cells 198 navigating 197 selecting cells 197 variables 203 433 square zoom 90 93 stack in RPN 48 51 stairsteps graph 279 standard number format 31 statistical calculations 216 231 statistical fit types 229 230 statistical plots 217 219 232 Statistics 1Var 70 209 220 data set definitions 210 deleting data 215 228 editing data 214 entering frequencies 21 functions 363 generating data 215 importing data from a spreadsheet 213 inserting data 213 215 228 menu buttons 211 214 plot types bar graph 218 box and whisker plot 218 histogram 217 line plot 218 normal probability plot 218 pareto chart 219 plotting data 217 results 216 sorting data 215 228 variables summary of 435 Statistics 2Var 70 221 236 adjusting plotting scale 233 choosing the fit 229 define your own fit 230 deleting data 228 editing data 226 fit types 229 230 functions 363 364 inserting data 226 228 menu buttons 227 234 plot setup 234 plotting data 232 predicting values 235 results 231 sorting data 228 tracing a scatter plot 233 troubleshooting plots 236 variables summary of 437 storing 42 symbolic calculations 56 Symbolic Setup view 74 common operations in 87 Symbolic view 73 common operations in 81 85 in Geomet
232. ch is used to enter data The Symbolic view is used to specify which columns contain data and which column contains frequencies You can also compute statistics in Home and recall the values of specific statistics variables The values computed in the Statistics 1 Var app are saved in variables and can be re used in Home view and in other apps Getting started with the Statistics 1Var app Suppose that you are measuring the heights of students in a classroom to find the mean height The first five students have the following measurements 160 cm 165 cm 170 cm 175 cm and180 cm 1 Open the Statistics Statistics 1Var Numeric View D1 D2 D3 D4 1Var app 1 2 Select S 5 Statistics 1Var f Z 2 Enter the fol measurement data IN Enter value or expression Cee column D1 Statistics 1Var app 209 165 Theo 2 165 170 3h70 4 175 175 IS 180 6 180 7 7 9 Find the mean of the m i Enter value or expression sample Tap fo see x HI or ae n IS the statistics Min feo Iculated from the Mea f70 e calculated trom the Ha ina data set definitions Y 2t__ frea 160 Statistics IVar Numeric View 1 sample data in D1 M pgo i a Exe 144750 The mean x is 170 170 sX 17 905694150 There are more oX 7 071067812 ET 5 statistics than can be a g DaT Ta displayed on one screen Thus you may need to scroll to see the stati
233. ch vertex of the triangle pressing after each tap The excircle is drawn tangent to the side defined by thelast 4 fen two vertices tapped In the example at the right the last two vertices tapped were A and C or C and A Thus the excircle is drawn tangent to the segment AC Geometry 159 Locus Plot Takes two points as its arguments the first is the point whose possible locations form the locus the second is a point on an object This second point drives the first through its locus as the second moves on its object In the example at the right 7 circle C has been drawn and point D is a point placed on N r5 C using the Point On function described above k Point is a translation of E ft p75 point D Choosing Curve gt w 5 A Pina ii Special gt Locus places locus on the entry line Complete the command as locus GI GD and point l traces a path its locus that parallels point D as it moves around the circle to which it is constrained yo You can plot expressions of the following types in Plot view e Function e Parametric e Polar Sequence Tap ES select Plot and then the type of expression you want to plot The entry line is enabled for you to define the expression Note that the variables you specify for an expression must be in lowercase In this example Function has been selected as the plot type and the gra
234. chapter 21 5 Functions and commands on page 305 For example to E find the root of 3 x closest to x 2 you could enter in a cell ma Ro LoL JAB LAJ a 2 er The answer displayed is 1 732 You could also have selected a function from a menu For example 1 Press SMM J 2 Press and tap ZS 3 Select Polynomial gt Find Roots Your entry line will now look like this cAS proot 4 Enter the coefticients of the polynomial in descending order separating each with a comma E 2 JOl 33 5 Press to see the result Select the cell and tap to see a vector containing both roots 1 732 1 732 6 Tap to return to the spreadsheet Note that the CAS prefix added to your function is to remind you that the calculation will be carried out by the CAS and thus a symbolic result will be returned if possible You can also force a calculation to be handled by the CAS by tapping in the spreadsheet There are additional spreadsheet functions that you can use mostly related to finance and statistics calculations See Spreadsheet functions on page 345 Spreadsheet 201 Copy and paste To copy one or more cells select them and press Copy Move to the desired location and press Paste You can choose to paste either the value formula EREMIE format both value and format or both formula and format S gt wo fa o m 1Value
235. ck by dragging your finger across the screen in the appropriate direction Press to deselect point B Note that there are two ways to move a point atter it is selected a using the cursor keys as described above and b using your finger If you use the cursor keys pressing will cancel the move and put the point back where it was while pressing will accept the move and deselect the point If you use your finger to move the point lifting your 137 finger completes the move and deselects the point In this case there is no way to cancel the move unless you have activated keyboard shortcuts which provides you with an undo function Shortcuts are described on page 147 Create a The derivative of a graph at any point is the slope of its derivative point tangent at that point We ll now create a new point that will be constrained to point B and whose ordinate value is the derivative of the graph at point B We ll constrain it by forcing its x coordinate that is its abscissa to always match that of point B and its y coordinate that is its ordinate to always equal the slope of the tangent at that point 16 To define a point in Geometry Symbolic View i v terms of the attributes of V GB element GA 7 70265434582 other geometric objects V GC tangent GA GB display green you need to go to Symbolic view Note that each objet EDERDEDEPRCHEE you have so far created is listed in Symbolic view Note too that the
236. color of the geometrical object to be displayed Returns the argument returned by a limit function thereby indicating that the function is bounded Used in programming to interrupt a loop Used in programming to insert an intentional stopping or pausing point Returns a second degree trinomial in canonical form canonical form Trinom a x 2 b x c Var Example canonical _form 2 x 2 12 x 1 gives 2 x 3 2 17 Evaluates the objects in a sequence then returns them concatenated as a string cat SeqObj Example cat aaa c 12 3 gives aaac3 Functions and commands 377 center cFactor charpoly chrem circle circumcircle Displays a circle with its center indicated center Crcle Example center circle x 2 y2 x y gives point 1 2 1 2 Returns an expression factorized over the complex field on Gaussian integers if there are more than two cfactor Expr Example cFactor x 2 y y gives x i x i y Returns the coefficients of the characteristic polynomial of a matrix With only one argument the variable used in the polynomial is x With a variable as second argument the polynomial is an expression of it charpoly Mtrx Var Returns the Chinese remainders for two lists of integers chrem LstIntg a b c LstIntg p q r Example chrem 2 3 7 5 gives 12 35 With two arguments draws a circle If the second argument is a point then the distance betwe
237. correct input for this operation You must recover some memory to continue operation Delete one or more customized apps matrices lists notes or programs Not enough data points for the calculation For two variable statistics there must be two columns of data and each column must have at least four numbers Array argument had wrong dimensions Need two columns with equal numbers of data values 586 Troubleshooting Message Meaning Continued Syntax error No functions checked Receive error Undefined name Out of memory Two decimal separators input x 0 0 0 LN O Inconsistent units The function or command you entered does not include the proper arguments or order of arguments The delimiters parentheses commas periods and semi colons must also be correct Look up the function name in the index to find its proper syntax You must enter and check an equation in the Symbolic view before entering the Plot view Problem with data reception from another calculator Re send the data The global variable named does not exist You must recover a lot of memory to continue operation Delete one or more customized apps matrices lists notes or programs One of the numbers you have entered has two or more decimal points Division by zero error Undefined result in division LN O is undefined The calculation involves incompatible units eg adding len
238. ction app 119 3 Choose the function whose point of intersection with the currently selected function you wish to find The coordinates of the intersection are displayed at the bottom of the screen Tap on the screen near the intersection and EB rtersection 1 3028 2 30278 ok repeat from step 2 The coordinates of the intersection nearest to where you tapped are displayed at the bottom of the screen To find the slope of We will now find the slope of the quadratic function at the the quadratic intersection point function i Tag E E E ihe Hienw tas and select Slope The slope that is the gradient of the function at the intersection point is displayed at the bottom of the screen Slope undefined You can press or to trace along the curve and see the slope at other points You can also press or amp to jump to another function and see the slope at points on it 2 Press to re display the Plot menu To find the signed We ll now find the area between the two functions in the area between the range 1 3 lt x lt 2 3 two functions 1 Tap and select Signed area 120 Function app 2 Specify the start value for x Tap and press J 1 _2_J3 La 3 Top MMB 4 Select the other function as the boundary for the integral If F1 X is the currently selected function you would choose F2 X here and vice versa 5 Specify the end value for x
239. ction to HP apps 91 Note that there is an Unzoom option on the Zoom menu Use this to return a plot to its pre zoom state If the Zoom menu is not shown tap QUE Zoom In In Shortcut press Zoom Out MS Out Shortcut press X In ES xin X Out X Out Y in Em In Zoom Traces Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu 92 An introduction to HP apps Y Out Y Out Zoom Traces Menu Square Square Notice that in this example the plot on left has had a Y In zoom applied to it The Square zoom has returned the plot to its default state where the X and Y REZ scales are equal Autoscale Autoscale Decimal Decimal Notice that in this example the plot on left has had a X In zoom applied to it The Decimal zoom has reset the default values for the xrange and y iZoomi ilracee Menu range Integer Integer Menu An introduction to HP apps 93 Trace To select a plot To evaluate a definition Trig Trig Zoom Traces Menu Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Solve Statistics 1 Var and Statistics 2Var The tracing functionality enables you to move a cursor the trace cursor along the current graph You move the trace cursor by pressing or You can also move the trace cursor by tapping on or near the current plot The trace curs
240. ctive The syntax depends on the entry mode and working view When textbook entry is enabled the syntax for both non CAS and CAS is casel if testl casen if testn Example Even if 324 MOD 2 0 odd if returns Even When textbook entry is disabled the syntax for non CAS is PIECEWISE testl casel testn casen When textbook entry is disabled the syntax for CAS is piecewise testl casel testn casen 406 Functions and commands plane plotinequation plotparam plotpolar plotseq point polar polar_coordinates With three points as arguments draws the plane made by the three points With a point and a line as arguments draws the plane made by the point and the line With an equation as argument draws the plane corresponding to the equation in 3D space plane Pnt or Eq Pnt or Line Pnt Draws the points of the plane whose coordinates satisfy the inequations of two plotinequation Expr x xrange y yrange xste pl ystep With a complex a t i b t and a list of values for the variable t as arguments draws the parametric representation of the curve defined by x a t and y g t over the interval specified in the second argument With a list of expressions of two variables a u v b u v c u v and a list of values for the variables u u0 u1 v vO0 v1 as arguments draws the surface defined by x a u v y b u v and z
241. d 8 3 gives 8 1 3 420 Functions and commands sylvester table tail TAN tan2cossin2 tan2sincos2 tangent THEN Returns the Sylvester matrix of two polynomials sylvester Poly Poly Var Example sylvester x 2 1 x 3 1 x gives 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Defines an array where the indexes are strings or real numbers table SeqEqual index _name element_value Returns a list or sequence or string without its first element tail Lst or Seq or Str Example tail 3 2 4 1 0 gives 2 4 1 0 Tangent tan x tan value Returns an expression with tan x rewritten as 1 cos 2 x sin 2 x tan2cossin2 Expr Example tan2cossin2 tan x gives 1 cos 2 x sin 2 x Returns an expression with tan x rewritten as sin 2 x l cos 2 x tan2sincos2 Expr Example tan2sincos2 tan x gives sin 2 x 1 cos 2 x With a curve as argument draws the tangent line to the curve at point A With a surface as argument draws the tangent plane to the surface at point A tangent Curve or surface C Pnt A Example tangent plotfunc x 2 GA draws the tangent to the graph of y x 2 through point A Used in programming to introduce a statement dependent on a conditional statement Functions and commands 421 TO translation transpose triangle trunc tsimplify type Used in programming in a loop when expr
242. d O if the inequality is false Note that more than two objects can be compared See comment above regarding lt Inequality test Returns 1 if the inequality is true and O if the inequality is false Equality symbol Connects two members of an equation Equality test Returns 1 if the equality is true and O if the equality is false Strict inequality test Returns 1 if the inequality is true and O if the inequality is false Note that more than two objects can be compared See comment above regarding lt Inequality test Returns 1 if the inequality is true and O if the inequality is false Note that more than two objects can be compared See comment above regarding lt Inserts the power symbol Returns the symbolic expression in quadratic form in the variables given in VectVar of the symmetric matrix A a2q MtrxA VectVar Example a2q 1 2 4 41 x y gives x 2 6 x y 4 y 2 Returns the polynomials U and V such that for polynomials A B and C PU QV R With only polynomials as arguments the variable used is x With a variable as the final argument the polynomials are expressions of it abcuv Poly A Poly B Poly C Var Example abcuv x 2 2 x 1 x 2 1 x 1 gives 1 2 1 2 Arc cosine cos x ACOS value 374 Functions and commands additionally algvar alog10 altitude AND angleatraw Ans Used in programming with assume to state an additional assumption about
243. d in chapter 2 Reverse Polish Notation RPN starting on page 47 Note that on page 2 of the Home Settings screen you can specify whether you want to display your calculations in Textbook format or not This refers to the appearance of your calculations in the history section of both Home view and CAS view This is a different setting from the Entry setting discussed above Entering expressions The examples that follow assume that the entry mode is Textbook e An expression can contain numbers functions and variables To enter a function press the appropriate key or open a Toolbox menu and select the function You can also enter a function by using the alpha keys to spell out its name When you have finished entering the expression press to evaluate it If you make a mistake while entering an expression you can e delete the character to the left of the cursor by pressing e delete the character to the right of the cursor by pressing e clear the entire entry line by pressing or 3 Getting started 37 2 Example Calculate 23148 45 0 23 x 14E 800 3 OLN J45 This example illustrates a number of important 23 1408 ngas points to be aware of 3 620 996104305 dhe importance of momma a delimiters such as parentheses how to enter negative numbers e the use of implied versus explicit multiplication Parentheses As the example above shows
244. d the plot environment Not used Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Not used Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Not used Not used 76 An introduction to HP apps Numeric view The table below outlines what is done in the Numeric view of each app App Use the Numeric view to Advanced View a table of numbers generated by the Graphing open sentences selected in Symbolic view Finance Enter values for time value of money calculations Function View a table of numbers generated by the functions selected in Symbolic view Geometry Perform calculations on the geometric objects drawn in Plot view Inference Specify the statistics needed to perform the Linear Explorer Linear Solver Parametric Polar Quadratics Explorer Sequence Solve Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var test selected in Symbolic view Not used Specify the coefficients of the linear equations to be solved View a table of numbers generated by the functions selected in Symbolic view View a table of numbers generated by the functions selected in Symbolic view Not used View a table of numbers generated by the sequences selected in Symbolic view Enter the known values and solve for the unknown value Enter numbers text formulas etc The N
245. data points n the mean x and the standard deviation o Calculates the sum of a range of numbers SUM input For example SUM B7 B23 returns the sum of the numbers in the range B7 to B23 You can also specify a block of cells as in SUM B7 C23 An error is returned if a cell in the specified range contains a non numeric object Calculates the arithmetic mean of a range of numbers AVERAGE input For example AVERAGE B7 B23 returns the arithmetic mean of the numbers in the range B7 to B23 You can also specify a block of cells as in AVERAG B7 C23 An error is returned if a cell in the specified range contains a non numeric object 346 Functions and commands AMORT STATI Calculates the principal interest and balance of a loan over a specified period AMORT Range n i pv pmt ppyr 12 cpyr ppyr Grouping ppyr beg false fix current configuration Range is the cell range where the results are to be placed If only one cell is specified then the range is automatically calculated Configuration is a string that defines if a header row needs to be created starts with H and what result to place in which column h show row headers S show the start of the period E show the end of the period P show the principal paid this period B show the balance at the end of the period show the interest paid this period n i py and pmt are the nu
246. dependent variable thereby decreasing or increasing the increment between consecutive values This and other options are explained in Common operations in Numeric view on page 100 You can see the Plot and Numeric views side by side See Combining Plot and Numeric Views on page 106 278 Polar app 17 Sequence app The Sequence app provides you with various ways to explore sequences You can define a sequence named for example U1 e interms of n e in terms of U1 n 1 e in terms of U1 n 2 e in terms of another sequence for example U2 n or e in any combination of the above You can define a sequence by specifying just the first term and the rule for generating all subsequent terms However you will have to enter the second term if the HP Prime is unable to calculate it automatically Typically if the nth term in the sequence depends on n 2 then you must enter the second term The app enables you to create two types of graphs e a Stairsteps graph which plots points of the form n Un a Cobweb graph which plots points of the form Un 1 Un Getting started with the Sequence app The following example explores the well known Fibonacci sequence where each term from the third term on is the sum of the preceding two terms In this example we specify three sequence fields the first term the second term and a rule for generating all subsequent terms Sequence app 279
247. drag 17 drawing commands 534 541 E editing lists 453 matrices 466 notes 489 programs 498 engineering number format 31 entry format See entry methods entry line 14 entry methods 32 36 47 epsilon 58 evaluation Eval 84 evaluation in Numeric view 102 exam mode 34 61 67 activating 64 canceling 66 configuring 63 expression detining 81 112 extremum 122 132 F Finance app 69 285 292 amortization 29 1 292 functions 367 368 TVM calculations 285 variables Numeric 566 568 summary of 442 fit types statistical 229 230 fixed number format 31 fixed step dot graphing 99 fixed step segment graphing 99 flick 17 font size general 33 format hexagesimal 26 notes 494 number 31 56 parameters in spreadsheets 207 Spreadsheet cells 206 fractions 26 frequency data 211 full precision display 31 Function app 69 111 124 functions 118 122 343 344 variables 122 results 574 summary of 432 functions algebra 322 323 apps 343 372 arithmetic 312 314 base 580 calculus 323 328 common 371 creating your own 425 defining 37 81 112 definition of 111 Finance app 367 368 Function app 343 344 geometric 165 192 hyperbolic 315 Inference app 364 367 integer 334 336 Index 597 keyboard 307 310 Linear Explorer 371 Linear Solver 369 number 311 312 plot 342 343 polynomial 337 342 probability 315 320 rewrite 330 334 solve 328 330 Solve app 344 spreadsheet 208 345 362 Statistics 1Var 363 Statistics 2Var 363 364
248. e Getting started Annunciator Meaning Continued CAS White You are working in CAS view not Home view A Z orange In Home view a z orange tU Yellow The Alpha key is active The charac ter shown in orange on a key will be entered in uppercase when a key is pressed See Adding text on page 23 for more information In CAS view The Alpha Shift key combination is active The character shown in orange ona key will be entered in uppercase when a key is pressed See Adding text on page 23 for more information In Home view The Alpha Shift key combination is active The character shown in orange ona key will be entered in lowercase when a key is pressed See Adding text on page 23 for more information In CAS view The Alpha key is active The charac ter shown in orange on a key will be entered in lowercase when a key is pressed See Adding text on page 23 for more information The user keyboard is active All the following key presses will enter the customized objects associated with the key See The User Keyboard Customizing key presses on page 515 for more information Getting started Navigation Annunciator Meaning Continued W Yellow The user keyboard is active The next key press will enter the custom ized object associated with the key See The User Keyboard Customiz ing key presses on page 515 for more information Time
249. e entire columns You can also change the width of a selected column with an open or closed horizontal pinch gesture Row displays an input form for you to specify the required height of the selected rows only available if you have selected the entire spreadsheet or one or more entire rows You can also change the height of a selected row with an open or closed vertical pinch gesture show show quote marks around strings in the body of the spreadsheet Auto Yes No Textbook display formulas in textbook format Auto Yes No Caching turn this option on to speed up calculations in spreadsheets with many formulas only available if you have selected the entire spreadsheet 206 Spreadsheet Format Parameters Each format attribute is represented by a parameter that can be referenced in a formula For example D1 1 returns the formula in cell D1 or nothing if D1 has no formula The attributes that can be retrieved in a formulas by referencing its associated parameter are listed below Parameter Attribute Result 0 content contents or empty 1 formula formula 2 name name or empty 3 number format Standard 0 Fixed 1 Scientific 2 Engineering 3 4 number of deci 1 to 11 or unspeci mal places fied 1 5 font O to 6 unspecified with O 10 pt and 6 22pt 6 background cell fill color or color 32786 if unspecified 7 foreground color cell contents color horizontal align men
250. e A Hence we can conclude that there are no further solutions for A We can also see this if we plot the equation Solve app 259 Plot the The Plot view shows one graph for each side of the solved equation equation You can choose any of the variables to be the independent variable by selecting it in Numeric view So in this example make sure that A is highlighted The current equation is V U 2AD The plot view will plot two equations one for each side of the equation One of these is Y V2 with V 27 78 making Y 771 7284 This graph will be a horizontal line The other graph will be Y U 2AD with U 16 67and D 100 making Y 200A 277 8889 This graph is also a line The desired solution is the value of A where these two lines intersect Plot the equation for variable A Select Auto Scale Select Both sides of En where n is the number of the selected equation E1 771 7284 By default the tracer is active Using the cursor keys move the trace cursor along either graph until it nears the intersection Note that the value of A displayed near the bottom left corner lt eres saa of the screen closely matches the value of A you calculated above The Plot view provides a convenient way to find an approximation to a solution when you suspect that there are a number of solutions Move the trace cursor close to the solution that is the intersection of interest to you and then open Nume
251. e Ans from Home view not the Ans from CAS view All the variables available to you are listed on the variables menus displayed by pressing 5 A comprehensive list of these variables is provided in chapter 22 Variables beginning on page 427 Spreadsheet 203 Using the CAS in spreadsheet calculations You can force a spreadsheet calculation to be performed by the CAS thereby ensuring that results are symbolic and thus exact For example the formula VRow in row 5 gives 2 2360679775 if not calculated by the CAS and V5 if it is You choose the calculation engine when you are entering the formula As soon as you begin entering a formula the key changes to or depending on the last selection This is a toggle key Tap on it to change it from one to the other When is showing the calculation will be numeric with the number of significant digits limited by the precsion of the calculator When is showing the calculation will be performed by CAS and be exact In the example at the right the Tf DIA IB IC D IE formula in cell A is exaclty the rf i 3 B 17 58578649 V2 14 26794416 V3 23 23 33 76393436 V5 46 55051449 V6 61 35424464 V7 178 17157481 2 V2 same as the formula in cell B Row V Row 1 The only difference is that S99 was showing or selected while the ojaan E NA 97 97 r Row V Row 1 formula was being entered in SETATMAC
252. e Function app E0 E9 for the Solve app H1 H5 for the Statistics 1Var app e 1 S5 for the Statistics 2Var app x0 Y0 x9 Y9 for the parametric app RO R9 for the Polar app u0 U9 for the Sequence app CHECK Symbn Example CHECK F1 checks the Function app Symbolic view variable F1 The result is that F1 X is drawn in the Plot view and has a column of function values in the Numeric view of the Function app Unchecks the Symbolic view variable Symbn UNCHECK Symbn Example UNCHECK R1 unchecks the Polar app Symbolic view variable R1 The result is that R1 0 is not drawn in the Plot view and does not appear in the Numeric view of the Polar app The Catlg menu brings Statistics 1Var together all the functions and commands available on the HP Prime However this section describes the functions and commands that can only be found on the Catlg menu The Man CAS Asp alii functions and commands that are also on the Math menu are described in Keyboard functions on page 307 Those that are also on the CAS menu are described in CAS menu on 372 Functions and commands page 322 The functions and commands specific to the Geometry app are described in Geometry functions and commands on page 165 and those specific to programming are described in Program commands on page 525 Some of the options on the Catlg menu can
253. e List Catalog List The number of elements in a list is wo cooooocoo0osd shown beside the list Lo 0 F cait Delete send 1 name Lists 453 List Catalog Buttons and keys 2 Tap on the name you T want to assign to the new list L1 L2 etc The list editor appears If you re creating a new list rather than MEETER changing make sure you choose a list with out any elements in it 3 Enter the values you want in the list pressing _ after each one Values can be real or T complex numbers or an expression If you enter a expression it is evaluated and the result is inserted in SEpgTECTOMEDETSETE the list 4 When done press BUNS or ES a7 a List to return to the List catalog or press Eio go to Home view The buttons and keys in the List Catalog are Button or Key Purpose Cm o en EZ Clear aW Opens the highlighted list for editing You can also just tap on a list name Deletes the contents of the selected list Transmits the highlighted list to another HP Prime Clears all lists Moves to the top or bottom of the catalog respectively 454 Lists The List Editor List Editor Buttons and keys The List Editor is a special environment for entering data into lists There are two ways to open the List Editor once the List Catalog is open Highlight the
254. e Parametric app uses the customary app views Symbolic Plot and Numeric described in chapter 5 Open the Parametric app For a description of the menu buttons available in this app see Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons on page 86 Plot view Summary of menu buttons on page 96 and Numeric view Summary of menu buttons on page 104 Throughout this chapter we will explore the parametric equations x T 8sin 7 and y T 8cos 7 These equations produce a circle l Open the Parametric Symbolic View Parametric app x m r7 E vim Select X2 T Parametric H vm X3T The Parametric E m app starts in XAT j 3 Enter function Symbolic view 7 This is the defining view It is where you symbolically define that is specify the parametric expressions you want to explore Show Parametric app 269 Define the functions The graphical and numerical data you see in Plot view and Numeric view are derived from the symbolic functions defined here There are 20 fields for defining functions These are labelled x1 T through x9 T and X0 T and Y1 T through Y9 T and Y0 T Each X function is paired with a Y function 2 Highlight which pair of functions you want to use either by tapping on or scrolling to one of the pair If you are entering a new function just start typing If you are editing an existing function tap and make your changes When you have f
255. e Value of Money match that shown in N 360 I NR 6 5 the figure to the right yp S000 pye PMT 948 102035239 CIR 12 Fv 0 End y Group Size 12 Enter payment amount or solve Fest Jamon sove Finance app 291 Amortization graph 2 Tap Cn P Principal Interest Balance 1 1676 57 9700 63 148323 43 2 3465 42 19288 98 146534 58 3 5374 07 28757 53 144625 93 4 7410 55 38098 25 142589 45 5 9583 41 47302 59 140416 59 6 t11901 8 56361 4 138098 2 7 14375 46 65264 94 135624 54 8 17014 77 74002 83 132985 23 9 19830 85 f82563 95 130169 15 10 22835 53 90936 47 127164 47 26041 43 99107 77 123958 57 1 SS eas Siza a as 3 Scroll down the table P Principal Interest Balance 1676 57 9700 63 148323 43 to payment group 10 3465 42 19288 98 146534 58 5374 07 28757 53 144625 93 Note that after 10 7410 55 38098 25 142589 45 9583 41 47302 59 140416 59 F11901 8 56361 4 138098 2 years 22 835 53 14375 46 65264 94 135624 54 has been paid off the 17014 77 74002 83 132985 23 principal and zii 10 90 936 47 paid in qugn gun ener OTT interest leaving a balloon payment due of 127 164 47 19830 85 f82563 95 130169 15 22835 53 90936 47 127164 47 26041 43 99107 77 123958 57 SSoaTtankwn 0 Press to see the Amortization 1 12 amortization schedule presented graphically The balance owing at the end of each
256. e and either specify a new value or if you are choosing a type of table for Numeric view automatic or build yourown choose the appropriate option from the Num Type menu An introduction to HP apps 105 To help you seta starting Function Num Setup number and increment that Num start f15 9 oo Num Step 1 matches the current Plot view Num Start 31 8 tap Plot Num Zoor Num Step 2 Num Type Automatic Enter table start value mme Restore default settings To restore one field to its default setting 1 Select the field 2 Press 8 To restore all default settings press Ea Combining Plot and Numeric Views You can display Plot view and Numeric view side by side Moving the tracing cursor causes the table of values in Numeric view to scroll You can also enter a value in the X column The table scrolls to that value and the tracing cursor jumps to the corresponding point on the selected plot To combine Plot and Numeric view in a split screen press and select Split Screen Plot Table To return to Plot view press B To return to Numeric view by pressing EB Adding a note to an app You can add a note to an app Unlike general notes those created via the Note Catalog see chapter 26 an app note is not listed in the Note Catalog It can only be accessed when the app is open An app note remains with the app if the app is sent to another calculator
257. e app In this example we will want the user to be able to e start the app e specify the number of sides that is faces on each die e specify number of times to roll the dice e start the app again With that in mind we will create the following views START SETSIDES and SETNUMROLLS The START option will initialize the app and display a note that gives the user instructions The user will also interact with the app through the Numeric view and the 522 Programming The program DiceSimulation Plot view These views will be activated by pressing and but the functions Num and Plot in our app program will actually launch those views after doing some configuration The program discussed earlier in this chapter to get the number of sides for a dice is expanded here so that the possible sums of two such die are stored in dataset D1 Enter the following sub routines into the program for the DiceSimulation app START BEGIN DICESIMVARS gt D1 gt D2 SetSample H1 D1 SetFreq H1 D2 PHIType Oo ta Z D VIEWS Roll Dice ROLLMANY BEGIN LOCAL k roll MAKELIST X 1 X 1 2 SIDES MAKELIST X 1 X 1 2 SIDES FOR k FROM 1 TO ROLLS DO 1 1 gt D1 1 1 D2 roll ROLLDIE SIDES ROLLDIE SIDES D2 roll 1 1 gt D2 roll 1 END 1 gt Xmin AX D1 1 gt
258. e common to more than one app For example the Function app has a variable named Xmin but so too does the Polar app the Parametric app the Sequence app and the Solve app Likewise the X variable is common to both the Statistics 1Var and Statistics 2Var apps Although named identically these variables can hold different values Variables 429 If you attempt to retrieve Statistics 1Var a variable that is used in more than one app by entering just its name in Home view you will get the value that was last Csisties 2var 2x is calculata ror ina Cn ne variable This might not be the value that you want To ensure you get the right value you need to qualify the variable with the name of the app that generated it In the example at the right the variable X was entered but it returned the value of that variable as it was calculated in the Statistics 1 Var app the first entry However it was the value of the variable as it was calculated in the Statistics 2Var app that was sought To retrieve that value the variable name had to be qualified by prefixing it with the name of the app that generated it Statistics 2Var followed by a period the second entry Note the syntax required app _name variable name Spaces are not allowed in an app name and must be represented by the underscore character EA The app can be a built in app or one you have crated based on a built in app The name of a built
259. e menu to immediately display the last item in the menu Press when you are at the bottom of the menu to immediately display the first item in the menu e Press to jump straight to the bottom of the menu e Press to jump straight to the top of the menu Enter the first few characters of the item s name to jump straight to that item Enter the number of the item shown in the menu to jump straight to that item 28 Getting started To close a menu Toolbox menus Input forms A menu will close automatically when you select an item from it If you want to close a menu without selecting Esc anything from it press or B3 The Toolbox menus are a collection of menus offering functions and commands useful in mathematics and programming The Math CAS and Catlg menus offer over 400 functions and commands The items on these menus are described in detail in chapter 21 Functions and commands starting on page 305 An input form is a screen that provides one or more fields for you to enter data or select an option It is another name for a dialog box e It afield allows you to enter data of your choice you can select it add your data and tap SMM There is no need to tap first e Ifa field allows you to choose an item from a menu you can tap on it the field or the label for the field tap on it again to display the options and tap on the item you want You can also choose an item from an
260. e optional The default values represent the top left of the graphic x2 y2 are optional The default values represent the bottom right of the graphic edgecolor and fillcolor can be c any color specified as RRGGBB Both are optional and fillcolor defaults to edgecolor if not specified To erase a GROB execute RECT G To clear the screen execute RECT When optional arguments are provided in a command with multiple optional parameters like RECT the arguments provided correspond to the leftmost parameters first For example in the program below the arguments 40 and 90 in the RECT_P command correspond to x1 and y1 The argument 000000 corresponds to edgecolor since there is only the one additional argument If there had been two additional arguments they would have referred to x2 and y2 rather than edgecolor and fillcolor The program produces the figure below 538 Programming SUBGROB_P SUBGROB EXPORT BOX BEGIN RECT RECT P 40 90 000000 FREEZE END The program below also uses the RECT _P command In this case the pair of arguments 0 and 3 correspond to x2 and y2 EXPORT BOX BEGIN RECT INVERT G 0 RECT_P 40 90 0 3 F Nz REEZE END Syntax SUBGROB srcGRB x y1 x2 y2 trgtGRB SUBGROB P srcGRB xl yl x2 y2 trgtGRB Sets trgtGRB to be a copy of
261. e sequence of commands and then subtract increment from var Syntax WHILE test DO commands END Evaluate test If result is true not O executes the commands and repeat Example A perfect number is one that is equal to the sum of all its proper divisors For example 6 is a perfect number because 6 1 2 3 The example below returns true when its argument is a perfect number EXPORT ISPERFECT n BEGIN OCAL d sum 2 gt d gt sum WHILE sum lt n AND d lt n DO IF irem n d 0 THEN sum d gt sum END d 1 gt d ND zal RETURN sum n END The following program displays all the perfect numbers up to 1000 EXPORT PERFECTNUMS BEGIN LOCAL k FOR k FROM 2 TO 1000 DO IF ISPERFECT k THEN SGBOX k END is perfect press OK END END Programming 529 REPEAT Syntax REPEAT commands UNTIL test Repeats the sequence of commands until test is true not 0 The example below prompts for a positive value for SIDES modifying an earlier program in this chapter EXPORT SIDES EXPORT GETSIDES BEGI REPEAT INPUT SIDES Die Sides N Enter num sides 2 UNTIL SIDES gt 0 END BREAK Syntax BREAK n Exits from loops by breaking out of n loop levels Execution picks up with the first statement after the loop With no argum
262. e sub menu Fill in the argument of the MSGBOX command and type a semicolon at the end of the command MYPROGRAM EXPORT MYPROGRA BEGIN MYPROGRAM EXPORT MYPROGRAM BEGIN FOR N FROM 1 TO 3 DO MSGBOX Counting N END END CT I Tap to check the syntax of your program When you are finished press to return to the Program Catalog or to go to Home view You are ready now to execute the program Programming 505 Runa From Home view enter the name of the program If the Program program takes parameters enter a pair of parentheses after the program name with the parameters inside them each separated by a comma To run the program press From the Program Catalog highlight the program you want fo run and tap EME When a program is executed from the catalog the system looks for a function named START no parameters You can also run a Function program from the USER menu one of the Toolbox menus Tap MYPROGRAM i tam and MY PROGRAM Users appears on the entry line Tap and the program executes displaying a message box Tap three Function times to step through the FOR loop Notice that the number shown increments by 1 each time f h MYPROGRAM After the program MYPROGRAM prog nnm annm SS a terminates you can resume any other activity with the HP Prime If a program has arguments when you press a screen appear
263. e value of u0 In a program type n gt LO 564 Programming nl n2 TO Pooled sl where0 lt u0 lt 1 Sets the size of the sample for a hypothesis test or confidence interval For a test or interval involving the difference of two means or two proportions sets the size of the first sample From the Numeric view set the value of nl In a program type neni For a test or interval involving the difference of two means or two proportions sets the size of the second sample From the Numeric view set the value of n2 In a program type npn2 Sets the assumed proportion of successes for the One proportion Z test From the Numeric view set the value of nO In a program type n gt To where 0 lt 20 lt 1 Determine whether or not the samples are pooled for tests or intervals using the Student s T distribution involving two means From the Numeric view set the value of Pooled In a program type 0 gt Pooled for not pooled default 1 gt Pooled for pooled Sets the sample standard deviation for a hypothesis test or confidence interval For a test or interval involving the difference of two means or two proportions sets the sample standard deviation of the first sample From the Numeric view set the value of s1 In a program type n gt s1 Programming 565 s2 ol o2 xl x2 Finance app variables For a test or interval involving the difference of two m
264. e will be returned Programming 513 Program ROLLMANY Another program could use the ROLLDIE function and generate n rolls of a die with any number of sides In the following program the ROLLDIE function is used to generate n rolls of two dice each with the number of sides given by the local variable sides The results are stored in list L2 so that L2 1 shows the number of times the dies came up with a combined total of 1 L2 2 shows the number of times the dies came up with a combined total of 2 etc L2 1 should be O since the sum of the numbers on 2 dice must be at least 2 EXPORT ROLLMANY n sides BEGIN OCAL k roll initialize list of frequencies MAKELIST 0 X 1 2 sides 1 PL2 FOR k FROM 1 TO n DO ROLLDIE sides ROLLDIE sides Proll L2 roll 1 gt L2 roll END END By omitting the EXPORT command when a function is declared its visibility can be restricted to the program within which it is defined For example you could define the ROL DIE function inside the ROLLMANY program like this ROLLDIE EXPORT ROLLMANY n sides BEGIN OCAL k roll initialize list of frequencies MAKELIST 0 X 1 2 sides 1 PL2 FOR k FROM 1 TO n DO ROLLDIE sides ROLLDIE sides Proll L2 roll 1P L2 roll END END OLLDIE n EGIN ETURN 1 FLOOR RANDOM N ND J Ww DW zal 5
265. e zoom factor for the values in the Y column in the Numeric view From Numeric Setup view type in a value for NUMY ZOOM In a program type n gt NumYZoom where n gt 0 Programming 563 Inference app variables Alpha Conf Mean Mean2 u0 The following variables are used by the Inference app They correspond to fields in the Inference app Numeric view The set of variables shown in this view depends on the hypothesis test or the confidence interval selected in the Symbolic view Sets the alpha level for the hypothesis test From the Numeric view set the value of Alpha In a program type n gt Alpha where 0 lt n lt 1 Sets the confidence level for the confidence interval From the Numeric view set the value of Conf In a program type n gt Conf where 0 lt n lt 1 Sets the value of the mean of a sample for a 1 mean hypothesis test or confidence interval For a 2 mean test or interval sets the value of the mean of the first sample From the Numeric view set the value of Mean1 In a program type n Meanl For a 2 mean test or interval sets the value of the mean of the second sample From the Numeric view set the value of Mean2 In a program type n gt Mean2 The following variables are used to set up hypothesis test or confidence interval calculations in the Inference app Sets the assumed value of the population mean for a hypothesis test From the Numeric view set th
266. ean input list configuration ConfTlmean SampMean SampStdDev SampSize ConfLevel configuration Input List A list of input variables see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values Input Parameters SampMean SampStd SampSize Conflevel Configuration A string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers h header cells will be created DF T Xl Xh std The ConfT2mean calculates the confidence interval for a two sample T test ConfT2mean input list configuration ConfT2mean SampMean SampMean2 SampStdDev SampStdDev2 SampSize SampSize2 pooled ConfLevel configuration Functions and commands 361 Input List A list of input variables see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values Input Parameters SampMean SampMean2 SampStdDev SampStdDev2 SampSize SampSize2 pooled Conflevel Configuration A string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers h header cells will be created DF T zX zXh zXm Functions and commands Statistic
267. eans or two proportions sets the sample standard deviation of the second sample From the Numeric view set the value of s2 In a program type n gt s2 Sets the population standard deviation for a hypothesis test or confidence interval For a test or interval involving the difference of two means or two proportions sets the population standard deviation of the first sample From the Numeric view set the value of o1 In a program type npol For a test or interval involving the difference of two means or two proportions sets the population standard deviation of the second sample From the Numeric view set the value of 02 In a program type n gt o2 Sets the number of successes for a one proportion hypothesis test or confidence interval For a test or interval involving the difference of two proportions sets the number of successes of the first sample From the Numeric view set the value of x1 In a program type n ex1 For a test or interval involving the difference of two proportions sets the number of successes of the second sample From the Numeric view set the value of x2 In a program type n gt x2 The following variables are used by the Finance app They correspond to the fields in the Finance app Numeric view 566 Programming CPYR END FV IPYR NbPmt Compounding periods per year Sets the number of compounding periods per year for a cash flow calculation From the Nu
268. ed You can set each configuration for its own time period with or without a password An exam mode configuration can be activated from an HP Prime sent from one HP Prime to another via USB cable or sent to one or more HP Primes via the Connectivity Kit Exam mode Exam Mode Configuration configuration will SystemiApps g i HF HserApps primarily be of interestto H Physics H M Hete teachers proctors and CH units invigilators who want to cH Matrices H _ Complex ensure that the calculator _ cas is used appropriately by pUre students sitting for an iesala ons aas ala faa OK examination In the illustration to the right user customized apps the help system and the computer algebra system have been selected for disabling As part of an exam mode configuration you can choose to activate 3 lights on the calculator that will flash periodically during exam mode The lights are on the top edge of the calculator The lights will help the supervisor of the examination detect if any particular calculator has dropped out of exam mode The flashing of lights on all calculators placed in exam mode will be synchronized so that all will flash the same pattern at the same time Exam Mode 6l Modifying the default configuration A configuration named Default Exam appears when you first access the Exam Mode screen This configuration has no functions disabled If only one configuration is needed yo
269. ed to re run the calculations this time setting the PMT value to 300 and calculating a new PV value 7 In the pt field enter 300 move the cursor to the Pv field and tap EIB 286 Finance app The PV value is Time Value of Money calculated as N 60 I YR 5 5 pv 15705 8506337 P VR 12 15 705 85 this PMT 300 CNR 12 being the maximum Fv 0 End y you can borrow Group Size 12 Thus with your 3 000 deposit you R value or oT can afford a car with a price tag of up to 18 705 85 Cash flow diagrams TVM transactions can be represented in cash flow diagrams A cash flow diagram is a time line divided into equal segments representing the compounding periods Arrows represent the cash flows These could be positive upward arrows or negative downward arrows depending on the point of view of the lender or borrower The following cash flow diagram shows a loan from a borrower s point of view Present value PV Loan Money Equal periods received is apasive a a Ai fe i number TY 273415 Lenn Money Payment Payment Payment Payment paid out is PMT PMT PMT PMT Future value a negative FY number Equal payments Finance app 287 The following cash flow diagram shows a loan from the lender s point of view Equal payments ers VV PMT PMT PMT PMT ee ee ee ee T Equal periods PV Cash flow diagrams m also specify when PONE payments occur rela apitali
270. eeeeeeeeeeeees 279 Another example Explicitly defined sequences ecceee 283 18 Finance app Getting Started with the Finance App ccccesceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 285 Cash flow diagrams 2 soewvastasiny sdoage saccs tec ty ds alse ieactegh eden masa 287 Time value of money TVM ccccccccessccceeseeeseeteeeeseteeeeeaees 288 TVM calculations Another example cccccceeeeeereeeeeees 289 Calculating GMOni Zation si scc5 cahavensuennsaantemarearecaiaadgaedieanrs 291 19 Triangle Solver app Getting started with the Triangle Solver app esceeeeeeeees 293 Choosing triangle types gt ascccss00asrvpnan deen intebansenaneosrenpanensoanes 295 Special cases nea e a tapadtarongn eas meen a a E a 296 20 The Explorer apps Linear Explorer Gmc cccantacs s duct oncumman rane suakevmsrrandsatosaodditnans 297 Quadratic Explorer app sisegcics dc taashiergsithinetyeaath dak nedeoncdtavane 300 Trig Explorer app sae crane ata nmesiouguryadeetatereadiancnebiee eadeetunsiannds 302 21 Functions and commands Keyboard tinction s icsyciei peneTeiasaesers ca pie dees os ova anaes 307 Moth iment circensi a E ee GS 310 INDIES x2 ceetuewe rer cee bathe dane la 311 ATithmetiE niei E E Aa ee ates 312 Trigonometry sei bes Ma ceed a e e Severe eles 314 Hyperbolic riirii ani n EE S 315 Probabili ai ustipncinseesaay earn a O 315 listesesnn ne S eTA A OO OT 320 Matik riecny anren ete a R aa S 321 SPECI l sacii vasa ea OE HO 321 CAS MERUN
271. eing limited to 100 pixels EXPORT RUNPISERIES BEGIN LOCAL sign 2 gt K 4 dA 1 gt sign RECT TEXTOUT_P N 0 0 TEXTOUT P PI APPROX 0 30 REPEAT At tsign 4 2 K 1 gt A TEXTOUT P K 35 0 2 FFFFFF 100 333399 540 Programming Matrix ADDCOL ADDROW DELCOL TEXTOUT P A 90 30 2 000000 100 99CC33 sign 1 gt ig sign P1 aerox aRSUORTE K 1 gt K UNTIL 0 END The program executes until the user presses to terminate The spaces after K the number of the term and A the current approximation in the TEXTOUT_P commands are there to overwrite the previously displayed value Some matrix commands take as their argument the matrix variable name on which the command is applied Valid names are the global variables MO M9 or a local variable that contains a matrix Syntax ADDCOL name value valuen column_number Inserts values into a new column inserted before column_number in the specified matrix You enter the values as a vector These are not optional arguments The values must be separated by commas and the number of values must be the same as the number of rows in the matrix name Syntax ADDROW name value valuen row_number Inserts values into a new row inserted before row_number in the specified matrix You enter the values as a vector These are not optional argumen
272. ell press and get 50 If you subsequently changed the value of P the value in that cell automatically changes to reflect the new value This is an example of a referenced variable If you just wanted the current value of P and not have the value change if P changes just enter P and press __ _ This is an example of an entered variable Variables given values in other apps can also be referenced in a spreadsheet In chapter 13 we see how the Solve app can be used to solve equations An example used is V U 2AD You could have four cells in a spreadsheet with v U A and D as formulas As you experiment with different values for these variables in the Solve app the entered and the calculated values are copied to the spreadsheet where further manipulation could be done The variables from other apps includes the results of certain calculations For example if you have plotted a function in the Function app and calculated the signed area between two x values you can reference that value in a spreadsheet by pressing tapping EN and then selecting Function gt Results gt SignedArea Numerous system variables are also available For example you could enter to get the last answer calculated in Home view You could also enter FR E i JL Fue to get the last answer calculated in Home view and have the value automatically updated as new calculations are made in Home view Note that this works only with th
273. elow it the current equation of that form The keys you can use to manipulate the graph or equation appear below the equation The x and y intercepts are given at the bottom There are two types or levels of linear equation available for you to explore y ax and y ax b You choose between them by tapping or Ez The keys available to you to manipulate the graph or equation depend on the level you have chosen For example the screen for a level 1 equation shows this e gt 7 This means that you can press kt and 4 If you choose a level 2 equation the screen shows this eoTtlt 7 This means that you can press kt and 5 Graph mode The app opens in graph mode indicated by the icity dot on the Graph button at the bottom of the waht screen In graph mode nt 2 the and keys translate the graph a vertically effectively changing the y intercept of the line Tap to change the magnitude of the increment for vertical translations The and keys as well as and decrease and increase the slope Press to change the sign of the slope The form of the linear function is shown at the top right of the display with the current equation that matches the graph just below it As you manipulate the graph the equation updates to reflect the changes 298 The Explorer apps Equation mode Test mode Tap to enter equation mode A dot en will appe
274. emaining four vertices are named D E G and H Moreover each of the six segments is also given a name J K L M and N These names are not displayed in Plot view but you can see 142 Geometry Selecting an object Hiding names Moving objects Coloring objects Geometry them if you go to Symbolic view see Symbolic view in detail on page 148 Naming objects and parts of objects enables you to refer to them in calculations This is explained in Numeric view in detail on page 150 You can rename an object See Symbolic Setup view on page 150 To select an object just tap on it The color of a selected item changes to cyan To select a point in Plot view just press _ _ A list of all the points appears Select the one you want You can choose to hide the name of an object in Plot view 1 Select the object whose label that is caption you want to hide 2 Press B8 3 Select Toggle Caption 4 Press Ea Redisplay a hidden name by repeating this procedure Points To move a point press _ _ A list of all the points appears Select the one you want to move then tap on the new location for it and press __er_ J You can also select a point by tapping on it In addition to tapping a new location for a selected point you can press the arrow keys to move the point to a new location or use a finger to drag the point to a new location A point can also be selected directly by
275. ements of the given list open_polygon LstPnt LstCplx Logical Or exprl OR expr2 Example 3 1 4 OR 8 lt 5 returns 1 Returns the remainder O term of a series expansion limit x a order_size x x 0 0 if a gt 0 order size Expr Functions and commands 403 orthocenter orthogonal pa2b2 pade parabola Shows the orthocenter of the triangle made with three points orthocenter Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Example orthocenter 0 4i 4 returns 0 0 With a point A and a line BC as arguments draws the orthogonal plane of the line that passes through the point With a point A and a plane BCD as arguments draws the orthogonal line of the plane that passes through the point orthogonal Pnt A Line BC or Plane BCD Example orthogonal A line B C draws the orthogonal plane of line BC through A and orthogonal A plane B C D draws the orthogonal line of plane B C D through A Takes a prime integer n congruent to 1 modulo 4 and returns a b such that a 2 b 2 n pa2b2 Intg n Example pa2b2 17 gives 4 1 Returns the Pade approximation i e a rational fraction P Q such that P Q Xpr mod x n 1 or mod N with degree P lt p pade Expr Xpr Var x Intg n Poly N Intg p Example pade exp x x 10 6 gives x 5 30 x 4 420 x 3 3360 x 2 15120 x 30240 x 5 30 x 4 420 x 3 3360 x 24 15120 x 30240 With two points F A as ar
276. emoval Factor This allows for the removal of any datapoint that is more than n times the standard deviation where n is the outlier removal factor By default this factor is set to 2 Configuration indicates which values you want to place in which row and if you want row or columns headers Place the symbol for each value in the order that you want to see the values appear in the spreadsheet The valid symbols are H Place column headers h Place row headers x x 22 s s o o serr sqd n min ql med q3 max For example if you specifiy h n Z x the first column will contain row headers the first row will be the number of items in the input data the second the sum of the items and the third the mean of the data If you do not specify a configuration string a default string will be used Notes The STATI f function only updates the content of the destination cells when the cell that contains the formula is calculated This means that if the spreadsheet view contains at the same time results and inputs but not the cell that 348 Functions and commands REGRS contains the call to the STAT1 function updating the data will not update the results as the cell that contains STAT1 is not recalculated since it is not visible The format of cells that receive headers is changed to have Show set to false The STAT1 function will overwrite the content of destination cells potentially erasing data Examples STATI
277. en it and the point given as the first argument is equal to the diameter the circle If the second argument is a complex then the center of the circle is at the point given in the first argument and the absolute value of the second argument is the radius of the circle circle Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cp1x B Real a Real b Var A Var B Example circle GA GB draws the circle with diameter AB Returns the circumcircle of the triangle ABC circumcircle Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Pnt or Cplx C Example circumcircle GA GB GC draws the circle circumscribed about AABC 378 Functions and commands col colDim comDenom common_perpend icular companion compare complexroot Returns the column of index n of a matrix col Mtrx n Example col 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 gives 2 5 8 Returns the number of columns of a matrix colDim Mtrx Example coldim 1 2 3 4 5 6 gives 3 Rewrites a sum of rational fractions as a one rational fraction The denominator of the one rational fraction is the common denominator of the rational fractions in the original expression With a variable as second argument the numerator and denominator are developed according to it comDenom Expr Var Example comDenom 1 x 1 y 2 1 gives x y 2 xty 2 x y 2 Draws the common perpendicular of the lines D1 and D2 common_perpendicular Line D1 Line D2 Returns the
278. endent variable Appears as the NRNG fields in the Plot Setup view In Plot Setup View enter values for NRNG In a program type n gt Nmin n Nmax where n lt n Recenters at the cursor when zooming From Plot Zoom Set Factors check or uncheck Recenter In a program type 0 gt Recenter to turn recenter on default 1 gt Recenter to turn recenter off Sets the mark to use for scatter plots In Plot Setup view for two variable statistics select one of Slmark S5Smarks SeqPlot Enables you to choose between a Stairstep or a Cobweb Sequence plot In Plot Setup view select SeqPlot then choose Stairstep or Cobweb In a program type 0 gt SeqPlot for Stairstep 1 gt SeqPlot for Cobweb 556 Programming Omin Omax Polar Ostep Polar Tmin Tmax Parametric Tstep Parametric Xtick Ytick Sets the minimum and maximum independent values In Plot Setup View enter values for RNG In a program type ny Omin n gt Omax where 1 lt n Sets the step size for the independent variable In Plot Setup view enter a value for STEP In a program type n gt Ostep where n gt 0 Sets the minimum and maximum independent variable values In Plot Setup View enter values for TRNG In a program type n gt Tmin n gt Tmax where n lt n Sets the step size for the independent variable In Plot Setup View enter a value for TSTEP In a program type
279. ent by which the graph moves with each press of a cursor key By default the increment is set at 2 9 or 20 Tap to switch to manono equation mode In equation mode you use the cursor keys to move 4 between parameters in the equation and change their values You can then qu asec ec RGU ETERS observe the effect on the graph displayed Press or to decrease or increase the value of the selected parameter Press gt or to select another parameter You can switch back to graph mode by tapping EEI The Explorer apps 303 Test mode Tap to enter test mode In test mode you test your skill at matching an equation to the graph shown Test mode is like equation mode in that you use the cursor keys to select and change the value of one or more parameters in the equation The goal is to try to match the graph that is shown The app displays the YAESING X 0 graph of a randomly chosen sinusoidal function Tap a Level buton EB 2 and so on to choose 4 between one of five types of sinusoidal equations Now press the cursor keys to select each parameter and set its value When you are ready tap to see if you have correctly matched your equation to the given graph Tap to see the correct answer and tap to exit Test mode 304 The Explorer apps 21 Functions and commands Many mathematical functions are available from
280. ent exit from a single loop CONTINUE Syntax CONTINUE Transfer execution to the start of the next iteration of a loop Variable These commands enable you to control the visibility of a user defined variable LOCAL Local Syntax LOCAL var l var2 varn Makes the variables var1 var2 etc local to the program in which they are found EXPORT Exports the variable so that it is globally available 530 Programming Function EXPORT VIEW KEY These commands enable you to control the visibility of a user defined function Export Syntax EXPORT FunctionName Exports the function FunctionName so that it is globally available and appears on the User menu A REIS Sets text that the user can see by pressing ES A prefix to a key name when creating a user keyboard See The User Keyboard Customizing key presses on page 515 Commands under the Cmds menu Strings ASC CHAR A string is a sequence of characters enclosed in double quotes To put a double quote in a string use two consecutive double quotes The character starts an escape sequence and the character s immediately following are interpreted specially n inserts a new line and two backslashes insert a single backslash To put a new line into the string press to wrap the text at that point Syntax asc str Returns a vector containing the ASCII codes of string str Example asc AB returns 65 66 Syntax char vector or int R
281. enu The VIEWS command allows you to redefine these views to run programs you have created for an app The syntax for the VIEWS command is VIEWS text By adding VIEWS text before the declaration of a function you will override the list of views for the app For example if your app program defines three views SetSides RollDice and PlotResults when you press you will see SetSides RollDice and PlotResults instead of the app s default view list 520 Programming Customizing an app Example When an app is active its associated program appears as the first item in the Program Catalog It is within this program that you put functions to create a custom app A useful procedure for customizing an app is illustrated below 1 Decide on the HP app that you want to customize The customized app inherits all the properties of the HP app 2 Go to the Applications Library GM highlight the HP app tap and save the app with a unique name 3 Customize the new app if you need to for example by configuring the axes or angle measure settings 4 Develop the functions to work with your customized app When you develop the functions use the app naming conventions described above 5 Put the VIEWS command in your program to modify the app s Views menu 6 Decide if your app will create new global variables If so you should EXPORT them from a separate user program that is called from the Start function in
282. eometry Numeric View Measure gt Area tabscissa 2 affix Note that area Sangle 4arcLen appears on the entry m coordinates line ready for you to elena cee distance specify the object whose _ measure sJedistance2 area you are interested eaistanceat i y cmi CD er ares in 4 Tap WEBB choose curves and then the curve whose area you are interested in The name of the object is placed between the parentheses 150 Geometry NOTE Listing all objects Geometry You could have entered the command and object name manually that is without choosing them from menus If you enter object names manually remember that the name of the object in Plot view must be given a G prefix if it is used in any calculation Thus the circle named C in Plot view must be referred to as GC in Numeric view and Symbolic view 5 Press or tap QS The area is displayed Top IB Enter radius GC and tap GEER The radius is displayed Note that the syntax used here is the same as you use in the CAS to calculate the properties of geometric objects Peat v New 1 elete The Geometry functions and their syntax are described in Geometry functions and commands on page 165 8 Press to go back to Plot view Now manipulate the circle is some way that changes its area and radius For example select the center point A and use the cursor keys to move it to a new location Remember to press when yo
283. eries Summation Differential Curl Divergence Returns the series expansion of an expression in the vicinity of a given equality variable With the optional third and fourth arguments you can specify the order and direction of the series expansion If no order is specified the series returned is fifth order If no direction is specified the series is bidirectional series Expr Equal var limit point Orde r Dir 1 0 1 Example series x 4 x 2 x 2 1 x 0 5 gives 2 x 2x 2 x 3 3x 4 x 5 x 6 order size x With two arguments returns the discrete antiderivative of the expression with respect to the variable sum Expr Var With four arguments returns the discrete sum of the expression with respect to the variable from a to b sum Expr Var VarMin a VarMax b Example sum n 2 n 1 5 gives 55 Returns the rotational curl of a vector field defined by curl A B C x y z dC dy dB dz dA dz dC dx dB dx dA dy curl Lst A B C Lst x y Z Example Curl 2 x y x Zz y Zz yr gives z x 0 z 24x Returns the divergence of a vector field defined by divergence A B C x y z dA dx dB dy dC dz divergence Lst A B C Lst x y z Example divergence x 2t y xtzty 2 3 x 2 x y Z gives 2 x 3 z 2 1 Functions and commands 325 Gradient Hessian Integral By Parts v x By Parts u v Returns the gradient of an expression With a list of
284. ering your mathematical expression press 2 or 3 times depending on the complexity of your expression to exit the editor You can now continue to enter text Notes and Info 495 To import a note Sharing notes You can import a note from the Note Catalog into an app s Info view and vice versa Suppose you want to copy a note named Assignments from the Note Catalog into the Function Info view 1 Open the Note Catalog 2 Select the note Assignments and tap 3 Open the copy options for copying to the clipboard Copy The menu buttons change to give you options for copying EZIB Marks where the copying or cutting is to begin ETE Marks where the copying or cutting is to end QW Select the entire program ETE Cut the selection ETB Copy the selection Select what you want to copy or cut using the options listed immediately above Top ETB or ETB 6 Open the Info view of the Function app 8 tap the Function app icon press Ga Move the cursor to the location where you want the copied text to be pasted and open the clipboard Select the text from the clipboard and press Mo You can send a note to another HP Prime See Sharing data on page 44 496 Notes and Info 27 Programming HP Prime Programs Command Structure This chapter describes how to program the HP Prime In this chapter you ll learn about e programming commands e writing functions
285. es bisector A B C draws the bisector of lt BAC bisector 0 4i 4 draws the line given by y x Given three points that define a triangle creates the bisector of the exterior angles of the triangle whose common vertex is at the first point The triangle does not have to be drawn in the Plot view exbisector pointl point2 point3 Examples exbisector A B C draws the bisector of the exterior angles of AABC whose common vertex is at point A exbisector 0 4i 4 draws the line given by y x Given 2 points draws a ray from the first point through the second point half _line pointl point2 Draws a line The arguments can be two points a linear expression of the form a x b y c or a point and a slope as shown in the examples line pointl point2 or line a x b ytc or line pointl slope realm Examples line 2 i 3 2i draws the line whose equation is y x 1 that is the line through the points 2 1 and 3 2 169 median_line parallel perpen_bisector line 2x 3y 8 draws the line whose equation is 2x 3y 8 line 3 2i slope 1 2 draws the line whose equation is x 2y 7 that is the line through 3 2 with slope m 1 2 Given three points that define a triangle creates the median of the triangle that passes through the first point and contains the midpoint of the segment defined by the other two points median _line pointl point2 point3 Example median _line 0 8i 4 draws the line who
286. es 7 11 c c parameter for modes 8 11 d d parameter for modes 8 10 11 e e parameter for mode 11 py place 2 cells one for user input and the other to display the predicted y for the input px place 2 cells one for user input and the other to display the predicted x for the input Example REGRS A25 B37 2 Returns the predicted Y for a given x PredY mode x parameters Mode governs the regression model used 1 y sl x int 2 y sl In x int 3 y int exp sl x A y int x sl 350 Functions and commands PredX HypZ1mean 5 y int sl x 6 y sl x int 7 y L 1 a exp b x 8 y a sin b x c d 9 y cx 2 bx a 10 y dx 3 cx 2 bx a 11 y ex 4 dx 3 cx 2 bx a Parameters is either one argument a list of the coefficients of the regression line or the n coefficients one after another Returns the predicted x for a given y PredX mode y parameters Mode governs the regression model used 1 y sl x int 2 y sl In x int 3 y int exp sl x 4 y int x sl 5 y int sl x 6 y sl x int 7 y L 1 a exp b x 8 y a sin b x c d 9 y cx 2 bx a 10 y dx 3 cx 2 bx a 11 y ex 4 dx 3 cx 2 bx a Parameters is either one argument a list of the coefficients of the regression line or the n coefficients one after another The hypothesis test HypZ1mean is a one sample Ztest for comparing means HypZlmean input list configuration HypZlmean SampMean Samp
287. es the next character uppercase Makes the next charac fer uppercase Lock mode makes all characters uppercase until the mode is reset With uppercase locked makes the next character lowercase With uppercase locked makes all characters low ercase until the mode is reset Reset lowercase lock mode Reset uppercase lock mode You can also enter text and other characters by displaying the characters palette vers Getting started 23 Math keys The most common math functions have their own keys on the keyboard or a key in combination with the key Example 1 To calculate SIN 10 press LSN 10 and press _f _ The answer displayed is 0 544 if your angle measure setting is radians Example 2 To find the square root of 256 press 256 and press _ _ The answer displayed is 16 Notice that the key initiates the operator represented in blue on the next key pressed in this case V on the key The mathematical functions not represented on the keyboard are on the Math CAS and Catlg menus see chapter 21 Functions and commands starting on page 305 Note that the order in which you enter operands and operators is determined by the entry mode By default the entry mode is textbook which means that you enter operands and operators just as you would if you were writing the expression on paper If your preferred entry mode is Reverse Polish Notation the order of entry is differen
288. esired direction up or down To pan drag your finger horizontally or vertically across the screen To quickly zoom in make an open pinch Place the thumb and a finger close together on the screen and move them apart Only lift them from the screen when you reach the desired magnification To quickly zoom out make an elosed pinch Place the thumb and a finger some distance apart on the screen and move them toward each other Only lift them from the screen when you reach the desired magnification Note that pinching to zoom only works in applications that feature zooming such as where graphs are plotted In other applications pinching will do nothing or do something other than zooming For example in the Spreadsheet app pinching will change the width of a column or the height of a row Getting started The keyboard The numbers in the legend below refer to the parts of the keyboard described in the illustration on the next page Number Feature o DOAN OD OF RA OU N LCD and touch screen 320 x 240 pixels Context sensitive touch button menu HP Apps keys Home view and preference settings Common math and science functions Alpha and Shift keys On Cancel and Off key List matrix program and note catalogs Last Answer key Ans Enter key Backspace and Delete key Menu and Paste key CAS and CAS preferences key View and Copy key Escape and Clear key Help key Rocker wheel for cu
289. esis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the two populations means are equal Ho p Ho You select one of the following alternative hypotheses against which to test the null hypothesis Ho Hy lt p2 Ho My gt u2 Ho u Me Inference app 249 Inputs The inputs are Field Definition name i Sample 1 mean Ry Sample 2 mean Sy Sample 1 standard deviation S2 Sample 2 standard deviation ny Sample 1 size n2 Sample 2 size a Significance level Pooled Check this option to pool samples based on their standard deviations Results The results are Result Description Test T T Test statistic Test A 3 Difference in the means associated with the test tvalue P Probability associated with the T Test statistic DF Degrees of freedom Critical T Boundary values of T associated with the a level that you supplied Critical Difference in the means associated Az with the a level you supplied 250 Inference app Confidence intervals The confidence interval calculations that the HP Prime can perform are based on the Normal Zdistribution or Student s t distribution One Sample Z Interval Menu name Zint 1 p This option uses the Normal Zdistribution to calculate a confidence interval for p the true mean of a population when the true population standard deviation is known Inputs The inputs are Field Definition name x Sample mean n Sample size Population standard deviation
290. esos ik ec es ea eee veep ee ved ee 431 App variables peoria n A aa a EEEE EE E E S 432 Function app vorebles lt aiia iain mira nanan wes 432 Geometry app variables ccscceeeeeeseceeeeeeeetteeeeeeeees 433 Spreadsheet app variables ccceseseeeeeeeeettteeeeestneees 433 Solve app Vora blesi aiinsiusndsavedesitoyrahieridoesdavbrontipeasbnaalhn 433 Advanced Graphing app variables eceeeeeereeeeeeees 434 Statistics 1Var app variables ccessseeceeesssteeeeeeeeenees 435 Statistics 2Var app variables cceesseeceeeesteeeeeeeeeeeees 437 Inference app variables ccccccccesseeeseseceesteeesseeeeees 439 Parametric app variables ccccceessseeeeeesttteeeeeennnees 44 Polar app Vvariablesiicancvonsinissqvniseivautorvateys iteberatinershnonthind 442 Finance app variables iui sssisnaisesdereadv var bvanidy bbiwsoseiysassonnihnd 442 Linear Solver app variables cccccccccceeeeeteeeeeeeeeenteeees 443 Triangle Solver app variables cccecesseseeeeesetteeeeeeeees 443 linear Explorer app variables sis csssaeeseceyaaouesencydvemereaniants 443 Quadratic Explorer app variables ccccceeeesseeeeeeeees 443 Trig Explorer app variables 03 lt sssossasneseiantonantedeatereonaeas 444 Sequence app Variables c ccasacsgscsdssaavssnededentcnaversetexens 444 23 Units and constants Units cccsadects ceetabaetad cine tates suteeseneesayresepaesoary E 4
291. espect to a center point by a scale factor homothety point realk object Example homothety GA 2 GB creates a dilation centered at point A that has a scale factor of 2 Each point P on geometric object B has its image P on ray AP such that AP 2AP Draws the inversion of a point with respect to another point by a scale factor inversion pointl realk point2 Example inversion GA 3 GB draws point C on line AB such that AB AC 3 In this case point A is the center of the 178 Geometry projection reflection rotation similarity Geometry inversion and the scale factor is 3 Point B is the point whose inversion is created In general the inversion of point A through center C with scale factor k maps A onto A such that A is on line CA and CA CA k where CA and CA denote the lengths of the corresponding segments If k 1 then the lengths CA and CA are reciprocals Draws the orthogonal projection of a point onto a curve projection curve point Reflects a geometric object over a line or through a point The latter is sometimes referred to as a halfturn reflection line object or reflection point object Examples reflection line x 3 point 1 1 reflects the point at 1 1 over the vertical line x 3 to create a point at 5 1 reflection 1 i 3 2i reflects the point at 3 2 through the point at 1 1 to create a point at 1 4 Rotates a geometric objec
292. essing the range of values of a variable for which a statement should be executed With a vector and a point as arguments returns the point translated by the vector With two points as arguments returns the second point translated by the vector from the origin to the first point translation Vect Pnt C Example translation 0 i Ga translates object A down one unit Returns a matrix transposed without conjugation transpose Mtrx Example tran 1 2 3 1 3 6 2 5 71 gives 1 1 2 2 3 5 3 6 7 Draws a triangle with vertices at the three points triangle Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cp1x Returns a value or a list of values truncated to n decimal places If n is not provided it is taken as 0 Accepts complex numbers trunc Real LstReal Int n Example trunc 4 3 gives 4 Returns an expression with transcendentals rewritten as complex exponentials tsimplify Expr Example tsimplify exp 2 x texp x gives exp x 2 exp x Returns the type of an expression e g list string type Expr Example type abc gives DOM STRING 422 Functions and commands UFACTOR unapply UNTIL USIMPLIFY valuation variance vector vertices vertices_abca Factorizes a unit in a unit object ufactor Unit Unit Returns the function defined by an expression and a variable unapply Expr Var Example unapply 2 x 2 x gives x gt 2 x
293. esult in the variable var Also accepts three parallel or concurrent lines in this case it returns the equation of the harmonic conjugate line harmonic division pointl point2 point3 var or harmonic division linel line2 line3 var Example harmonic division point 0 0 point 3 0 point 4 0 p returns point 12 5 0 and stores it in the variable p Tests whether or not 4 points are in a harmonic division or range Returns 1 if they are or O otherwise is_harmonic point1 point2 point3 point4 is _harmonic pointl point2 point3 point4 Example is harmonic point 0 0 point 3 0 point 4 0 point 12 5 0 returns 1 is_harmonic_circle_bundle Geometry Returns 1 if the circles build a beam 2 if they have the same center 3 if they are the same circle and O otherwise is_harmonic_circle_ bundle circlel circle2 w Circlen 189 is_harmonic_line_bundle Returns 1 if the lines are concurrent 2 if they are all parallel 3 if they are the same line and O otherwise is harmonic _line bundle linel line2 linen is_rhombus Tests whether or not a set of four points are vertices of a rhombus Returns O if they are not 1 if they are and 2 if they are vertices of a square is rhombus pointl point2 point3 point4 Example is rhombus point 0 0 point 2 2 point 0 4 point 2 2 returns 2 LineHorz Draws the horizontal line y a LineHorz a Example LineHorz 2 draws the ho
294. et functions The spreadsheet functions can be selected from the App Toolbox menu fis gt gt Spreadsheet They can also be selected from the View menu E when the Spreadsheet app is open The syntax for many but not all the spreadsheet functions follows this pattern functionName input optional parameters Input is the input list for the function This can be a cell range reference a simple list or anything that results in a list of values One useful optional parameter is Configuration This is a string that controls which values are output Leaving the parameter out produces the default output The order of the values can also be controlled by the order that they appear in the string Functions and commands 345 SUM AVERAGE For example DA IB IC ID IE STAT1 A25 A37 1 STATI F i 28 62 produces the following 3 bx boos 4 EX2 12790298 default output Pix focal 6 _ sx2 1293 833 7 Jox 34 55875 8 oX 1194 307 9 serrx 9 976253 a 15526 Go However if you just wanted DIA IB IC D IE to see the number of data hi 13 a 2 R 62 points the mean and the 3 XB 55875 4 standard deviation you would enter STAT1 A25 A37 h n amp 10 x o What the STATI A25 A37 h n X 0 configuration string is indicating here is that row headings are required h and just the number of
295. etup view Setup Parametric Plot Setup specifying TRogp_ B60 appropriate ee PuS hi ti X Rng 15 9 15 9 graphing OPHons Y Rng 10 9 10 9 In this example set yti the T Rng and T YTick 1 Step fields so that _ enter minimum time value T steps from 0 to 360 in 5 steps Select the 2nd T Rng field and enter 360 MEN 5 Plot the functions Plot Setup T O 0 08 Parametric app 271 Explore the The menu button gives you access to common tools for graph exploring plots EZE displays a range of zoom options The and keys can also be used to zoom in and out EZE when active enables a tracing cursor to be moved along the contour of the plot with the coordinates of the cursor displayed at the bottom of the screen GREE specify a T value and the cursor moves to the corresponding x and y coordinates EBIB display the functions responsible for the plot Detailed information about these tools is provided in Common operations in Plot view on page 88 Typically you would modify a plot by changing its definition in Symbolic view However you can modify some plots by changing the Plot Setup parameters For example you can plot a triangle instead of a circle simply by changing two plot setup parameters The definitions in Symbolic view remain unchanged Here is how it is done 10 Press Setup 11 Change T Step to 120 12 Top za 13 From the Method menu
296. eturns empty string If n gt dim str returns str Example right MOMOGUMBO 5 returns GUMBO Syntax mid str pos n Extracts n characters from string str starting at index pos nis optional if not specified extracts all the remainder of the string Example mid MOMOGUMBO 3 5 returns MOGUM mid PUDGE 4 returns GE Syntax rotate str n Permutation of characters in string str If O lt n lt dim str shifts n places to left If dim str lt n lt 1 shifts n spaces to right If n gt dim str or n lt dim str returns str Examples rotate 12345 2 returns 34512 rotate 12345 returns 51234 rotate 12345 6 returns 12345 Syntax STRINGFROMID integer Returns in the current language the built in string associated in the internal string table with the specified integer Examples STRINGFROMID 56 returns Complex STRINGFROMID 202 returns Home Vars Syntax REPLACE object start object Replaces part of object with object beginning at start The objects can be matrices vectors or stings Example REPLACE 12345 3 99 returns 12995 Programming 533 Drawing C PX DRAWMENU FREEZE PX C RGB There are 10 built in graphics variables in the HP Prime called GO G9 GO is always the current screen graphic G1 to G9 can be used to store temporary graphic objects called GROBs for short when programming applica
297. eturns the string corresponding to the character codes in vector or the single code int Examples char 65 returns A char 82 77 72 returns RMH Programming 531 DIM STRING INSTRING LEFT Syntax dim str Returns the number of characters in string str Example dim 12345 returns 5 dim and dim n return 1 Notice the use of the two double quotes and the escape sequence Syntax string object Returns a string representation of the object The result varies depending on the type of object string 2 3 results in the string 0 666666666667 Examples String Result string F1 when F1 X COS X COS X string L1 when L1 1 2 3 1 2 3 string M1 whenM1 1 2 3 14 5 6 123 45 6 Syntax inString sfrl str2 Returns the index of the first occurrence of str2 in str Returns O if str2 is not present in str 1 Note that the first character in a string is position 1 Examples n inString vanilla van returns 1 wou inString banana na returns 3 inString ab abc returns O Syntax left sfr n Return the first n characters of string str If n gt dim str or n lt 0 returns str If n O returns the empty string Example Left MOMOGUMBO 3 returns MOM 532 Programming RIGHT MID ROTATE STRINGFROMID REPLACE Syntax right str n Returns the last n characters of string str If n lt O r
298. eviation of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the population standard deviation of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the standard error of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the mean of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 438 Variables LY xY2 sY oY serrY Contains the sum of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sum of the squares of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sample standard deviation of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 s5 Contains the population standard deviation of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the standard error of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Inference app variables Category Names Results Result CritScore explained TestScore CritVal below TestValue CritVal2 Prob DF Symbolic AltHyp Type Method Numeric Alpha Pooled Cont sl Mean s2 Mean2 ol n o2 n2 x uO x2 nO Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Variables 439 Results CritScore CritVal1 CritVal2 DF Prob Result
299. ew Displays the algebraic area of a polygon or circle The measure is displayed with a label at the given point in Plot view areaat polygon point or areaat circle point 180 Geometry areaatraw distanceat distanceatraw perimeterat perimeteratraw slopeat Geometry Example areaat circle x 2 y 2 1 point 4 4 displays acircle x 2 y 2 1 n at point 4 4 Works the same as areaat but without the label Used in Symbolic view Displays the distance between 2 geometrical objects The measure is displayed with a label at the given point in Plot view distanceat objectl object2 point Example distanceat 1 i 3 3 i 4 4 i returns 1 i 3 3 i 2V2 at point 4 4 Works the same as distanceat but without the label Used in Symbolic view Displays the perimeter of a polygon or circle The measure is displayed with a label at the given point in Plot view perimeterat polygon point or perimeterat circle point Example perimeterat circle x 2 y 2 1 point 4 4 displays pcircle x 2 y 2 1 2 n at point 4 4 Works the same as perimeterat but without the label Used in Symbolic view Displays the slope of a straight object segment line etc The measure is displayed with a label at the given point in Plot view slopeat object point 181 slopeatraw Example slopeat line point 0 0 point 2 3 point 8 8 displays sline
300. exam mode activation 1 If the Exam Mode screen is not showing press FA BB top ond top SE 2 Enter the password for the current exam mode activation and tap twice You can also cancel exam mode using the Connectivity Kit See the HP Connectivity Kit User Guide for more details Modifying configurations Exam mode configurations can be changed You can also delete a configuration and restore the default configuration To change a configuration 1 If the Exam Mode screen is not showing press EE top ond top CEE 2 Select the configuration you want to change from the Configuration list 3 Tap RHA 4 Make whatever changes are necessary and then tap OK 66 Exam Mode To return to the default configuration l Press EB The Home Settings screen appears Top MEZI Top CED The Exam Mode screen appears Choose Default Exam from the Configuration list Tap BEBE select Reset from the menu and tap to confirm your intention to return the configuration to its default settings Deleting configurations You cannot delete the default exam configuration even if you have modified it You can only delete those that you have created To delete a configuration l If the Exam Mode screen is not showing press ETa BM tap ond top OEA Select the configuration you want to delete from the Configuration list 3 Tap and choose Delete When asked to confirm the deletion tap or press _F
301. example Triangles in which you set up just once the equations for solving common problems involving right angled triangles such as H 0 SIN 0 A H COS 0 O A TAN 0 etc You could continue to use the Solve app to solve other types of problems but use your Triangle app to solve problems involving right angled triangles Just open Triangles select which equation to use you won t need to re enter them enter the variables you know and then solve for the unknown variable An introduction to HP apps 107 Like built in apps customized apps can be sent to another HP Prime calculator This is explained in Sharing data on page 44 Customized apps can also be reset deleted and sorted just as built in apps can as explained earlier in this chapter Note that the only apps that cannot be customized are the Linear Explorer Quadratic Explorer and Trig Explorer apps Example Suppose you want to create a customized app that is based on the built in Sequence app The app will enable you to generate and explore the Fibonacci series 1 Press and use the Application Library cursor keys to highlight the ea Sequence app Don t open Solve Linear Solver rer Trig Explorer the app o g F Triangle Solver B B 2 Tap E This enables you to create a copy of the builtin app and save it gap gery gr TS aS TT under a new name Any data already in the built in app is retained and you can ret
302. f comparison operators and Bool ean operators Special symbols palette Displays a palette of common math and Greek characters Automatically inserts the degree minute or second symbol accord ing to the context Backspace Deletes the character to the left of the cursor It will also return the highlighted field to its default value if it has one Delete Deletes the character to the right of the cursor Clears all data on the screen including the history On a set tings screen for example Plot Setup returns all settings to their default values Cursor keys Moves the cursor around the display Press to move to the end of a menu or screen or to move to the start These keys represent the directions of the rocker wheel Getting started 21 Shift keys Keys Purpose Continued Displays all the available characters To enter a character use the cursor keys to highlight it and then tap BB To select multiple characters select one tap FEE and continue likewise before pressing QB There are many pages of characters You can jump to a particular Unicode block by tapping and selecting the block You can also flick from page to page There are two shift keys that you use to access the operations and characters printed on the bottom of the keys and EA Key Purpose ALPHA alpha J Press to access the operations printed in blue on a key For instance
303. fied will be the top left of trgtGRB c can be an color specified as RRGGBB If it is not specified all pixels from rcGRB will be copied Using the same variable for trgtGRB and srcGRB can be unpredictable when the source and destination overlap Syntax DIMGROB P G w h color or DIMGROB_P G list DIMGROB G w h color or DIMGROB G list Sets the dimensions of GROB G to w x h Initializes the graphic G with color or with the graphic data provided in list Ifthe graphic is initialized using graphic data then list is a list of integers Each integer as seen in base 16 describes one color every 16 bits Colors are in A1R5G5B5 format that is 1 bit for the alpha channel and 5 bits for R G and B Syntax GETPIX G x y GETPIX P G x y Returns the color of the pixel G with coordinates x y G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO the current graphic Syntax GROBH G GROBH P G Returns the height of G G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO 536 Programming GROBW_P GROBW INVERT_P INVERT LINE_P LINE PIXOFF_P PIXOFF Syntax GROBW G GROBW_P G Returns the width of G G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO Syntax INVERT G x yl x2 y2 INVERT _P G xl yl x2 y2 Executes a reverse video of the selected region G can be any of the grap
304. font Opens an input form for you to create a sequence based on an expression and to store the result in a specified data column See Generating data on page 215 Calculates statistics for each data set selected in Symbolic view See Computed statistics on page 231 In Numeric view highlight the data to change type a new value and press _ _ You can also highlight the data tap GER make your change and tap GSM Statistics 2Var app 227 Delete data To delete a data item highlight it and press L J The values below the deleted cell will scroll up one row To delete a column of data highlight an entry in that column and press emn BA Clear Select the column and top I To delete all data in every column press Clear select A11 columns and tap GR Insert data Highlight the cell below where you want to insert a value Tap and enter the value If you just want to add more data to the data set and it is not important where it goes select the last cell in the data set and start entering the new data Sort data values You can sort up to three columns of data at a time based on a selected independent column l In Numeric view place the highlight in the column you want to sort and tap SERB Specify the Sort Order Ascending or Descending Specify the independent and dependent data columns Sorting is by the independent column For instance if ages are in C1 and incomes in
305. for a two sample T test ConfT2mean SampMean SampMean2 SampStdDev SampStdDev2 SampSize SampSize2 pooled ConfLevel Finance app functions The Finance App uses a set of functions that all reference the same set of Finance app variables There are 5 main TVM variables 4 of which are mandatory for each of these functions except DoFinance There are 3 other variables that are optional and have default values These variables occur as arguments to the Finance app functions in the following set order NbPmt the number of payments IPYR the annual interest rate pv the present value of the investment or loan PMTV the payment value FV the future value of the investment or loan PPYR the number of payments per year 12 by default Functions and commands 367 CalcFV CalcIPYR CalcNbPmt CalcPMTV CalcPV DoFinance CPYR the number of compounding periods per year 12 by default END payments made at the end of the period The arguments PPYR CPYR and END are optional if not supplied PPYR 12 CPYR PPYR and END 1 Solves for the future value of an investment or loan CalcFV NbPmt IPYR PV PMIV PPYR CPYR END Solves for the interest rate per year of an investment or loan CalcIPYR NbPmt PV PMTV FV PPYR CPYR END Solves for the number of payments in an investment or loan CalcNbPmt IPYR PV PMTV FV PPYR CPYR
306. functions which allow solving a complete triangle from the input of three consecutive parts of the triangle The names of these commands use A to signify an angle and S to signify a side length To use these commands enter three inputs in the specified order given by the command name These commands all return a list of the three unknown values lengths of sides and or measures of angles Functions and commands 369 AAS ASA SAS SSA SSS DoSolve AAS Uses the measure of two angles and the length of the non included side to calculate the measure of the third angle and the lengths of the other two sides AAS angle angle side ASA Uses the measure of two angles and the length of the included side to calculate the measure of the third angle and the lengths of the other two sides ASA angle side angle SAS Uses the length of two sides and the measure of the included angle to calculate the length of the third side and the measures of the other two angles SAS side angle side SSA Uses the lengths of two sides and the measure of a non included angle to calculate the length of the third side and the measures of the other two angles SSA side side angle SSS Uses the lengths of the three sides of a triangle to calculate the measures of the three angles SSS side side side Solves the current problem in the Triangle Solver app The Triangle Solver app must have enough data entered to successfull
307. g an APp isir oa i i e a e iaa 1 App functions and variables nccenwunuaceies cameerenaiienn 1 Contents 6 Function app Getting started with the Function app cccescceeeeeeerteeeeeeeees 111 Analyzing functions 4 taatsrchon chia cxwmiveneuek opiwetelwantdugrimebetneved 118 The Function Vetriables tii tcuis caesansnnreeedcareiecahoateeormwmarveeed 122 Summary of FCN operations ctiavioran dra cetsgeevemmomiveeantneunslutel 124 7 Advanced Graphing app Getting started with the Advanced Graphing app 05 126 Plok Gallletiyencctoncecerceca ctaniiacavectast sane naan 134 Exploring a plot from the Plot Gallery cccesseeesteeenees 134 8 Geometry Getting started with the Geometry app seseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 135 Plot view in details lt axiattqencutacinssclensatnsueerancnyacersiwuyiiaersinavns 141 Plof Setup VieWrianiniii eieiei gee A E A 146 Symbolic view in detail vi verAsetraweiasvernencnds sense yceranciyencerotenvas 148 Symbolic Setup VIEWS wi cctiusnatiesleiudineity Codi legend eatexincivsucemmarnt 150 Numeric view in details ususetsercitecauueeisecnisucerineryoucemsuavns 150 Geometric objects aria tacch vnraasasstiazeons te mimponnehiesiananiueborntees 153 Geometric transtormations lt siseeueh gussarnaceneonssonieaecimas Sinoneyaaees 161 Geometry functions and commands cccseeseeeeeteeeeeeees 165 Symbolic view Cmds menu cccsceceecceeseeteeeeeeeenneeeees 165 Numeric view Cmds
308. ge font Toggles between showing the value of the cell and the definition that generated the value 104 An introduction to HP apps Button Purpose Cont Displays a menu for you to choose to display the evaluations of 1 2 3 or 4 defintions If you have more than four definitions seelcted in Symbolic view you can press to scroll rightwards and see more columns Pressing scrolls the columns leftwards Common operations in Numeric Setup view Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Press to open Numeric Setup view The Numeric Setup view is used Function Num Setup 07 497 gt numsp oo Num Step 1 e set the starting number for the independent variable in NumZoom 4 automatic tables displayed in Numeric view the Num Start field Enter table start value ea Edita ee ee es es Num Type Automatic e set the increment between consecutive numbers in automatic tables displayed in Numeric view the Num Step field e specify whether the table of data to be displayed in Numeric view is to be based on the specified starting number and increment automatic table or to based on particular numbers for the independent variable that your specify build your own table the Num Type field set the zoom factor for zooming in or out on the table displayed in Numeric view the Num Zoom field Modifying Numeric Setup Select the field you want to chang
309. ge of the Home Settings screen see Home settings on page 30 When your are working in CAS you can retrieve an expres sion or result from Home view by tapping and selecting Get from Home Home view opens Press or until the item you want to retrieve is highlighted and press __ _ The highlighted item is copied to the cursor point in CAS You can access Home variables from within the CAS Home variables are assigned uppercase letters CAS variables are assigned lowercase letters Thus SIN x and SIN X will yield different results To use a Home variable in the CAS simply include its name in a calculation For example suppose in Home view you have assigned variable Qto 100 Suppose too that you have assigned variable q to 1000 in the CAS If you are in the CAS and enter 5 q the result is 5000 If you had entered 5 Q instead the result would have been 500 In a similar way CAS variables can be used in calculations in Home view Thus you can enter 5 q in Home view and get 5000 even though q is a CAS variable Computer algebra system CAS 59 60 Computer algebra system CAS Exam Mode The HP Prime can be precisely configured for an examination with any number of features or functions disabled for a set period of time Configuring a HP Prime for an examination is called exam mode configuration You can create and save multiple exam mode configurations each with its own subset of functionality disabl
310. geometric objects in Plot view See Geometric objects on page 153 for a list of the objects you can draw The drawing tool you choose line circle hexagon etc remains selected until you deselect it This enables you to quickly draw a number of objects of the same type such as a number of hexagons Once you have finished drawing objects of a particular type deselect the drawing tool by press ER You can tell if a drawing tool is still active by the presence of on screen help at the top left side corner of the screen help such as Hit Point 1 An object in Plot view can be manipulated in numerous ways and its mathematical properties can be easily determined see page 150 Object naming Each geometric object you create is given a name In the example shown on page 141 note that the circle has been named C Each defining point is also been named the center point has been named A and the point tapped to set the radius of the circle has been named B It is not only the points that y F define a geometric object ea 3 that are given a name Every 2 component of the object that aes T has any geometric 1 significance is also named bang 2 If for example you create a ye ee hexagon the hexagon is Zoom Point _Line_ Polygo Curve Transfo given a name as is each point at each vertex In the example at the right the pentagon is named C the points used to define the hexagon are named A and B and the r
311. gon This command can also return the area under a curve between two points area expr x valuel value2 Examples If GA is defined to be the unit circle then area GA returns T area 4 x 2 4 x 4 4 returns 14 666 Given a vector of points returns a matrix containing the x and y coordinates of those points Each row of the matrix defines one point the first column gives the x coordinates and the second column contains the y coordinates coordinates pointl point2 pointn Returns the distance between two points or between a point and a curve distance pointl point2 or distance point curve 183 distance2 equation extract_measure Examples distance 1 i 3 3i returns 2 828 or 2V2 if GA is the point at 0 0 and GB is defined as plotfunc 4 x 2 4 then distance GA GB returns 3 464 or 2V3 Returns the square of the distance between two points or between a point and a curve distance2 pointl point2 or distance2 point curve Examples distance2 1 i 3 3i returns 8 If GA is the point at 0 0 and GB is defined as plottunc 4 x 2 4 then distance2 GA GB returns 12 Returns the Cartesian equation of a curve in x and y or the Cartesian coordinates of a point equation curve or equation point Example If GA is the point at 0 0 GB is the point at 1 0 and GC is defined as circle GA GB GA then equation GC returns x y 1 Returns t
312. gth and mass 587 588 Troubleshooting Appendix C Product Regulatory Information Federal Communications Commission Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmtul interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television recep tion which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett Packard Company may void the user s authority to operate the equipment
313. guments draws a parabola of focus F and top A With three points F A and P as arguments draws a parabola with focus F and top A in the plane ABP With a complex A and a real c as arguments draws a parabola of equation y yA c x xA 2 With one second degree polynomial P x y as argument draws the parabola when the polynomial is set to equal O parabola Pnt F Pnt xA i yA Pnt A Real c r Pnt P 404 Functions and commands parallel parallelepiped parallelogram perimeterat perimeteratraw Example parabola GA GB draws a parabola whose focus is point A and whose directrix is line B With a point and a line as arguments draws the line through the point that is parallel to the given line With a point and a plane as arguments draws the plane through the point that is parallel to the given plane with a point and two lines as arguments draws the plane through the point that is parallel to the plane made by the two given lines parallel Pnt or Line Line or Plane Line Example parallel A B draws the line through point A that is parallel to line B Draws a parallelepiped with sides AB AC and AD The faces of the parallelepiped are parallelograms parallelepiped Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Pnt D Draws the parallelogram ABCD such that vector AB vector AD vector AC parallelogram Pnt A Cplx Pnt B Cplx Pnt C Cplx Var D Example parallelogram 0 6 9
314. guration list Select a time out period from the Timeout list Note that 8 hours is the maximum period If you are preparing to supervise a student examination make sure that the time out period chosen is greater than the duration of the examination Enter a password of between 1 and 10 characters The password must be entered if you or another user wants to cancel exam mode before the time out period has elapsed If you want to erase the memory of the calculator select Erase memory This will erase all user entries and return the calculator to its factory default settings If you want the exam mode indicator to flash periodically while the calculator is in exam mode select Blink LED Using the supplied USB cable connect a student s calculator Insert the micro A connector the one with the rectangular end into the USB port on the sending calculator and the other connector into the USB port on the receiving calculator To activate the configuration on an attached calculator tap RA The Exam Mode screen closes The connected calculator is now in exam Exam Mode 65 mode with the specified disabled features not accessible to the user of that calculator 9 Repeat from step 7 for each calculator that needs to have its functionality limited Cancelling exam mode If you want to cancel exam mode before the set time period has elapsed you will need to enter the password for the current
315. han 3 Not equal The hypothesis test HypT1 mean is a one sample T test for comparing means HypTlmean SampMean SampStdDev SampSize NullPopProp SigLevel Mode Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 less than 2 Greater than 3 Not equal The hypothesis test HypT2mean is a two sample T test for comparing means j HypT2mean SampMean1 SampMean2 SampStdDev1 SampStdDev2 SampSizel SampSize2 pooled SigLevel Mode Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not equal The ConfZ1mean calculates the confidence interval for a one sample Zest ConfZlmean SampMean SampSize PopStdDevm ConfLevel The ConfZ2mean calculates the confidence interval for a two sample Z est ConfZ2mean SampMeanl SampMean2 SampSizel SampSize2 PopStdDev1 PopStdDev2 ConfLevel 366 Functions and commands ConfZ1prop ConfZ2prop ConfT1mean ConfT2mean The ConfZ1 prop calculates the confidence interval for a one proportion Ztest ConfZlprop SuccCount SampSize ConfLevel configuration The ConfZ1mean calculates the confidence interval for a two proportion Ztest ConfZ2prop SuccCountl SuccCount2 SampSizel SampSize2 ConfLevel The ConfT1mean calculates the confidence interval for a one sample T test ConfTlmean SampMean SampStdDev SampSize ConfLevel The ConfT2mean calculates the confidence interval
316. he Program Editor Opens further menu options for the selected program Save Rename Sort Delete Clear These options are described immediately below To redisplay the initial menu press or Clear E Programming 499 Button or Key Purpose Continued Save creates a copy of the selected program with a new name you are prompted to give Rename renames the selected program Sort sorts the list of programs Sort options are alphabetical and chronological Delete deletes the selected program Clear deletes all programs Transmits the highlighted program to another HP Prime or to a PC Debugs the selected program Runs the highlighted program or Moves to the beginning or end of the Program Catalog 2 Deletes the selected program Deletes all programs 500 Programming Creating a new program HINT 1 Open the Program Catalog and start a new program E v Program m Program 2 Enter a name for the program to lock alpha mode MYPROGRAM na 3 Press SMB again A template for your program is then automatically created The template consists of a heading for a function with the Enter name for new program Fest Tf TT cancel 0K Enter name for new program IMYPROGRAM O T T Tene o MYPROGRAM skif EXPORT MYPROGRAM BEGIN END COE same name as the program EXPORT
317. he definition of a geometric object For a point that definition consists of the coordinates of the point For other objects the definition mirrors their definition in Symbolic view with the coordinates of their defining points supplied extract_measure Var ordinate Returns the y coordinate of a point or the y length of a vector ordinate point or ordinate vector Example Example ordinate GA returns the y coordinate of the point A 184 Geometry parameq perimeter radius Test is_collinear Geometry Works like the equation command but returns parametric results in complex form parameq GeoObj Returns the perimeter of a polygon or the circumference of a circle perimeter polygon Or perimeter circle Examples If GA is the point at 0 0 GB is the point at 1 0 and GC is defined as circle GA GB GA then perimeter GC returns 27 If GA is the point at 0 0 GB is the point at 1 0 and GC is defined as square GA GB GA then perimeter GC returns 4 Returns the radius of a circle radius circle Example If GA is the point at 0 0 GB is the point at 1 0 and GC is defined as circle GA GB GA then radius GC returns 1 Takes a set of points as argument and tests whether or not they are collinear Returns 1 if the points are collinear and 0 otherwise is_collinear pointl point2 pointn Example is collinear point 0 0 point 5 0 point 6 1 returns
318. he signature of a permutation signature Permut Example signature 1 0 3 4 2 gives 100 0 100 0 0 0 87 14 Functions and commands 417 similarity simult SIN sincos single_inter With two points B and A a real k and an angle a1 as arguments returns a point that is the point similar to A across center B with angle al and with scaling coefficient k With an axis Dr3 a real k an angle a1 and a point A as arguments returns a point that is the point similar to A across the axis given by the line with angle al and with scaling coefficient k similarity Pnt B or Dr3 Real k Angle al Pnt A Example similarity 0 3 angle 0 1 i point 2 0 dilates the point at 2 0 by a scale factor of 3 a point at 6 0 then rotates the result 90 counterclockwise to create a point at 0 6 Returns the solution to a system of linear equations or several systems of linear equations presented in matrix form In other words in the case of one system of linear equations takes a matrix A and a column matrix B and returns column matrix X such A X B simult Mtrx A Mtrx B Example simult 3 1 3 21 21 211 gives 2 PEN Sine sinx SIN value Returns an expression with the complex exponentials rewritten in terms of sin and cos sincos Expr Example sincos exp i x gives cos x i sin x With two curves or two surfaces as arguments returns one of the intersec
319. he value of F1 x when X is 25 as shown at the bottom of the screen This is one of many ways the HP Prime provides for you to evaluate a function for a specific independent variable You can also evaluate a function in Numeric view see page 102 Moreover any expression you define in Symbolic view can be evaluated in Home view For example suppose F1 X is defined as x 1 3 If you enter F1 4 in Home view and press you get 6 since F1 X 573 Menu 4 1 3 6 To turn To turn off tracing tap EERS fraangonor To turn on tracing tap Ga off If these options are not displayed tap QUE When tracing is off pressing the cursor keys no longer constrains the cursor to a plot An introduction to HP apps 95 Plot view Summary of menu buttons Button Purpose Displays a menu of zoom options See Zoom options on page 88 zo Ga toggle button for turning off and turning on trace functionality See Trace on page 94 Displays an input form for you to specify a value you want the cursor to jump to The value you enter is the value of the independent variable Displays a menu of options for analyzing a Fen Function only plot See Analyzing functions on page 118 Displays the definition responsible for generating the selected plot A toggle button that shows and hides the other buttons across the bottom of the screen Common operations in Plot Setup view
320. hebyshev polynomial of second kind of degree n tchebyshev2 Intg n Example tchebyshev2 3 gives 8 x 3 4 x Plots the graph of an expression of one or two variables with superposition plotfunc Expr Var x Intg color or plotfunc Expr VectVar Intg color Example plotfunc 3 sin x draws the graph of y 3 sin x Plots the graph of the function z t x y in the plane where the values of z are represented by different colors plotdensity Expr x xrange y yrange z x step ystep Draws the tangent of the differential equation y f t y where the first argument is the expression f t y y is the real variable and tis the abscissa the second argument is the vector of variables abscissa must be listed first and the third argument is the optional range plotfield Expr VectVar Opt 342 Functions and commands ODE App menu Draws the solution of the differential equation y f t y that crosses the point t0 yO where the first argument is the expression f t the second argument is the vector of variables abscissa must be listed first and the third argument is tO yO plotode Expr VectVar VectInitCond Press to open the Toolbox menus one of which is the App menu App Statistics 1Var 1Statistics 1Var gt 2 Function gt functions are used in HP Quadratic Explorer gt 4 Spreadsheet gt apps to perform common sStatistic
321. heses that contain a list of parameters or arguments separated by commas The body of a subroutine is a sequence of statements enclosed within a BEGIN END pair For example the body of a simple program called MYPROGRAM could look like this EXPORT MYPROGAM BEGIN IXON 1 1 END oy When a line of a program begins with two forward slashes the rest of the line will be ignored This enables you to insert comments in the program EXPORT MYPROGAM BEGIN PIXON 1 1 This line is just a comment END The Program Catalog The Program Catalog is where you run and debug programs and send programs to another HP Prime You can also rename and remove programs and it is where you start the Program Editor The Program Editor is where you create and edit programs Programs can also be run from Home view or from other programs 498 Programming Open the Press Program Catalog Program Program to open the lee sie Catalog Program Catalog The Program Catalog displays a list of program names The first item in the Program Catalog is a built in entry that has the same name as the active app This entry is the app program for the active app if such a program exists See the App programs on page 519 for more information Program Catalog buttons and keys Button or Key Purpose Opens the highlighted program for editing Prompts for a new program name then opens t
322. hics variables and is optional The default is GO x2 y2 are optional and if not specified will be the bottom right of the graphic xl y1 are optional and if not specified will be the top left of the graphic If only one x y pair is specitied it refers to the top left Syntax LINE G xl yl x2 y2 c INE P G xl yl x2 y2 c Draws a line of color c on G between points x 1 y7 and x2 y2 G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO c can be any color specified as RRGGBB The default is black Syntax PIXOFF G x y PIXOFF P G x y Sets the color of the pixel G with coordinates x y to white G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO the current graphic Programming 537 PIXON_P PIXON RECT_P RECT Syntax PIXON G x y color PIXON _P G x y color Sets the color of the pixel G with coordinates x y to color G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO the current graphic Color can be any color specified as RRGGBB The default is black Syntax RECT G x yl x2 y2 edgecolor fillcolor RECT P G xl yl x2 y2 edgecolor fillcolor Draws a rectangle on G between points x1 y and x2 y2 using edgecolor for the perimeter and fillcolor for the inside G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO the current graphic xl yl ar
323. ht it and press 8 J The values below the deleted cell will scroll up one row To delete a column of data highlight an entry in that column and press E3 Clear Select the column and tap Qa To delete all data in every column press Clear selectAl1 columns and tap S Highlight the cell below where you want to insert a value Tap and enter the value If you just want to add more data to the data set and it is not important where it goes select the last cell in the data set and start entering the new data You can enter a formula Make Column Data 735 to generate alist of data Spressione 7 oe Var X points for a specified Start 1 column In the example Sapto M Step 2 atthe right 5 data points Col D2 will be placed in column D2 They will be Enter expression to evaluate generated by the edit Xf cancel 0K expression X 2 F where X comes from the set 1 3 5 7 9 These are the values between 1 and 10 that differ by 2 F is whatever value has been assigned to it elsewhere such as in Home view If F happened to be 5 column D2 is populated with 4 4 20 44 76 You can sort up to three columns of data at a time based on a selected independent column l In Numeric view place the highlight in the column you want to sort and tap ENB Specify the sort order Ascending or Descending Specify the independent and dependent data columns Sorting is by the independent column
324. hypotheses about the statistical parameters of one or two populations The tests are based on statistics of samples of the populations Inference app 243 The HP Prime hypothesis tests use the Normal Z distribution or the Student s tdistribution to calculate probabilities If you wish to use other distributions please use the Home view and the distributions found within the Probability category of the Math menu One Sample Z Test Menu name ZTest 1 u On the basis of statistics from a single sample this test measures the strength of the evidence for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the population mean equals a specified value Ho H Ho You select one of the following alternative hypotheses against which to test the null hypothesis Ho u lt po Ho u gt po Ho u uo Inputs The inputs are Field name Definition x Sample mean n Sample size Lg Hypothetical population mean Population standard deviation Significance level 244 Inference app Results The results are Result Description Test Z Z est statistic Test 3 Value of 3 associated with the test Zvalue P Probability associated with the Zest statistic Critical Z Boundary value s of Z associated with the a level that you supplied Critical 3 Boundary value s of 3 required by the a value that you supplied Two Sample Z Test Menu name Zlest wy u2 On the basis of two samples each from a separate ea this te
325. iables enables you to declare and use variables that will not affect the rest of the calculator LOCAL variables are not bound to a particular type that is you can store floating point numbers integers lists matrices and symbolic expressions in a variable with any local name Although the system will allow you to store different types in the same local variable this is poor programming practice and should be avoided Variables declared in a program should have descriptive names For example a variable used to store the radius of a circle is better named RADIUS than VGFTRFG You are more likely to remember what the variable is used for if its name matches its purpose If a variable is needed after the program executes it can be exported from the program using the EXPORT command To do this the first command in the program Programming 511 Qualifying the name of a variable that is on a line above the program name would be EXPORT RADIUS Then if a value is assigned to RADIUS the name appears on the variables menu 5 and is visible globally This feature allows for extensive and powerful interactivity among different environments in the HP Prime Note that if another program exports a variable with the same name the most recently exported version will be active The program below prompts the user for the value of RADIUS and exports the variable for use outside the program EXPORT RADIUS EXPORT GETRADIU
326. iags sass bivscca resus murusua ge bons 36 Entering Expressions esne egiie tiee T e O E a i 37 Reusing previous expressions and results ccceeeeeeeeeeees 40 Storing a value in a Variables jnccisscugescuh sus kdvsncruediascrays 42 Complex MUIR Sa casasatugs aagusauatnage nds dcsctvandewidy viewer ewiemin 43 Sharing seis wy siags ets sausage sea ale uieotaabalh 44 Online Fel java ainne eda gi i cosh E 45 2 Reverse Polish Notation RPN History in RPN Modedern n ea E E E EA 48 Sample calcula sxjccvnrenessy onpoeeaun as rSaatonanecearadguen cmeaegeeese 49 Manipulating the Stac kes a cces gar warasiecedavatadioensuavd dvsseankmenesnranties 51 Contents 1 3 Computer algebra system CAS CAS VIEW ict cst ad atiie beh eanct ck Hides HUM A EEA S GAS CalCulations se0cskcnc sth teat a a a e a Sa Setings seien iae n EEEE A EE AE AEEA SaS 4 Exam Mode Modifying the default configuration ccccccesseeeeteeeeeees Creating a new configuration cccccccsssceeeseeceeeteeeeeeteeeees Activating Exam Mode s oasienscnd trea tavasersitrr werrmne ta auneenes Cancelling examamodes ndsecaicaatavaterastorantevratevertucneees Modifying contiqurati Omsivrosvou cyaeuspeyavontsasunanedesdovenevtendiringrans To change a configuration s cassasoitelecans seated lech yaeeh astemians res To return to the default configuration cccceceeseeeeeeeeees Deleting configurations x csrevsicgoisuncahs sans eds dascevilgcars cadavers 5 An introd
327. ide corner of the screen help such as Hit Point 1 The steps provided in this section are based on touch entry For example to add a point the steps will tell you to fap on the screen where you want the point to be and press _ _ However you can also use the cursor keys to position the cursor where you want the point to be and then press The drawing tools for the geometric objects listed in this section can be selected from the menu buttons at the bottom of the screen Some objects can also be entered using a keyboard shortcut For example you can select the triangle drawing tool by pressing Keyboard shortcuts are only available if they have been turned on in Plot Setup view See page 146 Tap to display a menu and submenus of options for entering various types of points The menus and submenus are Tap where you want the point to be and press _ Keyboard shortcut Tap the object where you want the new point to be and press _ far If you select a point that has been placed on an object and then move that point the point will be constrained to the object on which it was placed For example a point 153 placed on a circle will remain on that circle regardless of how you move the point If there is no object where you tap a point is created if you then press _ er Midpoint Tap where you want one point to be and press _ _ Tap where you want the other point to be and pres
328. ie_ Exam Mode 67 68 Exam Mode An introduction to HP apps Much of the functionality of the HP Prime is provided in packages called HP apps The HP Prime comes with 18 HP apps 10 dedicated to mathematical topics or tasks three specialized Solvers three function Explorers a spreadsheet and an app for recording data streamed to the calculator from an external sensing device You launch an app by first pressing which displays the Application Library screen and tapping on the icon for the app you want What each app enables you to do is outlined in the following where the apps are listed in alphabetical order App name Use this app to Advanced Explore the graphs of symbolic open Graphing sentences in x and y Example 2 2 x y 64 DataStreamer Collect real world data from scientific sensors and export it to a statistics app for analysis Finance Solve time value of money TVM problems and amortization problems Function Explore real valued rectangular functions of y in terms of x Example y 2x7 3x 5 Geometry Explore geometric constructions and perform geometric calculations Inference Explore confidence intervals and hypothesis tests based on the Normal and Student s t distributions Linear Explorer Explore the properties of linear equations and test your knowledge An introduction to HP apps 69 App name Use this app to Cont Linear Solver Parametric Polar
329. iew For each expression selected in Symbolic view Numeric view displays the value that results when the expression is evaluated for various x values Setup view Nom strep Num Step 1 Em EF Setup You can set the starting value and step value that is the increment for Enter table start value the xcolumn as well as the zoom factor for zooming in or out on a row of the table Note that in Numeric view zooming does not affect the size of what is displayed Instead it changes the Num Step setting that is the increment between consecutive x values Zooming in decreases the increment zooming out increases the increment This is further explained in Zoom on page 100 Num Zoom 4 Num Type Automatic Function app 115 13 14 You can also choose whether the table of data in Numeric view is automatically populated or whether it is populated by you typing in the particular x values you are interested in These options Automatic or BuildYourOwn are available from the Num Type list They are explained in detail in Custom tables on page 103 Press defaults Make the Numeric Funetion Num Setup view X column Numstat O settings Num Num Step 0 1 Start and Num Step match the tracer x values Num Type Automatic Xmin and pixel width in Plot view Top EEB EA For example if you have zoomed in on the plot in Plot view so that the visible x range is now 4 to 4 this option
330. igin 0 0 is defined in terms of 9 the angle a segment from the point to the origin makes with the polar axis Such equations take the form r f 0 Getting started with the Polar app Open the Polar app Define the function The Polar app uses the six standard app views described in chapter 5 An introduction to HP apps beginning on page 69 That chapter also describes the menu buttons used in the Polar app Throughout this chapter we will explore the expression 5ncos 0 2 cos 0 2 1 Open the Polar Polar Symbolic View app E R10 H R20 Select Polar E R30 E R4 0 The app opens in To Symbolic view E R6 0 E R7 6 Enter function Show There are 10 fields for defining polar functions These are labelled R1 0 through R9 0 and RO 0 2 Highlight the field you want to use either by tapping on it or scrolling to it If you are entering a new function just start typing If you are editing an existing function tap and make your changes When you have finished defining or changing the function press foe Polar app 275 Set angle measure Set up the plot 3 Define the expression 5rcos 0 2 cos 8 2 Polar Symbolic View V ERIO senecogs cose Boii E R30 R48 E R5 0 E R6 6 amn Enter function Notice how the key enters whatever variable is relevant to the current app In this app the relevant variable is 8
331. igning a value to the variable that represents that setting For example entering O ET Base in Home view forces the setting for the integer base to binary A value of 1 would force it to octal 2 to decimal and 3 to hex Another example you can change the angle measure setting from radians to 428 Variables Retrieving variables Qualifying variables degrees by entering 1 HAngle in Home view Entering O HAngle forces the setting to return to radians You can see what value has been assigned to a variable built in or user defined by entering its name in Home view and pressing _ far You can enter the name letter by letter or choose the variable from the Variables menu The Variables menu is Advanced Graphing opened by tapping 5 There are four sub x 1Real menus covering Home gt 2Complex gt List CAS app and user Pe variables Home sGraphics gt le Settings variables are the built in Home variables set by what you do in Home view or by the settings you choose on the Home Settings screen Some examples are HAngle and Base App variables are also built in but they are set by what you do in an app Some examples are XMax and Slope The CAS variables and user variables are those you create yourself If you want to retrieve just the value of a variable and not its name tap before you select the variable from a Variables menu Some variables ar
332. ile a Trace definition is still in Symbolic view if you move the point again a new trace line is created Tap a circle and press _ _ A point is created at the center of the circle Element 0 1 has a number of uses You can use it to place a constrained point on a object whether previously created or not For example if in Symbolic view you define GA as element circle 2 go to Plot view turn on tracing select GA and move it you will see that GA is constrained to move in a circle centered on the origin and of radius 2 You can also use Element 5 0 1 to generate values lem T that can then be used as coefficients in functions you 0 subsequently plot For example in Plot view select Element 0 1 Notice A Move GA that a label is added to the screen GA for example and given a value of 0 5 You can now use that label as a coefficient in a function to be plotted For example you could choose Curve gt Plot gt Function and define a function as GA x2 7 A plot of 0 5x2 7 appears in Plot view Now select the label GA in this example and press _ _ An interval bar appears on the screen Tap anywhere along the interval bar or press or The value of GA and the shape of the graph change to match the value along the at which you tapped Tap one object other than a point and press _ _ Tap another object and press _ _ The poin
333. ilt in variable it is important that you choose a variable that matches the type of object For example you cannot assign a complex number to the variables A through Z These are reserved fro real numbers Complex numbers need to be assigned to variables ZO through Z9 Likewise matrices can only be assigned to the built in variables MO through M9 See Home variables on page 431 for more information You can also take advantage of the built in variables in CAS view However the built in CAS variables must be entered in lowercase a z Example 2 You can create your own variables in Home view and in CAS view For example suppose you want to create a variable called ME and assign 1 to it You would enter ED CA sre A message appears asking if you want to create a variable called ME Tap or press to confirm your intention You can now use that variable in subsequent calculations ME 3 will yield 303 for example You can also create variables by entering variable name object For example entering D 2 SS 2 L155 _ fre Jassigns 55 to the variable YOU You can now use that variable in subsequent calculations YOU 60 will yield 115 for example Just as you can assign values to variables you create yourself you can assign values to certain built in variables You could modify Home settings on the Home Settings screen EA RM But you can also modify a Home setting from Home view by ass
334. in Plot view on or off In Plot Setup view check or uncheck GRID DOTS In a program type 0 gt GridDots to turn the grid dots on default 1 gt GridDots to turn the grid dots off Turns the background line grid in Plot View on or off In Plot Setup View check or uncheck GRID LINES In a program type 0 gt GridLines to turn the grid lines on default 1 gt GridLines to turn the grid lines off Defines the minimum and maximum values for histogram bars In Plot Setup View for one variable statistics set values for HRNG In a program type n gt Hmin n gt Hmax wheren lt n Sets the width of histogram bars In Plot Setup View for one variable statistics set a value for Hwidth In a program type n gt Hwidth Draws labels in Plot View showing X and Y ranges In Plot Setup View check or uncheck Labels In a program type 1 gt Labels to turn labels on default 0 gt Labels to turn labels off Programming 555 Method Nmin Nmax Sequence Recenter S1mark S5mark Statistics 2Var Defines the graphing method adaptive fixed step segments or fixed step dots See Graphing methods on page 99 for an explanation of the difference between these methods In a program type 0 gt Method select adaptive 1 gt Method select fixed step segments 2 gt Method select fixed step dots Defines the minimum and maximum values for the indep
335. in programs e using variables in programs e executing programs e debugging programs e creating programs for building custom apps e sending a program to another HP Prime An HP Prime program contains a sequence of commands that execute automatically to perform a task Commands are separated by a semicolon Commands that take multiple arguments have those arguments enclosed in parentheses and separated by a comma For example PIXON xposition yposition Sometimes arguments to a command are optional If an argument is omitted a default value is used in its place In the case of the PIXON command a third argument could be used that specifies the color of the pixel PIXON xposition yposition color In this manual optional arguments to commands appear inside square brackets as shown above In the PIXON example a graphics variable G could be specified as the first argument The default is GO which always contains the currently displayed screen Thus the full syntax for the PIXON command is PIXON G xposition yposition color Programming 497 Program Structure Comments Some built in commands employ an alternative syntax whereby function arguments do not appear in parentheses Examples include RETURN and RANDOM Programs can contain any number of subroutines each of which is a function or procedure Subroutines start with a heading consisting of the name followed by parent
336. in the Spreadsheet app and you want to copy it into column D7 With the Statistics 1Var app open return to Home view and enter Spreadsheet Al A10 EGA D7 e i Statistics 1Var app 213 Whichever method you use the data you enter is automatically saved You can leave this app and come back to it later You will find that the data you last entered is still available After entering the data you must define data sets and the way they are to be plotted in Symbolic view Numeric view menu items Edit a data set The menu items you can tap on in Numeric view are ltem Purpose Copies the highlighted item into the entry line Inserts a zero value above the highlighted cell Sorts the data in various ways See Sort data values on page 215 Displays a menu from which you can choose small medium or large font Displays an input form for you to enter a formula that will generate a list of values for a specified col umn See Generating data on page 215 Calculates statistics for each data set selected in Symbolic view See Computed statistics on page 216 In Numeric view highlight the data to change type a new value and press __ _ You can also highlight the data tap to copy it to the entry line make your change and press _fer_ 214 Statistics 1Var app Delete data Insert data Generating data Sort data values 2 To delete a data item highlig
337. in variable must match a name listed in the Home variables or App variables tables below Tip Non standard characters in variables name such as and o can be entered by selecting them from the special symbols palette em 430 Variables Home variables The Home variables are accessed by pressing and tapping Ene Category Names Real Complex List Matrix Graphics Settings AtoZ and 0 For example 7 45 A ZO to Z9 For example 2 3xi Z1 or 2 3 Z1 depending on your Complex number settings LO to L9 For example 1 2 3 Rg L1 MO to M9 Store matrices and vectors in these variables For example 1 2 3 4 M1 G0 to G9 HAngle HFormat HDigits HComplex Date Time Language Entry Integer Base Bits Signed Variables 431 App variables The app variables are accessed by pressing and tapping E They are grouped below by app You can find then grouped by view Symbolic Numeric Plot in Variables and Programs on page 553 Note that if you have customized a builtin app your app will appear on the App variables menu under the name you gave it You access the variables in a customized app in the same way that you access the variables in built in apps Function app variables Category Names Results Area Root Extremum Slope lsect Symbolic F1 F6 F2 E7 F3 F8 F4 F9 F5 FO Plot Axes Xmin Cursor Xtick GridDots Xzoom GridLines
338. inance app enter a value for P YR In a program type nhPPYR where n gt 0 Present value Sets the present value of an investment From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for PV In a program type nhPV Note negative values represent an investment or loan Group size Sets the size of each group for the amortization table From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for Group Size In a program type nb amp GSize The following variables are used by the Linear Solver app app They correspond to the fields in the app s Numeric view variables LSystem Contains a 2x3 or 3x4 matrix which represents a 2x2 or 3x3 linear system From the Numeric view of the Linear Solver app enter the coefficients and constants of the linear system In a program type matrix gt LSystem 568 Programming Size Triangle Solver app variables SideA SideB SideC AngleA where matrix is either a matrix or the name of one of the matrix variables MO M9 Contains the size of the linear system From the Numeric view of the Linear Solver app pressME or ES In a program type 2 gt Size tfor a 2x2 linear system 3 gt Size for a 3x3 linear system The following variables are used by the Triangle Solver app They correspond to the fields in the app s Numeric view The length of Side A Sets the length of the side opposite the angle A From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive v
339. ing rows 467 arithmetic with 471 474 column norm 480 commands 541 543 condition number 480 create identity 487 creating 466 468 deleting 466 deleting columns 467 deleting rows 467 determinant 477 dot product 486 functions 476 487 inverting 474 linear equations solving of 474 Index 599 matrix calculations 465 negating elements 474 raised to a power 473 reduced row echelon 487 singular value decomposition 486 storing 466 469 470 swap row 543 transposing 487 variables 431 465 maximum real number 36 measurements See units 445 menu App 305 CAS 322 343 Catlg 372 425 context sensitive 20 Math 310 321 shortcuts 28 User 305 menu buttons 20 in Linear Solver app 267 in Numeric view 104 in Plot view general 96 Geometry app 146 in Spreadsheet app 205 in Statistics 1Var app 211 214 in Statistics 2Var app 227 234 in Symbolic view 86 menus 28 closing 29 display format of 33 306 searching through 28 Toolbox 29 messages Solve app 263 minutes symbol 21 mixed numbers 26 MKSA 448 mode exact 56 symbolic 56 user 516 modes See system wide settings 30 N names in Geometry app 142 143 natural logarithm 308 navigation 16 negation 310 negative numbers 20 39 Newtonian method 58 normal probability plot 218 Normal Z distribution confidence inter vals 251 notes 489 496 app specific 106 496 copying 496 creating 490 editing 492 496 exporting 496 formatting of 494 importing 496 sharing 496 number for
340. inished defining or changing the function press _ _ 3 Define the two expressions 8 Parametric Symbolic View V X1 T 8 SIN T 8 E Y1 1 8 CcOs T E v20 LM Notice how the E vm key enters xa 1 3 Enter function whatever variable Show is relevant to the current app In the Function app enters an X In the Parametric app it enters a T In the Polar app discussed in chapter16 it enters 0 4 Decide if you want to give one or more function a custom color when it is plotted evaluate a dependent function deselect a definition that you don t want to explore incorporate variables math commands and CAS commands in a definition For the sake of simplicity we can ignore these operations in this example However they can be useful and are described in detail in Common operations in Symbolic view on page 81 270 Parametric app Set the angle measure Set up the plot Plot the functions Set the angle measure to degrees 5 6 Set up the plot by Settings Parametric Symbolic Setup zew Angle Measure V System ia a a ils ae Measure field Complex ea and select Degrees You could also have set the angle Choose angle measure measure on the Home Settings screen However Home settings are system wide By setting the angle measure in an app rather than Home view you are limiting the setting just to that app Open the Plot S
341. integer Returns the number of bits used by integer expressed in the default base Example GETBITS 22122 returns 20h if the default base is hexadecimal Programming 545 I O R B SETBITS SETBASE CHOOSE Syntax R B integer Converts a decimal integer base 10 to an integer in the default base Example RB 13 returns 1101b if the default base is binary or Dh if the default base is hexadecimal Syntax SETBITS integer m bits Sets the number of bits to represent integer Valid values are in the range 64 to 65 If m or bits is omitted the default value is used Example SETBITS 1111 b15 returns 1111b 15 Syntax SETBASE integer m c Displays integer expressed in base m in whatever base is indicated by c where can be 1 for binary 2 for octal or 3 for hexadecimal Parameter m can be b for binary d for decimal o for octal or h for hexadecimal If m is omitted the input is assumed to be in the default base Likewise if c is omitted the output is displayed in the default base Examples SETBASE 340 1 returns 11100b while GETBASE 1101 returns 0h if the default base is hexadecimal I O commands are used for inputting data into a program and for outputting data from a program They allow users to interact with programs These commands start the Matrix and List editors Syntax CHOOSE var t
342. ion 531 I O 544 546 integer 544 loop 527 matrix 541 other 551 553 strings 531 variable 530 commenting in 498 create 501 debug 507 run 506 samples 513 515 523 525 structure of 498 programming 497 574 projection 163 protective cover 13 Q Quadratic Explorer app 70 300 302 quadratic fit 230 qualify variables 110 429 512 quantum science constants 451 quotes in strings 531 R real variables 431 recursive evaluation 57 recursive function 58 recursive replacement 58 reduced row echelon matrix 487 regression models See fit types regulatory information 589 relations palette 21 25 reset app 71 calculator 585 result reusing 40 Reverse Polish Notation See RPN rewrite functions 330 334 rightangled triangles See Triangle Solv er app RPN 36 47 52 commands 51 52 entry 32 S sample programs 513 515 523 525 scientific number format 27 31 searching menus 28 online help 45 speed searches 28 Index 601 seconds symbol 21 seed value 257 261 sending See data sharing Sequence app 70 279 284 graph types 279 variables 444 settings 30 431 CAS 30 55 sharing data 44 shift keys 22 shortcut palettes 20 shortcuts in Geometry 147 in menus 28 Solve app 70 257 264 functions 344 limitations 262 messages 263 one equation 258 several equations 261 variables summary of 433 solve functions 328 330 sort apps 71 72 special symbols palette 21 25 splitscreen viewing 91 106 Spreadsheet app 70 193 208
343. ion can also be used from the Home view or a program For example suppose you want to find the derivative of x 5 at x 2 One way using an app function is as follows 1 Press A 2 Tap and select Function gt SLOPE SLOPE appears on the entry line ready for you to specify the function and the x value 3 Enter the function kzJ5 4 Enter the parameter Function separator x Eval _O 5 Enter the xvalue and press The slope that is the sLopd s 2 4 derivative at x 2 is Ce a calculated 4 All the app functions are described in App menu beginning on page 343 All apps have variables that is placeholders for various values that are unique to a particular app These include symbolic expressions and equations settings for the Plot and Numeric views and the results of some calculations such as roots and intersections An introduction to HP apps 109 Qualifying variables Suppose you are in Home view and want to retrieve the mean of a data set recently calculated in the Statistics 1Var app 1 Press 2 3 This opens the Variables menu From here you can access Home variables user defined variables and app variables 2 Tap EE This opens a menu of app variables 3 Select Statistics 1Var gt results gt Meanx The current value of the variable you chose now Statistics 1Var 1 Statistics 1Var 2Function 3 Ad
344. ion from the List sTrigonometry 4Concatenate 4Hyperbolic gt SPosition category of the Math sProbability _ gt Size List 2177 A List menu Matrix 2 8 List 8 Special 2 911 List Press 6 to select the List category in the left column of the Math menu List is the sixth category on the Math menu which is why pressing 6 will take you straight to the List category Tap a function to select it or use the direction keys to highlight it and either tap or press _ List functions are enclosed in parentheses They have arguments that are separated by commas as in CONCAT L1 L2 An argument can be either a list variable name or the actual list for example REVERSE L1 or REVERSE 1 2 3 Common operators like x and can take lists as arguments If there are two arguments and both are lists then the lists must have the same length since the calculation pairs the elements If there are two arguments and one is a real number then the calculation operates on each element of the list Example 5 1 2 3 returns 5 10 15 Besides the common operators that can take numbers matrices or lists as arguments there are commands that can only operate on lists Lists 459 Menu format By default a List function is presented on the Math menu using its descriptive name not its common command name Thus the shorthand name CONCAT is presented as Concatenate and POS is presented as
345. ith the follow ing EU Directives Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC e EMC Directive 2004 108 EC Ecodesign Directive 2009 125 EC where applicable CE compliance of this product is valid if powered with the correct CE marked AC adapter provided by HP Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards European Norms that are listed in the EU Declaration of Confor mity issued by HP for this product or product family and available in English only either within the product docu mentation or at the following web site www hp eu cer tificates type the product number in the search field The compliance is indicated by one of the following con formity markings placed on the product For non telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products such as Bluetooth within power class below 10mW For EU non harmonized telecommunications products If applicable a 4 digit notified body number is inserted between CE and Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the prod uct The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett Packard GmbH Dept MS HQ TRE Herren berger Strasse 140 71034 Boeblingen GERMANY Product Regulatory Information 591 Japanese Notice CORB S VIABDWHRHRECH CORB KERA TEA FOCERBHELTUETHM CORBP IV APT LEV ay BIRR ELTIRAS Nat HEMBES SHIT CEMHVETF MRKAR TELU MW RUELT FAL VCCI B Korean C
346. itle item1 item2 itemn Displays a choose box with the title and containing the choose items If the user selects an object the variable whose name is provided will be updated to contain the number of the selected object an integer 1 2 3 or O if the user taps GEREN Returns true not zero if the user selects an object otherwise return false 0 546 Programming Example TET ray CHOOSE N PickHero PickHero Ruler Gauss Ener wow Wy Gauss Newton eaten IF N 1 THEN ICHOOSE_TEST PRINT You CHOOSE TEST picked m Euler ELSE IF N 2 THEN PRINT You picked Gauss ELSE PRINT You picked Newton END END After execution of CHOOSE the value of n will be updated to contain O 1 2 or 3 The IF THEN ELSE command causes the name of the selected person to be printed to the terminal EDITLIST Syntax EDITLIST listvar Starts the List Editor loading listvar and displays the specified list If used in programming returns to the program when user taps Qa Example EDITLIST L1 edits list L1 EDITMAT Syntax EDITMAT matrixvar Starts the Matrix Editor and displays the specified matrix If used in programming returns to the program when user tops a Example EDITMAT M1 edits matrix M1 GETKEY Syntax GETKEY Returns the ID of the first key in the keyboard buffer or 1 if no
347. ix Editor and stored in the Matrix Catalog Vectors are also handled by the Matrix Catalog and Editor A choice of options given in the display It can appear as a list or as a set of touch buttons across the bottom of the display Text that you write in the Note Editor It can be a general standalone note or a note specific to an app An open sentence consists of two expressions algebraic or arithmetic separated by a relational operator such as lt etc Examples of open sentences include y2 lt x and x y2 34 x A reusable set of instructions that you record using the Program Editor A name given to an object such as a number list matrix graphic and so on to assist in later retrieving it The command assigns a variable and the object can be retrieved by selecting the associated variable from the variables menu 23 A one dimensional array of real or complex numbers enclosed in single square brackets Vectors can be created and manipulated by the Matrix Editor and stored in the Matrix Catalog The primary environments of HP apps Examples of app views include Plot Plot Setup Numeric Numeric Setup Symbolic and Symbolic Setup Glossary 583 584 Glossary Appendix B Troubleshooting Calculator not responding To reset If the calculator does not respond you should first try to reset it This is much like restarting a PC It cancels certain operations restores certain condi
348. ixels and Cartesian ARC_P ARC Syntax ARC G x y r al a2 c ARC _P G x y r al a2 c Draws an arc or circle on G centered on point x y with radius rand color c starting at angle a7 and ending on angle a2 G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO r is given in pixels c is optional and if not specified black is used It should be specified in this way RRGGBB in the same way as a color is specified in HTML al and a2 follow the current angle mode and are optional The default is a full circle BLIT_P BLIT Syntax BLIT trgtGRB dx1 dyl dx2 dy2 srcGRB sxl sy sx2 sy2 c BLIT_P trgtGRB dx1 dyl dx2 dy2 srcGRB sx1 sy sx2 sy2 c Copies the region of srcGRB between point sx sy and sx2 sy2 into the region of trgtGRB between points dx dy1 and dx2 dy2 Do not copy pixels from srcGRB that are color c trgtGRB can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO srcGRB can be any of the graphics variables dx2 dy2 are optional and if not specified will be calculated so that the destination area is the same size as the source area sx2 sy2 are optional and if not specified will be the bottom right of the srcGRB sx sy are optional and if not specified will be the top left of srcGRB Programming 535 NOTE DIMGROB_P DIMGROB GETPIX_P GETPIX GROBH_P GROBH dx dy are optional and if not speci
349. iy pea E E Madara aai ea E i aa 322 Algebra 6 Tenno iaoea braved aon rain EEES 322 Cal ulis t cs victors no e a a welds E EETA SS 323 DOV stint shes e a o di r n aa G aA SiS 328 RSW DN gare arn oe E aa ba be E AARE RES 330 Integer i ne eaa r eaa eaaa AAAA Ea EEE 334 Polynomials irean ouia oaan ea e ava es 337 Contents 5 APP GNU tactecceacteecetieds a satat e A aduetanassaedneneaneesaatates 343 Function app HUNGHONS 3ci5a204 teks seadeneaderooncqeannaednnas cascanenaind 343 Solve app functions iss ccs ecccnoncty idle wands eantieayiaidetasaeienantaaes 344 Spreadsheet functions c cccceesceeeeeeeeceeeeeesseeeenteeeens 345 Statistics 1Var app fUnctionS cccccceceeceeeseeeeeeteeeeetseeees 363 Statistics 2Var app FUNCTHIONS ccccceeeeceeeteeeeeeteeeeetseeees 363 Inference app FUNCTIONS cccccceseeceeteeeeeeteeeeetseeesteeeeees 364 Finance app functions lt i cicsiscteieedscedariensenenansdeendeerasianates 367 Linear Solver app functions ccccescceeeseeeeeeeeeetseeeeaes 369 Triangle Solver app functions ccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetseees 369 Linear Explorer functions ccccccceesceeeeseceeeeseeeeeseeeenaes 371 Quadratic Explorer functions cccececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeteaees 371 Common app MURCHONS 10 s tuliann ss ined ieetunt wal ax 371 Gilg men re eaa e E A aa eae AA iri 372 Creating your own functions wii cis tvi natin dedvseiveaveentn 425 22 Variables H m Vener
350. ject Returns the type of the object O Real 1 Integer 2 String 3 Complex 4 Matrix 5 Error 6 List 8 Function 9 Unit 14 cas object The fractional part is the cas type Variables and Programs The HP Prime has four types of variables Home variables App variables CAS variables and User variables You can retrieve these variables from the Variable menu amp 25 Home variables are used for real numbers complex numbers graphics lists and matrices among other things Home variables keep the same value in Home and in apps App variables are those whose values depend on the current app The app variables are used in programming to represent the definitions and settings you make when working with apps interactively CAS variables are exactly the same as Home variables except that they are used only when doing CAS operations They can however be called by commands in Home view The names for CAS variables mirror those for Home variables except that they must be lowercase Programming 553 App variables User variables are variables created by the user or exported from a user program They provide one of several mechanisms to allow programs to communicate with the rest of the calculator and with other programs Once a variable has been exported from a program it will appear among the User variables in the Variables menu next to the program that exported it This chapter deals with App variables
351. l outlet using the HP provided wall adapter Getting started A Battery Warning A Adapter Warning When the calculator is on a battery symbol appears in the title bar of the screen Its appearance will indicate how much power the battery has A flat battery will take approximately 4 hours to become fully charged To reduce the risk of fire or burns do not disassemble crush or puncture the battery do not short the external contacts and do not dispose of the battery in fire or water To reduce potential safety risks only use the battery provided with the calculator a replacement battery provided by HP or a compatible battery recommended by HP Keep the battery away from children e If you encounter problems when charging the calculator stop charging and contact HP immediately To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to equipment only plug the AC adapter into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times To reduce potential safety risks only use the AC adapter provided with the calculator a replacement AC adapter provided by HP or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP On off cancel operations To turn on To cancel To turn off Press to turn on the calculator Esc When the calculator is on pressing the key cancels the current operation For example it will clear whatever you have entered on the entry line It will also close a menu and a screen Press 2
352. lass Notice 82 171 O Wi HIBZCHees UMAYI amp JNA F WIAA AS k AS SACs SH SS ALAA At Oras Y ai A deid Disposal of Waste Equipment by Users This symbol on the product or on its in Private packaging indicates that this product must Household in the not be disposed of with your other household waste Instead it is your European Union responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the Lz recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product 592 Product Regulatory Information Chemical Substances HP is committed to providing our customers with informa tion about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH Regulation EC No 1907 2006 of the European Parliament and the Council A chemical information report for this product can be found at http www hp com go reach Perchlorate Material special handling may apply This calculator s Memory Backup battery may contain perchlorate
353. layed at the top t left of the screen C Pointer 2 91 3 58 Let s now add two more calculations to Numeric view and have them displayed in Plot view 28 Press to return to Numeric view 29 Tap WEB enter cz and tap SB Entering just the name of a point will show its coordinates 30 Tap WEB enter cc and tap SD Entering just the name of a line will show its equation 31 Make sure both of these new equations are selected by choosing each one and pressing MB 32 Press to return to y lslope GC 1 813 F f4 Plot view GB point 2 220 2 390 GC linety 1 813 x 6 415 La Notice that your new y calculations are displayed 33 Press and 5 S 8 6 4 Pointer 5 59 4 03 choose point GB 34 Use the cursor keys to move point B along the graph Note that with each move the results of the calculations shown at the top left of the screen change Point D is the point whose ordinate value matches the derivative of the curve at point B It is easier to see how the 140 Geometry derivative changes by looking at a plot of it rather than comparing subsequent calculations We can do that by tracing point D as it moves in response to movements of point B First we ll hide the calculations so that we can better see the trace curve 35 Press to return to Numeric view 36 Select each calculation in turn and tap HB All calculati
354. le ratnormal x 2 1 x 3 1 gives x 1 x 2 x 1 412 Functions and commands reciprocation rectangle rectangular_ coordinat red reduced_conic ref Returns the list where the point is replaced with its polar and the line is replaced with its pole with respect to the circle reciprocation Crcle Lst Pnt Line Draws the rectangle ABCD where if k is provided AD k AB if k gt O and where if k and P are provided the rectangle is in the plane ABP with AD AP and AD k AB rectangle Pnt A Cplx Pnt B Cplx Real k Pnt P Lst P k Var D Var C Returns the list of the abscissas and of the ordinates of points given by a list of their polar coordinates rectangular coordinates LstPolCoord Example rectangular coordinates 1 1 gives cos 1 sin 1 Used with display to specify the color of the geometrical object to be displayed Takes a conic expression and a vector of and returns the origin of the conic the matrix of a basis in which the conic is reduced O or 1 0 if the conic is degenerate the reduced equation of the conic and a vector of the conic s parametric equations reduced_conic Expr LstVar Example reduced_conic x 2 2 x 2 y 1 gives 1 0 0 1 1 01 1 y 2 2 x 1 4i t t 2 i t t 4 4 0 1 Returns the solution to a system of linear equations written in matrix form ref Mtrx M Example ref 3
355. le is drawn about the center point with a radius equal to the distance between the two tapped points Keyboard shortcut You can also create a circle by first defining it in Symbolic view The syntax is circle GA GB where A and B are two points A circle is drawn in Plot view such that A and B define the diameter of the circle Tap at one focus point and press _ _ Tap at the second focus point and press _ _ Tap at point on the circumference and press _ e _ Tap at one focus point and press __ _ Tap at the second focus point and press __ _ Tap at point on one branch of the hyperbola and press _ _ Tap at the focus point and press _ _ Tap either on a line the directrix or a ray or segment nd press Eer 158 Geometry Special Circumcircle A circumcircle is the circle that passes through each of the triangle s three vertices thus enclosing the triangle Tap at each vertex of the triangle pressing after each tap Incircle An incircle is a circle that is tangent to each of a polygon s sides The HP Prime can draw an incircle that is tangent to the sides of a triangle Tap at each vertex of the triangle pressing after each tap Excircle An excircle is a circle that is tangent to one segment of a triangle and also tangent to the rays through the segment s endpoints from the vertex of the triangle opposite the segment Tap at ea
356. les are placeholders for objects such as function definitions numbers matrices the results of calculations and the like Some are built in and cannot be deleted But you can also create your own Many built in variables are automatically assigned objects as a result of some operation such as defining a polar function performing a calculation or setting an option For example if you define a polar function that definition is assigned to variable named R to R If you use the Function app to find the slope of a curve at some x value the slope is assigned to a variable named Slope And if you choose binary as the base for integer arithmetic a built in variable named Base is given the value O If you had chosen octal instead Base would have been given the value 1 Variables you create are assigned whatever value you give them You can assign a value to certain built in variables such as the Home variables You can also create your own variables Example 1 below gives an example of assigning a value to a built in variable and example 2 illustrates how to create a variable and assign a value to it Example 1 To assign 7 to the built in variable A Your stored value appears as shown at the right If you then wanted m A 9 86960440109 to multiply your stored Era C a a value by 5 you could enter Aurea yars p x p 5 Enter Variables 427 Using variables to change settings To assign an object to a bu
357. lied here belong to the case in which a student has generated 50 pseudo random numbers on his graphing calculator If the algorithm is working properly the mean would be near 0 5 and the population standard deviation is known to be approximately 0 2887 The student is concerned that the sample mean 0 461368 seems a bit low and it testing the less than alternative hypothesis against the null hypothesis 6 Display the test X Result ji results TestZ 0 946205374811 Test 0 461368 P 0 172021922639 Crit Z 1 64485362695 Crit amp 0 432843347747 The test distribution value and its associated Fate reject He GeO probability are __ _suz_ __ _0k_ displayed along with the critical value s of the test and the associated critical value s of the statistic In this case the test indicates that one should not reject the null hypothesis Tap to return to Numeric view 7 Display a graphical P 172021922639 results view of the test Test Z 946205374811 results The graph of the f J distribution is bes 3 Test X 461368 displayed with the EEA GUD EE test Zvalue marked The corresponding X value is also shown Tap to see the critical Zvalue With the alpha level showing you can press or to decrease or increase the a level 240 Inference app Importing statistics Open the Statistics 1Var app Clear unwanted data Enter data The Inference app
358. linear equations You can use matrices to solve systems of linear equations such as the following 2x 3yt 4z 5 x y z 7 Ax y 2z 1 In this example we will use matrices M1 and M2 but you could use any available matrix variable name 1 Open the Matrix MI i 1 Catalog clear M1 i choose to create a vector and open the Matrix Editor 0 Lies i Ob peppy yee 2 Create the vector of MI T 1 5 the three constantsin 2 f a 3 1 the linear system A sC 7 ee ins J size GoJ Column 474 Matrices 3 Return to the Matrix M1 3 039KB Catalog M2 2 2 047KB Shif M3 1 1 023KB M4 1 1 023KB P M5 2 2 047KB The size of M1 M6 3 039KB r M7 1 1 023KB should be showing vg 1 1 peal as 3 M9 1 1 023KB MO 1 1 a Edit Delete vecte send 4 Select and clear M2 m 7 and re open the Matrix Editor Press or to select M2 0 5 Enter the equation ieee coefficients 2 Enter 13 Enter M2 1 2 3 Tap in cell R1 C3 bo k H 4 1C e j J1 4 1 2 6 Return to Home view and left multiply the constants vector by the inverse of the coefficients matrix UN 7 2 Lalha xi m Pins T T sie T Go gt column Function The result is a vector of the solutions x 2 y 3 and z 2 M2 M1 23 2 An alternative method is 23g GGG to use the RREF function see page 477
359. lines in A i the figure to the right Press it again A N 10 U1 N 1 73415299E 2 Menu _ to hide the dotted lines Explore the 7 View the table Sequence Numeric View N U1 table of i 666666666667 Useup 2 444444444445 se uence 3 296296296297 h 8 Top EM ond seit va ues h 6 0877914951992 select to see the 7 0585276634661 8 0390184423108 sequence values 9 0260122948739 10 0173415299159 0260122948739 zom size Defn column 284 Sequence app 18 Finance app The Finance app enables you to solve time value of money TVM and amortization problems You can use the app to do compound interest calculations and to create amortization tables Compound interest is accumulative interest that is interest on interest already earned The interest earned on a given principal is added to the principal at specified compounding periods and then the combined amount earns interest at a certain rate Financial calculations involving compound interest include savings accounts mortgages pension funds leases and annuities Getting Started with the Finance app Suppose you finance the purchase of a car with a 5 year loan at 5 5 annual interest compounded monthly The purchase price of the car is 19 500 and the down payment is 3 000 First what are the required monthly payments Second what is the largest loan you can afford if your maximum monthly payment is 300 Assume that the payments start at
360. list and tap or Tap the name of the list When you open a list the following buttons and keys are available to you Button or Key Purpose m o Clear maoe Copies the highlighted list item into the entry line Inserts a new value with default zero before the highlighted item Deletes the highlighted item Displays a menu for you to choose the small font medium font or large font Displays a menu for you to choose how many lists to display at one time one two three or four For example if you have only L4 displayed and you choose 3 from the Lists menu lists L5 and L6 will be displayed in addition to L4 Clears all items from the list Moves the cursor to the start or the end of the list Lists 455 To edit a list 1 Open the List Catalo Biss 11KB g L2 0 OKB u 7 aJ List PE a L5 0 OKB L6 0 OKB L7 0 OKB L8 0 OKB L9 0 OKB L0 0 OKB Edit pelete __ send J 2 Tap on the name of the list L1 L1 etc The List Editor appears L1 1 C 2 90 3 89 4 65 5 88 COERCED 3 Tap on the element T 1 88 you want to edit Alternatively press 5 or until the element you want to edit is highlighted 89 In this example edit EEB the third element so that it has a value of 5 5 ma To insertan element Suppose you want to a in a list insert a new value 9 in 2 bo L1 2 in the list L1 shown H to the right P
361. lotting range is suitable Try pressing and selecting Autoscale or adjust the plotting parameters in Plot Setup view e Ensure that both paired columns contain data and are of the same length 236 Statistics 2Var app 12 Inference app Sample data The Inference app enables you to calculate confidence intervals and undertake hypothesis tests based on the Normal Z distribution or Student s t distribution In addition to the Inference app the Math menu has a full set of probability functions based on various distributions Chi Square F Binomial Poisson etc Based on statistics from one or two samples you can test hypotheses and find confidence intervals for the following quantities mean e proportion difference between two means difference between two proportions The Inference app comes with sample data which you can always restore by resetting the app This sample data is useful in helping you gain an understanding of the app Getting started with the Inference app Let s conduct a ZTest on one mean using the sample data Open the 1 Open the Inference app Inference Select Inference Symbolic View all a Inference Method Hypothesistest_ 7 PP Type Z Test 1 p b The Inference app AI ype lt io opens in Symbolic view Choose an inferential method LL leams aa a Inference app 237 Symbolic view options The table below summarizes the options available in Symbolic view for
362. lues choose to show 1 2 3 or 4 columns of function values You can also combine Plot and Numeric view See Custom tables on page 103 Function app 117 Analyzing functions Display the Plot view menu To find a root of the quadratic function The Function menu WR in Plot view enables you to find roots intersections slopes signed areas and extrema for any function defined in the Function app If you have more than one function plotted you may need to choose the function of interest beforehand The Function menu is a sub menu of the Plot view menu First display the Plot view menu Menu Suppose you want to find the root of the quadratic equation defined earlier Since a quadratic equation can have more than one root you will need to move the cursor closer to the root you are interested in than to any other root In this example you will find the root of the quadratic close to where x 3 1 If it is not already selected select the quadratic equation Dor 2 Press oO or Oto move the cursor near to where x 3 3 Tap and select Root Zoom Trace Goto Menu The root is displayed at the bottom of the screen If you now move the trace cursor close to x 1 the other HE Poot 2 73205080757 ok place where the quadratic crosses the x axis and select Root again the other root is displayed 118 Function app Note the button If you tap this butto
363. ma a Returns the value of the nth derivative of the digamma function at x a where the digamma function is the first derivative of In I x Psi a n Returns the value of the zeta function Z for a real x Zeta x Returns the floating point value of the error function at x a erf a Returns the value of the complementary error function at x a erfc a Returns the exponential integral of an expression Ei Expr Returns the sine integral of an expression Si Expr Returns the cosine integral of an expression Ci Expr Functions and commands 321 CAS menu Algebra Simplify Collect Expand Factor Press to open the Statistics 1Var Toolbox menus one of which is the CAS menu The TAER functions on the CAS menu 2Calculus 3Solve arg those most commonly 4Rewrite used Many more functions 28 6 Polynomial are available See Ctlg a menu beginning on page cas 372 Note that the Geometry functions appear on the CAS menu when the Geometry app is currently active or was the last used app They are described in Geometry functions and commands beginning on page 165 App catlg ok Returns an expression simplified simplify Expr Example simplify 4 atan 1 5 atan 1 239 yields 1 4 pi Returns a polynomial or list of polynomials factorized over the field of the coefficients collect Poly or LstPoly Example
364. mal Mark Dot or Comma Displays a number as 12456 98 dot mode or as 12456 98 comma mode Dot mode uses commas to separate elements in lists and matrices and to separate function arguments Comma mode uses semicolons as separators in these contexts Page 2 Setting Options Font Size Calculator Name Textbook Display Menu Display Choose between small medium and large font for general display Enter a name for the calculator If selected expressions and results are displayed in textbook format that is much as you would see in textbooks If not selected expres sions and results are displayed in algebraic format that is in one dimensional format For example gt is displayed as 14 51 6 21 6 2 in algebraic format This setting determines whether the commands on the Math and CAS menus are presented descriptively or in common mathematical shorthand The default is to provide the descriptive names for the functions If you prefer the functions to be presented in mathematical shorthand deselect this option Getting started 33 Page 3 Page 4 Setting Options Continued Time Set the time and choose a format 24 hour or AM PM format The checkbox at the far right lets you choose whether to show or hide the time on the title bar of screens Date Set the date and choose a format YYYY MM DD DD MM YYYY or MM DD YYYY Color Theme Light black text on
365. mat 31 56 engineering 31 fixed 31 scientific 31 Standard 31 number functions 311 312 Numeric Setup view 78 common operations in 105 106 Numeric view 77 common operations in 100 103 menu buttons 104 zoom in 100 Numeric view app variables 554 O object selection in Geometry app 143 objects geometric 153 160 on and off 12 One Proportion Z Interval 252 One Proportion Z Test 246 One Sample T Interval 254 One Sample T Test 248 One Sample Z Interval 251 One Sample Z Test 244 online help 45 open sentences 125 defining 81 127 P palettes shortcut 21 25 Parametric app 70 269 273 variables 441 pareto plot 219 600 Index permutations 316 physical constants 449 physics constants 451 pinch 17 pixels 18 plot box and whisker 218 cobweb 279 color of 85 defined in Geometry app 160 functions 342 343 line 218 one variable statistics 217 pareto 219 stairsteps 279 statistical data one variable 217 two variable 232 Plot and Numeric views together 106 Plot Gallery 134 Plot Setup view 76 common operations in 96 100 Plot view 74 common operations in 88 95 in Geometry app 141 menu buttons 96 146 variables 554 558 zoom 88 94 points 153 Polar app 70 275 278 variables 442 polygons 157 polynomial functions 337 342 precedence algebraic 39 prediction 235 prefixes for units 446 principal solutions 57 probability functions 315 320 program commands app functions 543 block 525 branch 526 drawing 534 541 funct
366. mat again A Angle Measure Radians v Number Format v Standard menu of number Fixed Entry Salaki y cientific format options Integers Engineering ee Complex a b i appears PP Language English Tap on Scientific Decimal MANE Dot Choose format for numbers The option is chosen GHD GRE 37 GHD GS and the menu closes You can also choose an item by pressing the cursor keys and pressing when the option you want is highlighted Notice that a number Home Settings appears to the right Angle Measure Radians 0 Number Format Scientific 1 of the Number 2 Entry Textbook Format field This is Integers Hex 32 J the number of Complex arbi 5 d i lol Language English 6 CEDA P aces Decimal Mark Dot currentl set To Choose decimal places to display apts as a change the number to 2 tap on it twice and then tap on 2 in the menu that appears Press BAMJto return to Home view Mathematical calculations The most commonly used math operations are available from the keyboard see Math keys on page 24 Access to the rest of the math functions is via various menus see Menus on page 28 Getting started 35 Where to start Note that the HP Prime represents all numbers smaller than 1 x 10 49 as zero The largest number displayed is 9 99999999999 x 1047 A greater result is displayed as this number The home base for the calculator is the Home view EA You can do all your
367. mber of periods for the loan the interest rate the present value the per period payment ppyr and cpyr are the number of payments per year and the number of compounding periods per year Grouping is the number of periods that need to be grouped together in the amortization table beg is 1 when payments are made at the beginning of each period otherwise it is O fix is the number of decimal places to used in the results the calculations The STAT1 function provides a range of one variable statistics It can calculate all or any of x X 22 s s o 02 serr sqd n min ql med q3 and max STAT1 Input range mode outlier removal Factor configuration Input range is the data source such as A1 D8 Mode defines how to treat the input The valid values are 1 Single data Each column is treated as an independent dataset Functions and commands 347 2 Frequency data Columns are used in pairs and the second column is treated as the frequency of appearance of the first column 3 Weight data Columns are used in pairs and the second column is treated as the weight of the first column 4 One Two data Columns are used in pairs and the 2 columns are multiplied to generate a data point If more than one column is specified they are each treated as a different input data set If only one row is selected it is treated as 1 data set If two columns are selected the mode defaults to frequency Outlier R
368. meric view are derived from the symbolic expressions defined here There are 10 fields for defining functions These are labeled F1 x through F9 X and FO X 2 Highlight the field you want to use either by tapping on it or scrolling to it If you are entering a new expression just start typing If you are editing an existing expression tap and make your changes When you have finished defining or changing the expression press _ 3 Enter the linear function in F1 X 1 4 Enter the quadratic function in F2 X Function Symbolic View V BEF1 X 1 X WSO Fase a 3 B F400 E F6 X E FK Enter function Show You can tap the button to assist in the entry of equations In the Function app i has the same effect as pressing Ri In other apps enters a different character 112 Function app Set up the plot Plot the functions 5 Decide if you want to give one or more function a custom color when it is plotted evaluate a dependent function deselect a definition that you don t want to explore incorporate variables math commands and CAS commands in a definition For the sake of simplicity we can ignore these operations in this example However they can be useful and are described in detail in Common operations in Symbolic view on page 81 You can change the Function Plot Setup Sree range of the x and y axes and the spacing
369. meric view of the Finance app enter a value for C YR In a program type n gt CPYR where n gt 0 Determines whether interest is compounded at the beginning or end of the compounding period From the Numeric view of the Finance app Check or uncheck END In a program type 1 gt END for compounding at the end of the period Default 0 gt END for compounding at the beginning of the period Future value Sets the future value of an investment From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for FV In a program type n FV Note positive values represent return on an investment or loan Interest per year Sets the annual interest rate for a cash flow From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for I3YR In a program type nh IPYR where n gt 0 Number of payments Sets the number of payments for a cash flow From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for N In a program type nb amp NbPmt where n gt 0 Programming 567 PMT PPYR PV GSize Linear Solver Payment value Sets the value of each payment in a cash flow From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for PMT In a program type n PMT Note that payment values are negative if you are making the payment and positive if you are receiving the payment Payments per year Sets the number of payments made per year for a cash flow calculation From the Numeric view of the F
370. metry functions and commands The list of geometry specific functions and commands in this section covers those that can be found by tapping in both Symbolic and Numeric view and those that are only available from the Catlg menu The sample syntax provided has been simplified Geometric objects are referred to by a single uppercase character such as A B C and so on However calculations referring to geometric objects in the Numeric view of the Geometry app and in the CAS must use the G prefixed name given for it in Symbolic view For example altitude A B C is the simplified form given in this section altitude GA GB GC is the form you need to use in calculations Further in many cases the specified parameters in the syntax below A B C etc can be the name of a point such as GA or a complex number representing a point Thus angle A B C could be e angle GP GR GB angle 3 2i 1 2i 5 i or e a combination of named points and points defined by a complex number as in angle GP i1 2i i Symbolic view Cmds menu Point barycenter Geometry Calculates the hypothetical center of mass of a set of points each with a given weight a real number Each point weight pair is enclosed in square brackets as a vector barycenter pointl weight1 point2 weight2 pointn weightn Example barycenter 3 1 3 1 3V3 i 1 gives point cos BED which is equivalent to 0 V3 165 center
371. n Expr 414 Functions and commands revlist rhombus right_triangle romberg rotation Returns a list with the elements in reverse order revlist Lst Example revlist 1 2 3 gives 3 2 1 With two points A and B and an angle a as arguments draws the rhombus ABCD such that the angle AB AD a With three points as arguments A B and P draws the rhombus ABCD in the plane ABP such that angle AB AD angle AB AP rhombus Pnt A Cplx Pnt B Cplx Angle a P nt P Lst P a Var C Var D Example rhombus GA GB angle GC GD GE draws a rhombus on segment AB such that the angle at vertex A has the same measure as angle DCE With two points A and B and a real k as arguments draws right angled triangle such ABC such that AC k AB With three points A B and P as arguments draws the right angled triangle ABC in the plane ABP and such that AC AP right_triangle Pnt A or Cplx Pnt B or Cplx Real k or Pnt P or Lst P k Var C Uses Romberg s method to return the approximate value of the integral of the expression over the interval a to b romberg Expr f x Var x Real a Real b Example romberg exp x 2 x 0 1 gives 1 46265174591 With a point B an angle a1 and another point A as arguments returns the result of rotating the second point by the angle about the center of rotation given by the first point With a line Dr3 an angle a1 a
372. n gt Tstep where n gt 0 Sets the distance between tick marks for the horizontal axis In Plot Setup View enter a value for Xtick a program type n gt Xtick where n gt 0 Sets the distance between tick marks on the vertical axis In Plot Setup View enter a value for Ytick In a program type n gt Ytick where n gt 0 Programming 557 Xmin Xmax Ymin Ymax Xzoom Yzoom Sets the minimum and maximum horizontal values of the plot screen In Plot Setup View enter values for XRNG In a program type n gt Xmin n gt Xmax where n lt m Sets the minimum and maximum vertical values of the plot screen In Plot Setup View enter the values for YRNG In a program type n gt Ymin n gt Ymax where n lt n Sets the horizontal zoom factor In Plot View press EEN then BRIERE Scroll to Set Factors select it and press B Enter the value for x zoom QM In a program type n gt Xzoom where n gt 0 The default value is 4 From Plot setup press EE then BN Scroll to Set Factors select it and press GME Enter the value for Y zoom and press GME Or in a program type n gt YZoom The default value is 4 558 Programming Symbolic view variables AltHyp Inference EO E9 Solve FO F9 Function H1 H5 Statistics 1 Var H1Type H5Type Statistics 1 Var Determines the alternative hypothesis used for a hypothesis testing Choose an op
373. n vertical and horizontal dotted lines are drawn through the current position of the tracer to Zoom Traces Goto Fen Defn Menu highlight its position Use this feature to draw attention to the cursor location You can also choose a blinking cursor in Plot Setup Note that the functions in the Fen menu all use the current function being traced as the function of interest and the current tracer x coordinate as an initial value Finally note that you can tap anywhere in Plot view and the tracer will move to the point on the current function that has the same x value as the location you tapped This is a faster way of choosing a point of interest than using the trace cursor You can move this tracing cursor using the cursor keys if you need finer precision To find an Just as there are two roots of the quadratic equation there intersection of two are two points at which both functions intersect As with functions roots you need to position your cursor closer to the point you are interested in In this example the intersection close to x 1 will be determined The Go To command is another way of moving the trace cursor to a particular point 1 Tap to re display the menu tap ES enter 1 and tap SR The tracing cursor will now be on one of the functions at x 1 2 Tap and select Intersection Intersection of F2 and A list appears giving you a choice of functions and axes Fun
374. n or out in Plot view to get the values you want to see in the table in Numeric view 132 Advanced Graphing app Trace Edge Trace Pol 16 Tap and select Edge Now the table shows if possible pairs of values that make the relation true By default the first column is the Y column and there are multiple X columns in case more than one X value can be paired with the Y value to make the relation true Tap to make the first column an X column followed by a set of Y columns In the figure above for Y 0 there are 10 values of X in the default Plot view that make the relation Y SIN X true These are shown in the first row of the table It can be clearly seen that the sequence of X values have a common difference of r 1 57079681 1 256637 1 9 42477796 1 580813 1 1 246620 1 9 52494538 1 236501 1 9 62613588 6 08182739 1 226168E1 9 72947061 5 97849265 1 215485 1 9 83629481 5 87166846 1 204277 1 9 94837674 5 75958653 1 192287 1 1 006828e1 5 63968420 1 179097 1 1 020018e1 5 50778781 1 163908e1 1 035207 1 5 35589009 1 144660 3 0544 4 PpeRUYDMDaWHN Again you can enter a value for Y that is of interest 17 With O highlighted in the Y column enter B f 3 7 3b7 2 18 Tap and select 4 The first row of the table now illustrates that there are two branches of solutions In each branch the consecutive solution values are 2x apart
375. nal statement Used to indicate the conditions under which a statement should be executed Exclusive or Returns 1 if the first expression is true and the second expression is false or if the first expression is false and the second expression is true Returns O otherwise xor Exprl Expr2 Used with display to specify the color of the geometrical object to be displayed Applies a bivariate function to the elements of two lists Without the default value its length is the minimum of the lengths of the two lists and the shorter list is padded with the default value zip Fnce2d f Lst 11 Lst 12 Val default Example zip a b c d 1 2 3 41 gives at1 b 2 c 3 d 4 Substitutes a value for a variable in an expression Expr Var v1 value al v2 a2 Returns the square of an expression Expr Inserts pi Inserts a template for a partial derivative expression Inserts a template for a summation expression Inserts a minus sign Inserts a square root sign Inserts a template for an antiderivative expression Inserts a not equal to sign 424 Functions and commands lA IV Inserts a less than or equal to sign Inserts a greater than or equal to sign Evaluates the expression then stores the result in variable var Note that cannot be used with the graphics GO G9 See the command BLIT expression P var Inserts the imaginary number i Returns the inverse of an expression Ex
376. name for an object in Symbolic view is the name it was given in Plot view but prefixed with a G Thus the graph labeled A in Plot view is labeled GA in Symbolic view 17 Highlight Gc and tap MEB When creating objects that are dependent on other objects the order in which they appear in Symbolic view is important Objects are drawn in Plot view in the order in which they appear in Symbolic view Since we are about to create a new point that is dependent on the attributes of GB and GC it is important that we place its definition after that of both GB and Gc That is why we made sure we were at the bottom the list of definitions before tapping WE If our new definition appeared higher up in Symbolic view the point we are about to create wouldn t be drawn in Plot view 18 Tap and choose Point gt point You now need to specify the x and y coordinates of the new point The former is to be constrained to abscissa of 138 Geometry Add some calculations Geometry point B referred to as GB in Symbolic view and the later is to constrained to the slope of c referred to as GC in Symbolic view 19 You should have point on the entry line Between the parentheses add abscissa GB slope GC You can enter the commands by hand or choose them from one of two Toolbox menus App gt Measure or Catlg 20 Tap Geometry Symbolic View V GA plotfunc 3 sin x A The definition of y
377. nced Graphing app The Advanced Graphing app enables you to define and explore the graphs of symbolic open sentences in x y both or neither You can plot conic sections polynomials in standard or general form inequalities and functions The following are examples of the sorts of open sentences you can plot l x 3 y 5 1 2x 3y lt 6 mod x 3 X 4x 4 6 1 gt 0 2 3 4 sin x y 5 gt sin 8 atan 5 The illustrations below show what these open sentences look like when plotted Example 1 Example 2 X 15 9 X 15 9 0 Advanced Graphing app 125 Example 3 Example 4 Example 5 Example 6 X 715 9 0 Menu X 715 9 0 Menu Getting started with the Advanced Graphing app The Advanced Graphing app uses the customary app views Symbolic Plot and Numeric described in chapter 5 For a description of the menu buttons available in this app see Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons on page 86 Plot view Summary of menu buttons on page 96 and Numeric view Summary of menu buttons on page 104 The Trace option in the Advanced Graphing app works differently than in other apps and is described in detail in this chapter In this chapter we will explore the rotated conic defined by 2 2 x Txy 3y x yp EI IE a E A gt i 2 ms 126 Advanced Graphing app Open the a
378. nd Info Entering uppercase and lowercase characters Button or Key Purpose Continued C Starts a new line e E Clear Erases the entire note Menu for entering variable names and the contents of variables Menu for entering math commands Chars Displays a palette of special characters To type one highlight it and tap or press te To copy a character without closing the Chars menu select it and tap Er The following table below describes how to quickly enter uppercase and lowercase characters Keys Purpose ALPHA alpha _ ALPHA alpha _ alpha _alpha_ Shift Lalha J __ J alpha J J L alpho_ J Make the next character upper case Lock mode make all characters uppercase until the mode is reset With uppercase locked make next character lowercase With uppercase locked make all characters lowercase until the mode is reset Reset uppercase lock mode Make the next character lower case Lock mode make all characters lowercase until the mode is reset With lowercase locked make next character uppercase Notes and Info 493 Text formatting Formatting options Keys Purpose Continued ALPHA With lowercase locked make all characters uppercase until the mode is reset Reset lowercase lock mode The left side of the notification area of the title bar will indicate what case will be applied to the character you next enter You
379. nd a curve as arguments returns the result of rotating the curve by the angle about the axis of rotation given by the line rotation Pnt B or Cplx or Dr3 Angle al Pnt A or Curve Example rotation GA angle GB GC GD GK rotates the geometric object labeled K about point A through an angle equal to angle CBD Functions and commands 415 row rowAdd rowDim rowSwap rsolve segment Returns the row n or the sequence of the rows n1 n2 of the matrix A row Mtrx A Intg n Interval nl n2 Example row 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 gives 4 5 6 Returns the matrix obtained from matrix A after the n2th row is replaced by the sum of the n1th row and the n2th row rowAdd Mtrx A Intg n1 Intg n2 Example rowAdd 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 gives 1 2 3 4 8 10 Returns the number of rows of a matrix rowDim Mtrx Example rowdim 1 2 3 4 5 6 gives 2 Returns the matrix obtained from matrix A after the n1th row and the n2th row are swapped rowSwap Mtrx A Intg n1 Intg n2 Example rowSwap 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 gives 1 21 5 6 3 41 Returns the values of a recurrent sequence or a system of recurrent sequences rsolve Expr or LstExpr Var or LstVar InitVal or LstInitVal Example rsolve u n 1 2 u n n u n u 0 1 gives n 2 2 n 1 Draws a line segment connecting two points segment Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Var
380. ng means HypZ2prop input list configuration HypZ2prop SuccCountl SuccCount2 SampSizel SampSize2 Sighevel Mode configuration Input List A list of input variables see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values Input Parameters SuccCount SuccCount2 SampSizel SampSize2 Siglevel Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not equal Configuration A string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers h header cells will be created acc Accept Reject tZ TestZ tP prob cZ cpl cp2 Functions and commands 355 HypT1mean The hypothesis test HypT mean is a one sample T test for comparing means HypTlmean input list configuration HypTlmean SampMean SampStdDev SampSize NullPopProp SigLevel Mode configuration Input List A list of input variables see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values e Input Parameters SampMean SampStdDev SampSize NullPopMean Siglevel Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not equal Configuration A string that control
381. ng the Y Zoom setting An introduction to HP apps 89 Box zoom Option Result Cont Square Autoscale Decimal Integer Trig Undo Zoom Changes the vertical scale to match the horizontal scale This is useful after you have done a box zoom X zoom or Y zoom Rescales the vertical axis so that the display shows a representative piece of the plot given the supplied x axis settings For Sequence Polar parametric and Statistics apps autoscaling rescales both axes The autoscale process uses the first selected function to determine the best scale to use Rescales both axes so each pixel is 0 1 units This is equivalent to resetting the default values for XRNG and YRNG Rescales the horizontal axis only making each pixel equal to 1 unit Rescales the horizontal axis so that 1 pixel equals 27 24 radians or 7 5 degrees rescales the vertical axis so that 1 pixel equals 0 1 units Returns the display to the previous zoom or if there has been only one zoom displays the graph with the original plot settings A box zoom enables you to zoom in on an area of the screen that you specify 1 With the Plot view menu open tap and select Box 2 Tap one corner of the area you want fo zoom in on and then top J 3 Tap the diagonally opposite corner of the area you want to zoom in on and then tap GMB The screen fills with the area you specified To return to the default view tap and
382. nly visible if the selected cell has con tent Sort Enables you to select a column to sort by and to sort it in ascending or descending order Only visi ble if cells are selected Cancel the input and clear the entry line OK Accept and evaluate the input Clears the spreadsheet Spreadsheet 205 Formatting options The formatting options appear when you tap EES They apply to whatever is currently number oral selected a cell block column fscolor row or the entire spreadsheet Align e zAlign The options are Show 5 Micrel Format 1Name 3 Font Size gt gt S Fill gt gt gt Name displays an input form for you to give a name to whatever is selected Number Format Auto Standard Fixed Scientific or Engineering See Home settings on page 30 for more details Font Size Auto or from 10 to 22 point Color color for the content text number etc in the selected cells the gray dotted option represents Auto Fill background color that fills the selected cells the gray dotted option represents Auto Align horizontal alignment Auto Left Center Right Align vertical alignment Auto Top Center Bottom Column lt gt displays an input form for you to specify the required width of the selected columns only available if you have selected the entire spreadsheet or one or mor
383. nominator have been multiplied by the complex conjugate of the numerator mult conjugate Expr Example mult conjugate sqrt 3 sqrt 2 gives sqrt 3 sqrt 2 sqrt 3 sqrt 2 sqrt 3 sqrt 2 Returns an approximate value of the derivative of an expression at a given point using f x f x h f x h 2 h Without a third argument the value of h is set to 0 001 With a real as third argument it is the value of h nDeriv Expr Var var Real h Example nDeriv f x x h gives xth x h 0 5 h Unary minus Enters the negative sign 402 Functions and commands normal normalize NOT NTHROOT octahedron odd open_polygon OR order_size Returns the expanded irreducible form of an expression normal Expr Example normal 2 x 2 gives 4 x Returns a vector divided by its I norm where the norm is the square root of the sum of the squares of the vector s coordinates normalize Lst Cplx Example normalize 3 4 i gives 3 4 i 5 Returns the logical inverse of a Boolean expression not Boolean Gives the expression for calculating the nth root of a number _ Draws an octahedron with center A and vertex B and such that the plane ABC contains four vertices octahedron Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Returns 1 if a given integer is odd and returns O otherwise odd Intg n Example odd 6 gives 0 Draws a polygonal line with vertices at the el
384. ns and commands ellipse ELSE END equilateral_ triangle EVAL evalc evalf With three points F1 F2 and M as arguments draws an ellipse with foci at F1 and F2 that passes though M With two points and a real F1 F2 and a as arguments draws an ellipse with foci at F1 and F2 that passes through point M such that MF1 MF2 2a With one second degree polynomial p x y as argument draws the ellipse defined when the polynomial is set to equal O ellipse Pnt F1 Pnt F2 Pnt M or Real a or ellipse p x y Example ellipse GA GB 3 draws an ellipse whose foci are points A and B For any point P on the ellipse AP BP 6 Used in programming to introduce the false clause in a conditional statement Used in programming to end a set of statements that should be taken as a single statement With three arguments draws the equilateral triangle ABC of side AB With four arguments draws the equilateral triangle ABC in the plane ABP equilateral triangle Pnt A or Cplx Pnt B or Cplx Pnt P Var C Evaluates an expression eval Expr Returns an complex expression written in the form real i imag evalc Expr Example evalc 1 xty i returns x x 2 y 2 i y x 2 y 2 With one argument returns the numerical evaluation of it With a second argument returns the numerical evaluation of the first argument with the number of significant figures taken from the second argument ev
385. nt Conjugate Real Part Modulo The remainder of value 1 value2 valuel MOD value2 Example 74 MOD 5 returns 4 Function rootfinder like the Solve app Finds the value for the given variable at which expression most nearly evaluates to zero Uses guess as initial estimate FNROOT expression variable guess Example FNROOT A 9 8 600 1 A 1 returns 61 2244897959 x percent of y that is x 100 y X Y Example 20 50 returns 10 Argument Finds the angle defined by a complex number Inputs and outputs use the current angle format set in Home modes ARG x y i Example ARG 3 3 i returns 45 degrees mode Complex conjugate Conjugation is the negation sign reversal of the imaginary part of a complex number CONT xty i Example CONJ 3 4 i returns 3 4 i Real part x of a complex number x y i RE x y i Example RE 3 4 i returns 3 Functions and commands 313 Imaginary Part Unit Vector Exponential ALOG EXPM1 LNP1 Trigonometry CSC ACSC SEC ASEC Imaginary part y of a complex number x y i IM xty i Example IM 3 4 i returns 4 Sign of value If positive the result is 1 If negative 1 If zero result is zero For a complex number this is the unit vector in the direction of the number SIGN value SIGN x y Examples SIGN POLYEVAL 1 2 25 26 2 2 returns 1 SIGN 3 4 returns 6 8i Antilogarithm exponential
386. nt columns are shown Tap to see the statistics involving just the independent column or to display the statistics derived from the dependent column Tap to return to the default view The tables below describe the statistics displayed in each view The statistics computed when you tap are Statistic n ey sCOV o COV XY Definition The number of data points Correlation coefficient of the independent and dependent data columns based only on the linear fit regardless of the fit type chosen Returns a value between 1 and 1 where 1 and 1 indicate best fits The coefficient of determination that is the square of the correlation coefficient The value of this statistics is dependent on the Fit type chosen A measure of 1 indicates a perfect fit Sample covariance of independent and dependent data columns Population covariance of independent and dependent data columns Sum of all the individual products of of x and y Statistics 2Var app 231 The statistics displayed when you tap are Statistic Definition z Ex IX sX oX serrx Mean of x independent values Sum of x values Sum of x values The sample standard deviation of the independent column The population standard deviation of the independent column the standard error of the independent column The statistics displayed when you tap are Statistic Definition y xY ry SY oY
387. number of solutions The app opens in Numeric view mrm Linear Solver app 265 Note Define and solve the equations If the last time you used the Linear Solver app you solved for two equations the two equation input form is displayed To solve a three equation set tap GEREN now the input form displays three equations 2 You define the equations you want to solve by entering the coefficients of each variable in each equation and the constant term Notice that the cursor is positioned immediately to the left of x in the first equation ready for you to insert the coefficient of x 6 Enter the coefficient and either tap or press _fer_ 3 The cursor moves to the next coefficient Enter that co efficient and either tap or press _ J Continue doing likewise until you have defined all the equations Once you have Linear Equation Solver entered enough 6X OY 62 5 values for the T Oe oa s ex qw 0Z 0 solver to be able J to generate X 0 Y 1 666666667 Z 3 3333333333 solutions those solutions appear near the bottom ERED EED of the display In this example the solver was able to find solutions for x y and z as soon as the first coefficient of the last equation was entered As you enter Linear Equation Solver gt each of the Lhe Oye 6Z 5 remaining known Uist 10E 8Z 10 6X 4Y OZ 6 values the k solution changes x 3 1666666667 Y 3 25 Z 2 5416666667
388. ny data points each bin contains H Rng enables you to specify the range of values for a set of histogram bins The range runs from the left edge of the leftmost bin to the right edge of the rightmost bin Exploring the graph The Plot view B has zooming and tracing options as well as coordinate display The Autoscale option is available from the View menu a as well as the menu The View menu also enables you to view graphs in splitscreen mode as explained on page 91 For all plot types you can tap and drag to scroll the Plot view You can also zoom in or out on the cursor by pressing and respectively Statistics 1Var app 219 Plot view menu items The menu items you can tap on in Plot view are Button Purpose Displays the Zoom menu Turns trace mode on or off See Zoom on page 100 Displays the definition of the current statistical plot Menu Shows or hides the menu 220 Statistics 1Var app 11 Statistics 2Var app The Statistics 2Var app can store up to ten data sets at one time It can perform two variable statistical analysis of one or more sets of data The Statistics 2Var app starts with the Numeric view which is used to enter data The Symbolic view is used to specify which columns contain data and which column contains frequencies You can also compute statistics in Home and in the Spreadsheet app The values computed in the Statistics 2Var app are saved in variables
389. o have named D3 and D5 say TOTCOM and COSTS respectively Then the formula in D7 could have been TOTCOM COSTS 27 Enter the label GOAL in cell 1 You can swipe the screen with a finger or repeatedly press the cursor keys to bring E1 into view 28 Enter 250 in cell F1 29 In cell c9 enter the label Go HOMI This is the minimum profit you want to make on the day Fl 30 In cell D9 enter 31 Gra D7 gt mC You can select gt from the relations palette EA 6 What this formula does is Spreadsheet sl place O in D9 if you have rows amp kot 2 not reached your goal sb HOTALCOMMISIO e r 4 j0 profit and 1 if you have 5 COSTS T00 6 J0 It provides a quick way for 7p PROFIT F100 8 p you to see when you have 20 GOHOME p OK made enough profit and gua een genes em a aS can go home Select C9 and D9 You can select both cells with a finger drag or by highlighting C9 selecting and pressing 196 Spreadsheet 32 Tap and select Color 33 Choose a color for the contents of the selected cells 34 Tap and select Fill 35 Choose a color for the background of the selected cells The most important cells in the spreadsheet will now stand out from the rest The spreadsheet is complete P PRICE COMMIS C D JE but you may want to checkall
390. obability of x with n degrees of freedom is p CHISQUARE_ICDF n p Example CHISQUARE ICDF 2 0 957147873133 returns 6 3 Inverse cumulative Fisher distribution function Returns the value x such that the Fisher lower tail probability of x with numerator n and denominator d degrees of freedom is p FISHER _ICDF n d p Example FISHER_ICDF 5 5 0 76748868087 returns 2 Inverse cumulative binomial distribution function Returns the number of successes k out of n trials each with a probability of p such that the probability of k or fewer successes is q BINOMIAL ICDF n p q Example BINOMIAL ICDF 20 0 5 0 6 returns 11 Inverse cumulative Poisson distribution function Returns the value x such that the probability of x or fewer occurrences of an event with u expected or mean occurrences of the event in the interval is p POISSON_ICDF p Example POISSON_ICDF 4 0 238103305554 returns 3 These functions work on data in a list They are explained in detail in chapter 24 Lists beginning on page 453 320 Functions and commands Matrix Special Beta Gamma Psi Zeta erf erfc Ei Si Ci These functions work on matrix data stored in matrix variables They are explained in detail in chapter 25 Matrices beginning on page 465 Returns the value of the beta function B for two numbers a and b Beta a b Returns the value of the gamma function T for a number a Gam
391. oebner Remainder Hermite Lagrange Laguerre Returns the Groebner basis of the ideal spanned by a list of polynomials gbasis LstPoly LstVar Example gbasis x 2 y 3 xty 2 x y gives y 4 yrs pxty 2 Returns the remainder of the division of a polynomial by the Groebner basis of a list of polynomials greduce Poly LstPoly LstVar Example greduce x y 1 x 2 y 2 2 x y y 2 y 3 x y gives 1 2 y 2 1 Returns the Hermite polynomial of degree n hermite Intg n where n lt 1556 Example hermite 3 gives 8 x 3 12 x Returns the Lagrange polynomial for two lists The list in the first argument corresponds to the abscissa values and the list in the second argument corresponds to the ordinate values lagrange Lst_xk Lst_yk or lagrange Mtrx_2 n Example lagrange 1 3 0 1 gives x 1 2 Returns the Laguerre polynomial of degree n laguerre Intg n Example laguerre 4 gives 1 24 a 4 1 6 a 3 x 5 2 a 3 1 4 a 2 x 2 3 2 a 2 x 35 24 a 2 6 a x 3 7 4 a x 2 13 3 a x 25 12 a 1 24 x 4 2 3 x 3 3 x 2 4 x 1 Functions and commands 341 Legendre Chebyshev Tn Chebyshev Un Plot Function Density Slopefield Returns the Legendre polynomial of degree n legendre Intg n Example legendre 4 gives 35 x 4 8 15 x 2 4 3 8 Returns the Tchebyshev polynomial of first kind of degree n tchebyshevl Intg n Example tchebyshevl 3 gives 4 x 3 3 x Returns the Tc
392. of he tick ks al th xengfis 9 15 9 the tick marks along the Y Rng 10 9 re axes X Tick 1 Y Tick 1 6 Display Plot Setup view Enter minimum horizontal value Edit Page T Setup For this example you can leave the plot settings at their default values If your settings do not match those in the illustration above press Clear to restore the default values See Common operations in Plot Setup view on page 96 for more information about setting the appearance of plots 7 Plot the functions Ploti LSetup tt e pa o F109 1 Function app 113 Trace a By default the trace functionality is active This enables graph you to move a cursor along a graph If more than two graphs are shown the graph that is the highest in the list of functions in Symbolic view is the graph that will be traced by default Since the linear equation is higher than the quadratic function in Symbolic view it is the graph on which the tracing cursor appears by default 8 Trace the linear function Oor Note how a cursor moves along the plot as you press the buttons Note panmi ae too that the coordinates of the cursor appear at the bottom of the screen and change as you move the cursor 9 Move the tracing cursor from the linear function to the quadratic function or 10 Trace the quadratic function or Again notice how the coordinates of the cursor appear at 41 F200 6
393. oint or a line A reflection through a point is sometimes called a half turn In either case each Hit Symetry_center_axis ly ey 3 9 l b 3 A wa ai f A reflection Gb Zoom Point Line Polygo Curve Transfo point on the mirror image is the same distance from the mirror as the corresponding point on the original In the example at the right the original triangle D is reflected through point I l 2 Tap and select Reflection Tap the point or straight object segment ray or line that will be the symmetry axis that is the mirror and press Tap the object that is to be reflected across the symmetry axis and press _ _ The object is reflected across the symmetry axis defined in step 2 Dilation A dilation also called a homothety or uniform scaling is a transformation where an object is enlarged or reduced by a given scale factor around a given point as center In the illustration at the right the scale factor is 2 and the center of dilation is indicated by a point near the top right of the screen named I Each point on the new triangle is collinear with its corresponding point on the original triangle and point I Further the distance from point to each new point will be twice the distance to the original point since the scale factor is 2 1 Tap and select Dilation 2 Tap the point that is to be the center of dilation and press CE 3
394. om in and zoom out options the degree of zooming is determined by the zoom factor In Numeric view this is the Numzoon field in the Numeric Setup view The default value is 4 Thus if the current increment that is the NUMSTEP value is 0 4 zooming in will further divide that interval by four smaller intervals So instead of x values of 10 10 4 10 8 11 2 etc the 100 An introduction to HP apps Zoom options Zoom keys Zoom menu x values will be 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 etc Zooming out does the opposite 10 10 4 10 8 11 2 etc becomes 10 11 6 13 2 14 8 16 4 etc X FI X FI 10 78 10 78 10 4 85 36 10 1 79 81 10 8 93 04 10 2 81 64 11 2 101 04 10 3 83 49 11 6 109 36 10 4 85 36 12 118 10 5 87 25 12 4 126 96 10 6 89 16 12 8 136 24 10 7 91 09 13 2 145 84 10 8 93 04 13 6 155 76 10 9 95 01 14 166 n 97 10 w Zoom Big Defn Width J Zoom Big Defn Width Before zooming After zooming In Numeric view zoom options are available from two sources the keyboard e the menu in Numeric view Note that any zooming you do in Numeric view does not affect Plot view and vice versa However if you choose a zoom option from the Views menu ER while you are in Numeric view Plot view is displayed with the plots zoomed accordingly In other words the zoom options on the Views menu apply only to Plot view Zooming in Numeric view automatically changes
395. on Root Extremum Slope Signed area Intersec tion Select Root to find the root of the current function nearest to the tracing cursor If no root is found but only an extremum then the result is labeled Extremum instead of Root The cursor is moved to the root value on the xaxis and the resulting x value is saved in a variable named Root Select Ext remum to find the maximum or minimum of the current function nearest to the tracing cursor The cursor moves to the extremum and the coordinate values are displayed The resulting x value is saved in a variable named Extremum Select Slope to find the numeric derivative of the current function at the current position of the tracing cursor The result is saved in a variable named Slope Select Signed area to find the numeric integral If there are two or more expressions checkmarked then you will be asked to choose the second expression from a list that includes the x axis Select a starting point and an ending point The result is saved in a variable named SignedArea Select Intersection to find the intersection of the graph you are currently tracing and another graph You need to have at least two selected expressions in Symbolic view Finds the intersection closest to the tracing cursor Displays the coordinate values and moves the cursor to the intersection The resulting x value is saved in a variable named Isect 124 Function app Adva
396. on page 24 lo eB fio reg oo a Oo wo fod mo oo wg E ojo jel You can also create your own functions See Creating your own functions on page 425 You can choose to have entries on the Math and CAS menus presented either by their descriptive name or their command name The entries on the Catlg menu are always presented by their command name Descriptive name Command name Factor List ifactors Complex Zeros cZeros Groebner Basis gbasis Factor by Degree factor_xn Find Roots proot The default menu presentation mode is to provide the descriptive names for the Math and CAS functions If you prefer the functions to be presented by their command name deselect the Menu Display option on the second page of the Home Settings screen see Home settings on page 30 Abbreviations used in this chapter In describing the syntax of functions and commands the following abbreviations and conventions are used Expr a mathematical expression Poly a polynomial LstPoly a list of polynomials Frac a fraction 306 Functions and commands RatFrac a rational fraction Fnc a function Var a variable LstVar a list of variables Parameters that are optional are given in square brackets as in NORMAL _ICDF u o p For ease of reading commas are used to separate parameters but these are only necessary to separate parameters Thus a single parameter command needs no
397. on whose vertices are elements in a list polygon LstPnt LstCplx Example polygon GA GB GD draws AABD Draws the polygons made by joining the points xk yk where xk element row k column O and yk element row k column j for fixed and for k 0 nrows polygonplot Mtrx Draws the points xk yk and the polygons made by joining the points xk yk where xk element row k column O and yk element row k column j for fixed and for k 0 nrows polygonscatterplot Mtrx Draws a convex polyhedron whose vertices are the points in the sequence polyhedron SeqPnt A B C 408 Functions and commands polynomial_ regression POLYROOT potential power_regression powerpc Returns the coefficients an a1 a0 of y an x n a1x a0 where y is the nth order polynomial which best approximates the points whose coordinates are the elements in two lists or the rows of a matrix polynomial regression Lst Mtrx A Lst Intg n Example polynomial regression 1 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 3 0 9 0 4 0 16 0 3 gives 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Returns the zeros of the polynomial given as argument either as symbolic expression or as a vector of coefficients POLYROOT P x or Vect Example POLYROOT 1 0 1 returns 1 1 Returns a function whose gradient is the vector field defined by Vect V and VectVar potential Vect V VectVar Example potential 2 x y 3 x 2 4 z 4 y x y Z
398. ons csolve LstEq LstVar Example csolve x 4 1 x gives list 1 1 i i With an expression as argument returns the complex zeros of the expression With a list of expressions as argument returns the matrix where the rows are the solutions of the system i e expression1 0 expression2 0 Czeros Expr Var or Czeros LstExpr LStVar Example cZeros x 2 1 gives 1 1 Returns the numerical solution of an equation or a system of equations nSolve Expr Var Var Guess Examples nSolve cos x x x gives 0 999847741531 nSolve cos x x x 1 3 gives 0 999847741531 Functions and commands 329 Differential Equation ODE Solve Linear System Rewrite Incollect powexpand Returns the solution to a differential equation deSolve Eq TimeVar FncVar Example desolve y y 0 y gives c_0 cos x c_1 sin x Returns an approximate value of y at a final value t1 of a given variable where y t is the solution of y t f t y t y t0 y0 odesolve Expr f t y VectVar t y Vec tInitCond t0 y0 FinalVal t1 tstep V al curve Example odesolve sin t y t y 0 1 2 gives 1L 8224125572 Returns the solution to a system of linear equations linsolve LstLinkq LstVar Example linsolve x y z 1 x y 2 2 x z 3 x y Z gives 3 2 1 2 0 Returns an expression rewritten with the logarithms collected applies In a
399. ons and commands 335 Previous Prime Euler Division Quotient Remainder a MOD p Chinese Remainder Returns the prime or pseudo prime number closest to but smaller than an integer prevprime Intg a Example prevprime 11 returns 7 Compute s Euler s totient for an integer euler Intg n Example euler 6 returns 2 Returns the integer quotient of the Euclidean division of two integers iquo Intg a Intg b Example iquo 46 23 returns 2 Returns the integer remainder from the Euclidean division of two integers irem Intg a Intg b Example irem 46 23 returns 17 Returns a modulo p in 0 p 1 powmod Intg a Intg n Intg p Expr P x l Var Example powmod 5 2 13 returns 12 Returns the Chinese remainder of two lists of integers ichinrem LstIntg a p LstIntg b q Example ichinrem 2 7 3 5 returns 12 35 336 Functions and commands Polynomial Find Roots Coefficients Divisors Factor List GCD LCM Returns all computed roots of a polynomial given by its coefficients It may not work if roots are not simple proot Vect Poly Example proot 1 0 2 gives 1 41421356237 1 41421356237 With an integer as third argument returns the coefficient of a polynomial of degree given in the third argument With no third argument returns the list of coefficients of the polynomial coeff Expr Var degree
400. ons should now be deselected 37 Press to return to Plot view 38 Press and select point GD 39 Tap and select More gt Trace AO Press and select point GB Al Using the cursor keys y move B along the curve i Ha You will notice that a N i Ai shadow curve is traced out as you move B This is the curve of the derivative of 3sin x E S TaS Plot view in detail Geometry In Plot view you can directly draw objects on the screen using various drawing tools For example to draw a circle tap and select Circle Now tap where you want the center of the circle to be and press fuer Next tap a point that is to be on the circumference and press _ _ A circle is drawn with a center at the location of your first tap and with a radius equal to the distance between your first tap and second tap Creating or selecting an object always involves at least two steps tap and press _ _ Only by pressing do you confirm your intention to create the point or select an 141 object When creating a point you can tap on the screen and then use the cursor keys to accurately position the point before pressing ae Note that there are on screen instructions to help you For example Hit Center means tap where you want the center of your object to be and Hit Point 1 means tap at the location of the first point you want to add You can draw any number of
401. onstants 451 cobweb graph 279 coding See programming color highlight 34 of geometric objects 143 of graphs 85 theme 34 commands app 543 branch 553 definition of 543 582 geometric 165 192 See also functions structure in programming 497 variable 530 531 commenting code 498 common fractions 26 complex numbers 32 43 57 functions for 313 314 storing 44 complex variables 431 computer algebra system See CAS confidence intervals 238 251 255 366 367 conic sections 125 constants chemistry 451 math 451 physical 449 physics 451 quantum science 451 context sensitive menu 20 conventions 9 converting between units 448 copy and paste 202 copying history items 40 notes 496 programs 509 correlation coefficient 234 covariance 231 cover 13 critical values 240 cursor keys 21 curves 158 custom apps 107 134 521 custom functions 425 custom tables 103 custom variables 42 427 D data set definition 222 data sharing 44 date 34 debugging programs 507 decimal comma 33 596 Index decimal mark 33 decimal zoom 90 93 102 default settings restoring 21 87 100 106 define your own fit 230 degree symbol 21 deleting apps 72 characters 21 lists 457 matrices 466 notes 490 programs 500 statistical data 215 228 determinant 477 dilation 162 display 13 annunciators 14 clearing 13 engineering 31 fixed 31 fraction 31 menu buttons 14 parts of 14 scientific 31 standard 31 DMS format 21 document conventions 9
402. ontains 12 Entering Al B2 in say A4 yields 19 as does entering em Al B2 in A5 However if the value in A1 or B2 changes the value in A5 changes but not the value in A4 This is because the expression or formula was retained in A5 To see if a cell contains just the value shown in it or also an underlying formula that generates the value move your cursor to the cell The entry line shows a formula if there is one Spreadsheet 199 Import data A single formula can add content to every cell in a column or row For example move to C the heading cell for column C enter _z JSIN Row and press _ t Each cell in the column is populated with the sine of the cell s row number A similar process enables you to populate every cell in a row with the same formula You can also add a formula once and have it apply to every cell in the spreadsheet You do this by placing the formula in the cell at the top left the cell with the HP logo in it To see how this works suppose you want to generate a table of powers squares cubes and so on starting with the squares 1 Tap on the cell with the oo 5 a 5 E s nf 1 1 1 1 HP logo in it at the top 2 3 5 w pz fa B 27 B1 243 729 left corner Alternatively la h6 le4 256 1024 4096 IS 25 125 625 3125 15625 you can use the cursor 6 Be pise 1296 776 kesse 7 49 343 12401 16807 11764 keys to move to that cell 3 lea
403. oom Numeric Automatic NumStep BuildYourOwn NumType Numlndep NumZoom NumStart Modes AAngle ADigits AComp lex AFormat Finance app variables Category Names Numeric CPYR NbPmt BEG PMTV FV PPYR IPYR PV Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat 442 Variables Linear Solver app variables Category Names Numeric LSystem LSolution Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat a Contains a vector with the last solution found by either the Linear Solver app or the LSolve app function Triangle Solver app variables Category Names Numeric SideA AngleA SideB AngleB SideC AngleC Rect Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Linear Explorer app variables Category Names Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Quadratic Explorer app variables Category Names Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Variables 443 Trig Explorer app variables Category Names Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Sequence app variables Category Names Symbolic UL U6 U2 U7 U3 U8 U4 U9 U5 U0 Plot Axes Xmax Cursor Xmin GridDots Xtick GridLines Xzoom Labels Ymax Nmin Ymin Nmax Ytick Recenter Yzoom Numeric Automatic NumStep BuildYourOwn NumType Numlndep NumZoom NumStart Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat 444 Variables 23 Units and constants Units Unit categories A unit of measurement such as inch ohm or Becquerel enables you to give a precise magnitude to a physic
404. operating on units These are available by pressing and tapping GSES Converts one unit to another unit of the same category CONVERT 5_m 1 ft returns 16 4041994751 ft You can also use the last answer as the first argument in a new conversion calculation Pressing places the last answer on the entry line You can also select a value from history and tap to copy it to the entry line with a measurement calls the convert command as well and converts to whatever unit follows the Store symbol Meters kilograms seconds amperes Converts a complex unit into the base components of the MKSA system MKSA 8 175 cm s returns 08175 m s 1 448 Units and constants UFACTOR USIMPLIFY Unit factor conversion Converts a measurement using a compound unit into a measurement expressed in constituent units For example a Coulomb a measure of electric charge is a compound unit derived from the SI base units of Ampere and second 1 C 1 A 1 s Thus UFACTOR 100_C 1 _A returns 100 A s Unit simplification For example a Joule is defined as one kg m s Thus USIMPLIFY 5_kg m 2 s 2 returns 5 J Physical constants Example The values of 34 math and physical constants can be selected by name or value and used in calculations These constants are grouped into four categories math chemistry physics and quantum mechanics A list of all these constants is given in List of constants on page 451 To display
405. or to decrease or increase the value of the selected parameter Press or to select another parameter Press to change the sign You have four forms or levels of graph and the keys available for manipulating the equation depend on the level chosen Tap to enter test mode In Test mode you test your skill at matching t l an equation to the graph shown Test mode is like equation mode in that you use the cursor keys to select and change the value of each parameter in the equation The goal is to try to match the graph thot is shown The app displays the graph of a randomly chosen quadratic function Tap the Level button to choose between one of four forms of quadratic equation You can also choose graphs that are relatively easy to match or graphs that are harder match by tapping or respectively Now press the cursor keys to select a parameter and set its value When you are ready tap to see if you have correctly matched your equation to the given graph The Explorer apps 301 Tap to see the correct answer and tap to exit Test mode Trig Explorer app The Trig Explorer app can be used to investigate the behavior of the graphs y a sin bx c d and y a cos bx c d as the values of a b c and d change The menu items available in this app are or EB toggles between graph mode and equation mode or ZS toggles between sine and cosine graphs or
406. or is at the edge of the screen You can zoom by tapping and choosing a zoom option The zoom options are the same as you find in the Plot view of many apps in the calculator see Zoom on page 88 145 Plot view buttons and keys Button or key Purpose Zoom Various scaling options See Zoom on page 88 Point Tools for creating various types of points See Points on page 153 Tools for creating various types of lines See Line on page 156 Tools for creating various types of poly gons See Polygon on page 157 p o w al oc o Curve Tools for creating various types of curves and plots See Curve on page 158 Transfor Tools for geometric transformations of vari ous kinds See Geometric transforma tions on page 161 2 Deletes a selected object or the character to the left of the cursor if the entry line is active De activate the current drawing tool Clears the Plot view of all geometric objects or the Numeric view of all mea surements and calculations Shortcut keys To quickly add an object and undo what you ve done See page 147 Plot Setup view The Plot Setup view enables you to configure the appearance of Plot view and AXES ff to take advantage of eee keyboard shortcuts The fields FUNCTION LABELS SHORTCUTS and options are Geometry Plot Setup RNGEIS f5 8 YRNG 7 1 13 1 Enter minimum horizontal value X
407. or jumps to the point on the plot that is closest point to where you tapped 6 4 0578905109 R1 8 1 0471975512 The current coordinates of the cursor are shown at the bottom of the screen If menu buttons are hiding the coordinates tap to hide the buttons Trace mode and coordinate display are automatically turned on when a plot is drawn Except in the Advanced Graphing app if there is more than one plot displayed press or until the trace cursor is on the plot you are interested in In the Advanced Graphing app tap and hold on the plot you are interested in Either the plot is selected or a menu of plots appears for you select one One of the primary uses of the trace functionality is to evaluate a plotted definition Suppose in Symbolic view you have defined F1 X as X 1 3 Suppose further that you want to know what the value of that function is when X is 25 1 Open Plot view E5 94 An introduction to HP apps 2 If the menu at the bottom of the screen is not open tap Fens 3 If more than one definition is plotted ensure that the trace cursor is on the plot of the definition you want to evaluate You can press to see the definition of a plot and press or to move the trace cursor from plot to plot 4 If you pressed to see the definition of a plot the menu at the bottom of the screen will be closed Tap to re open it 5 Tap RIB 6 Enter 25 and tap ME Top MET T
408. or message appears An error message will also appear if there is an entry on a stack level that an operator needs but it is not an appropriate argument for that operator For example pressing when there is a string on level 1 displays an error message An operator or function will work only on the minimum number of arguments necessary to produce a result Thus if you enter on the entry line 2 4 6 8 and press J stack level 1 shows 48 Multiplication needs only two arguments so the two arguments last entered are the ones that get multiplied The entries 2 and 4 are not ignored 2 is placed on stack level 3 and 4 on stack level 2 Where a function can accept a variable number of arguments you need to specify how many arguments you want it to include in its operation You do this by specifying the number in parentheses straight after the function name You then press to evaluate the function For example suppose your stack looks like this Spreadsheet 2254 2254 2665 2665 25547 25547 9 g 7 25557 25557 S 25117 25117 4 25993 25993 3 25547 25547 2 255743 255743 1 25514 25514 Suppose further that you want to determine the minimum of just the numbers on stack levels 1 2 and 3 You choose the MIN function from the MATH menu and complete the entry as MIN 3 When you press _ _ the minimum of just the last three items on the stack is displayed Reverse Polish Notation
409. ou want to calculate 4x 10 6 x 10 3x 10 First select Scientific as the number format 1 Open the Home Settings window 2 SelectScientific from the Number Format menu 3 Return home A Enter 462 05 13 edok Nal ce Home Settings Angle Measure Radians Number Format V Standard Fixed Scientific Engineering Complex a b Entry Me Integers Language English Decimal Mark Dot Choose format for numbers Getting started 27 Menus To select from a menu 5 Press The result is 8 0000815 This is equivalent to 8 x 10 4 0000E 13 6 0000E23 3 0000E 5 8 0000 15 A menu offers you a Geometry choice of items As in the F 1 Numbers case shown at the right zarithmetic _Jimaximum 3Trigonometry 2 Minimum 4Hyperbolic gt Modulus 1Argument SProbability 4Find Root 2Conjugate some menus have sub menus and sub sub List SPercentage 3Real Part menus Matrix 1 Complex 4Imaginary Part 8Special gt Exponential gt 5 Unit Vector Marn CTI There are two techniques for selecting an item from a menu e direct tapping and e using the arrow keys to highlight the item you want and then either tapping or pressing L Fer Note that the menu of buttons along the bottom of the screen can only be activated by tapping Shortcuts Press when you are at the top of th
410. our V GB element GA 7 70265434582 a V GC tangent GA GB display green new point is added to Veeman NITES Symbolic view When you return to Plot view you will see a point named D and it will have the same x coordinate as point B 21 Press BB 7 If you can t see point D B pan until it comes into 7 view The y coordinate f of D will be the i 2 derivative of the curve at L L 4 point B 8 6 4 Pointer 4 79 3 68 frst v_ New 11 Delete Since its difficult to read coordinates off the screen we ll add a calculation that will give the exact derivative to three decimal places and which we can display in Plot view 22 Press Gig Numeric view is where you enter calculations 23 Tap WEB 24 Tap and choose Measure gt slope 25 Between parentheses add the name of the tangent namely GC and tap SB Notice that the current slope is calculated and displayed The value here is dynamic that is if the slope of the 139 Trace the derivative tangent changes in Plot view the value of the slope is automatically updated in Numeric view 26 With the new calculation highlighted in Numeric view top EEB Selecting a calculation in Numeric view means that it will also be displayed in Plot view 27 Press to return to y Plot view Islope GC 0 452 r r4 Notice the calculation that you have just created in Numeric view is disp
411. ow A vector is represented by single brackets for example 1 2 3 A vector can be a real number vector or a complex number vector such as 1 2 i 7 3 i Matrices Matrices are two dimensional arrays They are composed of at least two rows and at least one column Matrices may contain any combination of or real and complex numbers such as 142i aki 7 Matrix variables There are ten reserved matrix variables available named MO to M9 however you can save a matrix in a variable name you define You can then use them in calculations in Home or CAS views or in a program You can retrieve matrix names from the Vars menu or just type their names from the keyboard Matrices 465 Creating and storing matrices Matrix Catalog buttons and keys The Matrix Catalog x M1 1 1 023KB contains the reserved H R TEKE matrix variables MO M9 M3 11 02348 M4 1 1 023KB as well as any matrix MS 11 023KB q M6 1 1 023KB variables you have cape Sak created in Home or CAS wa 1 023KB F M9 1 1 023KB views or froma program mo 11 1023KB if they are global Edit Delete vect_ send __ ___ Once you select a matrix name you can create edit and delete matrices in the Matrix Editor You can also send a matrix to another HP Prime To open the Matrix Catalog press SA 4 Matrix In the Matrix Catalog the size of a matrix is shown beside the matrix name An empty matrix is shown as 1 1 The number of elements in it is
412. ph of y 1 x is plotted 160 Geometry Geometric transformations The Transform menu displayed by tapping AEN provides numerous tools for you to perform transformations on geometric objects in Plot view You can also define transformations in Symbolic view Translation A translation is a transformation of a set of points that moves each point the same distance in the same direction T x y gt x a y b You must create a vector to indicate the distance and direction of the translation You then choose the vector and the object to be translated Suppose you want to translate circle B at the right down a little and to the right 1 Tap and select Vector 2 Draw a vector in the direction you want to translate the circle and of the same length as move you intend If you need help see Vector on page 156 3 Tap and select Translation 4 Tap the vector and press _ J 5 Tap the object to be moved and press The object is moved the same length as the vector and in the same direction The original object is left in place 8 6 4 Pointer GD E Line Polygo Curve Transfo 1 oa bo 1 B amp 4 Pointer 1 189 1 392 Zoom Point Line Polygo Curve Transfo Geometry 161 Reflection A reflection is a transformation which maps an object or set of points onto its mirror image where the mirror is either a p
413. plane formed by A Band P and angle AB AC is equal to angle AB AP With a list consisting of a point and an angle as the third argument 1 P the triangle is in the plane formed by A B and P and the angle AB AC is equal to t isosceles triangle Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Angle t or Pnt P or Lst P t Var C Functions and commands 395 jacobi_symbol KILL laplacian lcoeff legendre_symbol length Example isosceles triangle GA GB angle GC GA GB defines an isosceles triangle such that one of the two sides of equal length is AB and the angle between the two sides of equal length has a measure equal to that of angle ACB Returns the Jacobi symbol of the given integers jacobi_symbol Intg Intg Example jacobi_ symbol 132 5 gives 1 Used in programming to stop a step by step execution with debugging Returns the Laplacian of an expression with respect to a list of variables laplacian Expr LstVar Example laplacian exp z cos x y x y z gives x 2 cos x y exp z y 2 cos x y exp z cos x y exp z Returns the coefficient of the term of highest degree of a polynomial The polynomial can be expressed in symbolic form or as a list lcoeff Poly Lst Example lcoeff 2 x 3 x 2 7 x gives 2 Returns the Legendre symbol of the given integers legendre_ symbol Intg Intg Example legendre 4 gives 35 x 4 8 15 x 2 4 3 8 Returns the length of a list
414. play the Plot view menu A number of options appear to WY help you can ONO explore the graph such as zoom and trace options using Zoom Traces Go To Defn Menu the trace and zoom options You can also jump directly to a particular 6 value by entering that value The Go To screen appears with the number you typed on the entry line Just tap to accept it You could also tap the button and spwecify the target value Polar app 277 If only one polar equation is plotted you can see the equation that generated the plot by tapping EER If there are several equations plotted move the tracing cursor to the plot you are interested by pressing or and then tap MAIB For more information on exploring plots in Plot view see Common operations in Plot view on page 88 e Display the 11 Open the Numeric 5 Ri BE O 5707963 Numeric view 0 1 1 553197161 e 0 2 1 501260161 Num amp 0 3 1 417517361 view 0 4 1306027261 0 5 1 172142461 a 0 6 1 022203661 The Numeric view 5 363120235 0 8 7 02276690 displays a table of s s aes30021 1 4 02421804 values for and 7 R1 If you had specified and selected more than one polar function in Symbolic view a column of evaluations would appear for each one R2 R3 R4 and so on 12 With the cursor in the 6 column type a new value and tap W The table scrolls to the value you entered You can also zoom in or out on the in
415. played if you press v The palette displays operators useful in math and programming Again just tap the character you want Other math shortcut keys include amp Pressing this key inserts an X T 8 or N depending on what app you are using This is explained further in the chapters describing the apps Similarly pressing enters a degree minute or second character It enters if no degree symbol is part of your expression enters if the previous entry is a value in Getting started 25 Fractions Hexagesimal numbers degrees and enters if the previous entry is a value in minutes Thus entering 36 ETA 24 40 ETA 54 20 ET s yields 36 40 20 See Hexagesimal numbers on page 26 for more information The fraction key J cycles through thee varieties of fractional display If the current answer is the decimal fraction 5 25 pressing converts the answer to the common fraction 21 4 If you press again the answer is converted to a mixed number 5 1 4 If pressed again the display returns to the decimal fraction 5 25 The HP Prime will approximate fraction and mixed number representations in cases 2 2360679775 n 219602 where it cannot find 38209 23184 exact ones For example 2 58209 enter 5 to see the ES SSS a decimal approximation 2 236 Press once to see co and again to see a a third time will cycle back to the 98209 original decimal represen
416. ple Z Test 245 Two Sample Z Interval 251 598 Index Inference app 69 237 255 confidence intervals 251 255 functions 364 367 hypothesis tests 243 250 importing statistics 241 variables Numeric 564 Results 440 summary of 439 Info Solve app 263 input form 29 insufficient memory 586 insufficient statistics data 586 integer 32 integer arithmetic 575 integer base 56 integer commands programming 544 integer functions 334 336 integer zoom 90 93 102 integer editing 579 580 intercepts 132 invalid dimension 586 statistics data 586 K keyboard 18 customizing 515 editing keys 20 entry keys 20 functions on 307 310 keys edit 20 entry 20 internal name of 517 math 24 shift 22 user defined 515 variables 25 L language select 32 Library Application 582 line plot 218 linear equations solving 265 474 Linear Explorer app 69 130 297 299 functions 371 linear fit 229 Linear Solver 70 130 265 267 functions 369 menu buttons 267 variables Numeric 568 summary of 443 lines 156 lists creating 457 deleting 457 editing 456 functions for 459 operating on 457 459 variables 431 453 local variables 511 logarithmic fit 229 functions 308 loop commands 527 527 530 lowercase characters 23 493 M math constants 45 1 keys 24 operations 35 enclosing arguments 38 in scientific notation 27 negative numbers in 39 See also calculations template 20 24 Math menu 310 321 matrices 465 488 add
417. pp Define the open sentence Set up the plot Open the Adva nced Advanced Graphing Symbolic View 19 5 Graphing app Ev E v Select Advanced E vz Graphing H va E vs The app opens in the E vs Symbolic view mv Enter an open sentence Edit Define the open sentence Advanced Graphing Symbolic View 125 2 2 Vivi X_7 X0 3Y XY gg 2 10 4 105 woo E v E va E vs ve Enter an open sentence Note that displays the relations palette trom which relational operators can be easily selected This is the same palette that appears if you press eG Decide if you want to give an open sentence a custom color when it is plotted evaluate a dependent function deselect a definition that you don t want to explore incorporate variables math commands and CAS commands in a definition For the sake of simplicity we can ignore these operations in this example However they can be useful and are described in detail in Common operations in Symbolic view on page 81 You can change the range of the x and y axes and the spacing of the interval marks along the axes Advanced Graphing app 127 Plot the selected definitions Explore the graph 4 Display Plot Setup view Setup For this example you can leave the plot settings at their default values If your settings do not match those in the illustration at the right press Clea
418. pr 7 Creating your own functions You can create your own function by writing a program see chapter 27 or by using the simpler DEFINE functionality Functions you create yourself appear on the User menu one of the Toolbox menus Suppose you wanted to create the function SINCOS A B SIN A COS B C Press Define 2 Inthe Name field enter a name for the function for example SINCOS and tap a 3 In the Function field enter the function SN BAO J 35 OC Sy New fields appear below your function one for each potential parameter it will take You need to decide which ones are to be parameters when the function is called In this example we ll make A and B parameters The value of C will be provided by global variable C which by default is zero Name is Function Enter the name for your user function Name SINCOS Function SIN A COS B C Ag BY c Check if you want this to be an aie variable Functions and commands 425 4 Make sure that A and B are selected and C is not 5 Top Gi You can run your function by entering it on the entry line in Home view or be selecting it from the USER menu You enter the value for each variable you chose to be a parameter In this example we chose A and B to be parameters Thus you might enter SINCOS 0 5 0 75 426 Functions and commands Variables 22 Creating variables Variab
419. quilateral triangle you have the option of storing the coordinates of the third point into a CAS variable isosceles triangle pointl point2 angle Example isosceles triangle GA GB angle GC GA GB defines an isosceles triangle such that one of the two sides of equal length is AB and the angle between the two sides of equal length has a measure equal to that of lt ACB Draws a regular polygon given the first two vertices and the number of sides where the number of sides is greater than 1 If the number of sides is 2 then the segment is drawn You can provide CAS variable names for storing the coordinates of the calculated points in the order they were created The orientation of the polygon is counterclockwise isopolygon pointl point2 realn where realn is an integer greater than 1 Example isopolygon GA GB 6 draws a regular hexagon whose first two vertices are the points A and B Draws a parallelogram given three of its vertices The fourth point is calculated automatically but is not detined symbolically As with most of the other polygon commands you can store the fourth point s coordinates into a CAS variable The orientation of the parallelogram is counterclockwise from the first point parallelogram pointl point2 point3 Example parallelogram 0 6 9 5i draws a parallelogram whose vertices are at O 0 6 0 9 5 and 3 5 The coordinates of the last point are calculated automatically 173
420. r to restore the default values Advanced Graphing Plot Setup xRngfis 9 pss Y Rng 10 9 10 9 X Tick 1 Y Tick 1 Enter minimum horizontal value er aa Edit Page VY See Common operations in Plot Setup view on page 96 for more information about setting the appearance of plots 5 Plot the selected definitions Plot Setup X 15 9 yY 0 6 Display the Plot view menu items Note that you have options to zoom trace go to a specified point and display the definition of the selected graph You can use the zoom and split screen functionality discussed in chapter 6 You can tap and drag to scroll the Plot view or use and to zoom in and out on the cursor position respectively 7 Tap and select In A special feature of the Advanced Graphing app enables you to edit the definition of a graph from within the Plot view 128 Advanced Graphing app 8 Tap ERI The definition as you entered it in Symbolic view appears at the bottom of the screen Top EE The definition is now editable 10 Change the lt to and tap D Notice that the graph changes to match the new definition The definition in Symbolic view also changes 11 Tap HEEB to drop the definition to the bottom of the screen so that you can see the full graph The definition is converted from textbook mode to algebraic mode to save screen space Trace in Plot vie
421. r for numbers when doing integer arithmetic The exception is if you want to include a number from the non default base it will have to include the base marker Thus if your default base is 2 and you want to enter 27 for an integer arithmetic operation you could enter just 11011 without the b suffix But if you wanted to enter E4 you need to enter it with the suffix E4h The HP Prime adds any omitted base markers when the calculation is displayed in history 576 Basic Integer arithmetic Note that if you change the Function mae default base any calculation in history that involves integer arithmetic for which you did not explicitly add a base marker will be resisplayed in the new base 1o0b 111b 10116 In the example at the right the 0 zeh first calculation explicitly re ee ee included base markers b for each operand The second calculation was a copy of the first but without the base markers The default base was then changed to hex The first calculation remained as it was while the second without base markers being explicitly added to the operands was redisplayed in base 16 Changing the default base The calculator s default base for integer arithmetic is 16 hexadecimal To change the default base 1 Display the Home Settings screen 2 Choose the base you want Home Settings from the Integers menu Angle Measure Radians Number Format Standard Binary Octal Decimal
422. rd and you activate it when you go into user mode Programming Sik User mode Re assigning keys There are two user modes Temporary user mode the next key press and only the next enters the object you have assigned to that key After entering that object the keyboard automatically returns to its default operation To activate temporary user mode press User Notice that 1U appears in the title bar The 1 will remind you that the user keyboard will be active for just one key press e Persistent user mode each key press from now until you turn off user mode will enter whatever object you have assigned to a key To activate persistent user mode press ga emn E Notice that tU appears in the title bar The user keyboard will now remain active Ema cug until you press again If you are in user mode and press a key that hasn t been re assigned the key s standard operation is performed Suppose you want to Reassign SIN A KEY K_Si assign a commonly used fran O function such as END ALOG to its own key on the keyboard Simply create a new program that mimics the syntax in the image ot the righ xT Cras The first line of the program specifies the key to be reassigned using its internal name The names of all the keys are given in Key names on page 517 They are case sensitive On line 3 enter the text you want produced when the key being re assigned is pressed This te
423. riable These variables are named Root e Isect for Intersection e Slope e SignedArea e Extremum The result of each new analysis overwrites the previous result For example if you find the second root of a quadratic equation ofter finding the first the value of Root changes form the first to the second root 122 Function app To access Function The Function variables are available in Home view and in variables the CAS where they can be included as arguments in calculations They are also available in Symbolic view 1 To access the Function variables press Ces tap and select Function 2 Select Results and then the variable of interest The variable s name is copied to the insertion point and its value is used in evaluating the expression that contains it You can also enter the value of the variable instead of its name by tapping amp For example in Function Home view or the CAS you could select SignedArea from the Vars menus press 3 and SignedArea 3 get the current value eda laity of SignedArea multiplied by three Function variables can also be made part of a function s definition in Symbolic view For example you could define a function as x x Root The full range of variables and their use in calculations is covered in detail in chapter 22 Variables beginning on page 427 Function app 123 Summary of FCN operations Operation Descripti
424. riangle solver is used From the Triangle Solver view tap GRRE In a program type O gt RECT for the general Triangle Solver 1 gt RECT for the right Triangle Solver Modes The following variables are found in the Home Modes variables input form They can all be over written in an app s Symbolic setup Ans Contains the last result calculated in the Home view HAngle Sets the angle format for the Home view From Modes view choose Degrees or Radians for angle measure 570 Programming HDigits HFormat HComplex Date Time Language In a program type 0 gt HAngle for Degrees 1 gt HAngle for Radians Sets the number of digits for a number format other than Standard in the Home view From the Modes view enter a value in the second field of Number Format In a program type n gt HDigits where 0 lt n lt 11 Sets the number display format used in the Home view From the Modes view choose Standard Fixed Scientific or Engineering in the Number Format field In a program store one of the following the constant numkers or its name into the variable HFormat O Standard 1 Fixed 2 Scientific 3 Engineering Sets the complex number mode for the Home view From Modes check or uncheck the Complex field Or in a program type 0 gt HComplex for OFF 1 gt HComplex for ON Returns the system date The format is YYYY MMDD This format is used irrespective of the format set on the Home Set
425. ric app You can also press amp 2 Enters the independent variable in the Polar app You can also press i Enters the independent variable in the xtOn Sequence app You can also press Qi Enters the equals sign in the Solve app A shortcut equivalent to pressing Cz Displays the selected definition in full screen mode See Large results on page 40 for more information Evaluates dependent definitions See Evaluate a dependent definition on page 84 An introduction to HP apps Common operations in Symbolic Setup view Scope all apps Function Symbolic Setup Number Format System The Symbolic Setup view is the same for all apps lts primary purpose is to allow you to override three of the system wide settings specitied on the Home Settings window Press to open Symbolic Setup view Complex System Choose Angle Measure Override system wide settings 1 Tap once on the setting you want to change You can tap on the field name or the field 2 Tap again on the setting A menu of options appears 3 Select the new setting Note that selecting the Fixed Scientific or Engineering option on the Number Format menu displays a second field for you to enter the required number of significant digits You could also select a field tap REBY and select the new setting Restore default settings To restore default settings is to return precedence to the setting
426. ric view The solution given in Numeric view will be will be for the solution nearest the trace cursor 260 Solve app NOTE By dragging a finger horizontally or vertically across the screen you can quickly see parts of the plot that are initially outside the x and y ranges you set Several equations You can define up to ten equations and expressions in Symbolic view and select those you want to solve together as a system For example suppose you want to solve the system of equations consisting of X24 Y2 16 and X Y Open the 1 Open the Solve app Solve app Select Solve 2 If you have no need for any equations or expressions already defined press Clear Tap to confirm your intention to clear the app Define the 3 Define the equations Solve Symbolle View FD VEET X Y 16 equations AEN x MEA VME2 X Y 1 ES ema 6 Er mE4 MES AO x a y E ee Cal mE HES Enter function Make sure that both SEDIT CHK equations are selected as we are looking for values of X and Y that satisfy both equations Enter a seed 4 Display Numeric view value Num 6 Setup solve Numeric View Unlike the example above in this example we have no values for any variable You can either enter a seed value for one of the Enter value or press SOLVE DEEN SOLVE Solve app 261 Solve the unknown variables Limitations variables or let the calculator provide a solution
427. rithm Also accepts complex numbers LOG value Example LOG 100 returns 2 Common exponential antilogarithm Also accepts complex numbers 1 value 10 Example he returns 1000 Sine cosine tangent Inputs and outputs depend on the current angle format degrees or radians SIN value cos value TAN value Example TAN 45 returns 1 degrees mode Arc sine sin x Output range is from 90 to 90 or 7 2 to 1 2 Inputs and outputs depend on the current angle format Also accepts complex numbers ASIN value Example ASIN 1 returns 90 degrees mode 308 Functions and commands acos ATAN x x Arc cosine cos x Output range is from 0 to 180 or O to m Inputs and outputs depend on the current angle format Also accepts complex numbers Output will be complex for values outside the normal cosine domain of 1 lt x lt 1 ACOS value Example ACOS 1 returns 0 degrees mode Arc tangent tan x Output range is from 90 to 90 or 1 2 to 7 2 Inputs and outputs depend on the current angle format Also accepts complex numbers ATAN value Example ATAN 1 returns 45 degrees mode Square Also accepts complex numbers value Example 182 returns 324 Square root Also accepts complex numbers Vvalue Example V 320 returns 17 88854382 x raised to the power of y Also accepts complex numbers value Power Example 2 8 returns 256
428. rizontal line whose equation is y 2 LineVert Draws the vertical line x a LineVert a Example LineVert 3 draws the vertical line whose equation is x 3 open_polygon Connects a set of points with line segments in the given order to produce a polygon If the last point is the same as the first point then the polygon is closed otherwise it is open open_polygon point1 point2 point1 or open_polygon point1 point2 pointn 190 Geometry polar polar_coordinates pole powerpc radical_axis Geometry Returns the polar line of the given point as pole with respect to the given circle polar circle point Example polar circle x 2 y 2 1 point 1 3 0 returns x 3 Returns a vector containing the polar coordinates of a point or a complex number polar coordinates point or polar coordinates complex Example polar coordinates V2 V2 returns 2 m 4 Returns the pole of the given line with respect to the given circle pole circle line Example pole circle x 2 y 2 1 line x 3 returns point 1 3 0 Given a circle and a point returns the difference between the square of the distance from the point to the circle s center and the square of the circle s radius powerpc circle point Example powerpc circle point 0 0 point 1 1 point 0 0 point 3 1 returns 8 Returns the line whose points all have the same powerpc values for the two given circles
429. rn on eeseseeeccceeeneeseseceeeees 585 Operdting limits a asen nE EE a E 586 Status MESSAGES miss aiae nenit tas eian EE A E a 586 C Product Regulatory Information Federal Communications Commission Notice c cceseeeeees 589 European Union Regulatory Notice cccccsereeceeeeeeseeeeeeees 591 ie ERSEN ENNEA Sele 595 8 Contents Preface Manual conventions The following conventions are used in this manual to represent the keys that you press and the menu options that you choose to perform operations A key that initiates an unshifted function is represented by an image of that key EEX SN CE GM etc A key combination that initiates a shifted unction or inserts a character is represented by the appropriate shift key ETA or FE followed by the key for that function or character initiates the natural exponential function and inserts the pound character The name of the shifted function may also be given in parentheses after the key combination E3 Clean Setup A key pressed to insert a digit is represented by that digit 5 7 8 etc All fixed on screen text such as screen and field names appear in bold CAS Settings XSTEP Decimal Mark etc A menu item selected by touching the screen is represented by an image of that item ETa oS Eal Note that you must use your finger to select a menu item Using a stylus or something similar will not select
430. rns a vector containing the singular values of matrix SVL matrix Example SVL f 1 returns 5 4649 0 3659 3 4 Cross Product of vector with vector2 CROSS vector1 vector2 Example CROSS a 2 3 a returns o 0 2 Dot Product of two arrays matrix and matrix2 DOT matrix1 matrix2 Example DOT da 2 3 a returns 11 Returns the norm sqrt x1 2 x2 2 xn 2 of a vector l2norm Vect Example 12norm 3 4 2 returns V29 Returns the norm sum of the absolute values of the coordinates of a vector llnorm Vect Example linorm 3 4 2 returns 9 486 Matrices Max Norm Examples Identity Matrix Transposing a Matrix Reduced Row Echelon Form Returns the norm the maximum of the absolute values of the coordinates of a vector maxnorm Vect or Mtrx Example maxnorm _ returns 4 123 4 You can create an identity matrix with the IDENMAT function For example IDENMAT 2 creates the 2x2 identity matrix 1 0 0 1 You can also create an identity matrix using the MAKEMAT make matrix function For example entering MAKEMAT I J 4 4 creates a 4 x 4 matrix showing the numeral 1 for all elements except zeros on the diagonal The logical operator returns O when the row number and J the column number are equal and returns 1 when they are not equal You can insert by choosing it from the relations palette ee als
431. row I row2 Multiplies the specified row of the matrix name by value then adds this result to the second specified row2 of the matrix name Syntax SUB name start end Extracts a sub object a portion of a list matrix or graphic and stores it in name Start and end are each specified using a list with two numbers for a matrix a number for vector or lists or an ordered pair X Y for graphics SUB M1 1 2 2 2 542 Programming SAWAPCOL SWAPROW App Functions STARTAPP STARTVIEW Syntax SWAPCOL name column column2 Swaps column and column2 of the specified matrix name Syntax SWAPROW name row row2 Swaps row and row2 in the specified matrix name These commands allow you to launch any HP app bring up any view of the current app and change the options in the Views menu Syntax STARTAPP name Starts the app with name This will cause the app program s START function to be run if it is present The app s default view will be started Note that the START function is always executed when the user taps in the Application Library This also works for user defined apps Example STARTAPP Function launches the Function app Syntax STARTVIEW n draw Starts the nth view of the current app If draw is true that is not O it will force an immediate redrawing of the screen for that view The view numbers n are as follows Symbolic 0 Plots N
432. rs three histories one for the CAS view and two for Home view CAS history is discussed in chapter 3 The two histories in Home view are non RPN visible if you have chosen algebraic or textbook as your preferred entry technique RPN visible only if you have chosen RPN as your preferred entry technique The RPN history is also called the stack As shown in the illustration below each entry in the stack is given a number This is the stack level number 5 T 3 1 0471975512 ls COS 25 x547 542187938089 las 23 23 es SIN 45 TAN 52 6 90417590732 a J415 20 3715487875 As more calculations are added an entry s stack level number increases If you switch from RPN to algebraic or textbook entry your history is not lost It is just not visible If you switch back to RPN your RPN history is redisplayed Likewise if you switch to RPN your non RPN history is not lost When you are not in RPN mode your history is ordered chronologically oldest calculations at the top most recent at the 48 Reverse Polish Notation RPN Re using results bottom In RPN mode your history is ordered chronologically by default but you can change the order of the items in history This is explained in Manipulating the stack on page 51 There are two ways to re use a result in history Method 1 deselects the copied result after copying method 2 keeps the copied item selected Method 1 1 Select
433. rsor movement Getting started Context sensitive menu A context sensitive menu occupies the bottom line of the The options available depend on the context that is the view you are in Note that the menu items are activated by screen touch Getting started There are two types of buttons on the context sensitive menu e menu button tap to display a pop up menu These buttons have square corners along their top such as in the illustration above command button tap to initiate a command These buttons have rounded corners such as in the illustration above Entry and edit keys The primary entry and edit keys are Keys Purpose to Enter numbers or Es Cancels the current operation or clears the entry line Enters an input or executes an operation In calculations acts like When EEM or is present as a menu key acts the same as pressing For entering a negative number For example to enter 25 press 25 Note this is not the same operation that is performed by the subtraction key lJ Math template Displays a palette of pre formatted templates repre senting common arithmetic expres sions Enters the independent variable that is either X T 0 or N depend ing on the app that is currently active 20 Getting started Keys Purpose Continued ena ma en BA clean O00000 Relations palette Displays a palette o
434. ry app 148 menu buttons 86 symbols in title bar 14 system wide settings 30 431 override 87 602 Index T tables custom 103 template key 24 templates 20 test mode See exam mode text 23 textbook entry 32 33 36 47 theme 34 time 16 34 time value of money problems 285 title bar 14 Toolbox menus 29 305 touch options 16 trace 94 95 129 transformations geometric 161 164 Triangle Solver app 70 293 296 functions 369 370 variables Numeric 569 summary of 443 Trig Explorer app 70 302 304 trig zoom 90 94 102 trigonometric fit 230 functions 314 troubleshooting 585 turn on and off 12 TVM problems 285 Two Proportion Z Interval 253 Two Proportion Z Test 247 Two Sample T Interval 254 Two Sample T test 249 Two Sample Z Interval 251 Two Sample Z Test 245 U undo a zoom 90 in Geometry 144 units 445 451 calculating with 446 converting between 448 prefixes for 446 tools for manipulating 448 uppercase characters 23 493 Upper Tail Chi Square probability 317 USB cables 44 user defined keys 515 regression fit 230 variables 429 512 user keyboard 515 User menu 305 user modes 516 V variables Advanced Graphing app 434 app 109 554 574 CAS 59 complex 431 creating 427 cross app 110 definition of 583 Finance app 442 Function app 122 432 Geometry 433 global 511 graphics 431 Home 431 Home settings 431 in programming 553 Inference app 439 key 25 Linear Solver 443 list 431 local 511 matrix 4
435. s eigenvects eigVc eigVI element Enters the mathematical constant e Euler s number Returns three polynomials U V and D such that for two polynomials A and B U x A x V x B x D x GCD A x B x where GCD A x B x is the greatest common divisor of polynomials A and B The polynomials can be provided in symbolic form or as lists Without a third argument it is assumed that the polynomials are expressions of x With a variable as third argument the polynomials are expressions of it egcd Poly or Lst A Poly or Lst B Var Example egcd x 1 2 x 3 1 gives x 2 1 3 x 3 Returns the sequence of eigenvalues of a matrix eigenvals Mtrx Example eigenvals 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 gives 3 3 3 Returns the eigenvectors of a diagonalizable matrix eigenvects Mtrx Returns the eigenvectors of a diagonalizable matrix eigVc Mtrx Returns the Jordan matrix associated with a matrix when the eigenvalues are calculable eigV1 Mtrx Shows a point on a curve or a real in an interval element Curve or Real_interval Pnt or Real Example element 0 5 creates a value of 2 5 initially Tapping on this value and pressing Enter enables you to press a cursor key to increase or decrease the value in a manner similar to a slider bar Press Enter again to close the slider bar The value you set can be used as a coefficient in a function you subsequently plot 384 Functio
436. s _ J A point is automatically created midway between those two points If you choose an object first such as a segment choosing the Midpoint tool and pressing adds a point midway between the ends of that object In the case of a circle the midpoint is created at the circle s center Intersection Tap the desired intersection and press L _ A point is created at one of the points of intersection Keyboard shortcut More Trace Displays a list of points for 7 you to choose the one you k f want to trace If you Sx Li subsequently move that Jo point a trace line is drawn e a on the screen to show its L 3 path In the example at the 4 Pointer GB right point B was chosen to Zoom Point Line Polygo Curve Transfo be traced When that point was moved up and to the left a path of its movement was created Trace creates an entry in Symbolic view In the example above the entry is Trace GB Stop Trace Turns off tracing and deletes the definition of the trace point from Symbolic view If more than one point is being traced a menu of trace points appears so that you can choose which one to untrace Stop Trace does not erase any existing trace lines It merely prevents any further tracing should the point be moved again 154 Geometry Erase Trace Center Element O 1 Intersections Random pts Geometry Erases all trace lines but leaves the definition of the trace points in Symbolic view Wh
437. s on the Home Settings screen To restore one field to its default setting 1 Select the field 2 Press 8 To restore all default settings press i ER An introduction to HP apps 87 Common operations in Plot view Plot view functionality that is common to many apps is described in detail in this section Functionality that is available only in a particular app is described in the chapter dedicated to that app Press to open Plot view Zoom Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Solve Statistics 1 Var and Statistics 2Var Also to a limited degree Geometry Zooming redraws the plot on a larger or smaller scale It is a shortcut for changing the range settings in Plot Setup view The extent of most zooms is determined by two zoom factors a horizontal and a vertical factor By default these factors are both 2 Zooming out multiplies the scale by the factor so that a greater scale distance appears on the screen Zooming in divides the scale by the factor so that a shorter scale distance appears on the screen Zoom factors To change the default zoom factors 1 Open the Plot view of the app EB 2 Tap to open the Plot view menu 3 Tap to open the Zoom menu 4 Scroll and select Set Factors Zoom Factors zzomm i Y Zoom 2 Recenter y The Zoom Factors screen appears 5 Change one or both zoom factors Enter horizontal zoom factor 6 If you want the plot
438. s 0 76748868087 Cumulative binomial distribution function Returns the probability of k or fewer successes out of n trials with a probability of success p for each trial Note that n and k are integers withk lt n BINOMIAL CDF n p k Example Suppose you want to know the probability that during 20 tosses of a fair coin you will get either O 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 heads BINOMIAL CDF 20 0 5 6 returns 0 05765914917 Cumulative Poisson distribution function Returns the probability x or fewer occurrences of an event in a given time interval given u expected occurrences POISSON CDF U x Example POISSON CDF 4 2 returns 0 238103305554 Inverse cumulative normal distribution function Returns the cumulative normal distribution value associated with the lower tail probability p given the mean u and standard deviation o of a normal distribution If only one argument is supplied it is taken as p and the assumption is that u 0 and o NORMALD ICDF u 0 p Example NORMALD_ICDF 0 1 0 841344746069 returns 1 Functions and commands 319 Binomial Poisson List Inverse cumulative Student s t distribution function Returns the value x such that the Student s t lower tail probability of x with n degrees of freedom is p STUDENT_ICDF n p Example STUDENT_ICDF 3 0 0246659214814 returns 3 2 Inverse cumulative x distribution function Returns the value x such that the x lower tail pr
439. s 1Var app functions Do1VStats SetFreq SetSample The Statistics 1Var app has three functions designed to work together to calculate summary statistics based on one of the statistical analyses H1 H5 defined in the Symbolic view of the Statistics 1Var app Do1 variable statistics Performs the same calculations as tapping in the Numeric view of the Statistics 1 Var app and stores the results in the appropriate Statistics 1 Var app results variables Hn must be one of the Statistics 1 Var app Symbolic view variables H1 H5 DolVStats Hn Set frequency Sets the frequency for one of the statistical analyses H1 H5 defined in the Symbolic view of the Statistics 1Var app The frequency can be either one of the columns D0 D9 or any positive integer Hn must be one of the Statistics 1Var app Symbolic view variables H1 H5 If used Dn must be one of the column variables DO D9 otherwise value must be a positive integer SetFreq Hn Dn or SetFreq Hn value Set sample data Sets the sample data for one of the statistical analyses H1 H5 defined in the Symbolic view of the Statistics 1 Var app Sets the data column to one of the column variables DO D9 for one of the statistical analyses H1 H5 SetSample Hn Dn Statistics 2Var app functions PredX The Statistics 2Var app has a number of functions Some are designed to calculate summary statistics based on one of the statistical analyses S1 S5 defined in the Symbolic
440. s 2 tan x 2 tan x 2 2 Returns an expression simplified using the formulas sin x 2 cos x 2 1 and tan x sin x cos x privileging sine trigsin Expr Example trigsin cos x 4 sin x 2 gives sin x 4 sin x 2 Returns an expression simplified using the formulas sin x 2 cos x 2 1 and tan x sin x cos x privileging cosine trigcos Expr Example trigcos sin x 4 sin x 2 gives cos x 4 3 cos x 2 2 Returns an expression simplified using the formulas sin x 2 cos x 2 1 and tan x sin x cos x privileging tangent trigtan Expr Example trigtan cos x 4 sin x 2 gives tan x 4 tan x 2 1 tan x 4 2 tan x 2 1 Functions and commands 333 atrig2In tlin tCollect trigexpand trig2exp Integer Divisors Returns an expression with inverse trigonometric functions rewritten as logarithmic functions atrig21n Expr Example atrig21n atan x gives i 1n i x i x 2 Returns a trigonometric expression with the products and integer powers linearized tlin ExprTrig Example tlin sin x 3 gives 3 sin x 4 sin 3 x 4 Returns a trigonometric expression linearized and with any sine and cosine of the same angle put together tCollect Expr Example tcollect sin x cos x gives sqrt 2 cos x 1 4 pi Returns a trigonometric expression in expanded form trigexpand Expr Example trigexpand sin 3 x
441. s 2Var i A Advanced Graphing gt calculations For example in f eomery the Function app the Plot eSolve view Fen menu hos a ap ETIE function called SLOPE that calculates the slope of a given function at a given point The SLOPE function can also be used from the Home view or a program to give the same results The app functions described in this section are grouped by app Function app functions AREA The Function app functions provide the same functionality found in the Function app s Plot view under the FCN menu All these operations work on functions The functions may be expressions in X or the names of the Function app variable FO through F9 Area under a curve or between curves Finds the signed area under a function or between two functions Finds the area under the function Fn or below Fn and above the function Fm from lower X value to upper X value AREA Fn Fm Lower upper Example AREA X X 2 2 1 returns 4 5 Functions and commands 343 EXTREMUM ISECT ROOT SLOPE Extremum of a function Finds the extremum if one exists of the function Fn that is closest to the X value guess EXTREMUM Fn guess Example EXTREMUM X2 X 2 0 returns 0 5 Intersection of two functions Finds the intersection if one exists of the two functions Fn and Fm that is closest to the X value guess ISECT Fn Fm guess Example ISECT X 3
442. s if an operand is Function not marked as an integer by preceding it with In these cases the result is presented in base 10 710 4h 10 2280 ES R E S S 578 Basic Integer arithmetic Integer manipulation The result of integer arithmetic can be further analyzed and manipulated by viewing it in the Edit Integer dialog l In Home view use the cursor keys to select the result of interest 2 Press Base The Edit Integer dialog Function appears The Was field at Edit Integer the top shows the result you selected in Home view i 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 The hex and decimal 00000000 00000000 00000000 11100100 equivalents are shown under the Out field followed by a bit by bit representation of the integer 4l lt gt Shift Bits Neg Cycle base Symbols beneath the bit representation show the keys you can press to edit the integer Note that this doesn t change the result of the calculation in Home view The keys are or Shift these keys shift the bits one space to the left or right With each press the new integer represented appears in the Out field and in the hex and decimal fields below it or Bits these keys increase or decrease the wordsize The new wordsize is appended to the value shown in the Out field Neg returns the two s complement that is each bit in the specified wordsize is inverted and one is
443. s no RPN entry mode in CAS view just algebraic and textbook modes All the operator and function keys work in the same way in CAS view as Home view although all the alpha characters are lowercase rather than uppercase But the primary difference is that the default display of answers is symbolic rather than numeric You can also use the template key L3 to help you insert the framework for common calculations and for vectors and matrices This is explained in detail in Math template on page 24 The most commonly used Function CAS functions are available from the CAS menu one of the Toolbox menus To display the menu press E If the CAS menu is not open by default tap We Other CAS a commands are available from the Catlg menu another of the Toolbox menus To choose a function select a category and then a command 54 Computer algebra system CAS Example 1 Example 2 Settings To find the roots of 2x 3x 2 1 With the CAS menu open select Polynomial and then Find Roots The function proot appears on the entry line 2 Between the parentheses enter 20H ICFIS peole BAe 3 Press _fe _ To find the area under the graph of 5x 6 between x 1 and x 3 1 With the CAS menu open select Calculus and then Integrate The function int appears on the entry line 2 Between the parentheses enter 5 ar J6 eer 2 3 A eee 3 3 Press _fer_
444. s of advertising and the y axis represents sales However there is no data point for 6 minutes Thus we cannot move the cursor to x 6 Instead we need to predict what y will be when x 6 based on the data we do have To do that we need to trace the regression curve not the data points we have 15 Press or to set the cursor to trace the regression line rather than the data points PREDY 1653 875 Statistics 2Var app 225 The cursor jumps from whatever data point it was on to the regression curve 16 Tap on the regression line near x 6 near the right edge of the display Then press gt until x 6 If the x value is not shown at the bottom left of the screen tap MET When you reach x 6 you will see that the PREDY value also displayed at the bottom of the screen reads 2931 5 Thus the model predicts that sales would rise to 2 931 50 if advertising were increased to 6 minutes You could use the same tracing technique to predict although roughly how many minutes of advertising you would need to gain sales of a specified amount However a more accurate method is available return to Home view and enter Predx s where s is the sales figure Predy and Predx are app functions They are discussed in detail in Statistics 2Var app functions on page 363 Entering and editing statistical data Note Each column in Numeric view is a dataset and is represented by
445. s prompting you to enter the program parameters 506 Programming Multi function programs Debug a Program If there is more than one EXPORT function in a program when is tapped a list appears for you to choose which function to run To see this feature create a program with the text EXPORT NAME1 BEGIN END EXPORT NAME2 _ BEGIN END Now note that when you tap or GEE a list with NAME1 and NAME2 appears You cannot run a program that contains syntax errors If the program does not do what you expect it to do or if there is a run time error detected by the system you can execute the program step by step and look at the values of local variables Let s debug the program created above MYPROGRAM 1 In the Program Program Catalog Catalog select Function OKB ExportName lt 1KB MYPROGRAM MYPROGRAM lt 1KB Select MYPROGRAM 2 Top EB FOR N FROM 1 TO 3 DO MSGBOX Counting N E If there is more than kg one EXPORT function in a file a list appears for you to choose which function to debug CEMC While debugging a program the title of the program or intra program function appears at the top of the display Below that is the current line of the program being debugged Programming 507 The current value of each variable is visible in the main body of the screen The following menu buttons are available in the debugger BET Skips
446. s what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers h header cells will be created acc Accept Reject 47 prob df ct cX cX2 356 Functions and commands HypT2mean The hypothesis test HypT2mean is a two sample T test for comparing means HypT2mean input list configuration HypT2mean SampMeanl SampMean2 SampStdDevl SampStdDev2 SampSizel SampSize2 pooled Sighevel Mode configuration Input List A list of input variables see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values Input Parameters SampMean1 SampMean2 SampStdDev1 SampStdDev2 SampSizel SampSize2 pooled 0 false or 1 true Siglevel Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not equal Configuration A string that controls what results are shown and the order in which they appear An empty string displays the default all results including headers h header cells will be created acc Accept Reject Functions and commands 357 ConfZ1mean ConfZ2mean ct cX cX2 stD The ConfZ 1 mean calculates the confidence interval for a one sample Ztest ConfZlmean input list configuration ConfZlmean SampMean SampSize
447. s x With a variable as second argument it is taken as the abscissa fMin Expr Var Example fMin x 2 2 x 1 x gives 1 Used in programming in loops for which the number of iterations is known Returns a real number as a string with the indicated format t float s scientitic e engineering format Real Str 4 s5 e6 Example format 9 3456 s3 gives 9 35 For a given integer n representing a fraction and an integer p the modulus returns the fraction a b such that n a b mod p fracmod Intg n Intg p Example fracmod 41 121 gives 2 3 Returns the list of roots and poles of a rational polynomial Each root or pole is followed by its multiplicity froot RatPoly Example froot x 5 2 x 4 x 3 x 3 gives 0 3 1 2 3 1 388 Functions and commands fsolve function_diff gauss GETPIX_C GF Returns the numerical solution of an equation or a system of equations With the optional third argument you can specify a guess for the solution or an interval within which it is expected that the solution will occur With the optional fourth argument you can name the iterative algorithm to be used by the solver fsolve Expr Var Guess or Interval Method Example fsolve cos x x x 1 1 bisection_solver gives 0 739085133215 Returns the derivative function of a function function_diff Fnc Example function _diff sin gives x gt cos x Using the Gauss
448. se equation is y 2x that is the line through 0 0 and 2 4 the midpoint of the segment whose endpoints are O 8 and 4 0 Draws a line through a given point that is parallel to a given line parallel point line Examples parallel A B draws the line through point A that is parallel to line B parallel 3 2i x y 5 draws the line through the point 3 2 that is parallel to the line whose equation is x y 5 that is the line whose equation is y x 1 Draws the perpendicular bisector of a segment The segment is defined either by its name or by its two endpoints perpen bisector segment or perpen bisector pointl point2 Examples perpen bisector GC draws the perpendicular bisector of segment C perpen bisector GA GB draws the perpendicular bisector of segment AB perpen bisector 3 2i i draws the perpendicular bisector of a segment whose endpoints have coordinates 3 2 and 0 1 that is the line whose equation is y x 3 1 170 Geometry perpendicular segment tangent Geometry Draws a line through a given point that is perpendicular to a given line The line may be defined by its name two points or an expression in x and y perpendicular point line or perpendicular pointl point2 point3 Examples perpendicular GA GD draws a line perpendicular to line D through point A perpendicular 3 2i GB GC draws a line through the point whose coordinates are 3 2
449. se any expression that is in history You can also retrieve and reuse any result that is in history To retrieve an expression and place it on the entry line for editing either tap twice on it or e use the cursor keys to highlight the expression and then either tap on it or tap EIB To retrieve a result and place it on the entry line use the cursor keys to highlight it and then tap De If the expression or result you want is not showing press repeatedly to step through the entries and reveal those that are not showing You can also swipe the screen to quickly scroll through history Pressing takes you straight to the very first entry in history and pressing SA takes you straight to the most recent entry Your last four expressions are always copied to the clipboard and can easily be retrieved by pressing E This opens the clipboard from where you can quickly choose the one you want Note that expressions and not results are available from the clipboard Note too that the last four expressions remain on the clipboard even if you have cleared history 40 Getting started To reuse the last result TIP Press Ans to SN ee retrieve your last answer Ir 1 77245385091 for use in another Ans 13 23 0419000618 calculation Ans A appears on the entry line This is a shorthand for your last answer and it can be part of a new expression You could now enter other components of a calcul
450. serry Mean of y dependent values Sum of y values Sum of y values The sample standard deviation of the dependent column The population standard deviation of the dependent column The standard error of the dependent column Plotting statistical data Once you have entered your data selected the data set to analyze and specified your fit model you can plot your data You can plot up to five scatter plots at a time 1 In Symbolic view select the data sets you want to plot 2 Make sure that the full range of your data will be plotted You do this by reviewing and adjusting if 232 Statistics 2Var app Tracing a scatter plot Tracing a curve Tracing order necessary the X Rng and Y Rng fields in Plot Setup view Ema e 3 Press EB If the data set and regression line are not ideally positioned Press and select Autoscale Autoscale can be relied upon to give a good starting scale which can then be adjusted later in the Plot Setup view The figures below the plot indicate that the cursor is at the second data point of S1 at 1 920 Press to move to the next data point and display information about it 51 2 X11 920 If the regression line is not showing tap MEB The coordinates of the tracer cursor are shown at the bottom of the screen If they are not visible tap Menu Bt Press Bio see the Statistics 2Var Symbolic View equation of the Vsi ct a
451. sking if you want to create a variable called ME Tap or press to confirm your intention You can now use that variable in subsequent calculations ME 3 will yield 29 6088132033 for example You can also create variables in CAS view in the same way However the built in CAS variables must be entered in lowercase However the variables you create yourself can be uppercase or lowercase See chapter 22 Variables starting on page 427 for more information As well as built in Home and CAS variables and the variables you create yourself each app has variables that you can access and use in calculations See App functions and variables on page 109 for more information Complex numbers You can perform arithmetic operations using complex numbers Complex numbers can be entered in the following forms where x is the real part y is the imaginary part and i is the imaginary constant 1 gt xy e x yi except in RPN mode e x yi except in RPN mode x iy except in RPN mode or x iy except in RPN mode To enter i e press or press A 2 There are 10 built in variables available for storing complex numbers These are labeled Z0 to 29 You can Getting started 43 Sharing data General procedure also assign a complex number to a variable you create yourself To store a complex AA a ee AN Od number in a variable enter the complex uae a number press 3 moamamanamam
452. ssion rows columns AKEMAT expression elements Examples AKEMAT 0 3 3 returns a 3 x 3 zero matrix 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AKEMAT V2 2 3 returns the 2 x 3 matrix V2 V2 V2 V2 V2 V2 AKEMAT I J 1 2 3 returns the 2 x 3 matrix 1 2 3 2 3 4 Note in the example above that each element is the sum of the row number and column number minus 1 MAKEMAT V2 2 returns the 2 element vector V2 V2 Identity matrix Creates a square matrix of dimension size x size whose diagonal elements are 1 and off diagonal elements are zero IDENMAT size Given two integers nand m and a matrix name creates an nx m matrix that contains random integers in the range 99 through 99 with a uniform distribution and stores it in the matrix name randMat MatrixName n m Example RANDMAT M1 2 2 returns a 2x2 matrix with random integer elements and stores it in M1 Returns a square nxn matrix with expr on the diagonal 1 above and O everywhere else JordanBlock Expr n Example Tred JordanBlock 7 3 returns g 7 4 007 478 Matrices Hilbert Given a positive integer n returns the n order Hilbert matrix Each element of the matrix is given by the formula 1 j k1 where j is the row number and k is the column number hilbert n Example iil In CAS view hilbert 4 returns 2345 Wil Al On IH ol 14567 Isometric Matrix of an isometry
453. st Example SIZE 1 2 3 returns 3 ALIST Creates a new list composed of the first differences of a list that is the differences between consecutive elements in the list The new list has one less element than the original list The differences for x x2 X3 Xp y Xn are XQ X pp X3 X2 vs XX pI ALIST list Lists 461 Example In Home view store Function 3 5 8 12 17 23 in L5 and find the first differences for the list ift 3 5 8 12 17 23 gt L5 3 5 8 12 17 23 3 5 8 1 2 17 23 ALIST L5 2 3 4 5 6 es ALPHA p ca 5 Enter Select List Select AList con EA 5 Enter EELIST Calculates the sum of all elements in a list XLIST list Example ELIST 2 3 4 returns 9 TILIST Calculates the product of all elements in list TILIST list Example TILIST 2 3 4 returns 24 Finding statistical values for lists To find statistical values such as the mean median maximum and minimum of a list you create a list store it in a data set and then use the Statistics 1 Var app Example In this example use the Statistics 1Var app to find the mean median maximum and minimum values of the elements in the list L1 being 88 90 89 65 70 and 89 462 Lists l In Home view create Function L1 88 90 89 65 70 89 1 88 90 89 65 70 89 gt L1 88 90 89 65 70 89 Ee ee ee eee In Home view store Function LI in D1 ALPHA J1 EED 9 Define o
454. st measures the strength of the evidence or a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the means of the two populations are equal Hg u bo You select one of the following alternative hypotheses to test against the null hypothesis Ho u lt u2 Ho by gt u2 Ho u u2 Inputs The inputs are Field name Definition R Sample 1 mean X3 Sample 2 mean ny Sample 1 size n2 Sample 2 size o Population 1 standard deviation o2 Population 2 standard deviation a Significance level Inference app 245 Results The results are Result Description Test Z Z Test statistic Test A X Difference in the means associ ated with the test Z value P Probability associated with the Z Test statistic Critical Z Boundary value s of Z associated with the a level that you supplied Critical A x Difference in the means associ ated with the a level you supplied One Proportion Z Test Menu name Inputs ZlTest 1 2 On the basis of statistics from a single sample this test measures the strength of the evidence for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the proportion of successes is an assumed value Ho n To You select one of the following alternative hypotheses against which to test the null hypothesis Ho T lt To Ho T gt To Ho T To The inputs are Field name Definition x Number of successes in the sample n Sample si
455. stic you are after Note that the title of the column of statistics is H1 There are 5 data set definitions available for one variable statistics H1 H5 If data is entered in D1 H1 is automatically set to use D1 for data and the frequency of each data point is set to 1 You can select other columns of data from the Symbolic view of the app Tap to close the statistics window Press to see the Statistics 1Var Symbolic View E Plott Histogram The first field in each 2 Seri E Plot2 Hist set of definitions is le where you specify I Plot3 Histogram the column of data Hay Enter independent column that is to be edit v po show _tval_ analyzed the second field is where you specify the column that has the frequencies of each data point and the third field Plotn is where you choose the type of plot that will represent the data in Plot view Histogram Box and Whisker Normal Probability Line Bar or Pareto 210 Statistics 1Var app Symbolic view menu items The menu items you can tap on in Symbolic view are Menu item Purpose Copies the column variable or vari able expression to the entry line for editing Tap when done A Selects or deselects a statistical m analysis H1 H5 for exploration am Enters D directly to save you having to press two keys Show Displays the current expression in textbook format in full screen view Tap when
456. string or sequence length Lst or Str or Seq Example length 1 2 3 gives 3 396 Functions and commands Iged lin line_segments linear_interpolate linear_regression LineHorz LineTan LineVert Returns the greatest common divisor of a list of integers or polynomials lgcd Seq or Lst Example lgcd 45 75 20 15 gives 5 Returns an expression with the exponentials linearized lin Expr Example lin exp x 3 exp x 2 gives exp 6 x 2 exp 4 x exp 2 x Returns the list of the line segments one line one segment of a polyhedron line segments Polygon or Polyedr P Takes a regular sample from a polygonal line defined by a matrix of two rows linear interpolate Mtrx xmin xmax xstep Returns the coefficients a and b of y a x b where y is the line that best approximates the points whose coordinates are the elements in two lists or the rows of a matrix linear regression Lst Mtrx A Lst Example linear _regression 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 3 0 9 0 4 0 16 0 gives 4 0 2 0 Draws the horizontal line y a LineHorz Expr a Draws the tangent to y f x at x a LineTan Expr f x Var Expr a Draws the vertical line x a LineVert Expr a Functions and commands 397 list2mat LN Iname Inexpand LOCAL locus LOG log10 Returns a matrix of n columns made by splitting a list into rows each cont
457. sts whether or not they are vertices of a right triangle Returns O if they are not If they are returns the number order of the common point of the two perpendicular sides 1 2 or 3 is rectangle point 0 0 point 4 2 point 2 6 returns 2 is_square Tests whether or not a set of four points are vertices of a square Returns 1 if they are and O otherwise is _square pointl point2 point3 point4 Example is square point 0 0 point 4 2 point 2 6 point 2 4 returns 1 Other Geometry functions The following functions are not available from a menu in the Geometry app but are available from the Catlg menu convexhull Returns a vector containing the points that serve as the convex hull for a given set of points convexhull pointl point2 pointn harmonic_conjugate Returns the harmonic conjugate of 3 points Specifically returns the harmonic conjugate of point3 with respect to point and point2 Also accepts three parallel or concurrent 188 Geometry harmonic_division is_harmonic lines in this case it returns the equation of the harmonic conjugate line harmonic _conjugate pointl point2 point3 or harmonic _conjugate linel line2 line3 Example harmonic conjugate point 0 0 point 3 0 point 4 0 returns point 12 5 0 Returns the harmonic conjugate of 3 points Specifically returns the harmonic conjugate of point3 with respect to point and point2 and stores the r
458. t approx Expr Int Displays the algebraic area at point zO of a circle or a polygon A legend is provided areaat Polygon Pnt Cplx z0 Displays the algebraic area at point zO of a circle or a polygon areaatraw Polygone Pnt Cplx z0 Arc sine sine x ASIN value Used in programming to state an assumption about a variable assume Expr Arc tan tan7 x ATAN value Draws the barycenter of the system consisting of point 1 with weight coefficient 1 point 2 with weight coefficient 2 point 3 with weight coefficient 3 etc barycenter Pntl Coeff1 Pnt2 Coeff2 Pnt3 Coeff3 Example barycenter 3 1 3 1 4 2 gives point 2 0 376 Functions and commands basis BEGIN bisector black blue bounded_function BREAK breakpoint canonical_form cat Returns the basis of the linear subspace defined by the set of vectors consisting of vector 1 vector 2 and vector n basis Lst vectorl vectorn Example basis 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 gives 3 0 3 0 3 6 Used in programming to begin a set of statements that should be taken as a single statement Draws the bisector of the angle AB AC bisector Pnt A or Cplx Pnt B or Cplx Pnt C or Cplx Example bisector 0 4i 4 draws the line given by y x Used with display to specify the color of the geometrical object to be displayed Used with display to specify the
459. t Recursive Function Epsilon Probability Newton Specify the maximum number of embedded variables allowed in a single evaluation in a program See also Recursive Evalua tion above Specify the maximum number of embedded function calls allowed Any number smaller than the value specified for epsilon will be shown as zero Specify the maximum probability of an answer being wrong for non deterministic algorithms Set this to zero for deterministic algo rithms Specify the maximum number of iterations when using the Newto nian method to find the roots of a quadratic Setting the form of menu items One setting that affects the CAS is made outside the CAS Settings screen This setting determines whether the commands on the CAS menu are presented descriptively or by their command name Here are some examples of identical functions that are presented differently depending on what presentation mode you select Descriptive name Command name Factor List Complex Zeros Groebner Basis Factor by Degree Find Roots ifactors cZeros gbasis factor_xn proot The default menu presentation mode is to provide the descriptive names for the CAS functions If you prefer the 58 Computer algebra system CAS To use an expression or result from Home view To use a Home variable in CAS functions to be presented by their command name deselect the Menu Display option on the second pa
460. t vertical align ment show strings in quotes textbook mode as opposed to algebraic mode or 32786 if unspeci fied Left O Center 1 Right 2 unspeci fied 1 Top 0 Center 1 Bottom 2 unspeci fied 1 Yes 0 No 1 unspecified 1 Yes 0 No 1 unspecified 1 As well as retrieving format attributes you can set a format attribute or cell content by specifying it in a formula in the Spreadsheet 207 relevant cell For example wherever it is placed g5 1 6543 enters 6543 in cell g5 Any previous content in g5 is replaced Similarly B3 5 2 forces the contents of B3 to be displayed in medium font size Spreadsheet functions As well as the functions on the Math CAS and Catlg menus you can use special spreadsheet functions These can be found on the App menu one of the Toolbox menus Press IE tap and select Spreadsheet The functions are described on Spreadsheet functions on page 345 Remember to precede a function by an equals sign SA 2 if you want the result to automatically update as the values it is dependent on change Without an equals sign you will be entering just the current value 208 Spreadsheet 10 Statistics 1Var app The Statistics 1 Var app can store up to ten data sets at one time It can perform one variable statistical analysis of one or more sets of data The Statistics 1 Var app starts with the Numeric view whi
461. t See chapter 2 Reverse Polish Notation RPN starting on page 47 Math The math template key uz template helps you insert the framework for common calculations and for vectors matrices and hexagesimal numbers It displays a palette of pre formatted outlines to which you add the constants variables and so on Just tap on the template you want or use the arrow keys to highlight it and press _ _ Then enter the components needed to complete the calculation 24 Getting started Math shortcuts Example Suppose you want to find the cube root of 945 1 In Home view press E 2 Select VO The skeleton or framework for your calculation now appears on the entry line 2m 3 Each box on the template needs to be completed 30 945 A Press to display the result 9 813 The template palette can save you a lot of time especially with calculus calculations You can display the palette at any stage in defining an expression In other words you don t need to start out with a template Rather you can embed one or more templates at any point in the definition of an expression As well as the math template there are other similar screens that offer a palette of special characters For example pressing displays the special symbols palette shown at the right Select a character by tapping it or scrolling to it and pressing CEI A similar palette the relations palette is dis
462. t about a given center point through a given angle rotate point angle object Example rotate GA angle GB GC GD GK rotates the geometric object labeled K about point A through an angle equal to lt CBD Dilates and rotates a geometric object about the same center point similarity point realk angle object 179 translation Measure Plot angleat angleatraw areaat Example similarity 0 3 angle 0 1 i point 2 0 dilates the point at 2 0 by a scale factor of 3 a point at 6 0 then rotates the result 90 counterclockwise to create a point at 0 6 Translates a geometric object along a given vector The vector is given as the difference of two points head tail translation vector object Examples translation 0 i GA translates object A down one unit translation GB GA GC translates object C along the vector AB Used in Symbolic view Given the three points of an angle and a fourth point as a location displays the measure of the angle defined by the first three points The measure is displayed with a label at the location in the Plot view given by the fourth point The first point is the vertex of the angle angleat pointl point2 point3 point4 Example In degree mode angleat point 0 0 point 2V3 0 point 2V3 3 point 6 6 displays appoint 0 0 30 0 at point 6 6 Works the same as angleat but without the label Used in Symbolic vi
463. t calculations A number plus a unit is a measurement You can perform calculations with multiple measurements providing that the units of each measurement are from the same category For example you can add two measurements of length even lengths of different units as illustrated in the following example But you cannot add say a length measurement to a volume measurement 446 Units and constants Example Suppose you want to add 20 centimeters and 5 inches and have the result displayed in centimeters l If you want the result in cm enter the centimeter measurement first Select Length Select cm Now add 5 inches 5 Select Length Select in The result is shown as 32 7 cm If you had wanted the result in inches then you would have entered the 5 inches first To continue the example let s divide the result by 4 seconds 4 Select Time Select s The result is shown as 8 175 cm s7 Function Function Function 32 7_cm 8 175_ crn s Units and constants 447 Unit tools CONVERT MKSA 4 Now convert the Function result to kilometers per hour 32 7_cm 8 175_ cm s Select Speed Select km h The result is shown as 0 2943 kilometers Function per hour PTER Ans as 8 175 _ cm s converfe 17s forms E km 2943 m There are a number of tools for managing and
464. t of tangency along the curve The curve to be explored is y 3sin x Since the accuracy of our calculation in this example is not too important we will first change the number format to fixed at 3 decimal places This will also help keep our geometry workspace uncluttered 135 Preparation Open the app and plot the graph Press Si ay On the Home Setting screen set the number format to Fixed and the number of decimal places to 3 Press and select Geometry If there are objects showing that you don t need press and confirm your intention by tapping MB Select the type of graph you want to plot In this example we are plotting a simple sinusoidal function so choose gt Plot gt Function With plotfunc on the entry line enter 3 sin x Note that x must be entered in lowercase in the Geometry app If your graph doesn t resemble the illustration i at the right adjust the X A f 2 Rng and Y Rng values ho in Plot Setup view L w l gt EB f i 6 4 2 Pointer 4 25 2 42 We HOW Bec a pain to the curve a point that will be constrained always to follow the contour of the curve Add a Tap and select Point On constrained Choosing Point On rather than Point means that the point point will be constrained to whatever it is placed on Tap anywhere on the y graph press 3 2 and then press B3 f
465. t s where the two objects intersect are created and named Note that an intersections object is created in Symbolic view even if the two objects selected do not intersect Displays a palette for you to choose to add 1 2 3 or 4 points The points are placed randomly 155 Line Segment Ray Line Vector Angle bisector 1 4 Bisector Perpendicular bisector 2 L Bisector Tap where you want one endpoint to be and press _ _ Tap where you want the other endpoint to be and press Fer _ A segment is drawn between the two end points Keyboard shortcut Tap where you want the endpoint to be and press _ er_ Tap a point that you want the ray to pass through and press fret A ray is drawn from the first point and through the second point Tap at a point you want the line to pass through and press Ete Tap at another point you want the line to pass through and press _ _ A line is drawn through the two points Keyboard shortcut Tap where you want one endpoint to be and press L Tap where you want the other endpoint to be and press _Ete_ A vector is drawn between the two end points Tap the point that is the vertex of the angle to be bisected A and press __ Tap another point B and press _ _ Tap a third point C and press _ J A line is drawn through A bisecting the angle formed by AB and AC Tap one point and press _ _ Tap another point and press __ These two poin
466. t you will need to change 6 0 R1 8 12 5663706144 the plot setup parameters Plot Setup View 7 Press EB Polar Plot Setup il 8 Setthe second ORNG field to gcre 1308996930 4r by entering XRNG 15 9 15 9 Shift YRNG 10 9 10 9 4E 3 x ma YTICK 1 Enter maximum angle value 9 Press to return to Plot view and see the complete plot R1 8 12 5663706144 80 An introduction to HP apps Numeric View The values generated by the equation can be seen in Numeric view 10 Press B Suppose you want to see just whole numbers for 0 in other words you want the increment between consecutive values in the 0 column to be 1 You set this Numeric Setup View 11 Press 3 ig 12 Change the NumsteP field to 1 13 Press to return to Numeric view You will see that the 0 column now contains 12 4255770 12 0100805 11 3401382 10 4482179 19 37713908 18 17762897 16 90544187 5 61821351 4 37224016 13 21937443 baUuoauRWro So Seeesescoy Zoom Big Defn Width up in the Numeric Setup view Polar Num Setup NUMSTART 0 NUMTYPE Automatic NUMZOOM 4 Enter table step value consecutive integers starting from zero and the corresponding values calculated by the equation specified in Symbolic view are listed in the R1 column Common operations in Symbolic view Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Solve See dedicated app chapters
467. t1 int2 Bitwise Shift Left Takes one or two integers as input and returns the result of shifting the bits in the first integer to the left by the number places indicated by the second integer If there is no second integer the bits are shifted to the left by one place 544 Programming BITSR BITXOR BR GETBASE GETBITS Examples BITSL 28 2 returns 112 BITSL 5 returns 10 Syntax BITRL intl int2 Bitwise Shift Right Takes one or two integers as input and returns the result of shifting the bits in the first integer to the right by the number places indicated by the second integer If there is no second integer the bits are shifted to the right by one place Examples BITSR 112 2 returns 28 BITSR 10 returns 5 Syntax BITXOR intl int2 intn Returns the bitwise logical exclusive OR of the specified integers Example BITAND 9 26 returns 19 Syntax B R integerm Converts an integer in base m to a decimal integer base 10 The base marker m can be b for binary o for octal or h for hexadecimal Example B R 11016 returns 13 Syntax GETBASE integer m Returns the base for the specified integer in whatever is the current default base O default 1 binary 2 octal 3 hexadecimal Examples GETBASE 1101b returns 1h if the default base is hexadecimal while GETBASE 1101 returns 0h Syntax GETBITS
468. tapping on it If the bottom right of the screen shows the name of the point you have accurately tapped the point otherwise the pointer coordinates are shown indicating that the point is not selected Composite objects To move a multi point object see Translation on page 161 An object is colored black by default and cyan when it is selected If you want to change the color of an object 143 Filling objects Removing fill Undoing Clearing an Select the object whose color you want to change Press aw 3 Select Change Color The Choose Color palette appears 4 Select the color you want Press Ea An object with closed contours such as a circle or polygon can be filled with color 1 2 4 Press 8 Select Fill with Color The Select Object menu appears Select the object you want to fill The object is highlighted Press Gay y Select Change Color a wa The Choose Color a e palette appears 5 Select the color you 6 want 15 10 5 O Pointer a 5 19 Press To remove the fill from an object 1 2 3 Press Gay Select Fill with Color The Select Object menu appears Select the object You can undo your last addition or change to Plot view by pressing v4 However you must have keyboard shortcuts activated for this to work See page 147 To clear one object select it and tap Note that an object
469. tation uy oF a 2 Pressing Any decimal result can de displayed in hexagesimal format that is in units subdivided into groups of 60 This includes degrees minutes and seconds as well as hours minutes and seconds For example enter a to see the decimal result 1 375 Now press to see 1 22 30 Press again to return to the decimal representation HP Prime will produce the best approximation in cases where an exact result is not possible Enter 5 to see the decimal approximation 2 236 Press to see 2 14 9 84472 26 Getting started EEX key powers of 10 Note that the degree and minute entries must be integers and the minute and second entries must be positive Decimals are not allowed except in the seconds Note too that the HP Prime treats a value in hexgesimal format as a single entity Hence any operation performed on h imalvaliei 5 2 14 9 844719 a hexagesimal value is or2526 Er performed on the entire apg gene value For example if you enter 10 25 26 the whole value is squared not just the seconds component The result in this case is 108 39 26 8544 Numbers like 5x 10 and 3 21 x 10 are expressed in scientific notation that is in terms of powers of ten This is simpler to work with than 50 000 or 0 000 000 321 To enter numbers like these use the functionality This is easier than using L J10473 Example Suppose y
470. tents of the Inference app variables Method Type and AltHyp Calculate contidence interval or test hypothesis Performs the same calculations as tapping in the Numeric view of the Inference app and stores the results in the appropriate Inference app results variables DoInference 364 Functions and commands HypZ1mean HYPZ2mean HypZ1prop HypZ2prop The hypothesis test HypZ 1 mean is a one sample Ztest for comparing means HypZlmean SampMean SampSize NullPopMean PopStdDev SigLevel Mode Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not equal The hypothesis test HypZ2mean is a two sample Ztest for comparing means HypZ2mean SampMean SampMean2 SampSize SampSize2 PopStdDev PopStdDev2 SigLevel Mode Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not equal The hypothesis test HypZ1 prop is a one proportion Ztest HypZlprop SuccCount SampSize NullPopProp SigLevel Mode Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not equal The hypothesis test HypZ2prop is a two proportion Ztest for comparing means HypZ2prop SuccCount1 SuccCount2 SampSizel SampSize2 SigLevel Mode Functions and commands 365 HypT1mean HypT2mean ConfZ1mean ConfZ2mean Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater t
471. that is perpendicular to line BC perpendicular 3 2i line x y 1 draws a line through the point whose coordinates are 3 2 that is perpendicular to the line whose equation is x y 1 that is the line whose equation is y x 5 Draws a segment defined by its endpoints segment pointl point2 Examples segment 1 2i 4 draws the segment defined by the points whose coordinates are 1 2 and 4 0 segment GA GB draws segment AB Draws the tangent s to a given curve through a given point The point does not have to be a point on the curve tangent curve point Examples tangent plotfunc x 2 GA draws the tangent to the graph of y x 2 through point A tangent circle GB GC GB GA draws one or more tangent lines through point A to the circle whose center is at point B and whose radius is defined by segment BC 171 Polygon equilateral_triangle hexagon Draws an equilateral triangle defined by one of its sides that is by two consecutive vertices The third point is calculated automatically but is not defined symbolically If a lowercase variable is added as a third argument then the coordinates of the third point are stored in that variable The orientation of the triangle is counterclockwise from the first point equilateral triangle pointl point2 or equilateral triangle pointl point2 var Examples equilateral triangle 0 6 draws an equilateral triangle whose first two ver
472. that there is an expand box beside System Apps in the example shown above Tap on the expand box to see the sub items You can then select the sub items individually If you want to disable all the sub item just select the category You can select or deselect an option either by tapping on the check box beside it or by using the cursor keys to scroll to it and tapping GB 6 When you have finished selecting the features to be disabled tap GE If you want fo activate exam mode now continue with Activating Exam Mode below Creating a new configuration You can modify the default exam configuration when new circumstances require a different set of disabled functions Alternatively you can retain the default configuration and create a new configuration When you create a new configuration you choose an existing configuration on which to base it l Press EB The Home Settings screen appears Top 7 Top EGAS The Exam Mode Exam Mode beef screen appears Configuration Defaut am Timeout 15 Minutes h Choose a base Password e x Erase memory configuration from Blink LED the Configuration list If you have not R Choose exam mode configuration created any exam mode configurations before the only base configuration will be Default Exam Exam Mode 63 5 Tap BEEZ select copy from the menu and enter a name for the new configuration See Adding text on page 23 if
473. the NUMSTEP value in the Numeric Setup view There are two zoom keys pressing zooms in and pressing zooms out The extent of the scaling is determined by the NUMZOOM setting explained above tap an option i 10 2 E Zoom Width An introduction to HP apps 101 Evaluating The zoom options are explained in the following table Option Result In Out Decimal Integer Trig Undo Zoom The increment between consecutive values of the independent variable becomes the current value divided by the Numzoom setting Shortcut press J The increment between consecutive values of the independent variable becomes the current value multiplied by the Numzoom setting Shortcut press kaz Restores the default NUMSTART and NUMSTEP values O and 0 1 respectively The increment between consecutive values of the independent variable is set to 1 e If the angle measure setting is radians sets the increment between consecutive values of the independent variable to 1 24 approximately 0 1309 e If the angle measure setting is degrees sets the increment between consecutive values of the independent variable to 7 5 Returns the display to the previous zoom or if there has been only one zoom displays the graph with the original plot settings You can step through the table of evaluations in Numeric view by pressing or You can also quickly jump to an evaluation
474. the S1 analysis With no argument returns a list containing the independent column name the dependent column name and the number of the fit type Sets the type of fit to be used by the FIT operation in drawing the regression line From Symbolic Setup view specify the fit in the field for Type1 Type2 etc In a program store one of the following constant integers or names into a variable S1Type S2Type etc O Linear 1 Logarithmic 2 Exponential 3 Power 4 Exponent 5 Inverse 6 Logistic 7 Quadratic 8 Cubic 9 Quartic 10 User Defined Example Cubic gt S2type or 8 gt S2type 560 Programming Type Inference XO YO X9 Y9 Parametric UO U9 Sequence Determines the type of hypothesis test or confidence interval Depends upon the value of the variable Met hod Make a selection from the Symbolic view Or in a program store the constant number from the list below into the variable Type With Method 0 the constant values and their meanings are as follows O Z Test 1 u 1 Z Test u p2 2 Z Test 1 x 3 Z Test 2 T 4 T Test 1 u 5 T Test u Hy With Method 1 the constants and their meanings are O Z hnt u 1 Z hnt u u gt 2 Z nt 1 2 3 ZAnt 2 T 4 T Int 1 u 5 T lnt p u Can contain any expression Independent variable is T Example SIN 4 T gt Y1 2 SIN 6 T DP X1 Can contain any expression Independent variable is N Example RECURSE U U N 1 N 1 2
475. the app program This way they will not have their values lost 7 Test the app and debug the associated programs It is possible to link more than one app via programs For example a program associated with the Function app could execute a command to start the Statistics 1 Var app and a program associated with the Statistics 1 Var app could return to the Function app or launch any other app The following example illustrates the process of creating a custom app The app is based on the built in Statistics 1Var app It simulates the rolling of a pair of dice each with a number of sides specitied by the user The results are tabulated and can be viewed either in a table or graphically Programming 521 1 In the Application Librray select the Statistics 1Var app but don t open it Select Statistics 1Var 2 Tap EB Solve Linear Solver Quadratic Trig Explorer Explorer COMENCE 3 Enter a name for the new app such as DiceSimulation 4 Tap twice The new app appears in the Application Library 5 Open the new app 6 Open the Program Catalog 7 Tap the program to open it Each customised app has one program associated with it Initially this program is empty You customize the DiceSimulation EXPORT DiceSimulation BEGIN END CS Tea app by entering functions into that program At this point you decide how you want the user to interact with th
476. the code you want to copy 3 Press Copy The menu buttons change to give you options for copying EQ Marks where the copying or cutting is to begin ETE Marks where the copying or cutting is to end GW Select the entire program ETB Cut the selection EIB Copy the selection Select what you want to copy or cut using the options listed immediately above 5 Tap or ETB Return to the Program Catalog and open the target program Move the cursor to where you want to insert the copied or cut code Press Paste The clipboard opens What you most recently copied or cut will be first in the list and highlighted already so just tap QB The code will be pasted into the program beginning at the cursor location Programming 509 Delete a To delete a program program 1 Open the Program Catalog 2 Highlight a program to delete and press 3 At the prompt tap to delete the program or to cancel Delete all To delete all programs at once programs 1 Open the Program Catalog 2 Press Clear 3 At the prompt tap to delete all programs or to cancel Delete the You can clear the contents of a program without deletin prog g contents of a the program The program then just has a name and program nothing else 1 Open the Program Catalog 2 Tap the program to open it 3 Press Clear 4 At the prompt tap to delete the contents or to cancel The text of the program is deleted but
477. the constants press and then tap Function Suppose you want to know the potential energy of a mass of 5 units according to the equation E mc 1 Enter the mass and the multiplication operator Sle 2 Open the constants menu Units and constants 449 Value or measurement 3 Select Physics Function Select c 299792458 10 5 67040E B EIEEE c 299792458 5 Square the speed of Function light and evaluate the expression 4 49377589368E17 You can enter just the value of a constant or the constant and its units if it has units If is showing on the is showing on the screen the value and its units are inserted at the cursor point In the example at the Function right the first entry shows the Universal Gas Constant after it was chosen with MEME showing The second entry shows the same constant but chosen when was showing 8 314472 8 314472 8314472 J J H mol K displays Tapping 450 Units and constants List of constants Category Name and symbol Math Chemistry Phyics Quantum e MAXREAL MINREAL T i Avogadro NA Boltmann k molar volume Vm universal gas R standard temperature StdT standard pressure StdP Stefan Boltzmann o speed of light c permittivity 9 permeability uo acceleration of gravity g gravitation G Planck h Dirac f electronic
478. the current range of values GRID DOTS Places a dot at the intersection of each horizontal and vertical grid line GRID LINES Draws a horizontal and vertical grid line at each integer xvalue and y value CURSOR Sets the appearance of the trace cursor standard inverting or blinking CONNECT Connects the data points with straight Stats 2 Var segments only 98 An introduction to HP apps Setup field Purpose Cont METHOD Sets the graphing method to adaptive Not in either _fixed step segments or fixed step dots statistics app Explained below Graphing methods The HP Prime gives you the option of choosing one of three graphing methods The methods are described below with each to plot In these cases applied to the function f x 9 sin e appears on the menu bar enabling you to X0 E109 7 973239863274 MENU stop the plotting process if you wish adaptive this gives very accurate results and is used by default With this method active some complex functions may take a while II I e fixed step segments this method samples x values computes their corresponding y values and oj then plots and connects the points i 4 amp 0 E109 7 973238986324 MENU e fixed step dots this works like fixed step segments method but does not connect the points An introduction to HP apps 99 Restore default settings Scope
479. the end of the first period 1 Start the Finance app Select Finance The app opens in the Numeric view 2 Inthe N field enter 5 12 and press nfo mo PV 0 PYR 12 PMT 0 CNR 12 y Fv 0 End V Notice that the result of the calculation Group Size 12 60 appears in the Enter number of payments or solve field This is the CRENTE number of months over a five year period Finance app 285 3 In the 1 yR field type 5 5 the interest rate and press _Fuer_ 4 In Pv field type 19500 3000 and press Ete _ This is the present value of the loan being the purchase price less the deposit 5 leave P YR and Time Value of Money C YR both at 12 N 60 I YR 5 5 PV 16500 PIYR 12 their default values me cnme 2 leave End as the FV 0 End V payment option Also crane leave future value FV as 0 as your goal is aapa to end up with a future value of the loan of 0 6 Move the cursor to Time Valve of Money the PMT field and tap N 60 I VR 5 5 PV 16500 P YR 12 EMB hePM fares ome value is calculated as FV 0 End 315 17 In other Group Size 12 words your monthly Enter payment amount or solve payment will be E sl Ot Sb 315 17 The PMT value is negative to indicate that it is money owed by you Note that the PMT value is greater than 300 that is greater than the amount you can afford to pay each month So you n
480. the list of notes sort options are alphabetical and chronological Delete deletes the selected note Clear deletes all notes Send sends the selected note to another HP Prime Deletes the selected note Deletes all notes in the catalog The Note Editor The Note Editor is where you create and edit notes You can launch the Note Editor from the Notes Catalog and also from within an app Notes created within an app stay with that app even if you send the app to another calculator Such notes do not appear in the Notes Catalog They can only be read when the associated app is open Notes created via the Notes Catalog are not specific to any app and can be viewed at any time by opening the Notes Catalog Such notes can also be sent to another calculator To create a note 1 Open the Note Nota Catalog from the Notes Catalog Catalog fT New More T T 490 Notes and Info 2 Create a new note New 3 Enter a name for your note In this example we ll call the note MYNOTE MYNOTE OK OK 4 Write your note using the editing Enter name for new note Pest TT Tcancel 0K Enter name for new note MYNOTE mmnm keys and formatting options described in the following sections When you are finished exit the Note Editor by pressing E or pressing and opening an app Your work is automatically saved THIS IS MY TES Format sole fe
481. the program name remains To share a You can send programs between calculators just as you program can send apps notes matrices and lists See Sharing data on page 44 510 Programming The HP Prime programming language Variables and visibility Variables in an HP Prime program can be used to store numbers lists matrices graphics objects and strings The name of a variable must be a sequence of alphanumeric characters letters and numbers starting with a letter Names are case sensitive so the variables named MaxTemp and maxTemp are different The HP Prime has built in variables of various types visible globally that is visible wherever you are in the calculator For example the built in variables A to Z can be used to store real numbers Z0 to Z9 can be used to store complex numbers MO to M9 can be used to store Matrices and vectors and so on These names are reserved You cannot use them for other data For example you cannot name a program M1 or store a real number in a variable named 28 In addition to these reserved variables each HP app has its own reserved variables Some examples are Root Xmin and Numstart Again these names cannot be used to name a program A full list of system and app variables is given in chapter 22 Variables beginning on page 427 In a program you can declare variables for use only within a particular function This is done using a LOCAL declaration The use of LOCAL var
482. the result to be copied You can do this by pressing or until the result is highlighted or by tapping on it 2 Press _ _ The result is copied to the entry line and is deselected Method 2 1 Select the result to be copied You can do this by pressing or until the result is highlighted or by tapping on it 2 Tap and select ECHO The result is copied to the entry line and remains selected Note that while you can copy an item from the CAS history to use in a Home calculation and copy an item from the Home history to use in a CAS calculation you cannot copy items from or to the RPN history You can however use CAS commands and functions when working in RPN mode Sample calculations The general philosophy behind RPN is that arguments are placed before operators The arguments can be on the entry line each separated by a space or they can be in history For example to multiply z by 3 you could enter ena JL 3 on the entry line and then enter the operator J Thus your entry line would look like this before entering the operator 13 However you could also have entered the arguments separately and then with a blank entry line entered the operator Your history would look like this before entering the operator Reverse Polish Notation RPN 49 m 3 14159265359 3 3 2 u If there are no entries in history and you enter an operator or function an err
483. the two inference methods hypothesis test and confidence interval Hypothesis Test Confidence Interval ZTest 1 u the Z Test on one mean Zest u4 pg the ZTest on the difference between two means ZTest 1 x the Z Test on one proportion ZTest n4 To the ZTest on the difference between two proportions T Test 1 p the T Test on one mean TTest 11 uo the T Test on the difference between two means Zint 1 p the confidence interval for one mean based on the Normal distribution Zint u4 ug the confidence interval for the difference between two means based on the Normal distribution Zint 1 x the confidence interval for one proportion based on the Normal distribution Zint n1 T the confidence interval for the difference between two proportions based on the Normal distribution T Int 1 u the confidence interval for one mean based on the Student s t distribution T Int u1 uz the confidence interval for the difference between two means based on the Student s t distribution If you choose one of the hypothesis tests you can choose an alternative hypothesis to test against the null hypothesis For each test there are three possible choices for an alternative hypothesis based on a quantitative comparison of two quantities The null hypothesis is always that the two quantities are equal Thus the alternative hypotheses cover the various cases for the two quantities being
484. thmetic the result of any calculation that would return a remainder in floating point arithmetic is truncated only the integer portion is presented Thus 100b 10b gives the correct answer 10b since 449 219 is 219 However 100b 11b gives just the integer component of the correct result 1b Note too that the accuracy of integer arithmetic can be limited by the integer wordsize The wordsize is the maximum number of bits that can represent an integer You can set this to any value between 1 and 64 The smaller the wordsize the smaller the integer that can be accurately represented The default wordsize is 32 which is adequate for representing integers up to approximately 2 x 10 However integers larger than that would be truncated that is the most significant bits that is the leading bits would be dropped thus the result of any calculation involving such a number would not be accurate The default base Setting a default base only affects the entry and display of numbers being used in integer arithmetic If you set the default base to binary 27 and 44 will still be represented that way in Home view and result of those numbers being added will still be represented as 71 However if you entered 27b you would get a syntax error as 2 and 7 are not integers found in binary arithmetic You would have to enter 27 as 11011b since 27 110113 Setting a default base means that you do not always have to specify a base marke
485. tices are at O O and 6 0 the third vertex is calculated to be at 3 3 V3 equilateral triangle 0 6 v draws an equilateral triangle whose first two vertices are at O O and 6 0 the third vertex is calculated to be at 3 3 V3 and these coordinates are stored in the CAS variable v In CAS view entering v returns point 3 V3 i 1 which is equal to 3 3 V3 Draws a regular hexagon defined by one of its sides that is by two consecutive vertices The remaining points are calculated automatically but are not defined symbolically The orientation of the hexagon is counterclockwise from the first point hexagon pointl point2 or hexagon pointl point2 varl var2 var3 var4 Examples hexagon 0 6 draws a regular hexagon whose first two vertices are at O O and 6 0 hexagon 0 6 a b c qd draws a regular hexagon whose first two vertices are at 0 O and 6 O and stores the other four points into the CAS variables a b c and d You do not have to define variables for all four remaining points but the coordinates are stored in order For example hexagon 0 6 a stores just the third point into the CAS variable a 172 Geometry isosceles_triangle isopolygon parallelogram Geometry Draws an isosceles triangle defined by two of its vertices and an angle The vertices define one of the two sides equal in length and the angle defines the angle between the two sides of equal length Like e
486. tings screen Returns the system time or sets the system time HHMMSS gt Time Sets the language From Modes choose a language for the Language field Programming 571 In a program store one of the following constant numbers into the variable Language 1 gt Language English 2 gt Language Chinese 3 gt Language French 5 gt Language Spanish 6 gt Language Dutch 4 gt Language German 7 gt Language Portuguese Entry Sets the entry mode In a program enter 0 gt Entry for Textbook 1 gt Entry for Algebraic 2 gt Entry for RPN Integer Base Returns or sets the integer base In a program enter 0 gt Base for Binary 1 gt Base for Octal 2 Base for Decimal 3 gt Base for Hexadecimal Bits Returns or sets the number of bits for representing integers In a program enter n gt Bits where n is the number of bits Signed Returns or sets a flag indicating that the integer wordsize is signed or not In a program enter 0 gt Signed for unsigned 1 gt Signed for signed The following variables are found in the Symbolic setup of an app They can be used to overwrite the value of the corresponding variable in Home Modes 572 Programming AAngle AComplex ADigits AFormat Sets the angle mode From Symbolic setup choose System Degrees or Radians for angle measure System default will force the angle measure to agree with th
487. tinue the MYPROGRAM A aad example which we leno began on page 501 use the cursor keys to position the cursor where you want to insert a CHIE command In this example you need to position the cursor between BEGIN and END MYPROGRAM 2 Tap to open XPORT MYPRI the menu of common freon ee programming END commands for 1Block gt blocking branching esranch gt 3Loop gt looping variables i and functions Function Tmp G e D In this example we ll select a LOOP command from the menu 3 Select Loop and MYPROGRAM XPORT MYPR then select FOR from serp PROGRAMO the sub menu END 1Block 2Branch 3Loop 4Variable SFunction gt CONTINUE it Toe aT 504 Programming Notice that a FOR_FROM_TO_DO _ template is inserted All you need do is fill in the missing information Using the cursor keys and keyboard fill in the missing parts of the command In this case make the statement match the following FOR N FROM 1 TO 3 DO MYPROGRAM EXPORT MYPROGRAM BEGIN FOR FROM TO DO END END Lomas tmp check MYPROGRAM 5 EXPORT MYPROGRAM BEGIN FOR N FROM 1 TO 3 DO END END COED Move the cursor to a blank line below the FOR statement Tap to open the menu of common programming commands Select 1 0 and then select MSGBOX from th
488. tion from the Symbolic view In a program type 0 gt AltHyp for u lt po 1 gt AltHyp for u gt po 2 gt AltHyp for u uo Can contain any equation or expression Independent variable is selected by highlighting it in Numeric View Example X Y X 2 YDP EL Can contain any expression Independent variable is x Example SIN X gt F1 Contains the data values for a 1 variable statistical analysis For example H1 n returns the nth value in the data set for the H1 analysis Sets the type of plot used to graphically represent the statistical analyses H1 through H5 From the Symbolic setup specify the type of plot in the field for Type Type 2 etc Or in a program store one of the following constant integers or names into the variables H1Type H2Type etc 0 Histogram default 1 Box and Whisker 2 Normal Probability 3 Line 4 Bar 5 Pareto Example 2PH3Type Programming 559 Method Inference RO R9 Polar 1 85 Statistics 2Var S1Type S5Type Statistics 2Var Determines whether the Inference app is set to calculate hypothesis test results or confidence intervals In a program type 0 gt Method for Hypothesis Test 1 gt Method for Confidence Interval Can contain any expression Independent variable is 0 Example 2 SIN 2 0 gt R1 Contains the data values for a 2 variable statistical analysis For example S1 n returns the nth data pair in the data set for
489. tions and clears temporary memory locations However it does not clear stored data variables apps programs etc Turn the calculator over and insert a paper clip into the Reset hole just above the battery compartment cover The calculator will reboot and return to Home view If the calculator does not turn on If the HP Prime does not turn on follow the steps below until the calculator turns on You may find that the calculator turns on before you have completed the procedure If the calculator still does not turn on contact Customer Support for further information 1 Charge the calculator for at least one hour 2 After an hour of charging turn the calculator on 3 If it does not turn on reset the calculator as per the preceding section Troubleshooting 585 Operating limits Operating temperature 0 to 45 C 32 to 113 F Storage temperature 20 to 65 C 4 to 149 F Operating and storage humidity 90 relative humidity at 40 C 104 F maximum Avoid getting the calculator wet The battery operates at 3 7V with a capacity of 1500mAh 5 55Wh Status messages The table below lists the most common general error messages and their meanings Some apps and the CAS have more specific error messages that are self explanatory Message Meaning Bad argument type Insufficient memory Insufficient statistics data Invalid dimension Statistics data size not equal In
490. tions that use graphics They are temporary and thus cleared when the calculator turns off Twenty six functions can be used to modify graphics variables Thirteen of them work with Cartesian coordinates using the Cartesian plane defined in the current app by the variables Xmin Xmax Ymin and Ymax The remaining thirteen work with pixel coordinates where the pixel 0 0 is the top left pixel of the GROB and 320 240 is the bottom right Functions in this second set have a _P suffix to the function name Converts from Cartesian coordinates to screen coordinates Syntax DRAWMENU text texts Draws a menu showing the text items listed Syntax FREEZE Pauses program execution until a key is pressed This prevents the screen from being redrawn after the end of the program execution leaving the modified display on the screen for the user to see Converts from screen coordinates to Cartesian coordinates Syntax RGB R G B A Returns an integer number that can be used as the color parameter for a drawing function Based on Red Green and Blue components values 0 to 255 If Alpha is greater than 128 returns the color flagged as transparent There is no alpha channel blending on Prime So RGB 255 0 128 returns FFOOOF RECT RGB O 0 255 makes a blue screen as would RGB 255 any valid number gets interpreted the same way LINE RGB O 255 0 makes a green line 534 Programming P
491. tions of the two curves or surfaces With to curves or surfaces and a point or list of points as arguments returns an intersection of the curves or surfaces that is nearest to the point or not in the list of points single inter Curve Curve Pnt A LstPnt L 418 Functions and commands slopeat slopeatraw sphere spline sqrt square stddev Displays the value at point zO of the slope of the line or segment d A legend is provided slopeat Line Pnt Cplx z0 Displays the value at point zO of the slope of the line or segment d slopeatraw Line Pnt Cplx z0 With two points as arguments draws the sphere of diameter made by the line from one point to another With a point and a real as arguments draws the sphere with center at the point and radius given by the real sphere Pnt or Vect Pnt or Real Returns the natural spline through the points given by two lists The polynomials in the spline are in variable x and of degree d spline Lst 1x Lst ly Var x Intg qd Example spline 0 1 2 1 3 0 x 3 gives 5 x 3 44 13 x 44 1 5 x 1 3 44 15 x 1 2 44 x 1 2 3 Returns the square root of an expression sqrt Expr Example sqrt 50 gives 5 sqrt 2 Draws the square of side AB in the plane ABP square Pnt A or Cplx Pnt B or Cplx Pnt P Var C Var D Example square 0 3 2i p q draws a square with vertices at 0 0 3 2 1 5 and 2
492. to amp can only be from 1 to 9 inclusive EXECON can also begin operating on a specified element in a specified list For example EXECON amp 23 61 1 5 16 4 5 6 7 returns 7 12 In the example above amp 23 indicates that operations are to begin on the second list and with the third element To that element is added the first element in the first list The process continues until there are no more pairs Again the digits appended to amp can only be from 1 to 9 inclusive Syntax sHMS value Converts a decimal value to hexagesimal format that is in units subdivided into groups of 60 This includes degrees minutes and seconds as well as hours minutes and seconds Example HMS 54 8763 returns 54 52 34 68 Syntax HMS value Converts a value expressed hexagesimal format to decimal format Example HMS gt 54 52 34 68 returns 54 8763 Syntax ITERATE expr var ivalue times For times repeatedly evaluate expr in terms of var beginning with var ivalue Example ITERATE X 2 X 2 3 returns 256 Syntax TICKS Returns the internal clock value in milliseconds 552 Programming TIME TYPE Syntax TIME program_name Returns the time in milliseconds required to execute the program program_name The results are stored in the variable TIME The variable TICKS is similar It contains the number of milliseconds since boot up Syntax TYPE ob
493. to be centered around the current position of the cursor in Plot view select Recenter 7 Tap or press _fue _ Zoom Zoom options are available from three sources options the keyboard e the menu in Plot view the Views menu EB 88 An introduction to HP apps Zoom keys Zoom menu There are two zoom keys pressing zooms in and pressing zooms out The extent of the scaling is determined by the ZOOM FACTOR settings explained above In Plot view tap and tap an option If is not displayed tap META The zoom options are explained in the following table Examples are provided on Zoom examples on page 91 Menu d Option Result Center on Redraws the plot so that the cursor is in the Cursor center of the screen No scaling occurs Box Explained in Box zoom on page 90 In Divides the horizontal and vertical scales by X Zoom and Y Zoom values set with the Set Factors option explained on page 88 For instance if both zoom factors are 4 then zooming in results in 1 4 as many units depicted per pixel Shortcut press Out Multiplies the horizontal and vertical scales by the X Zoom and Y Zoom settings Shortcut press bz J X In Divides the horizontal scale only using the X Zoom setting X Out Multiplies the horizontal scale only using the X Zoom setting Y In Divides the vertical scale only using the Y Zoom setting Y Out Multiplies the vertical scale only usi
494. to the left of the decimal point and the specified number of decimal places For example 123 456789 becomes 1 23E2 in Scientific 2 format Engineering Displays results with an exponent that is a multiple of 3 and the specified number of significant digits beyond the first one Example 123 456E7 becomes 1 23E9 in Engineer ing 2 format Getting started 31 Setting Options Continued Entry Integers Complex Language Textbook An expression is entered in much the same way as if you were writing it on paper with some arguments above or below others In other words your entry could be two dimensional Algebraic An expression is entered on a single line Your entry is always one dimensional RPN Reverse Polish Notation The arguments of the expression are entered first followed by the operator The entry of an operator automatically evaluates what has already been entered Sets the default base for integer arithmetic binary octal decimal or hex You can also set the number of bits per integer and whether inte gers are to be signed Choose one of two formats for displaying complex numbers a b or atb i To the right of this field is an unnamed checkbox Check it if you want to allow complex output from real input Choose the language you want for menus input forms and the online help Getting started Setting Options Continued Deci
495. tory or you can copy it from History When you ve entered a list in the entry line or copied it from History to the entry line tap ETA enter a name for the list and press _f _ The reserved list variable names available to you are LO through L9 however you can create a list variable name of your own as well For example to store the list 25 147 8 in L7 1 Create the list on the entry line 2 Press gt to move the cursor outside the 52 3 49 8 gt L7 25 1478 Ee ee ee es ee list 3 Tap ESB 4 Enter the name L J7 5 Complete the operation r_ To display a list in Home view type its name and press _ tr If the list is empty a pair of empty braces is returned To display one element of a list in Home view enter listname element For example if L6 is 3 4 5 6 then 16 2 _ fer Jreturns 4 To store a value in one element of a list in Home view element enter value listname element For example to store 148 as the second element in L2 type 148 Ta CE 458 Lists To send a list List functions You can send lists to another calculator or a PC just as you can apps programs matrices and notes See Sharing data on page 44 for instructions List functions are found on the Math menu You can use them in Home and in programs You can type in the name of the function or you can copy the name of the 1Numbers 2Arithmetic _ gt 3Reverse funct
496. ts The values must be separated by commas and the number of values must be the same as the number of columns in the matrix name Syntax DELCOL name column_number Deletes column column_number from matrix name Programming 541 DELROW EDITMAT REDIM REPLACE SCALE SCALEADD SUB Syntax DELROW name row_number Deletes row row_number from matrix name Syntax EDITMAT name Starts the Matrix Editor and displays the specified matrix If used in programming returns to the program when user presses g Even though this command returns the matrix that was edited EDITMAT cannot be used as an argument in other matrix commands Syntax REDIM name size Redimensions the specified matrix name or vector to size For a matrix size is a list of two integers n1 n2 For a vector size is a list containing one integer n Existing values in the matrix are preserved Fill values will be O Syntax REPLACE name start object Replaces portion of a matrix or vector stored in name with an object starting at position start Start for a matrix is a list containing two numbers for a vector it is a single number REPLACE also works with lists graphics and strings For example REPLACE 123456 2 GRM gt 1GRM56 Syntax SCALE name value rownumber Multiplies the specitied row_number of the specified matrix by value Syntax SCALEADD name value
497. ts define a segment A line is drawn perpendicular to the segment through its midpoint It does not matter if the segment is actually defined in the Symbolic view or not Alternately tap to select a segment and press _ fuer If you are drawing a perpendicular bisector to a segment choose the segment first and then select Perp Bisector from the Line menu The bisector is drawn immediately without you having to select any points Just press to save the bisector 156 Geometry Parallel 3 Perpendicular 4L Tangent Median Altitude Polygon Triangle Quadrilateral Ngon Polygon5 Polygon Hexagon Geometry Tap on a point P and press _ _ Tap on a line L and press _ _ A new line is draw parallel to L and passing through P Tap on a point P and press _ Tap on a line L and press _ _ A new line is draw perpendicular to L and passing through P Tap on a curve C and press __ _ Tap on a point P and press _ _ Ifthe point P is on the curve C then a single tangent is drawn If the point P is not on the curve C then zero or more tangents may be drawn Tap on a point A and press L_ _ Tap on a segment and press _ _ A line is drawn through the point A and the midpoint of the segment Tap on a point A and press L_ _ Tap on a segment and press _ _ A line is drawn through the point A perpendicular to the segment or its extension
498. ttings once inside an app For example you can set the angle measure to radians in the Home settings but choose degrees as the angle measure once inside the Polar app Degrees then remains the angle measure until you open another app that has a different angle measure You use the Home Home Settings Settings input form to Angle Measure Radians 7 Number Format Standard specify the settings for gt en Home view and the Integers Hex 32 Complex a b i default settings for the anguage Englis Shift EA apps Press em Decimal Mark Dot Settings to open the aena RS en nee eee Home Settings input form There are four pages of settings 30 Getting started Page 1 Setting Options Angle Measure Number Format Degrees 360 degrees in a circle Radians 2r radians in a circle The angle mode you set is the angle setting used in both Home view and the current app This is to ensure that trigonometric calculations done in the current app and Home view give the same result The number format you set is the for mat used in all Home view calcula tions Standard Full precision display Fixed Displays results rounded to a number of decimal places If you choose this option a new field appears for you to enter the number of decimal places For example 123 456789 becomes 123 46 in Fixed 2 format Scientific Displays results with an one digit exponent
499. turns x cos x 2 sin x 2 With one argument returns the discrete Fourier transform in R fft Vect With three arguments returns the discrete Fourier transform in the field Z pZ with a as primitive nth root of 1 n size L fft Vect L Intg a Intg p Example f t 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 gives 10 0 0 414213562373 7 24264068712 i 2 0 2 0 1 2 41421356237 1 24264068712 i 2 0 2 41421356237 1 24264068712 i 2 0 2 0 i Returns the inverse discrete Fourier transform ifft Vect Example ifft 100 0 52 2842712475 6 i 8 0 i 4 28427124746 6 4 4 0 4 28427124746 6 i 8 i 52 2842712475 6 i gives 0 99999999999 3 99999999999 10 0 20 0 25 0 2 4 0 16 0 6 39843733552e 12 Returns the solutions to a polynomial equation or a set of polynomial equations solve Expr Var Example solve x 2 3 1 gives list 2 2 328 Functions and commands Zeros Complex Solve Complex Zeros Numerical Solve With an expression as argument returns the zeros real or complex according to the mode of the expression With a list of expressions as argument returns the matrix where the rows are the solutions of the system i e expression 1 0 expression2 0 zeros Expr Var or zeros LstExpr LStVar Example zeros x 2 4 gives in real mode and 2 i 2 i in complex mode Returns a list where the elements are complex solutions of the system of polynomial equati
500. u can simply modity the default exam configuration If you envisage the need for a number of configurations different ones for different examinations for example modify the default configuration so that it matches the settings you will most often need and then create other configurations for the settings you will need less often There are two ways to access the screen for configuring and activating exam mode press Or GHB E choose the third page of the Home Settings screen The procedure below illustrates the second method 1 Press ER The Home Settings screen appears The Exam Mode Exam Mode T screen appears You Configuration Defeult Exam Timeout 15 Minutes use this screen to Password activate a particular Erase memory Blink LED configuration just before an Choose exam mode configuration examination begins for example 4 Tap GMB The Exam Mode Configuration System Apps Exam Mode User Apps e Physics Configuration Help Q Units screen appears Matrices O Complex 5 Select those features Hro j Notes and Programs you wa nt disabled New Notes and Programs H Mathematice and make sure that EE TSC those features you don t want disabled are not selected 62 Exam Mode An expand box at the left of a feature indicates that it is a category with sub items that you can individually disable Notice
501. u have finished 9 Press to go back to Numeric view Notice that the area and radius calculations have been automatically updated If an entry in Numeric view is too long for the screen you can press gt to scroll the rest of the entry into view Press to scroll back to the original view When you are creating a Geometry Numeric View new calculation in Numeric point 5 7 2 9 gt GA 4 2 point 0 2 1 7 gt GB view the menu item Janeen pede appears Tapping 4 point 5 3 5 5 gt GD 1All gt Stangent GC GD gt GE gives you a list of all the Points le point 6 9 6 3 gt GG SLines gt point 6 5 2 7 gt GH objects in your Geometry ashe E E workspace These are also fpcures P vertices GI I2I gt G 151 Getting object grouped according to their type with each group given its own menu If you are building a calculation you can select an object from one of these variables menus The name of the selected object is placed at the insertion point on the entry line As well as employing functions to make calculations in properties Numeric view you can also get various parameters of objects just by tapping and specifying the object s name For example you can get the coordinates of a point by entering the point and pressing __ Another example you can get the formula for a line just by entering its name or the center point and radius of
502. uction to HP apps Application Library cienne e a APP VIEWS ire aa aE A ERE ERE EREE E E AE E EE Symbolic view sieer na aa a a a Symbolic Setup view sop rascccnausenrngimertoainecnarenmosiuseneinind gt Plot Vi EW ee rte ea E TA E Plot Setup View ves ctor leaner ee a a aE A N meric vieWese nriran ies iea E EAE EEEE Rt Numeric Set p VieWuranimes ae iane aa iE Quiek example enii e e A T TAE Common operations in Symbolic View cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons e0ceeeeeees Common operations in Symbolic Setup VieW ecccceeeeeeeees Common operations in Plot view ccccseeseccceeeeeesteeeeeeestneeees LOOM negin a E E EE A a E Kaa a aT Plot view Summary of menu buttons ccceesseeeeeeteeeeeees Common operations in Plot Setup View sccecseseecesereeeeeneeees Configure Plot view cccccccsesscceeseeeesseeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeees Common operations in Numeric view ceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees LOOM cis aa tase usssbaseaastede cadena a Sedan sbwadta ial Stal Sues 1 E VOICI ENG oadca deen ds tracer aan snatcesaunci te tun uaakiaeneenranrncbetamauteons GUStOmIG les jcc test hes asthausak last ale iter learal nad deans Numeric view Summary of menu buttons cccceeeeees 1 Common operations in Numeric Setup View 1 Combining Plot and Numeric Views 1 Adding a note to an App cccccccceeeescteeeeeesteeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenees 1 Creatin
503. umeric 2 Symbolic Setup 3 Plot Setup 4 Numeric Setup 5 App Info 6 Views Menu 7 First special view Split Screen Plot Detail 8 Second special view Split Screen Plot Table 9 Third special view Autoscale 10 Fourth special view Decimal 11 Fifth special view Integer 12 Sixth special view Trig 13 Programming 543 The special views in parentheses refer to the Function app and may differ in other apps The number of a special view corresponds to its position in the Views menu for that app The first special view is launched by STARTVIEW 8 the second with STARTVIEW 9 and so on You can also launch views that are not specific to an app by specifying a value for n that is less than O HomeScreen 1 Home Modes 2 emory Manager 3 Applications Library 4 atrix Catalog 5 List Catalog 6 Program Catalog 7 otes Catalog 8 VIEW Syntax VIEWS string program_name Adds a view to the Views menu When string is selected runs program_name Integer BITAND Syntax BITAND int1l int2 intn Returns the bitwise logical AND of the specified integers Example BITAND 20 13 returns 4 BITNOT Syntax BITNOT int Returns the bitwise logical NOT of the specified integer Example BITNOT 47 returns 549755813840 BITOR Syntax BITOR int1 int2 intn Returns the bitwise logical OR of the specified integers Example BITAND 9 26 returns 27 BITSL Syntax BITSL in
504. umeric view is the primary view for this app Enter data for analysis Enter data for analysis An introduction to HP apps 77 App Use the Numeric view to Cont Triangle Solver Trig Explorer Enter known data about a triangle and solve for the unknown data Not used Numeric Setup view The table below outlines what is done in the Numeric Setup view of each app App Use the Numeric Setup view to Advanced Specify the numbers to be calculated Graphing according to the open sentences specified in Symbolic view and set the zoom factor Finance Not used Function Specify the numbers to be calculated according to the functions specified in Symbolic view and set the zoom factor Geometry Not used Inference Not used Linear Explorer Not used Linear Solver Not used Parametric Polar Quadratics Explorer Sequence Solve Specify the numbers to be calculated according to the functions specified in Symbolic view and set the zoom factor Specify the numbers to be calculated according to the functions specified in Symbolic view and set the zoom factor Not used Specify the numbers to be calculated according to the sequences specified in Symbolic view and set the zoom factor Not used 78 An introduction to HP apps App Use the Numeric Setup view to Cont Spreadsheet Not used Statistics 1Var Not used Statistics 2Var Not used Triangle Solver Not
505. umns of a matrix quartilel Lst Mtrx Lst Example quartilel 1 2 3 5 10 4 gives 2 0 Returns the third quartile of the elements of a list or the columns of a matrix quartile3 Lst Mtrx Lst Example quartile3 1 2 3 5 10 4 gives 5 0 Functions and commands 411 quartiles quorem QUOTE radical_axis randexp randperm ratnormal Returns the minimum first quartile median third quartile and maximum of the elements of a list or the columns of a matrix quartiles Lst Mtrx Lst Example quartiles 1 2 3 5 10 4 gives itis 0Ty 12207 t30 5207 16 097 Returns the quotient and remainder of the Euclidean division by decreasing power of two polynomials The polynomials can be expressed as vectors of their coefficients or in symbolic form quorem Vect or Poly Vect or Poly Var Example quorem 1 2 3 4 1 2 gives polyl 1 4 11 poly1 26 Returns an expression unevaluated quote Expr Returns the line which is the locus of points at which tangents drawn to two circles have the same length radical _axis Crcle Crcle Returns a random real according to the exponential distribution of parameter a gt 0 randexp Real a Example randexp 1 gives 1 17118631006 Returns a random permutation of 0 1 2 n 1 randperm Intg n Example randperm 4 gives 2 1 3 0 Rewrites an expression as an irreducible rational fraction ratnormal Expr Examp
506. und to a number of significant digits if places is a negative integer as shown in the second example below Examples ROUND 7 8676 2 returns 7 87 ROUND 0 0036757 3 returns 0 00368 Truncates value to decimal places Also accepts complex numbers TRUNCATE value places Functions and commands 311 Mantissa Exponent Arithmetic Maximum Minimum TRUNCATE can also round to a number of significant digits if places is a negative integer as shown in the second example below Examples TRUNCATE 2 3678 2 returns 2 36 TRUNCATE 0 0036757 3 returns 0 00367 Mantissa that is the significant digits of value where value is a floating point number MANT value Example MANT 21 2E34 returns 2 12 Exponent of value That is the integer component of the power of 10 that generates value XPON value Example XPON 123456 returns 5 since 10 equals 123456 Maximum The greater of two values MAX valuel value2 Example MAX 8 3 11 4 returns 2 75 Note that in Home view a non integer result is given as a decimal fraction If you want to see the result as a common fraction press GJ This opens the computer algebra system If you want to return to Home view to make further calculations press GM Minimum The lesser of two values MIN valuel value2 Example MIN 210 25 returns 25 312 Functions and commands Modulus Find Root Percentage Complex Argume
507. urn to it later by opening the Sequence app 3 In the Name field enter a name for your new app say Fibonacci and press twice Your new app is added to Application Library the Application Library ea Note that it has the same Solve Linear Solver quaeri Trig Explorer icon as the parent g B app Sequence but with Triangle Solver Finance Linear Explore Parametric the name you gave it 4 Fibonacci in this Polar Sequence Fibonacci example Save Delete sort_ Send __ start_ 4 You are now ready to use this app just as you would the built in Sequence app Tap on the icon of your new app to open it You will see in it all the same views and options as in the parent app In this example we have used the Fibonacci series as a potential topic for a customized app To see how to create the Fibonacci series once inside the Sequence app or an app based on the 108 An introduction to HP apps Sequence app see chapter 17 Sequence app beginning on page 279 As well as cloning a built in app as described above you can modify the internal workings of a customized app using the HP Prime programming language See Customizing an app on page 521 App functions and variables Functions Variables App functions are used in HP apps to perform common calculations For example in the Function app the Plot view Fen menu has a function called SLOPE that calculates the slope of a given function at a given point The SLOPE funct
508. urns 2 3 4 Given a matrix a row number n and a column number m uses Gaussian elimination to return a matrix with zeroes in column m except that the element in column m and row n is kept as a pivot pivot matrix n m Example 12 t 2 pivot 3 4 1 1 returns g 2 5 6 0 4 Finds the trace of a square matrix The trace is equal to the sum of the diagonal elements It is also equal to the sum of the eigenvalues TRACE matrix Example neace 12 returns 5 34 Displays the eigenvalues in vector form for matrix E IGENVAL matrix Example erent 12 returns 3 4 5 37228 0 37228 Matrices 481 Eigenvectors Jordan Diagonal Cholesky Eigenvectors and eigenvalues for a square matrix Displays a list of two arrays The first contains the eigenvectors and the second contains the eigenvalues E IGENVV matrix Example EIGE w returns the following matrices 3 4 0 4159 0 8369 De Dh Lit 0 0 9093 0 5742 0 0 3722 Returns the list made by the matrix of passage and the Jordan form of a matrix j ordan matrix Example soraan 1 returns K AI 0 10 dy a 0 J2 Given a list returns a matrix with the list elements along its diagonal and zeroes elsewhere Given a matrix returns a vector of the elements along its diagonal diag list or diag matrix Example auagl 1 returns 1 4
509. using the CAS Syntax EVALLIST list Evaluates the content of each element in a list and returns an evaluated list Creates a new list based on the elements in one or more lists by iteratively modifying each element according to an expression that contains the ampersand character amp The syntax EXECON expression with list list9 list Where the expression is amp plus an operator o plus a number n each element in the list is operated on by o and nand a new list created Examples EXECON amp 1 1 2 3 returns 2 3 4 Where the amp is followed directly by a number the position in the list is indicated For example EXECON amp 2 amp 1 1 4 3 5 returns 3 1 2 In the example above amp 2 indicates the second element and amp 1 the first element in each pair of elements The minus operator between them subtracts the first from the second in each pair until there are no more pairs Note that numbers appended to amp can only be from 1 to 9 inclusive Programming 551 HMS HMS ITERATE TICKS EXECON can also operate on more than one list For example EXECON amp 1 62 1 2 3 4 5 6 returns 5 7 9 In the example above amp 1 indicates an element in the first list and amp 2 indicates the corresponding element in the second list The plus operator between them adds the two elements until there are no more pairs Note that numbers appended
510. ute or relative An absolute reference is written as C R where Cis the column number and R the row number Thus B 7 is an absolute reference In a formula it will always refer to the data in cell B7 wherever that formula or a copy of it is placed On the other hand B7 is a relative reference It is based on the relative position of cells Thus a formula in say B8 that references B7 will reference C7 instead of B7 if it is copied to C8 Ranges of cells can also be specified as in C6 E12 as can entire columns E E or entire rows 3 5 Note that the alphabetic component of column names can be uppercase or lowercase except for columns g m and z These must be in lowercase if not preceded by Thus cell B1 can be referred to as B1 b1 B 1 or b 1 whereas M1 can only be referred to as m1 m 1 or M 1 G L M and Z are names reserved for graphic objects lists matrices and complex numbers Cells rows and columns can be named The name can then be used in a formula A named cell is given a blue border To name an empty cell row or column go the cell row header or column header enter a name and tap EEB To name a cell row or column whether it is empty or not 1 Select the cell row or column 2 Tap and select Name 3 Enter a name and tap SS The name you give a cell row or column can be used in a formula For example if you name a cell TOTAL you could enter in another cell the formula TOTAL 1 1
511. value of 1000 __ 997998 interest Top ms If you still have other values to evaluate repeat from step 4 _ Edit Ins Sort Big Defn Width Deleting To delete one row of data in your custom table place the cursor data in that row and press 8 To delete all the data in your custom table 1 Press G3 2 Tap or press to confirm your intention An introduction to HP apps 103 Numeric view Summary of menu buttons Button Purpose To modify the increment between consecutive values of the independent variable in the table of evaluations See page 100 To edit the value in the selected cell BuildYourOwn only BuildYourOwn only BuildYourOwn only To overwrite the value in the selected cell you can just start entering a new value without first tapping QI Only visible if NUMTYPE is set to BuildYourOwn See Custom tables on page 103 To create a new row above the currently highlighted cell with zero as the independent value You can immediately start typing a new value Only visible if NUMTYPE is set to BuildYourOwn See Custom tables on page 103 To sort the values in the selected column in ascending or descending order Move the cursor to the column of interest tap QE select Ascending or Descending and top i Only visible if NUMTYPE is set to BuildYourOwn See Custom tables on page 103 Lets you choose between small medium and lar
512. vanced Graphing 4Trig Explorer 5 Quadratic Explorer 6 Linear Explorer Statistics 2Var 8Geometry 1NbItem 2Min 3Q1 4Med 593 6 Max 7 EX BEX2 1 MeanX appears on the entry line You can press to see its value Or you can include the variable in an expression that you are building For example if you wanted to calculate the square root of the mean computed in the Statistics 1 Var app you would first press EA follow steps 1 to 3 above and then press __ e _ See appendix A Glossary beginning on page 581 for a complete list of app variables You can quality the name of any app variable so that it can be accessed from anywhere on the HP Prime For example both the Function app and the Parametric app have an variable named Xmin If the app you last had open was the Parametric app and enter Xmin in Home view you will get the value of Xmin from the Parametric app To get the value of Xmin in the Function app instead you could open the Function app and then return to Home view Alternatively you could qualify the name of the variable by preceding it with the app name and a period as in Function Xmin 110 An introduction to HP apps Function app The Function app enables you to explore up to 10 real valued rectangular functions of y in terms of x for example y 1 x and y x 1 3 Once you have defined a function you can e create graphs to find roots
513. variables as second argument returns the vector of partial derivatives grad Expr LstVar Example gGrad 2 x 2 y x Z43 ER Yna gives 2 2 x y ZB pf QERSLZEAHRE SEZ SZ Returns the Hessian matrix of an expression hessian Expr LstVar Example hessian 2 x 2 y x z x y z gives 4 y 4 x 1 2 2 x 0 0 1 0 0 Performs integration by parts of the expression f x u x v x with f x as the first argument and v x or O as the second argument With the optional third fourth and fifth arguments you can specify a variable of integration and bounds of the integration If no variable of integration is provided it is taken as x ibpdv Expr f x Expr v x Var x Re al a Real b Example ibpdv 1n x x gives x 1ln x 1 Performs integration by parts of the expression f x u x v x with f x as the first argument and u x or 0 as the second argument With the optional third fourth and fifth arguments you can specify a variable of integration and bounds of the integration If no variable of integration is provided it is taken as x ibpu Expr f x Expr u x Var x Rea l a Real b Example ibpu Expr f x Expr u x Var x Real a Real b 326 Functions and commands F b F a Limits Riemann Sum Taylor Taylor of Quotient Transform Laplace Returns F b F a preval Expr F var
514. view of the Geometry app explained below on page 150 148 Geometry Creating objects Re ordering entries Hiding an object Geometry You can change the definition of an object by selecting it tapping BEIB and altering one or more of its defining parameters The object is modified accordingly in Plot view For example if you selected point GB in the illustration above tapped QB changed one or both of the point s coordinates and tapped SB you would find on returning to Plot view a circle of a different size You can also create an object in Symbolic view Tap ENB define the object for example point 4 6 and press _ fuer The object is created and can be seen in Plot view Another example to draw aline through points P and Q enter line GP GQ in Symbolic view and press _ J When you return to Plot view you will see a line passing through points P and Q Geometry Symbolic View v GA point 10 19 1 The object creation commands available in 1equilateral_triangle vV GU undef j i V GE hexagon 5 4 hexagon Symbolic VIEW CAN be seen V GG undef isosceles triangle by tapping EIS The AEE S isopolygon 1Point gt 5 parallelogram syntax for each command is fuine epolygon Fe 3 Polygon gt quadrilateral given in Geometry 4Curve gt 8rectangle functions and commands Transform 2rhombus on page 145 ns Te Ty Tene o You can re order the
515. w si E 3 X 7 X4 Y 3Y X Y 2 10 4 105 00 Pcs races TL menu 2 2 X 74X Y 3Y X 210 305 10 0 a 10 5 ect ca see ba In most HP apps the Plot view contains GEE a toggle to turn tracing a function on and off In the Advanced Graphing app the relations plotted in Plot view may or may not be functions So instead of a toggle becomes a menu for selecting how the tracer will behave The Trace menu contains the following options Off Inside Pol Points of Interest Xlntercepts Y intercepts Horizontal Extrema Vertical Extrema Inflections Selection Points of Interest 1X Intercepts 2Y Intercepts Vv 3Edge 3 Horizontal Extrema 4Pol Vertical Extrema 5Selection gt 5Inflections Foote Dein Menu 10ff 2Inside Traces Zoom Advanced Graphing app 129 The tracer does not extend beyond the current Plot view window The table below contains brief descriptions of each option Trace option Description Off Inside Edge Pol gt X Intercepts Pol gt Y Intercepts Pol gt Horizontal Extrema Pol gt Vertical Extrema Pol gt Inflections Selection Turns tracing off so that you can move the cursor freely in Plot view Constrains the tracer to move within a region where the current relation is true You can move in any direction within the region Use this option for inequalities
516. whatever is touched Preface Notice e Items you can select from a list and characters on the entry line are set in a non proportional font as follows Function Polar Parametric Ans etc Cursor keys are represented by and You use these keys to move from field to field on a screen or from one option to another in a list of options e Error messages are enclosed in quotation marks Syntax Error This manual and any examples contained herein are provided as is and are subject to change without notice Except to the extent prohibited by law Hewlett Packard Company makes no express or implied warranty of any kind with regard to this manual and specifically disclaims the implied warranties and conditions of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and Hewlett Packard Company shall not be liable for any errors or for incidental or consequential damage in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual and the examples herein 1994 1995 1999 2000 2003 2006 2010 2013 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P The programs that control your HP Prime are copyrighted and all rights are reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation of those programs without prior written permission from Hewlett Packard Company is also prohibited For hardware warranty information please refer to the HP Prime Quick Start Guide Product Regulatory and Environment Information is
517. xt must be enclosed in quote marks The next time you want to insert ALOG at the position of your cursor you just press SN You can enter any string you like in the RETURN line of your program For example if you enter Newton that text will be returned when you press the re assigned key 516 Programming Key names You can even get the program to return user defined functions as well as system functions and user defined variables as well as system variables You can also re assign a shifted key combination So for example AA ema could be re assigned to produce SLOPE F1 X 3 rather than the lowercase t Then if is entered in Home view and pressed the gradient at X 3 of whatever function is currently defined as F1 X in the Function app would be returned A quick way to write a program to re assign a key is to press and select Create user key when you are in the Program Editor You will then be asked to press the key or key combination you want to re assign A program template appears with the internal name of the key or key combination added automatically The first line of a program that re assigns a key must specify the key to be reassigned using its internal name The table below gives the internal name for each key Note that key names are case sensitive Internal name of keys and key states Key Name cm m en key key
518. y displayed 2 Make sure the trace cursor is on the regression curve Press or if it is not 3 Press or The cursor moves along the regression curve and the corresponding X and Y values are displayed across the bottom of the screen If these values are not visible tap EEN You can force the cursor to a specific X value by tapping ES entering the value and tapping GSM The cursor jumps to the specified point on the curve In Home If the Statistics 2Var app is the active app you can also view predict X and Y values in the Home view e Enter Predx Y to predict the X value for the specified Y value e Enter Predy X to predict the yY value for the specified X value You can type PredX and Statistics 2Var Predy directly on the entry line or select them from the App functions menu under the Statistics 2Var category The App functions menu is one of the Toolbox menus E 1 Statistics 2Var 2Statistics 1Var 3 Triangle Solver 4 Spreadsheet np TITS Statistics 2Var app 235 HINT In cases where more than one fit curve is displayed the PredX and Predy functions use the first active fit defined in Symbolic view Troubleshooting a plot If you have problems plotting check the following The fit that is regression model that you intended to select is the one selected Only those data sets you want to analyze or plot are selected in Symbolic view The p
519. y solve that is there must be at least three values entered one of which must be a side length DoSolve Example In Degree mode SAS 2 90 2 returns 2 82 45 45 In the indeterminate case AAS where two solutions may be possible AAS may return a list of two such lists containing both results 370 Functions and commands Linear Explorer functions SolveForSlope SolveForYIntercept Input enter two coordinates of the line x2 x1 y2 y1 Output Slope of the line m y2 y1 x2 x1 Example SolveForSlope 3 2 4 2 yields 2 Input x y m that is slope Output y intercept of the line c y mx Example SolveForYIntercept 2 3 1 yields 5 Quadratic Explorer functions SOLVE Input a b c where a b c are the constants in ax bx c 0 Output Solves the equation to determine the value of x b d 2a where d v b2 4ac Example SOLVE 1 0 4 yields 2 2 DELTA Input a b c where a b c are the constants in ax bx c 0 Output Discriminant Delta of the equation D b 4ac Example DELTA 1 0 4 yields 16 Common app functions In addition to the app functions specific to each app there are two functions common to the following apps Function Solve Parametric Polar Sequence Advanced Graphing Functions and commands 371 CHECK UNCHECK Ctlg menu Checks that is selects the Symbolic view variable Symbn Symbn can be any of the following F0 F9 for th
520. you need help with entering alphabetic characters 6 Tap twice Tap EMA The Exam Mode Configuration screen appears 8 Select those features you want disabled and make sure that those features you don t want disabled are not selected 9 When you have finished selecting the features to be disabled tap GE Note that you can create exam mode configurations using the Connectivity Kit in much the same way you create them on an HP Prime You can then activate them on multiple HP Primes either via USB or by broadcasting them to a class using the wireless modules For more information install and launch the HP Connectivity Kit that came on your product CD From the Connectivity Kit menu click Help and select HP Connectivity Kit User Guide If you want to activate exam mode now continue with Activating Exam Mode below Activating Exam Mode When you activate exam mode you prevent users of the calculator from accessing those features you have disabled The features become accessible again at the end of the specitied time out period or on entry of the exam mode password whichever occurs sooner 64 Exam Mode To activate exam mode l If the Exam Mode Exam Mode 802 screen is not Configuration Defaut am Timeout 15 Minutes showing press Password EA tap Erase memory tap Pagey TR Choose exam mode configuration If a configuration other than Default Exam is required choose it from the Confi
521. ze value of tive to me Compound ing periods The E op i o diagram to the right Jile a afs shows lease pay ments at the begin ning of the period lease PMT PMT PMT PMT PMT FV This diagram shows deposits PMT into an Fv account at the end of each period ee ee ee Time value of money TVM Time value of money TVM calculations make use of the notion that a dollar today will be worth more than a dollar sometime in the future A dollar today can be invested at a certain interest rate and generate a return that the same dollar in the future cannot This TVM principle underlies the notion of interest rates compound interest and rates of return 288 Finance app IThere are seven TVM variables Variable Description PV P YR PMT C YR FV The total number of compounding periods or payments The nominal annual interest rate or investment rate This rate is divided by the number of payments per year P YR to compute the nominal interest rate per compounding period This is the interest rate actually used in TVM calculations The present value of the initial cash flow To a lender or borrower PV is the amount of the loan to an investor PV is the initial investment PV always occurs at the beginning of the first period The number of payments made in a year The periodic payment amount The payments are the same amount each period and the TVM calculation assumes that no
522. ze To Population proportion of successes a Significance level 246 Inference app Results The results are Result Description Test Z Z Test statistic Test p Proportion of successes in the sample P Probability associated with the ZTest statistic Critical Z Boundary value s of Z associated with the a level that you supplied Critical p Proportion of successes associated with the level you supplied Two Proportion Z Test Menu name Inputs Zlest n4 T2 On the basis of statistics from two samples each from a different population this test measures the strength of the evidence for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the proportions of successes in the two populations are equal Ho 7 732 You select one of the following alternative hypotheses against which to test the null hypothesis The inputs are Field name Ho Ty lt T Ho 1 gt 1 Ho Tj T Definition X1 X2 ny n2 a Sample 1 success count Sample 2 success count Sample 1 size Sample 2 size Significance level Inference app 247 Results The results are Result Description Test Z Test A p Critical Z Critical A p ZTest statistic Difference between the proportions of successes in the two samples that is associated with the test Zvalue Probability associated with the ZTest statistic Boundary value s of Z associated with the a level

HP NW280AAABA User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents